Train Control Systems Documentation - User contributions [en]

WOWSound Box

2024-10-02T21:03:27Z

Dan Mycio: specified engine types in bells

{{Infobox product
| Manufacturer=Train Control Systems
| Type=Trackside WOWSound
| SKU=3200
| rDate=[Unreleased]
| MSRP=[To be announced]
| Functions=
| BulbFuncts=
| LEDFuncts=
| Protocols=DC; AC (Optional)
| VSupplies=DC 9V-15V
| ISupplies=
| IFuncts=Internal: 5W (max) Line Out: Unamplified
| KeepAlive=
| ProductScale=All Scales
| ProductDimensions=3.94” x 5.91” x 2.28” 100mm x 150mm x 58mm
| image=Push Button Box Lights On (3).png}}

==Overview==
The {{PAGENAME}} from Train Control Systems is a standalone product capable of playing sounds from TCS' massive library of bells, horns, whistles, and more! The {{PAGENAME}} can also play TCS' entire library of steam chuffs and diesel engine sounds, simply by connecting your track power. This product can seamlessly integrate with your existing DC, AC, or Lionel powered track.

Equipped with illuminated push buttons and an internal speaker with adjustable volume control, the {{PAGENAME}} can deliver clear and powerful audio to your train room or around the Christmas tree! Also included is a 3.5mm mono line out for externally amplified speakers.

The {{PAGENAME}} is fun for the whole family! Fun and engaging for children of all ages (and children at heart of all ages too)! The lighted buttons are satisfying to press, and are designed to be durable and to last. The massive library of sounds available at the press of a button also ensures that the experience never gets stale. Try a new whistle. A new bell. The {{PAGENAME}} has them all. Literally!

===Features===

*Four illuminated, rugged push buttons
*Integrated 5 Watt speaker
*Volume control knob
*Mono-channel Line Out for externally-amplified speakers (PC speakers, home stereo system, etc.)
*Includes TCS' complete library of Steam and Diesel sounds! (See List of Sounds for comprehensive list)
**64 Bells
**54 Horns
**75 Whistles
**13 Steam Chuffinity™ Chuff Sets
**32 Diesel Prime Movers
**And More!

==Setup Instructions==

===Basic Setup===
The {{PAGENAME}} includes a 15V power supply. Simply plugging in the power supply is all that is required to begin using this product. In this mode, the Bell, Horn, Whistle, and Change Sound buttons will operate. Simply pressing the buttons on the top will operate the corresponding sound functions. See the section below for Operational Behaviors to learn more about how each button operates. If no audio is heard, ensure that the Volume knob on the rear is turned up.

===Setting Up Line Out===
The {{PAGENAME}} can be connected to external speakers using the included Line Out jack on the back. The output is mono-channel, but the jack has been configured to work with mono or stereo cables so that the same sound will play through both L and R channels, rather than one or the other. If a cable has been plugged into the Line Out jack, the internal speaker will be disabled.

You will need to supply your own cable to adapt the 3.5mm Mono Line Out to whatever input is used by your speakers. PC speakers often also use 3.5mm stereo cable, which can be connected directly. Home stereo systems may require an adapter to change the 3.5mm output cable to [[wikipedia:RCA_connector|RCA/component]] in. Consult your stereo's user manual for available input options. The input chosen ''must'' have an internal-amplification in order to be audible.

The output volume will be controlled by the connected output device. The volume control knob only controls the built in speaker.

===Setting Up Operation With a Power Pack===
The featureset of the {{PAGENAME}} can be expanded to include motive power sounds if the Track Input is connected to a variable DC or AC power pack. Out of the box, only bells, horns, and whistles are playable; however, with a connected DC or AC power pack, the {{PAGENAME}} can play diesel prime mover or steam chuffs, along with other automatic sounds. These sounds will start up once an external power supply is detected, either DC or AC.

The Track Input does ''not'' replace the DC power supply for the {{PAGENAME}} itself. The included 15V power supply is still required.

{| class="wikitable"
|It is not possible to use DCC to control the {{PAGENAME}}.
|}

{| class="wikitable"
|''!!!WARNING!!! The maximum voltage allowed into the track input is 24V AC or DC''
|}

To integrate the {{PAGENAME}} into your layout or display, follow these steps:

#Turn off your power pack. Unplug the power supply from the {{PAGENAME}}.
#Connect one wire to each of the track output terminals on the power pack.
#Locate the screw terminal plug on the back of the {{PAGENAME}}. Disconnect if necessary.
#Connect both wires from the power pack to the terminal block. '''The polarity does not matter'''. Ensure the screws are tight. Reconnect the terminal block to the back of the{{PAGENAME}} if it was removed in the previous step.

'''Recommended Practices:'''

*It is recommended, but not required, that you tin the wires before connecting them to the terminal block. Ensure that no strands of wire are protruding from the terminal block.
*For DC-powered layouts, particularly with older power packs, it is recommended that you use an analog filter to stabilize the voltage output from your power pack.
*For power packs that have more than a single output, DO NOT connect both outputs to the {{PAGENAME}} at the same time! If you would like to be able to use each output with the {{PAGENAME}}, you should connect a double-pole double-throw switch (break before make or center-off) switch to change the input to the {{PAGENAME}} between the controls.

{| class="wikitable"
|''NOTE: The track input is high-impedance. Without the load from an actual locomotive on the rails to dissipate the energy from the power pack, the throttle response will not be accurate.''
|} 
===Calibrating Sound Operation===
The {{PAGENAME}} can store configurations for '''up to three''' different locomotives. Each of these locomotives can have the throttle/sound response individually calibrated to provide the most realistic operation. In order to use this feature, you must have already followed the steps above to connect to your power pack.

To calibrate the throttle response for a locomotive, follow these steps:

#Run the locomotive you would like to calibrate for a minimum of three minutes before calibrating to warm up the motor and ensure it is working.
#Place the locomotive on a straight and level piece of track (if possible).
#Turn on your power pack.
#Slowly turn up the voltage on your power pack until the idling sounds start, then wait ~5 seconds.
#Press the "Rotate Sound" button until you hear the correct prime mover or chuff set you would like to use for the locomotive.†
#Enter calibration mode by pressing and holding both the BELL and CHANGE SOUND button for ten seconds.
#Select a "locomotive" by pressing the HORN button.‡
#Follow the steps as given by the audio prompts to perform the calibration process.
#Exit Calibration Mode by pressing the CHANGE SOUND button.

{| class="wikitable"
|''NOTE: Avoid removing the power supply while in calibration mode.''
|}
† ''If the bell, horn, or whistle sound changes instead, briefly increase and then decrease the speed control on your power pack. The Change Sound button responds to the most recently played sound type - changing the speed should play a chuff or change the prime mover notch.''

‡ ''The calibration process can be repeated for up to three different locomotives.'' ''The calibration process will save the active prime mover or chuff set, as well as the relevant voltage levels.''
{| class="wikitable"
|''NOTE: The reliability and accuracy of the calibration is affected by the stability of the voltage from your power pack. Using a power pack with poor regulation will affect the accuracy of the calibration process.''
|}
It is a good idea to have saved profiles for the locomotives you run frequently. Once you have saved profiles, you can select the active locomotive by entering Calibration Mode, using the HORN button to select the locomotive number, and then pressing the CHANGE SOUND button to exit. Doing so will load the profile for the selected locomotive number, including the calibration levels and engine sounds.

Out of the box, the factory calibration levels are set based on TCS' testing of commonly-available power packs as follows:

- Locomotive 1: Bachmann Regulated 16V DC Power Pack (PN 44211)

- Locomotive 2: Lionel "Chief" 16V AC Power Pack

- Locomotive 3: MRC TechII Dualpower 2800 Unregulated Power Pack

==Operational Behaviors==

===Button Operation===
On the top of the{{PAGENAME}} are four buttons. From left to right (looking at the front side with the speaker facing toward you), the buttons are BELL, HORN, WHISTLE, and CHANGE SOUND.

#Bell Button - Press once to toggle the Bell sound ON. Press again to toggle the sound OFF.
#Horn Button - Press and hold to play the Horn sound. Release to stop.
#Whistle Button - Press and hold to play the Whistle sound. Release to stop.
#Change Sound Button - See below:

====Change Sound Operation====
The fourth button on the {{PAGENAME}} is labeled "Change Sound" and does precisely as the name implies - the most recently played sound type will be changed to a new sound of the same type if pressed. Therefore, if you would like to change the Bell sound, press the Bell button and then the Change Sound button.

When changing sounds, a short sample of the new sound will be played. A bell will ring, horn will blow, or whistle will chime each time the button is pressed. The sound that is heard will be the new sound that will be played any time you press the corresponding sound button afterwards.

Change Sound can also be used to change the motive power (Chuff/Prime mover) sounds. In order to do this, you must have set up and connected a power pack as described in the power pack setup section above. Locomotive sounds will start up once an external power supply is detected, either DC or AC, and the voltage input reaches a certain threshold. Increase and then decrease the speed control on your power pack - changing the speed should play chuffs or change the prime mover notch. So long as no other sound buttons are pressed, the Change Sound Button will change the locomotive type. When changing locomotive types, the {{PAGENAME}} will toggle between steam chuff sets and diesel prime movers.
{| class="wikitable"
|''NOTE: The "mute" locomotive type will disable the engine sounds completely, but will not interfere with the sound buttons.''
|}
Many of the peripheral sounds, such as the air compressor and air spitter, will change along with the locomotive type. The sounds will be automatically changed to be the most accurate for the locomotive type selected. It is not possible to change these sounds manually.

===Diesel Operation===
When a Diesel Prime Mover locomotive type is selected, and a power pack is being used, the {{PAGENAME}} will behave in the following ways:

*Periodically, when at idle or at low speed, the Air Compressor will kick on.
*Periodically, when at idle or at low speed, the Air Spitter sound will play.
*As the speed of the locomotive increases, the notch of the prime mover will increase. The inverse is also true.
*After a period of inactivity (while stationary/zero Track In voltage), the prime mover will play a shutdown sequence. To restart the prime mover, increase the throttle/voltage.

===Steam Operation===
When a Steam locomotive type is selected, and a power pack is being used, the {{PAGENAME}} will behave in the following ways:

*Periodically, when at idle or at low speed, the Air Pump will kick on.
*Periodically, when at idle or at low speed, the Injector sound will play.
*Periodically, when at idle or at low speed, the Safety Valve sounds will activate.
*When stationary or at low speed, idling sounds (boiler noise) will play. As the locomotive accelerates, these sounds will fade out.
*After remaining stationary for some time, then starting to accelerate, Cylinder Cocks sounds will play. Once a certain speed has been reached, these sounds will stop.
*As the locomotive accelerates, Rod Clank sounds will fade in. As the speed continues to increase, these sounds will fade out.
*Chuff sounds will change pace with changes to the speed/voltage.
*After a period of inactivity, the idle sounds will stop. To restart them, increase the throttle/voltage.

===Volume Control Operation===
The volume knob located on the back of the {{PAGENAME}} will change the volume of the built-in speaker. Turning the knob down all the way towards "-" will turn off the audio output completely.

The Line Out will always be on at a constant level (if connected) and must be controlled by the external amplifier. The volume knob will not affect the Line Out volume in any way. If the volume of an externally connected speaker is too quiet, ensure that the external amplifier is connected properly and the volume control is set appropriately.

==List of Sounds==
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Bells
|Cooperstown & Charlotte Valley S4 #8223 Bell
|-
|Allentown & Auburn SW #206 Bell
|-
|BUDD RDC Bell
|-
|E-Bell
|-
|Fairbanks Morse Trainmaster Bell
|-
|Galloping Goose #3 Bell
|-
|GE 45 Tonner Bell
|-
|GE 80 Tonner Bell
|-
|Norfolk & Western GP9 #620
|-
|Western Pacific F7 #2100
|-
|Conrail GP30 #2233
|-
|Niles Canyon Mongo Speeder Bell
|-
|PRR GG1 Bell
|-
|Quincy RR SW8 #1100
|-
|Richmond Pacific SW900
|-
|RRMNE GE U23B Bell
|-
|RSD1 #1956
|-
|RSD12 #2958
|-
|C&CV S4 #3051 Bell
|-
|Santa Catalina JLA2 Critter
|-
|SMS Lines AS616 #554 Bell
|-
|SMS Lines GP38-3 #2003 Bell
|-
|SMS Lines U23B #4212 Bell
|-
|Southern Pacific NW2 #1423
|-
|Southern Pacific U25B #3100
|-
|Southern Pacific SD9 #5472
|-
|Southern Pacific GP9 #5623
|-
|VO-1000 Bell
|-
|Western Pacific GP7 #713
|-
|Western Pacific F7 #918D
|-
|C&O Bell (Type 1)
|-
|D&RGW (CSRR Museum) K-37 #491
|-
|C&T #484 Bell
|-
|Heisler-Class hand-powered Bell
|-
|Replica John Bull hand-powered bell
|-
|Leetonia RR Shay #1
|-
|Lehigh Coal & Navigation #1
|-
|Lehigh Valley Bell (Type 1)
|-
|Lehigh Valley Bell (Type 2)
|-
|Norfolk & Western #611 Bell
|-
|Strasburg RR #89
|-
|Philladelphia & Reading Camelback #592
|-
|PRR H3 #1187 hand-powered bell
|-
|PRR H3 #2846 hand-powered bell
|-
|PRR E7 #7002 hand-powered bell
|-
|PRR Bell
|-
|PRR American #1223 hand-powered bell
|-
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 1)
|-
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 2)
|-
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 3)
|-
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 4)
|-
|Richland, Fredricksburg & Potomac Bell
|-
|Richmond Pacific SW900 Bell
|-
|Strausburg #475 air-powered Bell
|-
|Strausburg #475 hand-powered Bell
|-
|Strausburg #90 hand-powered Bell
|-
|Strausburg #90 hand-powered bell (Alternate)
|-
|Tweetsie RR Bell 1
|-
|Unknown Bell 1
|-
|Unknown Bell 2
|-
|Virginia Truckee RR #260 hand-powered bell
|-
|Williams Grove RR Bell
|-
|Black River & Western #60
|-
|Cass Shay #3
|}
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Horns
|Allentown & Auburn RR SW #206
|-
|SMS Lines AS616 #554
|-
|SMS Lines DS44 750 #102
|-
|SMS Lines S12 #303
|-
|VO-1000 Horn
|-
|Budd RDC #41 Horn
|-
|Fairbanks Morse Trainmaster
|-
|GE 45 Tonner
|-
|GE 80 Tonner
|-
|SMS Lines U23B #4212
|-
|Southern Pacific #3100
|-
|Norfolk & Western GP9 #620
|-
|SMS Lines GP38-3 #2003
|-
|Cooperstown & Charlotte Valley S4 #3051
|-
|Hancock Air Whistle (Type 1)
|-
|Leslie 125
|-
|Leslie 200 (C&CV S4 #8223)
|-
|Leslie 200
|-
|Leslie 3-Chime
|-
|Leslie RS3
|-
|Leslie RS3L
|-
|Leslie RS5T
|-
|VIA Rail SCV-42 Leslie RS5 variant
|-
|Nathan K3
|-
|Nathan K3H (Type 1)
|-
|Nathan K3H (Type 2)
|-
|Nathan K3LA
|-
|Nathan K3LL
|-
|Nathan K3P (C&CV S4 #102)
|-
|Nathan K5H
|-
|Nathan K5HL (Type 1)
|-
|Nathan K5LA (ACS-64 High Horn - Type 1)
|-
|Nathan K5LA (ACS-64 Low Horn)
|-
|Nathan K5LA (Amtrak SC-44 Charger)
|-
|Nathan K5LA (SEPTA ACS-64)
|-
|Nathan K5LA (Type 1)
|-
|Nathan K5LA (Strasburg RR #8618)
|-
|Nathan K5LLA
|-
|Nathan M3 (C&CV S4#8223)
|-
|Nathan M3 (Type 1)
|-
|Nathan M3 (Type 2)
|-
|Nathan M3 (Type 3)
|-
|Nathan M3 Tilt
|-
|Nathan M3 & Leslie 200 (C&CV #8223)
|-
|Nathan M5
|-
|Nathan P3
|-
|Nathan P5
|-
|Nathan P5A
|-
|SEPTA SPAX #80 Horn
|-
|SEPTA SPAX #80 Horn (Alternate)
|-
|Quincy RR SW8 #1100
|-
|Southern Pacific RSD12 #2958
|-
|Galloping Goose #3
|-
|Wabco E2 - 3-Chime
|}
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Whistles
|Air Chime Corporation #6
|-
|Alamo Michigan Plant Whistle
|-
|American Steam Gauge Single Note
|-
|Santa Fe Original 6-Chime
|-
|Santa Fe Reproduction 6-Chime
|-
|Tweetsie RR Baldwin 3-Chime
|-
|Baltimore & Ohio 3-Chime
|-
|Boston & Maine 6-Chime
|-
|Buffalo Creek & Gauley 3-Chime
|-
|Canadian National 5-Chime
|-
|Canadian Pacific 5-Chime
|-
|Cass Scenic RR Shay #5
|-
|Central NJ 3-Chime
|-
|Chicago Burlington & Quincy RR 3-Chime
|-
|Cleveland Cincinnati Chicago & St. Louis 5-Chime
|-
|Crosby Steam Gauge 6-Chime
|-
|Cumbrees & Toltec #488 K36 5-Chime
|-
|Cumbrees & Toltec #484 K36 5-Chime
|-
|Cumbrees & Toltec #484 K36 5-Chime (Alternate)
|-
|Grand Trunk & Western 6-Chime
|-
|Great Northern RR 5-Chime
|-
|Great Northern RR 5-Chime (Alternate)
|-
|Hancock 3-Chime Short-bell
|-
|Illinois Central Nathan 3-Chime
|-
|Kingsly RR 4-Chime
|-
|Lehigh & New England 3-Chime
|-
|Lehigh Valley RR Crosby 3-Chime
|-
|Lehigh Valley RR Hancock 3-Chime
|-
|Louisville & Nashville 3-Chime
|-
|Lunkenheimer Single-note
|-
|Lunkenheimer 3-Chime
|-
|Nathan 5-Chime
|-
|Lehigh Coal #126 Nathan 5-Chime
|-
|Lehigh Coal #126 Nathan 5-Chime (Alternate)
|-
|Nickel Plate Road #765
|-
|Norfolk & Western "Hooter"
|-
|Norfolk & Western Single-chime Long-bell
|-
|Norfolk & Western Single-chime Short-bell
|-
|Norfolk & Western Nathan 3-Chime
|-
|PRR "Banshee"
|-
|PRR 3-Chime
|-
|PRR 3-Chime (Alternate)
|-
|PRR K4 Whistle
|-
|Reading RR "Hooter"
|-
|Reading RR "Hooter" (Alternate)
|-
|Reading RR G2 #179 6-Chime
|-
|Reading Pacific G2 6-Chime
|-
|Reading RR 6-Chime
|-
|Reading RR 6-Chime (Alternate)
|-
|Rio Grande Southern RR #41
|-
|Southern Pacific 5-Chime
|-
|Southern Pacific "Daylight" 6-Chime
|-
|Southern RR Single-Chime
|-
|Southern RR 3-Chime
|-
|Southern RR 6-Chime
|-
|London & North Eastern Crosby 3-Chime
|-
|UK Whistle (Type 1)
|-
|UK Whistle (Type 2)
|-
|UK Whistle (Type 3)
|-
|UK Whistle (Type 4)
|-
|Consett Iron Co. Class A #5
|-
|Consett Iron Co. Class A #5 (Alternate)
|-
|British Single-Chime Whistle
|-
|Unknown Whistle (Type 1)
|-
|Unknown Whistle (Type 2)
|-
|Unknown Whistle (Type 3)
|-
|Unknown Whistle (Type 4)
|-
|Unknown Whistle (Type 5)
|-
|Hancock 3-Chime
|-
|Union Pacific 3-Chime Long-bell
|-
|Wabash 3-Chime
|-
|Wabash 6-Chime
|-
|Western Maryland Decapod #1114 Nathan 3-Chime
|-
|Western Maryland K2 #204 3-Chime
|-
|WW2-Era 3-Chime
|}
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+Steam Chuff Sets
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 1 | 0-4-0ST Vulcan Iron Works (Type 1)</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 2 | K-36 Narrow-Gauge (Type 1)</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 3 | K-36 Narrow-Gauge (Type 2)</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 4 | 4-6-0 Baldwin "Ten-wheeler"</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 5 | 4-6-2 Baldwin "Pacific"</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 6 | 2-8-4 Lima Locomotive Works "Berkshire"</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 7 | 0-4-0ST Narrow-gauge</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 8 | 4-6-0 Rogers Locomotive & Machine Works "Sierra"</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 9 | 2-8-0 Baldwin "Consolidation"</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 10 | 0-4-0T Vulcan Iron Works (Type 1)</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 11 | 3-cyl Shay</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 12 | 2-8-0 ALCo "Mogul"</nowiki>
|-
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 13 | 0-6-0ST Vulcan Iron Works</nowiki>
|}
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+Diesel Prime Movers
| rowspan="7" |ALCo
|ALCo 244D 12-Cylinder Turbo
|-
|ALCo 251B 12-Cylinder Turbo
|-
|ALCo 251D 6-Clinder Turbo
|-
|ALCo 251C 12-Cylinder Turbo (Century)
|-
|ALCo 539T 6-Cylinder ALCo Turbo (RS1)
|-
|ALCo 539T 6-Cylinder Buchi Turbo (S4)
|-
|ALCo 539T 6-Cylinder ALCo Turbo (S4)
|-
| rowspan="4" |Baldwin
|Baldwin 8-VO (VO-1000)
|-
|Baldwin 606-A (S12)
|-
|Baldwin 606-NA (DS-4-4-750)
|-
|De La Vergne 608SC (AS616)
|-
|MUTE
|''Disables the motive power sounds''
|-
|Detroit
Diesel
|MTU 16V2000 S96R
|-
| rowspan="12" |EMD
|EMD 567C 8-Cylinder (SW)
|-
|EMD 567BC 16-Cylinder (FP7)
|-
|EMD 567C 16-Cylinder (GP9u)
|-
|EMD 567C 16-Cylinder (GP9)
|-
|EMD 567D2 16-Cylinder Turbo (GP20)
|-
|EMD 645E 12-Cylinder (SW1500)
|-
|EMD 645E 12-Cylinder (Type 2)
|-
|EMD 645E 12-Cylinder (Type 3)
|-
|EMD 645E 16-Cylinder (GP38-3)
|-
|EMD 645E 16-Cylinder (GP38H-3)
|-
|EMD 645E 16-Cylinder Turbo (SD40)
|-
|EMD 710-G3 16-Cylinder Turbo (SD70-series)
|-
|Fairbanks
Morse
|38D-8 1/8 (H-12-44)
|-
| rowspan="7" |GE
|Cummins 6-Cylinder (80-Tonner)
|-
|GE FDL-16 (U25B)
|-
|GE 7FDL-12 (U23B)
|-
|GE 7FDL-12 (Type 2)
|-
|GE 7FDL-16 (C39-8)
|-
|GE 7FDL-16 (Type 2)
|-
|GE GEVO-12 (ES44)
|}
Peripheral sounds not individually listed here include:

*11 Diesel Air Compressors
*13 Steam Air Pumps
*9 Diesel Air Spitters
*6 Steam Injectors
*Brake Squeal and Brake Release sounds
*Steam locomotive Rod Clank sounds

[[Category:TCS Products]]
[[Category:Trackside Devices]]

WOWDiesel Version 4.5 Sound List

2024-10-02T21:00:27Z

Dan Mycio: specified loco type sin Bells

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!

NOTE: This page can help you to manually program sounds to buttons. Please refer to the [[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's]] page for more information on the other programming options available in WOWDiesel Version 4 decoders.

The WOWDiesl Version 4.5 sound set includes:

*19 Prime Movers - '''Including NEW Baldwin prime movers!'''
*51 Bells
*40 Horns

==WOWDiesel Version 4.5 Default Button Mappings==
{| class="wikitable"
! colspan="4" |WOWDiesel V4.5 Button Mappings
|-
|Function Button
|Sound Action
|Light Action
|Dual Enabled
|-
|0
|''None''
|Lamp 0F / 0R (Directional)
|True
|-
|1
|Bell
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 1
|False
|-
|2
|Playable Horn
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 2
|False
|-
|3
|Short Horn Blast
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 3
|False
|-
|4
|Grade Crossing Quill
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 4
|False
|-
|5
|Dynamic Brakes
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 5
|False
|-
|6
|[[Train Brake|Brake Release]]
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 6
|False
|-
|7
|[[Train Brake]] (apply)
|
|False
|-
|8
|1x Press Mute/Unmute
2x Press to rotate page

4x Press enter [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]]
|
|True
|-
|9
|[[WOWSound Rotate Feature|Rotate]]
|
|False
|-
|10
|Manual Notch Up
|
|False
|-
|11
|Manual Notch Down
|
|False
|-
|12
|Prime Mover Ignition
|
|False
|-
|13
|Coupling
|
|False
|-
|14
|Uncoupling
|
|False
|-
|15
|Momentum Mode Selection
|
|False
|-
|16
|[[Crew Alert]] On/Off
|
|False
|-
|17
|Windshield Wipers On/Off
|
|False
|-
|18
|Air Spit
|
|False
|-
|19-28
|''None''
|
|False
|}
{| class="wikitable"
! colspan="3" |Random Sound Mapping
|-
|Random Sound
Number
|Sound
Type
|Specific
Sound
|-
|1
|Air Compressor
|(Automatic With Prime Mover Selection)
|-
|2
|Air Spitter
|
|-
|3
|''Disabled''
|None
|-
|4
|''Disabled''
|None
|}

==WOWDiesel V4.5 Sound List==

===Complete List of Sounds===
''To change sound mappings, use indexed CV 1.X See [[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's]] for more information.''

Set CV 201 to 1. Set CV 202 to the button you want to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable"
!Sound Type
!Sound Number
!High Byte
(CV 203)
!Low Byte
(CV204)
!Sound Name
|-
|Air Compressor
|0
|0
|0
|ALCO Air Compressor 1
|-
|
|1
|0
|1
|EMD Air Compressor 1
|-
|
|2
|0
|2
|EMD Air Compressor 2
|-
|
|3
|0
|3
|GE "Whooping" Compressor
|-
|
|4
|0
|4
|EMD SD40-2 Air Compressor
|-
|
|5
|0
|5
|Baldwin VO-1000 Air Compressor
|-
|Air Spitter
|6
|0
|6
|GE U25B Air Spit
|-
|
|7
|0
|7
|EMD SD70MAC Air Spit
|-
|
|8
|0
|8
|EMD SD40-2 Air Spit 1
|-
|
|9
|0
|9
|EMD SD40-2 Air Spit 2
|-
|
|10
|0
|10
|EMD SD40-2 Air Spit 3
|-
|
|11
|0
|11
|Generic Air Spit 1
|-
|
|12
|0
|12
|LVC #126 Air Pump 2
|-
|Bell *
|13
|0
|13
|
|-
|Brake Release
|63
|0
|63
|Brake Release 1
|-
|
|64
|0
|64
|Brake Release 2
|-
|Brake Squeal
|65
|0
|65
|Brake Squeal *
|-
|Coupler Clank
|95
|0
|95
|Coupling 1
|-
|
|96
|0
|96
|Uncoupling 1
|-
|
|97
|0
|97
|Coupling 2
|-
|
|98
|0
|98
|Uncoupling 2
|-
|Crew Alert
|99
|0
|99
|[[Crew Alert|Crew Alert Feature]]
|-
|Dynamic Brakes *
|100
|0
|100
|Dynamic Brake Feature
|-
|Exhaust Fan
|103
|0
|103
|Generic Exhaust Fan
|-
|Forward Horn Quill *
|104
|0
|104
|
|-
|Playable Horn *
|144
|0
|144
|
|-
|Grade X Quill *
|184
|0
|184
|
|-
|Short Horn Blast *
|304
|1
|48
|
|-
|Manual Notch Down
|344
|1
|88
|
|-
|Manual Notch Up
|345
|1
|89
|
|-
|Momentum
|346
|1
|90
|[[WOWSound Momentum Function|Momentum Mode Feature]]
|-
|Mute
|348
|1
|92
|Mute All Sounds
|-
|Prime Mover Ignition *
|1755
|6
|219
|
|-
|Reverse Horn Quill *
|1793
|7
|1
|
|-
|Rotate Feature
|1834
|7
|42
|[[WOWSound Rotate Feature|Rotate Feature]]
|-
|Stop Quill *
|1873
|7
|81
|
|-
|Windshield Wipers
|1913
|7
|121
|
|}
'''* For sound types marked with this indicator, use this specific sound number to map the sound type to a button, then program the specific sound numbers in the corresponding indexed CV(s) using the tables below:'''

===Prime Mover Selection===
In WOWDiesel, the Prime Mover can be easily selected and set to use one or two prime movers by using [[Audio Assist®]]
{| class="wikitable"
!Indexed CV 4:11 Value
!Active Chuff Set
|-
|0
|ALCo 244 - Turbocharged (Type 1)
|-
|1
|ALCo 251 - Turbocharged (Type 1)
|-
|2
|ALCo 251 - Turbocharged (Type 2)
|-
|3
|ALCo 539T - Turbocharged
|-
|4
|Baldwin VO-1000
|-
|5
|Baldwin 606A
|-
|6
|Baldwin 606NA
|-
|7
|Baldwin 608A
|-
|8
|EMD 567 Non-Turbo
|-
|9
|EMD 567 - Turbocharged
|-
|10
|EMD 645 Non-Turbo (Type 1)
|-
|11
|EMD 645 Non-Turbo (Type 2)
|-
|12
|EMD 645 Non-Turbo (Type 3)
|-
|13
|EMD 645 - Turbochaged
|-
|14
|EMD 710 - Turbocharged
|-
|15
|GE FDL16
|-
|16
|GE 7FDL16 (Type 1)
|-
|17
|GE 7FDL16 (Type 2)
|-
|18
|GE "GEVo" ES44
|}

===Bell Type Selection Selection===
{| class="wikitable"
!Indexed CV 4:23 Value
!Active Bell
|-
|0
|E-Bell
|-
|1
|Fairbanks Morse Trainmaster Bell
|-
|2
|Galloping Goose #3 Bell
|-
|3
|GE 45 Tonner Bell
|-
|4
|Western Pacific F7 #2100
|-
|5
|Conrail GP30 #2233
|-
|6
|Niles Canyon Mongo Speeder
|-
|7
|PRR GG1
|-
|8
|Quincy RR SW8 #1100
|-
|9
|Richmond Pacific SW900
|-
|10
|RSD1 #1956
|-
|11
|RSD12 #2958
|-
|12
|Santa Catalina JLA2 Critter
|-
|13
|Southern Pacific NW2 #1423
|-
|14
|Southern Pacific U25B #3100
|-
|15
|Southern Pacific SD9 #5472
|-
|16
|Southern Pacific GP9 #5623
|-
|17
|VO-1000 Bell
|-
|18
|Western Pacific GP7 #713
|-
|19
|Western Pacific F7 #918D
|-
|20
|C&O Bell (Type 1)
|-
|21
|D&RGW (CSRR Museum) K-37 #491
|-
|22
|C&T #484 Bell
|-
|23
|Heisler-Class hand-powered Bell
|-
|24
|Replica John Bull hand-powered bell
|-
|25
|Leetonia RR Shay #1
|-
|26
|Lehigh Coal & Navigation #1
|-
|27
|Lehigh Valley Bell (Type 1)
|-
|28
|Lehigh Valley Bell (Type 2)
|-
|29
|Strasburg RR #89
|-
|30
|Philladelphia & Reading Camelback #592
|-
|31
|PRR H3 #1187 hand-powered bell
|-
|32
|PRR H3 #2846 hand-powered bell
|-
|33
|PRR #7002 hand-powered bell
|-
|34
|PRR Bell
|-
|35
|PRR American #1223 hand-powered bell
|-
|36
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 1)
|-
|37
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 2)
|-
|38
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 3)
|-
|39
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 4)
|-
|40
|Richland, Fredricksburg & Potomac Bell
|-
|41
|Richmond Pacific SW900 Bell
|-
|42
|Strausburg #475 air-powered Bell
|-
|43
|Strausburg #475 hand-powered Bell
|-
|44
|Strausburg #90 hand-powered Bell
|-
|45
|Strausburg #90 hand-powered bell (Alternate)
|-
|46
|Tweetsie RR Bell 1
|-
|47
|Unknown Bell 1
|-
|48
|Unknown Bell 2
|-
|49
|Virginia Truckee RR #260 hand-powered bell
|-
|50
|Williams Grove RR Bell
|}

===Horn Type Selection===
{| class="wikitable"
!Indexed CV 4:8 Value
!Active Horn
|-
|0
|SMS Lines AS616 #554
|-
|1
|SMS Lines DS44 750 #102
|-
|2
|SMS Lines S12 #303
|-
|3
|VO-1000 Horn
|-
|4
|Fairbanks Morse Trainmaster
|-
|5
|GE 45 Tonner
|-
|6
|GE 80 Tonner
|-
|7
|Southern Pacific #3100
|-
|8
|Hancock Air Whistle (Type 1)
|-
|9
|Leslie 125
|-
|10
|Leslie 200
|-
|11
|Leslie 3-Chime
|-
|12
|Leslie RS3
|-
|13
|Leslie RS3L
|-
|14
|Leslie RS5T
|-
|15
|Nathan K3
|-
|16
|Nathan K3H (Type 1)
|-
|17
|Nathan K3H (Type 2)
|-
|18
|Nathan K3LA
|-
|19
|Nathan K3LL
|-
|20
|Nathan K5H
|-
|21
|Nathan K5HL (Type 1)
|-
|22
|Nathan K5LA (ACS-64 High Horn - Type 1)
|-
|23
|Nathan K5LA (ACS-64 High Horn - Type 2)
|-
|24
|Nathan K5LA (ACS-64 Low Horn)
|-
|25
|Nathan K5LA (Type 1)
|-
|26
|Nathan K5LA (Strasburg RR #8618)
|-
|27
|Nathan K5LLA
|-
|28
|Nathan M3 (Type 1)
|-
|29
|Nathan M3 (Type 2)
|-
|30
|Nathan M3 (Type 3)
|-
|31
|Nathan M3 Tilt
|-
|32
|Nathan M5
|-
|33
|Nathan P3
|-
|34
|Nathan P5
|-
|35
|Nathan P5A
|-
|36
|Quincy RR SW8 #1100
|-
|37
|Southern Pacific RSD12 #2958
|-
|38
|Galloping Goose #3
|-
|39
|Wabco E2 - 3-Chime
|}

==CV Addendum (Standard CV's)==
WOWDiesel Version 4.5 follows the 256 NMRA Standard CV's as described in in TCS' [[NMRA Standard CV's|List of Standard CV's]]. Listed below are the CV's that have been modified for WOWDiesel Version 4.5.
{| class="wikitable"
!CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|#
|#
|...
|}

==CV Addendum (Indexed CV's)==
WOWDiesel Version 4.5 follows the motor and lighting CV's as described in TCS' [[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's|List of Indexed CV's for WOWDiesel Version 4]]. Listed below are the CV's that have been modified for WOWDiesel Version 4.5.
{| class="wikitable"
!CV 201
!CV 202
!CV 203
!CV 204
!Description
|-
|#
|#
|#
|#
|...
|}

Bachmann Spectrum SC-44 (Charger) - HO

2024-10-01T15:16:26Z

Dan Mycio:

[[Category:Bachmann]]
[[Category:HO Scale]]
[[Category:Bachmann Spectrum]]
Information on this wiki page provides particular details about this model not found in our basic guide.
{{Infobox locomotive
|name=Bachmann Spectrum SC-44 Charger
|Manufacturer=Bachmann
|Scale=HO-Scale
|Stock Number=67901-67907; 67909, 67910; 67951-67957
|Power Type=DCC Dual Mode w/Sound
|Release Date=First Run: June 2020Second Run: Feb 2021Third Run: Sep 2021Fourth Run: Mar 2022
|Retail Price=499.95
|Decoder Type=WOWDiesel (OEM)
|Version=4.5
|Functions=10
|Builder=Siemens Mobility
|Build Date=March 2016 - Present
|Motive Power=Diesel-Electric; Cummins QSK95
|Cylinders=V16
|Aspiration=Turbocharged
|Power Output=4,400 hp (3,300 kW)
|Prototype Link=[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Siemens_Charger Siemens SC-44]
|image=Siemens SC-44.jpg}}

==Overview==
Bachmann’s all-new DCC sound-equipped SC-44 Charger uses Siemens Mobility’s original design documentation and authentic sound files recorded from the prototype. This model includes a TCS WOWSound® decoder with Audio Assist® for easy configuration without programming CVs, and on-board Keep-Alive® device for uninterrupted operation, even over dirty track. The WOWSound® diesel-electric locomotive sound package includes sounds for horn, bell, prime mover, air compressor, dynamic brakes, cooling fan, coupler close/release, brake release and application, and many more!

Loaded with prototypical features, the SC-44 Charger in HO-scale from Bachmann Trains brings all the sights and sounds of Siemens' sleek new diesel-electric locomotive to your layout.

Features include:

*Siemens-approved design
*DCC sound-equipped for sound, speed, direction, and lighting control
*Dual-mode NMRA-compliant decoder operates sound, motor, and lights on DCC or DC power.
*TCS true CD-quality audio with 16-bit depth resolution at 44,100Hz
*Authentic and prototypical sounds
*Voice-guided Audio Assist® programming tool for easy set-up of almost all decoder functionality
*On-board Keep-Alive® device that keeps your engine running during power interruptions due to dirty track or loss of electrical contact
*Directional headlights with "Rule 17" dimming operation enabled by default
*Interior corridor work lights
*Roof-mounted strobe lights, with operation per prototype
*Directional marker lights
*Steady/alternate flashing ditch lights
*TCS' industry-leading "quiet drive" Back EMF motor control for superior slow-speed performance and load compensation
*User-loadable speed table options (3-point, 28-point, and 126-point curves)
*Three select-able [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rcZYD4bqLLk&list=PLYomfXJnNz3lQzTTKJv5dr-YGnO1w-0rC Throttle Modes]
*Two configurable [https://youtu.be/bI_q1F6W3d0 Momentum Modes]
*TCS' new and exclusive Function Pagination System
*Die-cast frame
*Separately-applied windshield wipers, grab irons and other detail parts
*Realistic top speed (limited in some cases by track voltage)

==Specific Features==
The SC-44 charger is at its heart a WOWDiesel decoder but has had some customization to make it specific to the SC-44 Charger locomotive. The information below details where CV’s and operation differ from the standard Diesel decoder.

'''DC mode operation'''

When operating in DC mode, the SC-44 Charger locomotive will sit still until a sufficient track voltage is present. Once the minimum voltage is met the locomotive will begin to move. A horn blast and bell will activate automatically. Users may trigger a grade crossing horn quill sound by quickly adjusting the track voltage up and back down quickly. The directional horn blasts, quill, and automatic DC mode bell are enabled by default and are controlled by the Automatic Sounds CV.

'''Additional Sound Features'''

The SC-44 Charger locomotive features new sounds such as “Whoosh” and “station announcements” as well as new traction noises like “traction motor” and “traction motor gearbox." Listen for the whine of the traction motors as the prime mover spools up and the Charger takes off. As the locomotive climbs toward 125 MPH, the traction motors are drowned out as the noise from the gearbox hardware hums ever louder.

The SC-44 Charger supports an "automatic bell" in DCC mode. After the locomotive starts the bell will play until the DCC mode automatic bell cutout speed step is reached. Please refer to the [[Bachmann Spectrum SC-44 (Charger) - HO#CV Addendum (Indexed CV's)|CV Addendum (Indexed CV's)]] section below for more information.

The SC-44 Charger includes a brand new Emergency Brake air dump sound. This sound will play if a user presses the Emergency Stop button on their throttle, if the Brake button is pressed 5 times in a row, or if the decoder goes into emergency via the "Crew Alert" feature.

'''New Lighting Features'''

The SC-44 Charger features a fully-functional emergency strobe light that operates prototypically. Send your DCC system into emergency and the engine will immediately stop and turn on the red strobe. Additionally you can also activate the “emergency brake” manually by engaging the TCS-exclusive Braking Feature fully with five rapid presses, after which the train will come to a quick stop and turn on the strobe.

The emergency strobe light also works in conjunction with the “crew alert” feature. The crew alert feature acts as a “dead mans” switch. If no user input is received after a set amount of time the alarm will sound giving the user short amount of time to enter input or else the train will go into emergency, brake, and come to a stop with the red emergency strobe flashing! When the crew alert feature is enabled, the emergency strobe will activate once the crew alert timer expires.

According to § 1.4.12 of the Siemens SC-44 Charger Operations Manual, the strobe lights function automatically when certain conditions are met. The white strobes will flash when the ditch lights are activated and headlights are at full brightness. TCS has implemented automatic and manual control modes for the white strobe lights. The factory default is set to automatic control (CV182 bit 7 is ON). In automatic mode the white strobe lights will behave as described in the Siemens manual section 1.4.12 while the strobe button is activated on the throttle (default Function 5). When Function 5 is activated, the strobe lights will turn on when both the headlight and ditch lights are active. If Function 5 is turned off, the strobe light will remain off regardless of current head and ditch light states. In manual control mode (CV182 bit 7 is OFF), headlight and ditch light status has no effect on the white strobes. The white strobe lights are controlled manually by the throttle button.

==Button Mappings==
The values outlined below in the button mapping, sound list, and CV values are the defaults assigned to this particular decoder from the factory.

For information on how to program your locomotive using the values provided in the charts below, please see our [https://www.tcsdcc.com/_files/ugd/559cd7_d3fbf8b528984a7a8c59874c9dcdd508.pdf Comprehensive Programming Guide], [https://www.tcsdcc.com/_files/ugd/559cd7_dfb8199e41ca41e185196092ef121643.pdf WOWDiesel V4 Programming Guide], and/or [[NMRA Standard CV's|List of Standard CV's]].

===TCS Function Pagination System===
The {{PAGENAME}} locomotive supports TCS' new "function pagination" system. This makes it easy to access all 28 functions and all lighting effects on throttles with limited function access by adding an offset to the pressed function button (offset of +10 for function page 2; offset of +20 for function page 3). For example, to access function 15:

*Press function 8 twice to rotate through the function pages until the decoder announces "function page [two]"
*Press button 5 on your throttle/controller
*The decoder will activate function 5 + 10 (page 2 offset) = 15

'''''Note: the decoder supports accessing functions above 9 at any time by pressing the corresponding button(s) on your throttle regardless of the currently selected function page.'''''

If you have a command station which supports all 28 function buttons and would like to disable function pagination, this may be done by re-configuring the User Options indexed CV 4:19. For more information on the User Options indexed CV for Version 4 WOWSound Diesel decoders, please see ''Page 19'' of the [https://www.tcsdcc.com/_files/ugd/559cd7_dfb8199e41ca41e185196092ef121643.pdf WOWSound Diesel Version 4 Complete Programming Guide]. This document can be used in conjunction with the [[Bachmann Spectrum SC-44 (Charger) - HO#CV Addendum .28Indexed CV.27s.29|Indexed CV Addendum]] below.

To disable Function Pagination, you must first have a Charger decoder with a manufactured date which falls within or after the Second Run (After January 18th 2021). First Run Charger decoders do not support the option to disable Function Pagination. Set the values of the Indexed CV as follows:

*CV 201 = 4
*CV 202 =19
*CV 203 = 144
*CV 204 = 251
{{Button Mapping Paged
|function 0 sound=None
|function 0 light=Headlights
|function 0 dual=Yes
|function 1 sound=Bell
|function 1 light=Blink Ditch Lights
|function 1 dual=Yes
|function 2 sound=Horn - Long Blast
|function 2 light=Blink Ditch Lights
|function 2 dual=Yes
|function 3 sound=Horn - Short Blast
|function 3 light=Ditch Lights (on/off)
|function 3 dual=No
|function 4 sound=Whoosh
|function 4 light=Number Board Lights
|function 4 dual=No
|function 5 sound=Train Brake
|function 5 light=Strobe Light (on/off)
|function 5 dual=No
|function 6 sound=Startup/Shutdown
|function 6 light=Marker Lights (on/off)
|function 6 dual=No
|function 7 sound=None
|function 7 light=Dim Headlights
|function 7 dual=Yes
|function 8 sound=1x Press Mute/Unmute 2x Press rotate light/sound mode or page 4x Press Audio Assist™
|function 8 light=None
|function 8 dual=Yes
|function 9 sound=Dynamic Brake
|function 9 light=Corridor Lights
|function 9 dual=No
|function 10 sound=Manual Notch Up
|function 10 light=Ditch Lights Blink
|function 10 dual=No
|function 11 sound=Manual Notch Down
|function 11 light=Emergency Strobe (on/off) (or with 5x brake press or with E-STOP function)
|function 11 dual=No
|function 12 sound=Coupler Close
|function 12 light=None
|function 12 dual=No
|function 13 sound=Coupler Release
|function 13 light=None
|function 13 dual=No
|function 14 sound=Brake Release
|function 14 light=None
|function 14 dual=No
|function 15 sound=Traction Motor Blower
|function 15 light=None
|function 15 dual=No
|function 16 sound=Momentum
|function 16 light=None
|function 16 dual=No
|function 17 sound=Crew Alert
|function 17 light=None
|function 17 dual=No
|function 18 sound=1x Press Mute/Unmute 2x Press rotate light/sound mode or page 4x Press Audio Assist™
|function 18 light=None
|function 18 dual=No
|function 19 sound=Random Whoosh (on/off)
|function 19 light=None
|function 19 dual=No
|function 20 sound=Grade Crossing Quill
|function 20 light=None
|function 20 dual=No
|function 21 sound=Forward Quill
|function 21 light=None
|function 21 dual=No
|function 22 sound=Reverse Quill
|function 22 light=None
|function 22 dual=No
|function 23 sound=Stop Horn
|function 23 light=None
|function 23 dual=No
|function 24 sound=Rotate Bell/Horn
|function 24 light=None
|function 24 dual=No
|function 25 sound=Windshield Wipers
|function 25 light=None
|function 25 dual=No
|function 26 sound=Station Announcements Departing
|function 26 light=None
|function 26 dual=No
|function 27 sound=Station Announcements Arriving
|function 27 light=None
|function 27 dual=No
|function 28 sound=1x Press Mute/Unmute 2x Press rotate light/sound mode or page 4x Press Audio Assist™
|function 28 light=None
|function 28 dual=No
}}
{{Random Mapping
|random sound 1=Air Compressor
|random sound 2=None
|random sound 3=Dust Blower
|random sound 4=Whoosh (When enabled with F19)}}

==CV Addendum (Standard CV's)==
The SC-44 Charger follows the motor and lighting CV's as described in TCS's [https://www.tcsdcc.com/_files/ugd/559cd7_d3fbf8b528984a7a8c59874c9dcdd508.pdf Comprehensive Programming Guide]. Listed below are the CV's that have been modified for the Charger decoder.

{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
! scope="col" |CV Number
! scope="col" |CV Value
! scope="col" |Description
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV3
|6
|Acceleration
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV4
|6
|Deceleration
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV13
|247
|DC Mode lights
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV29
|6
|Configuration CV
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV35
|16
|Light output 1 mapped to F3
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV36
|16
|Light output 2 mapped to F3
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV39
|16
|Light output 3 (brown wire) mapped off of F3
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV40
|64
|Light output 4 (pink wire) mapped to F5
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV41
|64
|Brown wire mapped to F11 (Red emergency strobe)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV49
|8
|Front headlight uses Rule 17
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV50
|24
|Rear headlight uses Rule 17
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV51
|10
|Light output 1 is a Ditch light
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV52
|11
|Light output 2 is a Ditch light
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV53
|36
|Light output 3 (brown wire) is a single pulse strobe 1 (red emergency beacon)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV54
|47
|Light output 4 (pink wire) is single pulse strobe 2 (white strobes)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV61
|41
|Configuration CV
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV63
|10
|Ditch light blink holdover time
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV117
|221
|Ditch light blink rate
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV123
|0
|So Rule 17 does not dim on F4
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV124
|76
|Ditch lights blink (F0-F6) on buttons 1, and 2
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV140
|255
|Increase red strobe blink rate to about 2 seconds
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV142
|255
|Increase white strobe blink rate to about 2 seconds
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV158
|4
|Enables Rule17 dimming on F7
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV159
|32
|Ditch lights blink (F7-12) on button 10
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV182
|134
|Disabled motor delay (motor changes speed right after throttle is changed, no delay), activate automatic control of the white strobes.
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV189
|0
|Dynamic brake min speed set to 0
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV190
|10
|Rate of deceleration from Dynamic Brakes
|-
|-
! scope="row" |CV191
|10
|Dynamic Brake speed decrease (in speed steps) per press of the dynamic brake button
|-
!CV248
|5 / 6
|Sound Set Revision Identifier. First to Third Run = 5, Fourth Run = 6
|-
|}

==CV Addendum (Indexed CV's)==
The SC-44 Charger follows the motor and lighting CV's as described in TCS's [https://www.tcsdcc.com/_files/ugd/559cd7_dfb8199e41ca41e185196092ef121643.pdf WOWDiesel Programming Guide]. Listed below are the TCS Indexed CV's that have been modified for the SC-44 Charger decoder.

''[The Sound type "Air Spitter" was re-named to "Dust Blower" in Audio Assist]''

''[The Sound type "Sanding Valve" was re-named to "Emergency Brake" in Audio Assist]''
{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
! scope="col" |Indexed CV Number
! scope="col" |Indexed CV Value (CV203,CV204)
! scope="col" |Description
|-
|-
! scope="row" |8
|3
|Default to new Charger K5LA Horn
|-
|-
! scope="row" |9
|0
|Charger defaults to Traditional throttle mode
|-
|-
! scope="row" |10
|80
|Reduced Global Volume of decoder
|-
|-
! scope="row" |11
|0
|Only one prime mover is available in the Charger decoder
|-
|-
! scope="row" |12
|255,2
|Enable all DC mode automatic sounds
|-
|-
! scope="row" |14
|16,15
|F0, 1, 2, and 7 dual mode enabled (active in light and sound mode)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |15
|9
|Dynamic brake notch setting
|-
|-
! scope="row" |19
|FR: 16,251
SR: 208,251
|"USER OPTIONS" Indexed CV - bitwise (inclusive selection):
(0)* Enable Manual Notching audio feedback sound
(1)* Automatically notch down prime mover when brakes are on
(2) Mute on startup/engine auto start mute if set
(3)* Enable switch/mainline mode audio feedback
(4)* Enable Rotate horn/bell audio feedback
(5)* Enable lightmode/sound mode audio feedback
(6)* Enable Audio auto shutoff timer
(7)* Digitrax bit-set simulates button 2 as toggle while in A.A. mode
(8) Dual Prime Movers - Set to enable
(9) Prime mover notches up with dynamic brakes
(10) Reverse directional horns
(11) Switching mode prime mover mechanism, if set prime mover will jump notch, otherwise it will stair step (default)
(12)* Mainline mode prime mover mechanism, if set prime mover will jump notch (default), otherwise it will stair step
(13) Bypass corridor light timer
'''(14)* Enable Bachmann Function Pagination (Not available in First Run models)'''
'''(15)* Grade Crossing Quill sound blinks ditch lights (Not available in First Run models)'''
Lines marked with an asterisk (*) are set by default.
''First-Run Charger default values: CV203 = 16; CV204 = 251 [00010000 11111011]Second-Run and later Charger default values: CV203 = 208; CV204 = 251 [11010000 11111011]''
''(Second Run is the same as above except disables dynamic brake notching, enables Function Pagination, enables quill blink)''
|-
|-
! scope="row" |23
|0
|Only 1 bell available (E-bell)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |32
|10
|Notch 2 speed step (traditional throttle mode)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |33
|25
|Notch 3 speed step (traditional throttle mode)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |34
|35
|Notch 4 speed step (traditional throttle mode)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |35
|50
|Notch 5 speed step (traditional throttle mode)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |v36
|60
|Notch 6 speed step (traditional throttle mode)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |37
|70
|Notch 7 speed step (traditional throttle mode)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |38
|80
|Notch 8 speed step (traditional throttle mode)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |43
|5,0
|DC Mode start voltage – Voltage at which the engine will start making noise in DC mode, the higher the value the higher the voltage
|-
|-
! scope="row" |44
|5,70
|Voltage at which the DC mode bell will stop playing, the higher the value the higher the voltage threshold.
|-
|-
! scope="row" |45
|15
|Speed step in DCC mode that the automatic bell will stop playing at
|-
|-
! scope="row" |46
|1,144
|DC Mode motor hysteresis – When the engine starts moving in DC mode the increased current draw may cause some oscillation, if so increase the value in this CV until the oscillation goes away. If the engine is going through a power on reset try increasing Sound CV 43 (Voltage at which the Engine will power up at while in DC mode)
|-
|-
! scope="row" |50
|6
|“Switching momentum” mode acceleration value
|-
|-
! scope="row" |51
|6
|“Switching momentum” mode deceleration value
|-
|}

==Demonstration==
<embedvideo service="youtube">https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UaBX0G5SGkQ</embedvideo>

<embedvideo service="youtube">https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FW4Sy7-cwtI</embedvideo>
==Decoder Service and Repair==
{{BachmannService}}

Throttle Release Notes

2024-08-22T00:51:02Z

Dan Mycio: added 1.4 release which appears to be the oldest we have records for

==Instructions for Updating==
For instructions on how to apply the latest update to your UWT-100, please refer to our [[Instructions for Updating WiFi-Enabled Throttles]].

Listed below are the release notes for the available firmware versions, in descending order starting with the most recent. The most recent version of software will also include all of the features and other changes listed in every previous releases.

==Release 3.4==
Release 3.4 makes the following changes and improvements to the UWT-100:

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds a configuration option for disabling or changing the sensitivity of the ballistic tracking (acceleration) for the encoder knob. ''Menu > 8 Settings > 1 Throttle Settings > 3 Drive Settings > Encoder Ballistics > Off/Low/Mid/High.'' The default of this setting will be Mid, whereas throttle software until 3.2 had the same behavior as High. Changing the setting to Off will disable all ballistics and the knob will control the speed at a constant rate with the rotation.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixes bug when the locomotive speed would jump to 126 unexpectedly after the throttle has been sitting idle for some time.
*The sensitivity of the thumbwheel is adjusted down in the text entry window to match that of the menus. This will make it easier to select individual characters and enter text.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*Updated DCC accessory addresses according to the newest standard RCN-213 and NMRA S-9.1.2 from 2023. This changes the behavior of turnout address 2045-2047, and extends the maximum to turnout address 2048. Turnouts 1-2044 did not change as part of this update.
*Fixed corner case when the same locomotive is selected on both sides in Dual Throttle mode and speed changes would not update each other. The speed and direction displayed will now follow each other as expected.
*Various fixes regarding LCC standards compliance. The Producer Identified Messages are updated. The CDI XML has an additional null terminator. Some non-user-visible but non-compliant parts in the XML are fixed.

 

==Release 3.2==
This release adds support for the magnetic encoder. The type of the encoder hardware is auto-detected, and printed in the About This Throttle page (Menu > 7).

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds support for Magnetic Encoder in UWT-100.
*Removes ballistic tracking when using the thumbwheel in the menus and text entry window.

===Bug Fixes===

*Bug fixes and performance improvements in specific situations.
*LCC turnout change screen: documents in the help text that ENTER will toggle the accessory and exit back to the main screen. Fixes a rare bug when it forgot to exit.
*Fixes crash when the LCC Command Station was slow in responding to requests during a select locomotive operation.

 

==Release 3.0==
UWT Firmware Version 3.0 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 and UWT-50 which adds full support for the CS-105 at initial release. Most of the changes focus on improvements and bug fixes in LCC mode. Continue reading to see the full list of changes.
{| class="wikitable"
|'''UWT Firmware Version 3.0 or newer is REQUIRED to operate a CS-105 when connected in LCC mode. Use of an older UWT firmware version with a CS-105 will result in most features of the system not working properly, and error messages and connection issues.'''
|}

===CS-105 Feature Support===
'''NOTE:''' All of the items below only apply when the UWT is connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode, and do not apply when in the WiThrottle Protocol connection mode. Many of the features described in this section are feature integrations with the Command Station. Listed below are ''some'' of the highlight features. For more detailed information on these features and how to use them, please refer to our [[CS-105|Wiki Documentation for the CS-105]].

Fun Fact: If your layout is run with assistance from JMRI, you can control your trains with a UWT in LCC mode using JMRI. In order to do this, you MUST be running JMRI Version 5.0 or newer otherwise you will not have the feature support. JMRI can be used to run an LCC/OpenMRN “Hub” (similar to a WiThrottle server) to connect an unlimited number of UWT’s to your CS-105.

'''Programming Track'''

To access this user interface, navigate to ''Menu>4 CV Programming>2 Programming Track''

[Image]

NOTE: CV programming is only available when connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode.

'''Roster Data Entry for Locomotives'''

Add, modify, and remove locomotives in the CS-105’s Internal Roster. Configure options such as:

*Name of locomotive
*Speed Step Mode
*Names/Labels for each button-controlled function
*Button-controlled functions which respond while in a system-controlled consist

To set up and access roster settings, first select a locomotive, then navigate to ''Menu>8 Settings>3 Roster Settings''

Train name and metadata on the display of the current throttle will refresh automatically after editing Roster Settings.

'''Miscellaneous Train Selection and Control Changes'''

*Adds support for selecting a locomotive using Marklin-Motorola (trinary) protocol by adding double-zero before the locomotive address. Example: to select M/M address 25, press the Loco key, type in “0025” and press ENTER. Note that entering “025” will select DCC long address 25.
*Function labels used for soft key settings will match CS-105 software version 1.0. As an example, when Button [:.] is configured under Throttle Settings > Change Buttons for “Coupler Open”, and the CS-105 presents a F9 as “Uncouple”, then pressing [:.] will trigger F9 on the locomotive.

'''LCC Throttle “Heartbeats”'''

*Adds support for heartbeats in the LCC train protocol.

'''NOTE:''' The CS-105 requires heartbeats from a throttle by default. When a UWT throttle with software prior to this version controls a train in LCC mode, the operator will find that the train speed resets to zero after ~10 seconds of running. This is resolved in the 3.0 release. If UWT’s with older software versions should not need to be used with a CS-105, heartbeat must be disabled in the command station settings.

Notifies LCC train to stop sending heartbeat requests when the throttle is powered down (intentionally or due to inactivity timeout).

'''Accessory Control'''

*Makes accessory screen in LCC mode work similarly to WiThrottle Protocol mode:
**Pressing ENTER will toggle-and-exit
**Pressing the Turnout Button will toggle and stay in the accessory screen.
*Adds support for triggering Command Station Macros on the CS-105. To trigger a macro, press the turnout button, enter zero followed by the macro number, then enter. As an example, type “042 ENTER” to run macro number 42.
*Adds support for turnout addresses up to 2047 according to the RCN-213 standard.

'''Short Circuit Indicator'''

*Adds an indicator to the top-right of the screen whenever a short circuit is present. This icon will appear instead of the WiFi signal strength indicator.

[Image]

'''NOTE:''' This feature will only work when connected to a TCS CS-105 and TCS Boosters.

'''Fast Clock'''

*Adds Fast Clock support in LCC mode. In LCC mode the throttle can automatically detect whether there is a Fast Clock generator available on LCC.

===Bug Fixes for LCC Connections===

*Fixes an issue where trailing locomotives in LCC consists did not respond to function button presses.
*Fixes a rare network-related lockup in LCC mode.
*Fixes incorrect display on screen when selecting a locomotive fails.
*Fixes incorrect display of address in the DCC Address Programming screen when a locomotive is being reprogrammed from a long address to a short address.
*Fixes a crash that was dependent on the serial number of the throttle.

===Miscellaneous Changes===
Items in this section apply regardless of the connection mode (LCC or WiThrottle Protocol).

*Improved the behaviour of the UWT-50P when the knob is moved while the user is in the menu screens. After exiting the menu, the knob will have to be first returned near the current speed before the locomotive speed can be changed. This is the same behavior as just after selecting or recalling a locomotive which avoids a sudden change of speed.
*Menu Name for Menu>8 Settings>2 Consist Functions changed to “2 WT Consist Funcs” for clarity purposes. This menu is used to handle function routing when creating and running In-Throttle Consists with the UWT, and does not apply or change any settings in LCC mode. The menu title was changed to reflect this to avoid confusion with consist function settings in the CS-105 Internal Roster.
*Improved clarity of some error messages
*Improved Help Text in many areas, and added new Help Text for new menu items.

 

==Release 2.4==
Release 2.4 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 that adds additional features, brings improvements to existing features based on the feedback of our users, and fixes some minor bugs. Release 2.4 is the first production firmware version for the UWT-50.

===Feature Additions & Changes===
'''Fast Clock'''

*Under the WiThrottle Protocol mode, the throttle will display the Fast Clock if the WiThrottle Server supports it. The Fast Clock display works with all known fast clocks, but support will depend on the connection to your layout and supporting infrastructure.
*12 hour and 24 hour clock formats are select-able in the settings.
*The Fast Clock displays on the right-hand-side. If the layout is in E-STOP, or Dual Throttle Mode (UWT-100 only) is enabled, that covers up the fast clock display.
*If the Fast Clock is not in use at the layout you are operating at, but the display is still turned on in the throttle settings, there is a possibility that a clock will display. By default, JMRI will create a “fast” clock which matches the current time of day and has a rate of 1:1. These clocks can be disabled in the JMRI WiThrottle Server settings (applies to all throttles), or individually on a per-throttle basis as stated above.
*To enable the Fast Clock automatic display, go to: Throttle Settings > Fast Clock > Show Fast Clock. (Default = OFF)

'''Remappable Button (Softkey) Changes'''

*To select F0 to F28 as fixed locomotive function number for a remappable button, enter the chosen number in the new “F0 - F28” menu. Found at: Menu > Settings > Throttle Settings > Change Buttons > [Button]
*Further to the above, The long list of entries F0, F1, … F28 is now removed from the "Common Functions" list in order to improve performance and give a better user experience. Common Functions list still exists, and consists of only named functions now.
*After selecting a remappable button in the Change Buttons menu, the current setting is now printed in the title.
*“Stop” is a new selectable function that can be assigned to any remappable button. The behavior is that it sets the locomotive speed to zero (with normal deceleration).
*The operations on the 1-dot, 2-dot, 3-dot and 4-dot keys are slightly rearranged on the UWT-100 in certain auxiliary screens to be aligned with the UWT-50 and be more intuitive to use. For example a confirmation dialog is now presented as “Yes | No” instead of “No | Yes”.

'''Accessory Mode Control Improvements'''

*Added new "toggle-and-exit" feature to the Accessory Window. ''This feature was recommended through user feedback.''

To use the toggle-and-exit feature, first select an accessory (e.g. typing in a number), then press the Enter button to toggle the accessory and immediately exit the Accessory Window. If you want to toggle and ''remain'' in the Accessory Window (for example to change multiple accessories), select the accessory, and then press the Accessory (turnout icon) button to toggle, OR use the "Normal" and "Reverse" (N/On / R/Off) buttons on the 2-dot and 3-dot keys.

*The Accessory button no longer exits to the drive window if an accessory number is selected. Use the "Esc" key to exit back to the drive window.

[Image]

===LCC-related Changes===
(Changes listed below do not affect connections over WiThrottle protocol)

*Added an assisted/automatic DCC Address Programming process. This can be found when connected through LCC under: Menu > CV Programming > DCC Address.
*This menu allows one to view the current address(es) of a locomotive on the Programming Track, set a short or long DCC Address, as well as view, set and clear CV19 Consist Address in an automatic and easy-to-use manner.
*Removed an unneeded step after accessing Menu > Settings > Roster Settings.
*Updated Consist Function Routing menus to support the advanced capabilities of LCC consisting in the CS-105.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed an issue where trying to add a new WiFi profile beyond the supported maximum (seven) did not prompt the user that their profiles were full. The throttle ''appeared'' to take the 8th WiFi but it would not take/would not work correctly; instead, the throttle now prompts the user before adding a new WiFi, when their profiles are full, to delete a profile before proceeding.
*After locking in (latching) a speed in yard mode on the UWT-100 and UWT-50E, entering and exiting the menu incorrectly changed the display.
*Removed an incorrect and out-of-context message from the built-in website from the Add WiFi box.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*In the text entry window, added visual clarification between the space and underscore characters. This avoids confusion where entering a WiFi name or password with underscores appearing to be not accepted by the throttle.
*In the text entry window, the most common punctuation characters (dot, minus, underscore and space) now appear on almost all pages when entering text.
*Accelerated (“ballistic”) behavior of the encoder-based thumb wheel is now disabled in menus. ''This change was made in response to user feedback.''
*Removed scanning on WiFi channel 13. This channel is not universally accessible due to regulatory constraints. Use channels 1 to 11 for maximum compatibility.
*Added a "refresh" button to the "About This Throttle" menu. This allows you to periodically refresh the window to update info displayed there. This can help users troubleshoot connectivity issues by having a "live update" on signal strength, SSID, IP, etc.
*Added some new icons to the user interface

===Firmware Synchronicity With UWT-50===
From this point forward, the firmware release numbers between the UWT-50 and UWT-100 throttles are always going to be the same. This means that the same release numbers will have the same features, performance and bug fixes. Most changes made can affect both devices, but there is also the possibility of having new updates which primarily address features or bugs on one device only. TCS' release schedule for firmware updates on the UWT-100 and UWT-50 is scheduled to include updates for both devices in synchronicity.
 

==Release 2.0==
Release 2.0 is a major software release that adds new features, brings improvements in different areas based on the feedback of our users and our development schedule, and fixes some minor bugs.

===Feature Additions & Changes===
The TCS UWT-100 throttle can now be used to control two locomotives at the same time. Both locomotives will be visible on the screen with their address, speed and direction.

'''Dual Throttle Mode Features:'''

*You can enable or disable Dual Throttle Mode by going Menu > Operations > Dual Throttle or typing [≡][2][6] on the keypad.
*While Dual Throttle Mode is active, the Recall ''softkey'' (default ['''·''']) will display as ‘Swap’. Swap may be used to flip the positions of the two throttles. '''NOTE:''' If you have changed the settings for your remappable buttons (softkeys) and have removed or overwritten the Recall option, but would still like to use Swap, you may use the Recall Menu instead and select the first option at the top of the list. Using the keypad would go like this: [≡][1][1]
*The single chevron keys will operate the right throttle’s speed while the double chevron keys, the thumbwheel, the direction key, and the function buttons operate the left throttle. Using the Select Loco key or Menu > Recall will replace the locomotive on the left throttle.
*If needed, a softkey (such as ['''∷''']) can be re-configured to operate as the Dual Direction button for the secondary throttle (In the Settings > Change Buttons menu, pick “Dual Direction” from the Common Functions list).
*Both throttles can be independently set to drive consists. The consist change operations manipulate the consist on the left throttle.
*Both throttles can be independently set to Yard Mode. We recommend using the right throttle to control a locomotive in Yard Mode because the direction can be controlled by using exclusively the chevron keys without the need to swap sides or reconfigure a soft key for the Dual Direction function.

We especially recommend Dual Throttle Mode for operators working a yard and users who would like to monitor and control two locomotives at the same time.

'''Accessory and Route Support'''

*The Accessory Control Screen now has separate keys for setting a turnout to Normal or Reversed. Pressing ENTER will “throw” the switch or toggle the accessory if the underlying system supports it. More details can be found in the new [[UWT-100#The%20.E2.80.9CHelp.E2.80.9D%20Button|Help Text]] for the Accessory Control Screen.
*The soft buttons in the Accessory Control Screen will now highlight to show you that your command was sent to the layout.
*'''Controlling turnouts over an LNWI connection is now supported'''. Press the Accessory key, enter the turnout number, then press the N/On or R/Off keys to set the turnout to Normal (aka. Closed) or Reversed (aka. Thrown). “Toggling” or throwing a turnout using the Enter key is not supported by the LNWI.
*'''Controlling Routes via JMRI'''. The UWT-100 throttle is now able to show and set Routes entered into JMRI. Routes will show when pressing the Accessory key in the list after the turnouts. The list can be restricted to show routes only by typing 0 on the keypad, after which typing more digits will further restrict the shown routes. A route from the list can be activated by scrolling to highlight it, then pressing the [··] (Select) key. Blind typing is also supported, for example if you have a route called “Yard entry 28”, you can trigger that with [ACCY] [0] [2] [8] [ENTER]. NCE macros can be operated using the Accessory Control Screen with the Appropriate JMRI Configuration.

'''Recall Functionality Tweaks'''

*The throttle will now remember if a locomotive was in [[Yard Mode]] through power cycles and Recall button presses. This allows for seamless transitions between a switcher in Yard Mode and a road locomotive in normal mode when using the Recall key -- the throttle will automatically switch to the last used mode for each locomotive. The throttle will remember the Yard Mode setting for all recently used locomotives that are still in the Recall list (up to 20), and apply it even if you select a recently used locomotive by address.
*Certain system connections via JMRI are incorrectly reporting locomotives acquired as zero speed and all functions off, even if the locomotive is running on the layout. This makes the quick switching between locomotives using the Recall button very difficult to use. We recommend using Dual Throttle Mode which does not exhibit this issue and makes switching between two locomotives much faster.
*If you regularly need to switch between ''more than two locomotives'', we added a workaround in Settings > Throttle Settings > Drive Settings > Workaround for Recall 0 Speed. This will make the throttle keep all locomotives which were selected in the current session in a hidden consist, causing JMRI to correctly remember the locomotive state. You can still explicitly release a locomotive with Menu > Operations > Release/Dispatch. '''WARNING:''' this behavior can make most command stations really unhappy, so make sure you only enable it if absolutely necessary. So far we’ve only seen this issue on the NCE PowerCab and PowerHouse Pro when using it via JMRI and the NCE USB or Serial connections. The WFD-30 module from WiFiTrax does successfully report speed and function status to the throttle, and does not require this workaround. Use this feature at your own risk. If transitioning between layouts and command stations, turn this feature on or off as necessary.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed incorrect scrolling when exiting the Advanced parameters menu in the Network Profile.
*Fixed incorrect line breaks on the Locomotive Steal dialog.
*Fixed bug where it was impossible to use the E-STOP button to turn track power on when using an LNWI connection.
*Fixed bug where selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect showed a locomotive on the screen that could not be controlled. The locomotive is now correctly re-acquired after the reconnect.
*Fixed bug where an unintuitive error message was left on the screen in Offline mode.
*Fixed bug when an empty menu item was shown in the Main Menu under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where selecting an accessory from the search results was sometimes impossible if it was the only result in the list.
*Fixed bug where the menu labels in the Consist Functions menu displayed 1 for F0.
*Fixed bug where “Connected to {WiFi}” message was stuck on screen under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where F0/headlight was not correctly displayed after acquiring a locomotive under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the direction sign was not correctly shown in Yard Mode under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the double chevrons failed to repeatedly change speed when held down in normal speed control mode, whereas single chevrons worked with repeats.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*Added Help text to the Select Loco and Select Accessory screens. Use the [?] button on these screens to access the help.
*Yard Mode On/Off can now be assigned as a function to any of the eight remappable buttons (including the soft keys), allowing you to turn Yard Mode on or off on any locomotive at any time with one button press.
*In Yard Mode the double chevrons are permanently assigned to control the locomotive; any other functions specified for the double chevrons will be active only in Standard mode. Similarly, in Dual Throttle Mode the single chevrons are permanently assigned to the right side throttle.
*Added a menu option to display and control track power in Menu > Settings > Track Power. This menu option can control layout power on any system that supports it. Track power may still be controlled via the E-STOP button if configured as a more convenient option.
*The main screen will display when the throttle is in Offline mode. You may now exit Offline mode by selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect, or by selecting a specific profile and the Connect Now command. Previously you had to turn off the throttle to exit Offline mode.
*The throttle now supports pressing two buttons at the same time. For example while holding down the horn button, a chevron key in Yard Mode can be pressed. This also allows you to drive two locomotives in Dual Throttle Mode at the same time, including when both locos are in Yard Mode.
*When the throttle gets into the automatic network discovery after turning on (this happens after a few seconds if reconnecting fails), it will print the name of the WiFi network it connected to on the top to aid in troubleshooting.

== Release 1.4 ==
Release 1.4 is a minor software release that fixes critical bugs and brings minor improvements in certain areas based on the feedback of our users.

=== Feature Additions & Changes ===
'''Recall functionality'''

* The number of available recall slots was increased from 8 to 20.
* The locomotive which is currently selected on the throttle is no longer shown in the Menu > Recall list.
* The Menu > Recall list title is updated to state clearly when the list is empty.
* All entries can now be deleted from the Recall List.

'''Emergency Stop functionality'''

Based on user feedback, we made the Emergency Stop functionality safer to use and more predictable in behavior across different systems. We made the following changes to protect your valuable equipment from accidents:

* An Emergency Stop can no longer be released by changing the speed, such as touching the wheel by accident.
* In the default configuration your locomotive speed will be set to zero when engaging the Emergency Stop. This will prevent your locomotive from accelerating when you release the Emergency Stop. Note: when operating an entire show layout from a single throttle, we recommend configuring the Emergency Stop button to operate only the layout power option, and disabling the “Current Locomotive” E-Stop functionality. In this mode all locomotives retain their speed setting from prior to the E-Stop.
* It is no longer possible to '''release''' the Emergency Stop while navigating the menus or other auxiliary screens. You can still '''engage''' the E-Stop from any screen by pressing the red button (one or more times).
* The throttle will now ask for confirmation before releasing the Emergency Stop. This makes releasing the Emergency Stop a multiple-button-press process to ensure it is intentional. On the confirmation screen we will remind you what speed your locomotive will have after releasing the E-Stop.
* Fixed bug where setting a locomotive to Emergency Stop then selecting a new locomotive caused the new locomotive to be incorrectly reported to be in Emergency Stop mode.

'''Park mode'''

* Added a new action: Menu > Operations > Park/Un-Park Current Loco. This engages/releases the Emergency Stop function on the currently selected locomotive, regardless of the setting of the red E-Stop button. This can be used by operators whose train needs to remain stopped in a siding to prevent accidental movements of the train. The speed buttons and knob/wheel will not work while parked.

=== Bug Fixes ===

* Fixed bug where single-stepping speed increase could not go past speed 49 on certain WiThrottle Protocol based systems.
* Fixed bug in Yard Mode where changing direction using the yard mode buttons sometimes caused a brief movement of the locomotive in the previous direction.
* Fixed bug where the throttle would not recall the last locomotive after a power cycle in certain situations.

Main Page

2024-08-22T00:32:02Z

Dan Mycio: added release notes and other links. Also moved the LCC stuff above the OEM projects

Welcome to the Train Control Systems documentation wiki! We are creating an online TCS knowledge base, hosted on a wiki (similar in format to an online encyclopedia, i.e. [https://en.wikipedia.org/ Wikipedia]).

We have been and will continuously be expanding on topics herein until we have complied a comprehensive knowledge base that is accessible to everyone and always up-to-date.

This wiki was first launched 3/4/2020. Documenting the TCS UWT-100 Universal WiFi Throttle as our first project of many. Please check back for more information, and send us suggestions for articles that you would find helpful.

Thanks! - The TCS Team

==TCS Flagship Products Information==

===[[WOWSound]]===

====WOWSound Information====

*[[Audio Assist®]]
*[[Light Mode and Sound Mode]]
*[[WOWSound Rotate Feature]]
*[[Momentum|WOWSound Momentum Feature]]
*[[Throttle Modes|WOWSound Throttle Modes]]

 
===WOWSteam===

====[https://www.tcsdcc.com/wowsteam WOWSteam V4.6 Products]====

====WOWSteam Version 4.X Resources:====

*[[WOWSteam Version 4.6 Changelog]]
*[[WOWSteam Version 4.6 Sound List]]
*[[WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's|WOWSteam V4.X Indexed CV's (Programming Guide)]]
*[https://09122110-fb14-4cd5-92e8-876baa0f5900.usrfiles.com/ugd/559cd7_945366308c1443bd84e7f4af0b34456b.pdf WOWSteam V4.0 Complete Programming Guide]
*[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/4CVSteamV4 WOWSteam V4.0 Guided Programmer]

 
===WOWDiesel===

====[https://www.tcsdcc.com/wowdiesel WOWDiesel V4.5 Products]====

====WOWDiesel Version 4.X Resources:====

*WOWDiesel Version 4.5 Changelog (Coming soon!)
*[[WOWDiesel Version 4.5 Sound List]]
*[[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's|WOWDiesel V4.X Indexed CV's]]
*[https://09122110-fb14-4cd5-92e8-876baa0f5900.usrfiles.com/ugd/559cd7_0f145c387a0345e0b548f2cd5757ca4a.pdf WOWDiesel V4.0 Complete Programming Guide]
*[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/4CVDieselV4 WOWDiesel V4.0 Guided Programmer]
*[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/4CVDieselV4Prime WOWDiesel V4.5 Guided Programmer]

 
===WOWElectric===
[https://www.tcsdcc.com/wowelectric WOWElectric Products]

[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/resources-bac-acs64 Bachmann HO-Scale ACS-64 Documentation Resources]

====WOWElectric Version 1 Resources:====

*[[WOWElectric Version 2 Indexed CV's|WOWElectric V2 Indexed CV's]]
*[https://09122110-fb14-4cd5-92e8-876baa0f5900.usrfiles.com/ugd/091221_4228265abdea4fba838577e3e7ee15a0.pdf WOWElectric V1 Programming Guide]
*(More Coming soon!)

 
===Non-Sound Decoders===

====Non-Sound Decoder Products====

*[https://www.tcsdcc.com/g-scale G/O/S Scale]
*[https://www.tcsdcc.com/ho-scale HO-Scale]
*[https://www.tcsdcc.com/n-scale N-Scale]
*[https://www.tcsdcc.com/z-scale Z-Scale]
*[https://www.tcsdcc.com/function-only Lighting-only]

====Non-Sound Decoder Resources:====

*[https://09122110-fb14-4cd5-92e8-876baa0f5900.usrfiles.com/ugd/559cd7_d3fbf8b528984a7a8c59874c9dcdd508.pdf Comprehensive Programming Guide]
*[[NMRA Standard CV's|List of TCS Standard CV's (1-255)]]
*[https://09122110-fb14-4cd5-92e8-876baa0f5900.usrfiles.com/ugd/559cd7_d423f23c2e674ceea87c8e462c52cc37.pdf CN & CN-GP installation Guide]

===Other Resources===

====Motherboard Resources====

*[[RTR-MB1|RTR-MB1 Expanded User Manual]]

==Technical Support Resources==
We are currently in the process of migrating all of our help articles and documentation to the new Wiki format! Below you can find links to pages with information, support, and troubleshooting for our most-commonly-asked questions. To see all of our technical support resources and help articles, click on "Technical Support" just below:

===[[:Category:Technical Support|Technical Support]]===
(For a full list of technical support pages and resources, click on the link above)

====Common Questions/Issues:====

*[[Support - Lighting|Lighting Wiring and Programming]]
*[[Lighting Effects|Programming Lighting Effects]]
*[[Advanced Consisting|Consisting with CV19]]
*[[DCC Decoder Addressing|Decoder Address Programming and "Lost Address"]]
*[[Support - DCC Programming Track|Issues With DCC Programming Tracks and "No Ack"]]
*[[Support - Decoder Lock|What is Decoder Lock?]]
*[[Support - Resets|Decoder Reset Options]]
*[https://tcsdcc.com/faq Technical Support FAQ]

====CV Lists and Other Resources:====

*[https://tcsdcc.com/installations Decoder Installation Guides]
*[https://tcsdcc.com/documentation Legacy Documentation] << Click here to see all of our superannuated programming guides and other documents
*[https://tcsdcc.com/techsupport Legacy Support Articles] << Click here to see help articles not yet migrated here
*[[NMRA Standard CV's|List of TCS Standard CV's (1-255)]]
*[[WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's|List of TCS Indexed CV's (WOWSteam V4.X)]]
*[[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's|List of TCS Indexed CV's (WOWDiesel V4)]]

 
==WiFi Command System==
===TCS LCC Command Station and Boosters===

====CS-105====
[[CS-105|CS-105 Overview]]

[[CS-105 Release Notes|CS-105 Firmware Release Notes]]

====LT-50====
[[LT-50|LT-50 Layout Throttle]]

[[LT-50 Release Notes|LT-50 Firmware Release Notes]]

====Boosters====
[[B-106|B-106 Auxiliary DCC Booster]]

[[B-106 Release Notes|B-106 Firmware Release Notes]]

====Panels and Accessories====
[[Booster Adapter]]

[[LT Panel]]

[[LCC Throttle Panel]]

LCC WiFi Panel - COMING SOON

 
===Universal WiFi Throttle===

====[[Universal WiFi Throttle - DCC System Compatibility|DCC System Compatibility]]====
[[UWT-100 compatibility with Digikeijs systems]]

[[UWT-100 compatibility with Digitrax systems]]

[[UWT-100 compatibility with ESU systems]]

[[UWT-100 compatibility with MRC systems]]

[[UWT-100 compatibility with NCE systems]]

====UWT-100====
[[UWT-100|UWT-100 Overview]]

[[UWT-100 Main Menu|UWT-100 Menu]]

[[UWT-100 Release Notes|UWT-100 Firmware Release Notes]]

====UWT-50====
[[UWT-50|UWT-50 Overview]]

[[UWT-50 Main Menu|UWT-50 Menu]]

[[UWT-50 Release Notes|UWT-50 Firmware Release Notes]]

====UWT Tips & Troubleshooting====
[[In-Throttle Consisting]]

[[Yard Mode]]

[[Instructions for Updating WiFi-Enabled Throttles]]

[[Universal WiFi Throttle - Connection Issues]]

[[UWT-100 Wrist Lanyard|Wrist Lanyard Installation Instructions]]

 
===Layout Command Control===
[[Layout Command Control (LCC)]]

==TCS Depot Software==
[https://tcsdcc.com/depot TCS Depot (Download and Instructions)]

[[Instructions for Updating WiFi-Enabled Throttles]]
==[https://www.bachmanntrains.com/ Bachmann Trains] OEM Decoder Projects and Information==

===On30-Scale:===
{| class="wikitable"
|+On30-Scale Steam (Newest to Oldest - Descending)
!WOW® Sound
|-
|[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/media/30 Bachmann 2-6-2 Baldwin "Trench" - On30 Scale]
|}

===HO-Scale:===
{| class="wikitable"
|+HO-Scale Diesel (Newest to Oldest - Descending)
!WOW® Sound
!Sound Value®
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum SCV-42 (VIA Rail Charger) - HO|Bachmann Siemens SCV-42 (VIA Rail Charger) - HO Scale]]
|[[Bachmann Sound Value GE Dash 8-40CW - HO|Bachmann Sound Value GE Dash 8-40CW - HO Scale]]
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum ALC-42 (Charger) - HO|Bachmann Siemens ALC-42 (Charger) - HO Scale]]
|[[Bachmann Sound Value GP35 - HO|Bachmann Sound Value EMD GP35 - HO Scale]]
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum SC-44 (Charger) - HO|Bachmann Siemens SC-44 (Charger) - HO Scale]]
|[[Bachmann Sound Value RS-3 - HO|Bachmann Sound Value ALCo RS-3 - HO Scale]]
|-
|
|[[Bachmann Sound Value FT - HO|Bachmann Sound Value EMD FT - HO Scale]]
|}
{| class="wikitable"
|+HO-Scale Steam (Newest to Oldest - Descending)
!WOW® Sound
|-
|[[Bachmann 4-6-4 ALCo J3a Hudson - HO|Bachmann 4-6-4 ALCo J3a Hudson - HO Scale]]
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum 4-6-2 K4 - HO|Bachmann 4-6-2 K4 - HO Scale]]
|-
|[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/media/29 Bachmann 2-10-0 Russian "Decapod" - HO Scale]
|-
|[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/resources-bac-k4 Bachmann Streamlined 4-6-2 K4 - HO Scale]
|}
{| class="wikitable"
|+HO-Scale Electric
!WOW® Sound
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum ACS-64 - HO|Bachmann ACS-64 - HO Scale]]
|}
===N-Scale:===
{| class="wikitable"
|+N-scale Diesel
!WOW® Sound
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum ALC-42 (Charger) - N|Bachmann Spectrum Siemens ALC-42 (Charger) - N Scale]]
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum SC-44 (Charger) - N|Bachmann Spectrum Siemens SC-44 (Charger) - N Scale]]
|}

==[https://rapidotrains.com/ Rapido Trains] OEM Decoder Projects and Information==

===HO-Scale===
{| class="wikitable"
|+HO-Scale Electric
!WOW® Sound
|-
|[[Rapido Bay Area Rapid Transit (BART) Subway - HO Scale]]
|}

Throttle Release Notes

2024-08-22T00:25:51Z

Dan Mycio: feature additions & changes now consistent on all releases so far

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!

==Instructions for Updating==
For instructions on how to apply the latest update to your UWT-100, please refer to our [[Instructions for Updating WiFi-Enabled Throttles]].

Listed below are the release notes for the available firmware versions, in descending order starting with the most recent. The most recent version of software will also include all of the features and other changes listed in every previous releases.

==Release 3.4==
Release 3.4 makes the following changes and improvements to the UWT-100:

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds a configuration option for disabling or changing the sensitivity of the ballistic tracking (acceleration) for the encoder knob. ''Menu > 8 Settings > 1 Throttle Settings > 3 Drive Settings > Encoder Ballistics > Off/Low/Mid/High.'' The default of this setting will be Mid, whereas throttle software until 3.2 had the same behavior as High. Changing the setting to Off will disable all ballistics and the knob will control the speed at a constant rate with the rotation.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixes bug when the locomotive speed would jump to 126 unexpectedly after the throttle has been sitting idle for some time.
*The sensitivity of the thumbwheel is adjusted down in the text entry window to match that of the menus. This will make it easier to select individual characters and enter text.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*Updated DCC accessory addresses according to the newest standard RCN-213 and NMRA S-9.1.2 from 2023. This changes the behavior of turnout address 2045-2047, and extends the maximum to turnout address 2048. Turnouts 1-2044 did not change as part of this update.
*Fixed corner case when the same locomotive is selected on both sides in Dual Throttle mode and speed changes would not update each other. The speed and direction displayed will now follow each other as expected.
*Various fixes regarding LCC standards compliance. The Producer Identified Messages are updated. The CDI XML has an additional null terminator. Some non-user-visible but non-compliant parts in the XML are fixed.

 

==Release 3.2==
This release adds support for the magnetic encoder. The type of the encoder hardware is auto-detected, and printed in the About This Throttle page (Menu > 7).

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds support for Magnetic Encoder in UWT-100.
*Removes ballistic tracking when using the thumbwheel in the menus and text entry window.

===Bug Fixes===

*Bug fixes and performance improvements in specific situations.
*LCC turnout change screen: documents in the help text that ENTER will toggle the accessory and exit back to the main screen. Fixes a rare bug when it forgot to exit.
*Fixes crash when the LCC Command Station was slow in responding to requests during a select locomotive operation.

 

==Release 3.0==
UWT Firmware Version 3.0 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 and UWT-50 which adds full support for the CS-105 at initial release. Most of the changes focus on improvements and bug fixes in LCC mode. Continue reading to see the full list of changes.
{| class="wikitable"
|'''UWT Firmware Version 3.0 or newer is REQUIRED to operate a CS-105 when connected in LCC mode. Use of an older UWT firmware version with a CS-105 will result in most features of the system not working properly, and error messages and connection issues.'''
|}

===CS-105 Feature Support===
'''NOTE:''' All of the items below only apply when the UWT is connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode, and do not apply when in the WiThrottle Protocol connection mode. Many of the features described in this section are feature integrations with the Command Station. Listed below are ''some'' of the highlight features. For more detailed information on these features and how to use them, please refer to our [[CS-105|Wiki Documentation for the CS-105]].

Fun Fact: If your layout is run with assistance from JMRI, you can control your trains with a UWT in LCC mode using JMRI. In order to do this, you MUST be running JMRI Version 5.0 or newer otherwise you will not have the feature support. JMRI can be used to run an LCC/OpenMRN “Hub” (similar to a WiThrottle server) to connect an unlimited number of UWT’s to your CS-105.

'''Programming Track'''

To access this user interface, navigate to ''Menu>4 CV Programming>2 Programming Track''

[Image]

NOTE: CV programming is only available when connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode.

'''Roster Data Entry for Locomotives'''

Add, modify, and remove locomotives in the CS-105’s Internal Roster. Configure options such as:

*Name of locomotive
*Speed Step Mode
*Names/Labels for each button-controlled function
*Button-controlled functions which respond while in a system-controlled consist

To set up and access roster settings, first select a locomotive, then navigate to ''Menu>8 Settings>3 Roster Settings''

Train name and metadata on the display of the current throttle will refresh automatically after editing Roster Settings.

'''Miscellaneous Train Selection and Control Changes'''

*Adds support for selecting a locomotive using Marklin-Motorola (trinary) protocol by adding double-zero before the locomotive address. Example: to select M/M address 25, press the Loco key, type in “0025” and press ENTER. Note that entering “025” will select DCC long address 25.
*Function labels used for soft key settings will match CS-105 software version 1.0. As an example, when Button [:.] is configured under Throttle Settings > Change Buttons for “Coupler Open”, and the CS-105 presents a F9 as “Uncouple”, then pressing [:.] will trigger F9 on the locomotive.

'''LCC Throttle “Heartbeats”'''

*Adds support for heartbeats in the LCC train protocol.

'''NOTE:''' The CS-105 requires heartbeats from a throttle by default. When a UWT throttle with software prior to this version controls a train in LCC mode, the operator will find that the train speed resets to zero after ~10 seconds of running. This is resolved in the 3.0 release. If UWT’s with older software versions should not need to be used with a CS-105, heartbeat must be disabled in the command station settings.

Notifies LCC train to stop sending heartbeat requests when the throttle is powered down (intentionally or due to inactivity timeout).

'''Accessory Control'''

*Makes accessory screen in LCC mode work similarly to WiThrottle Protocol mode:
**Pressing ENTER will toggle-and-exit
**Pressing the Turnout Button will toggle and stay in the accessory screen.
*Adds support for triggering Command Station Macros on the CS-105. To trigger a macro, press the turnout button, enter zero followed by the macro number, then enter. As an example, type “042 ENTER” to run macro number 42.
*Adds support for turnout addresses up to 2047 according to the RCN-213 standard.

'''Short Circuit Indicator'''

*Adds an indicator to the top-right of the screen whenever a short circuit is present. This icon will appear instead of the WiFi signal strength indicator.

[Image]

'''NOTE:''' This feature will only work when connected to a TCS CS-105 and TCS Boosters.

'''Fast Clock'''

*Adds Fast Clock support in LCC mode. In LCC mode the throttle can automatically detect whether there is a Fast Clock generator available on LCC.

===Bug Fixes for LCC Connections===

*Fixes an issue where trailing locomotives in LCC consists did not respond to function button presses.
*Fixes a rare network-related lockup in LCC mode.
*Fixes incorrect display on screen when selecting a locomotive fails.
*Fixes incorrect display of address in the DCC Address Programming screen when a locomotive is being reprogrammed from a long address to a short address.
*Fixes a crash that was dependent on the serial number of the throttle.

===Miscellaneous Changes===
Items in this section apply regardless of the connection mode (LCC or WiThrottle Protocol).

*Improved the behaviour of the UWT-50P when the knob is moved while the user is in the menu screens. After exiting the menu, the knob will have to be first returned near the current speed before the locomotive speed can be changed. This is the same behavior as just after selecting or recalling a locomotive which avoids a sudden change of speed.
*Menu Name for Menu>8 Settings>2 Consist Functions changed to “2 WT Consist Funcs” for clarity purposes. This menu is used to handle function routing when creating and running In-Throttle Consists with the UWT, and does not apply or change any settings in LCC mode. The menu title was changed to reflect this to avoid confusion with consist function settings in the CS-105 Internal Roster.
*Improved clarity of some error messages
*Improved Help Text in many areas, and added new Help Text for new menu items.

 

==Release 2.4==
Release 2.4 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 that adds additional features, brings improvements to existing features based on the feedback of our users, and fixes some minor bugs. Release 2.4 is the first production firmware version for the UWT-50.

===Feature Additions & Changes===
'''Fast Clock'''

*Under the WiThrottle Protocol mode, the throttle will display the Fast Clock if the WiThrottle Server supports it. The Fast Clock display works with all known fast clocks, but support will depend on the connection to your layout and supporting infrastructure.
*12 hour and 24 hour clock formats are select-able in the settings.
*The Fast Clock displays on the right-hand-side. If the layout is in E-STOP, or Dual Throttle Mode (UWT-100 only) is enabled, that covers up the fast clock display.
*If the Fast Clock is not in use at the layout you are operating at, but the display is still turned on in the throttle settings, there is a possibility that a clock will display. By default, JMRI will create a “fast” clock which matches the current time of day and has a rate of 1:1. These clocks can be disabled in the JMRI WiThrottle Server settings (applies to all throttles), or individually on a per-throttle basis as stated above.
*To enable the Fast Clock automatic display, go to: Throttle Settings > Fast Clock > Show Fast Clock. (Default = OFF)

'''Remappable Button (Softkey) Changes'''

*To select F0 to F28 as fixed locomotive function number for a remappable button, enter the chosen number in the new “F0 - F28” menu. Found at: Menu > Settings > Throttle Settings > Change Buttons > [Button]
*Further to the above, The long list of entries F0, F1, … F28 is now removed from the "Common Functions" list in order to improve performance and give a better user experience. Common Functions list still exists, and consists of only named functions now.
*After selecting a remappable button in the Change Buttons menu, the current setting is now printed in the title.
*“Stop” is a new selectable function that can be assigned to any remappable button. The behavior is that it sets the locomotive speed to zero (with normal deceleration).
*The operations on the 1-dot, 2-dot, 3-dot and 4-dot keys are slightly rearranged on the UWT-100 in certain auxiliary screens to be aligned with the UWT-50 and be more intuitive to use. For example a confirmation dialog is now presented as “Yes | No” instead of “No | Yes”.

'''Accessory Mode Control Improvements'''

*Added new "toggle-and-exit" feature to the Accessory Window. ''This feature was recommended through user feedback.''

To use the toggle-and-exit feature, first select an accessory (e.g. typing in a number), then press the Enter button to toggle the accessory and immediately exit the Accessory Window. If you want to toggle and ''remain'' in the Accessory Window (for example to change multiple accessories), select the accessory, and then press the Accessory (turnout icon) button to toggle, OR use the "Normal" and "Reverse" (N/On / R/Off) buttons on the 2-dot and 3-dot keys.

*The Accessory button no longer exits to the drive window if an accessory number is selected. Use the "Esc" key to exit back to the drive window.

[Image]

===LCC-related Changes===
(Changes listed below do not affect connections over WiThrottle protocol)

*Added an assisted/automatic DCC Address Programming process. This can be found when connected through LCC under: Menu > CV Programming > DCC Address.
*This menu allows one to view the current address(es) of a locomotive on the Programming Track, set a short or long DCC Address, as well as view, set and clear CV19 Consist Address in an automatic and easy-to-use manner.
*Removed an unneeded step after accessing Menu > Settings > Roster Settings.
*Updated Consist Function Routing menus to support the advanced capabilities of LCC consisting in the CS-105.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed an issue where trying to add a new WiFi profile beyond the supported maximum (seven) did not prompt the user that their profiles were full. The throttle ''appeared'' to take the 8th WiFi but it would not take/would not work correctly; instead, the throttle now prompts the user before adding a new WiFi, when their profiles are full, to delete a profile before proceeding.
*After locking in (latching) a speed in yard mode on the UWT-100 and UWT-50E, entering and exiting the menu incorrectly changed the display.
*Removed an incorrect and out-of-context message from the built-in website from the Add WiFi box.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*In the text entry window, added visual clarification between the space and underscore characters. This avoids confusion where entering a WiFi name or password with underscores appearing to be not accepted by the throttle.
*In the text entry window, the most common punctuation characters (dot, minus, underscore and space) now appear on almost all pages when entering text.
*Accelerated (“ballistic”) behavior of the encoder-based thumb wheel is now disabled in menus. ''This change was made in response to user feedback.''
*Removed scanning on WiFi channel 13. This channel is not universally accessible due to regulatory constraints. Use channels 1 to 11 for maximum compatibility.
*Added a "refresh" button to the "About This Throttle" menu. This allows you to periodically refresh the window to update info displayed there. This can help users troubleshoot connectivity issues by having a "live update" on signal strength, SSID, IP, etc.
*Added some new icons to the user interface

===Firmware Synchronicity With UWT-50===
From this point forward, the firmware release numbers between the UWT-50 and UWT-100 throttles are always going to be the same. This means that the same release numbers will have the same features, performance and bug fixes. Most changes made can affect both devices, but there is also the possibility of having new updates which primarily address features or bugs on one device only. TCS' release schedule for firmware updates on the UWT-100 and UWT-50 is scheduled to include updates for both devices in synchronicity.
 

==Release 2.0==
Release 2.0 is a major software release that adds new features, brings improvements in different areas based on the feedback of our users and our development schedule, and fixes some minor bugs.

===Feature Additions & Changes===
The TCS UWT-100 throttle can now be used to control two locomotives at the same time. Both locomotives will be visible on the screen with their address, speed and direction.

'''Dual Throttle Mode Features:'''

*You can enable or disable Dual Throttle Mode by going Menu > Operations > Dual Throttle or typing [≡][2][6] on the keypad.
*While Dual Throttle Mode is active, the Recall ''softkey'' (default ['''·''']) will display as ‘Swap’. Swap may be used to flip the positions of the two throttles. '''NOTE:''' If you have changed the settings for your remappable buttons (softkeys) and have removed or overwritten the Recall option, but would still like to use Swap, you may use the Recall Menu instead and select the first option at the top of the list. Using the keypad would go like this: [≡][1][1]
*The single chevron keys will operate the right throttle’s speed while the double chevron keys, the thumbwheel, the direction key, and the function buttons operate the left throttle. Using the Select Loco key or Menu > Recall will replace the locomotive on the left throttle.
*If needed, a softkey (such as ['''∷''']) can be re-configured to operate as the Dual Direction button for the secondary throttle (In the Settings > Change Buttons menu, pick “Dual Direction” from the Common Functions list).
*Both throttles can be independently set to drive consists. The consist change operations manipulate the consist on the left throttle.
*Both throttles can be independently set to Yard Mode. We recommend using the right throttle to control a locomotive in Yard Mode because the direction can be controlled by using exclusively the chevron keys without the need to swap sides or reconfigure a soft key for the Dual Direction function.

We especially recommend Dual Throttle Mode for operators working a yard and users who would like to monitor and control two locomotives at the same time.

'''Accessory and Route Support'''

*The Accessory Control Screen now has separate keys for setting a turnout to Normal or Reversed. Pressing ENTER will “throw” the switch or toggle the accessory if the underlying system supports it. More details can be found in the new [[UWT-100#The%20.E2.80.9CHelp.E2.80.9D%20Button|Help Text]] for the Accessory Control Screen.
*The soft buttons in the Accessory Control Screen will now highlight to show you that your command was sent to the layout.
*'''Controlling turnouts over an LNWI connection is now supported'''. Press the Accessory key, enter the turnout number, then press the N/On or R/Off keys to set the turnout to Normal (aka. Closed) or Reversed (aka. Thrown). “Toggling” or throwing a turnout using the Enter key is not supported by the LNWI.
*'''Controlling Routes via JMRI'''. The UWT-100 throttle is now able to show and set Routes entered into JMRI. Routes will show when pressing the Accessory key in the list after the turnouts. The list can be restricted to show routes only by typing 0 on the keypad, after which typing more digits will further restrict the shown routes. A route from the list can be activated by scrolling to highlight it, then pressing the [··] (Select) key. Blind typing is also supported, for example if you have a route called “Yard entry 28”, you can trigger that with [ACCY] [0] [2] [8] [ENTER]. NCE macros can be operated using the Accessory Control Screen with the Appropriate JMRI Configuration.

'''Recall Functionality Tweaks'''

*The throttle will now remember if a locomotive was in [[Yard Mode]] through power cycles and Recall button presses. This allows for seamless transitions between a switcher in Yard Mode and a road locomotive in normal mode when using the Recall key -- the throttle will automatically switch to the last used mode for each locomotive. The throttle will remember the Yard Mode setting for all recently used locomotives that are still in the Recall list (up to 20), and apply it even if you select a recently used locomotive by address.
*Certain system connections via JMRI are incorrectly reporting locomotives acquired as zero speed and all functions off, even if the locomotive is running on the layout. This makes the quick switching between locomotives using the Recall button very difficult to use. We recommend using Dual Throttle Mode which does not exhibit this issue and makes switching between two locomotives much faster.
*If you regularly need to switch between ''more than two locomotives'', we added a workaround in Settings > Throttle Settings > Drive Settings > Workaround for Recall 0 Speed. This will make the throttle keep all locomotives which were selected in the current session in a hidden consist, causing JMRI to correctly remember the locomotive state. You can still explicitly release a locomotive with Menu > Operations > Release/Dispatch. '''WARNING:''' this behavior can make most command stations really unhappy, so make sure you only enable it if absolutely necessary. So far we’ve only seen this issue on the NCE PowerCab and PowerHouse Pro when using it via JMRI and the NCE USB or Serial connections. The WFD-30 module from WiFiTrax does successfully report speed and function status to the throttle, and does not require this workaround. Use this feature at your own risk. If transitioning between layouts and command stations, turn this feature on or off as necessary.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed incorrect scrolling when exiting the Advanced parameters menu in the Network Profile.
*Fixed incorrect line breaks on the Locomotive Steal dialog.
*Fixed bug where it was impossible to use the E-STOP button to turn track power on when using an LNWI connection.
*Fixed bug where selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect showed a locomotive on the screen that could not be controlled. The locomotive is now correctly re-acquired after the reconnect.
*Fixed bug where an unintuitive error message was left on the screen in Offline mode.
*Fixed bug when an empty menu item was shown in the Main Menu under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where selecting an accessory from the search results was sometimes impossible if it was the only result in the list.
*Fixed bug where the menu labels in the Consist Functions menu displayed 1 for F0.
*Fixed bug where “Connected to {WiFi}” message was stuck on screen under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where F0/headlight was not correctly displayed after acquiring a locomotive under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the direction sign was not correctly shown in Yard Mode under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the double chevrons failed to repeatedly change speed when held down in normal speed control mode, whereas single chevrons worked with repeats.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*Added Help text to the Select Loco and Select Accessory screens. Use the [?] button on these screens to access the help.
*Yard Mode On/Off can now be assigned as a function to any of the eight remappable buttons (including the soft keys), allowing you to turn Yard Mode on or off on any locomotive at any time with one button press.
*In Yard Mode the double chevrons are permanently assigned to control the locomotive; any other functions specified for the double chevrons will be active only in Standard mode. Similarly, in Dual Throttle Mode the single chevrons are permanently assigned to the right side throttle.
*Added a menu option to display and control track power in Menu > Settings > Track Power. This menu option can control layout power on any system that supports it. Track power may still be controlled via the E-STOP button if configured as a more convenient option.
*The main screen will display when the throttle is in Offline mode. You may now exit Offline mode by selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect, or by selecting a specific profile and the Connect Now command. Previously you had to turn off the throttle to exit Offline mode.
*The throttle now supports pressing two buttons at the same time. For example while holding down the horn button, a chevron key in Yard Mode can be pressed. This also allows you to drive two locomotives in Dual Throttle Mode at the same time, including when both locos are in Yard Mode.
*When the throttle gets into the automatic network discovery after turning on (this happens after a few seconds if reconnecting fails), it will print the name of the WiFi network it connected to on the top to aid in troubleshooting.

Throttle Release Notes

2024-08-22T00:25:03Z

Dan Mycio: miscellaneous now consistent in all release notes so far

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!

==Instructions for Updating==
For instructions on how to apply the latest update to your UWT-100, please refer to our [[Instructions for Updating WiFi-Enabled Throttles]].

Listed below are the release notes for the available firmware versions, in descending order starting with the most recent. The most recent version of software will also include all of the features and other changes listed in every previous releases.

==Release 3.4==
Release 3.4 makes the following changes and improvements to the UWT-100:

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds a configuration option for disabling or changing the sensitivity of the ballistic tracking (acceleration) for the encoder knob. ''Menu > 8 Settings > 1 Throttle Settings > 3 Drive Settings > Encoder Ballistics > Off/Low/Mid/High.'' The default of this setting will be Mid, whereas throttle software until 3.2 had the same behavior as High. Changing the setting to Off will disable all ballistics and the knob will control the speed at a constant rate with the rotation.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixes bug when the locomotive speed would jump to 126 unexpectedly after the throttle has been sitting idle for some time.
*The sensitivity of the thumbwheel is adjusted down in the text entry window to match that of the menus. This will make it easier to select individual characters and enter text.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*Updated DCC accessory addresses according to the newest standard RCN-213 and NMRA S-9.1.2 from 2023. This changes the behavior of turnout address 2045-2047, and extends the maximum to turnout address 2048. Turnouts 1-2044 did not change as part of this update.
*Fixed corner case when the same locomotive is selected on both sides in Dual Throttle mode and speed changes would not update each other. The speed and direction displayed will now follow each other as expected.
*Various fixes regarding LCC standards compliance. The Producer Identified Messages are updated. The CDI XML has an additional null terminator. Some non-user-visible but non-compliant parts in the XML are fixed.

 

==Release 3.2==
This release adds support for the magnetic encoder. The type of the encoder hardware is auto-detected, and printed in the About This Throttle page (Menu > 7).

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds support for Magnetic Encoder in UWT-100.
*Removes ballistic tracking when using the thumbwheel in the menus and text entry window.

===Bug Fixes===

*Bug fixes and performance improvements in specific situations.
*LCC turnout change screen: documents in the help text that ENTER will toggle the accessory and exit back to the main screen. Fixes a rare bug when it forgot to exit.
*Fixes crash when the LCC Command Station was slow in responding to requests during a select locomotive operation.

 

==Release 3.0==
UWT Firmware Version 3.0 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 and UWT-50 which adds full support for the CS-105 at initial release. Most of the changes focus on improvements and bug fixes in LCC mode. Continue reading to see the full list of changes.
{| class="wikitable"
|'''UWT Firmware Version 3.0 or newer is REQUIRED to operate a CS-105 when connected in LCC mode. Use of an older UWT firmware version with a CS-105 will result in most features of the system not working properly, and error messages and connection issues.'''
|}

===CS-105 Feature Support===
'''NOTE:''' All of the items below only apply when the UWT is connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode, and do not apply when in the WiThrottle Protocol connection mode. Many of the features described in this section are feature integrations with the Command Station. Listed below are ''some'' of the highlight features. For more detailed information on these features and how to use them, please refer to our [[CS-105|Wiki Documentation for the CS-105]].

Fun Fact: If your layout is run with assistance from JMRI, you can control your trains with a UWT in LCC mode using JMRI. In order to do this, you MUST be running JMRI Version 5.0 or newer otherwise you will not have the feature support. JMRI can be used to run an LCC/OpenMRN “Hub” (similar to a WiThrottle server) to connect an unlimited number of UWT’s to your CS-105.

'''Programming Track'''

To access this user interface, navigate to ''Menu>4 CV Programming>2 Programming Track''

[Image]

NOTE: CV programming is only available when connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode.

'''Roster Data Entry for Locomotives'''

Add, modify, and remove locomotives in the CS-105’s Internal Roster. Configure options such as:

*Name of locomotive
*Speed Step Mode
*Names/Labels for each button-controlled function
*Button-controlled functions which respond while in a system-controlled consist

To set up and access roster settings, first select a locomotive, then navigate to ''Menu>8 Settings>3 Roster Settings''

Train name and metadata on the display of the current throttle will refresh automatically after editing Roster Settings.

'''Miscellaneous Train Selection and Control Changes'''

*Adds support for selecting a locomotive using Marklin-Motorola (trinary) protocol by adding double-zero before the locomotive address. Example: to select M/M address 25, press the Loco key, type in “0025” and press ENTER. Note that entering “025” will select DCC long address 25.
*Function labels used for soft key settings will match CS-105 software version 1.0. As an example, when Button [:.] is configured under Throttle Settings > Change Buttons for “Coupler Open”, and the CS-105 presents a F9 as “Uncouple”, then pressing [:.] will trigger F9 on the locomotive.

'''LCC Throttle “Heartbeats”'''

*Adds support for heartbeats in the LCC train protocol.

'''NOTE:''' The CS-105 requires heartbeats from a throttle by default. When a UWT throttle with software prior to this version controls a train in LCC mode, the operator will find that the train speed resets to zero after ~10 seconds of running. This is resolved in the 3.0 release. If UWT’s with older software versions should not need to be used with a CS-105, heartbeat must be disabled in the command station settings.

Notifies LCC train to stop sending heartbeat requests when the throttle is powered down (intentionally or due to inactivity timeout).

'''Accessory Control'''

*Makes accessory screen in LCC mode work similarly to WiThrottle Protocol mode:
**Pressing ENTER will toggle-and-exit
**Pressing the Turnout Button will toggle and stay in the accessory screen.
*Adds support for triggering Command Station Macros on the CS-105. To trigger a macro, press the turnout button, enter zero followed by the macro number, then enter. As an example, type “042 ENTER” to run macro number 42.
*Adds support for turnout addresses up to 2047 according to the RCN-213 standard.

'''Short Circuit Indicator'''

*Adds an indicator to the top-right of the screen whenever a short circuit is present. This icon will appear instead of the WiFi signal strength indicator.

[Image]

'''NOTE:''' This feature will only work when connected to a TCS CS-105 and TCS Boosters.

'''Fast Clock'''

*Adds Fast Clock support in LCC mode. In LCC mode the throttle can automatically detect whether there is a Fast Clock generator available on LCC.

===Bug Fixes for LCC Connections===

*Fixes an issue where trailing locomotives in LCC consists did not respond to function button presses.
*Fixes a rare network-related lockup in LCC mode.
*Fixes incorrect display on screen when selecting a locomotive fails.
*Fixes incorrect display of address in the DCC Address Programming screen when a locomotive is being reprogrammed from a long address to a short address.
*Fixes a crash that was dependent on the serial number of the throttle.

===Miscellaneous Changes===
Items in this section apply regardless of the connection mode (LCC or WiThrottle Protocol).

*Improved the behaviour of the UWT-50P when the knob is moved while the user is in the menu screens. After exiting the menu, the knob will have to be first returned near the current speed before the locomotive speed can be changed. This is the same behavior as just after selecting or recalling a locomotive which avoids a sudden change of speed.
*Menu Name for Menu>8 Settings>2 Consist Functions changed to “2 WT Consist Funcs” for clarity purposes. This menu is used to handle function routing when creating and running In-Throttle Consists with the UWT, and does not apply or change any settings in LCC mode. The menu title was changed to reflect this to avoid confusion with consist function settings in the CS-105 Internal Roster.
*Improved clarity of some error messages
*Improved Help Text in many areas, and added new Help Text for new menu items.

 

==Release 2.4==
Release 2.4 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 that adds additional features, brings improvements to existing features based on the feedback of our users, and fixes some minor bugs. Release 2.4 is the first production firmware version for the UWT-50.

===Feature Additions & Changes===
'''Fast Clock'''

*Under the WiThrottle Protocol mode, the throttle will display the Fast Clock if the WiThrottle Server supports it. The Fast Clock display works with all known fast clocks, but support will depend on the connection to your layout and supporting infrastructure.
*12 hour and 24 hour clock formats are select-able in the settings.
*The Fast Clock displays on the right-hand-side. If the layout is in E-STOP, or Dual Throttle Mode (UWT-100 only) is enabled, that covers up the fast clock display.
*If the Fast Clock is not in use at the layout you are operating at, but the display is still turned on in the throttle settings, there is a possibility that a clock will display. By default, JMRI will create a “fast” clock which matches the current time of day and has a rate of 1:1. These clocks can be disabled in the JMRI WiThrottle Server settings (applies to all throttles), or individually on a per-throttle basis as stated above.
*To enable the Fast Clock automatic display, go to: Throttle Settings > Fast Clock > Show Fast Clock. (Default = OFF)

'''Remappable Button (Softkey) Changes'''

*To select F0 to F28 as fixed locomotive function number for a remappable button, enter the chosen number in the new “F0 - F28” menu. Found at: Menu > Settings > Throttle Settings > Change Buttons > [Button]
*Further to the above, The long list of entries F0, F1, … F28 is now removed from the "Common Functions" list in order to improve performance and give a better user experience. Common Functions list still exists, and consists of only named functions now.
*After selecting a remappable button in the Change Buttons menu, the current setting is now printed in the title.
*“Stop” is a new selectable function that can be assigned to any remappable button. The behavior is that it sets the locomotive speed to zero (with normal deceleration).
*The operations on the 1-dot, 2-dot, 3-dot and 4-dot keys are slightly rearranged on the UWT-100 in certain auxiliary screens to be aligned with the UWT-50 and be more intuitive to use. For example a confirmation dialog is now presented as “Yes | No” instead of “No | Yes”.

'''Accessory Mode Control Improvements'''

*Added new "toggle-and-exit" feature to the Accessory Window. ''This feature was recommended through user feedback.''

To use the toggle-and-exit feature, first select an accessory (e.g. typing in a number), then press the Enter button to toggle the accessory and immediately exit the Accessory Window. If you want to toggle and ''remain'' in the Accessory Window (for example to change multiple accessories), select the accessory, and then press the Accessory (turnout icon) button to toggle, OR use the "Normal" and "Reverse" (N/On / R/Off) buttons on the 2-dot and 3-dot keys.

*The Accessory button no longer exits to the drive window if an accessory number is selected. Use the "Esc" key to exit back to the drive window.

[Image]

===LCC-related Changes===
(Changes listed below do not affect connections over WiThrottle protocol)

*Added an assisted/automatic DCC Address Programming process. This can be found when connected through LCC under: Menu > CV Programming > DCC Address.
*This menu allows one to view the current address(es) of a locomotive on the Programming Track, set a short or long DCC Address, as well as view, set and clear CV19 Consist Address in an automatic and easy-to-use manner.
*Removed an unneeded step after accessing Menu > Settings > Roster Settings.
*Updated Consist Function Routing menus to support the advanced capabilities of LCC consisting in the CS-105.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed an issue where trying to add a new WiFi profile beyond the supported maximum (seven) did not prompt the user that their profiles were full. The throttle ''appeared'' to take the 8th WiFi but it would not take/would not work correctly; instead, the throttle now prompts the user before adding a new WiFi, when their profiles are full, to delete a profile before proceeding.
*After locking in (latching) a speed in yard mode on the UWT-100 and UWT-50E, entering and exiting the menu incorrectly changed the display.
*Removed an incorrect and out-of-context message from the built-in website from the Add WiFi box.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*In the text entry window, added visual clarification between the space and underscore characters. This avoids confusion where entering a WiFi name or password with underscores appearing to be not accepted by the throttle.
*In the text entry window, the most common punctuation characters (dot, minus, underscore and space) now appear on almost all pages when entering text.
*Accelerated (“ballistic”) behavior of the encoder-based thumb wheel is now disabled in menus. ''This change was made in response to user feedback.''
*Removed scanning on WiFi channel 13. This channel is not universally accessible due to regulatory constraints. Use channels 1 to 11 for maximum compatibility.
*Added a "refresh" button to the "About This Throttle" menu. This allows you to periodically refresh the window to update info displayed there. This can help users troubleshoot connectivity issues by having a "live update" on signal strength, SSID, IP, etc.
*Added some new icons to the user interface

===Firmware Synchronicity With UWT-50===
From this point forward, the firmware release numbers between the UWT-50 and UWT-100 throttles are always going to be the same. This means that the same release numbers will have the same features, performance and bug fixes. Most changes made can affect both devices, but there is also the possibility of having new updates which primarily address features or bugs on one device only. TCS' release schedule for firmware updates on the UWT-100 and UWT-50 is scheduled to include updates for both devices in synchronicity.
 

==Release 2.0==
Release 2.0 is a major software release that adds new features, brings improvements in different areas based on the feedback of our users and our development schedule, and fixes some minor bugs.

===New Feature Additions===
The TCS UWT-100 throttle can now be used to control two locomotives at the same time. Both locomotives will be visible on the screen with their address, speed and direction.

'''Dual Throttle Mode Features:'''

*You can enable or disable Dual Throttle Mode by going Menu > Operations > Dual Throttle or typing [≡][2][6] on the keypad.
*While Dual Throttle Mode is active, the Recall ''softkey'' (default ['''·''']) will display as ‘Swap’. Swap may be used to flip the positions of the two throttles. '''NOTE:''' If you have changed the settings for your remappable buttons (softkeys) and have removed or overwritten the Recall option, but would still like to use Swap, you may use the Recall Menu instead and select the first option at the top of the list. Using the keypad would go like this: [≡][1][1]
*The single chevron keys will operate the right throttle’s speed while the double chevron keys, the thumbwheel, the direction key, and the function buttons operate the left throttle. Using the Select Loco key or Menu > Recall will replace the locomotive on the left throttle.
*If needed, a softkey (such as ['''∷''']) can be re-configured to operate as the Dual Direction button for the secondary throttle (In the Settings > Change Buttons menu, pick “Dual Direction” from the Common Functions list).
*Both throttles can be independently set to drive consists. The consist change operations manipulate the consist on the left throttle.
*Both throttles can be independently set to Yard Mode. We recommend using the right throttle to control a locomotive in Yard Mode because the direction can be controlled by using exclusively the chevron keys without the need to swap sides or reconfigure a soft key for the Dual Direction function.

We especially recommend Dual Throttle Mode for operators working a yard and users who would like to monitor and control two locomotives at the same time.

'''Accessory and Route Support'''

*The Accessory Control Screen now has separate keys for setting a turnout to Normal or Reversed. Pressing ENTER will “throw” the switch or toggle the accessory if the underlying system supports it. More details can be found in the new [[UWT-100#The%20.E2.80.9CHelp.E2.80.9D%20Button|Help Text]] for the Accessory Control Screen.
*The soft buttons in the Accessory Control Screen will now highlight to show you that your command was sent to the layout.
*'''Controlling turnouts over an LNWI connection is now supported'''. Press the Accessory key, enter the turnout number, then press the N/On or R/Off keys to set the turnout to Normal (aka. Closed) or Reversed (aka. Thrown). “Toggling” or throwing a turnout using the Enter key is not supported by the LNWI.
*'''Controlling Routes via JMRI'''. The UWT-100 throttle is now able to show and set Routes entered into JMRI. Routes will show when pressing the Accessory key in the list after the turnouts. The list can be restricted to show routes only by typing 0 on the keypad, after which typing more digits will further restrict the shown routes. A route from the list can be activated by scrolling to highlight it, then pressing the [··] (Select) key. Blind typing is also supported, for example if you have a route called “Yard entry 28”, you can trigger that with [ACCY] [0] [2] [8] [ENTER]. NCE macros can be operated using the Accessory Control Screen with the Appropriate JMRI Configuration.

'''Recall Functionality Tweaks'''

*The throttle will now remember if a locomotive was in [[Yard Mode]] through power cycles and Recall button presses. This allows for seamless transitions between a switcher in Yard Mode and a road locomotive in normal mode when using the Recall key -- the throttle will automatically switch to the last used mode for each locomotive. The throttle will remember the Yard Mode setting for all recently used locomotives that are still in the Recall list (up to 20), and apply it even if you select a recently used locomotive by address.
*Certain system connections via JMRI are incorrectly reporting locomotives acquired as zero speed and all functions off, even if the locomotive is running on the layout. This makes the quick switching between locomotives using the Recall button very difficult to use. We recommend using Dual Throttle Mode which does not exhibit this issue and makes switching between two locomotives much faster.
*If you regularly need to switch between ''more than two locomotives'', we added a workaround in Settings > Throttle Settings > Drive Settings > Workaround for Recall 0 Speed. This will make the throttle keep all locomotives which were selected in the current session in a hidden consist, causing JMRI to correctly remember the locomotive state. You can still explicitly release a locomotive with Menu > Operations > Release/Dispatch. '''WARNING:''' this behavior can make most command stations really unhappy, so make sure you only enable it if absolutely necessary. So far we’ve only seen this issue on the NCE PowerCab and PowerHouse Pro when using it via JMRI and the NCE USB or Serial connections. The WFD-30 module from WiFiTrax does successfully report speed and function status to the throttle, and does not require this workaround. Use this feature at your own risk. If transitioning between layouts and command stations, turn this feature on or off as necessary.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed incorrect scrolling when exiting the Advanced parameters menu in the Network Profile.
*Fixed incorrect line breaks on the Locomotive Steal dialog.
*Fixed bug where it was impossible to use the E-STOP button to turn track power on when using an LNWI connection.
*Fixed bug where selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect showed a locomotive on the screen that could not be controlled. The locomotive is now correctly re-acquired after the reconnect.
*Fixed bug where an unintuitive error message was left on the screen in Offline mode.
*Fixed bug when an empty menu item was shown in the Main Menu under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where selecting an accessory from the search results was sometimes impossible if it was the only result in the list.
*Fixed bug where the menu labels in the Consist Functions menu displayed 1 for F0.
*Fixed bug where “Connected to {WiFi}” message was stuck on screen under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where F0/headlight was not correctly displayed after acquiring a locomotive under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the direction sign was not correctly shown in Yard Mode under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the double chevrons failed to repeatedly change speed when held down in normal speed control mode, whereas single chevrons worked with repeats.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*Added Help text to the Select Loco and Select Accessory screens. Use the [?] button on these screens to access the help.
*Yard Mode On/Off can now be assigned as a function to any of the eight remappable buttons (including the soft keys), allowing you to turn Yard Mode on or off on any locomotive at any time with one button press.
*In Yard Mode the double chevrons are permanently assigned to control the locomotive; any other functions specified for the double chevrons will be active only in Standard mode. Similarly, in Dual Throttle Mode the single chevrons are permanently assigned to the right side throttle.
*Added a menu option to display and control track power in Menu > Settings > Track Power. This menu option can control layout power on any system that supports it. Track power may still be controlled via the E-STOP button if configured as a more convenient option.
*The main screen will display when the throttle is in Offline mode. You may now exit Offline mode by selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect, or by selecting a specific profile and the Connect Now command. Previously you had to turn off the throttle to exit Offline mode.
*The throttle now supports pressing two buttons at the same time. For example while holding down the horn button, a chevron key in Yard Mode can be pressed. This also allows you to drive two locomotives in Dual Throttle Mode at the same time, including when both locos are in Yard Mode.
*When the throttle gets into the automatic network discovery after turning on (this happens after a few seconds if reconnecting fails), it will print the name of the WiFi network it connected to on the top to aid in troubleshooting.

Throttle Release Notes

2024-08-22T00:24:25Z

Dan Mycio: attempting to condense 2.4 release on browser

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!

==Instructions for Updating==
For instructions on how to apply the latest update to your UWT-100, please refer to our [[Instructions for Updating WiFi-Enabled Throttles]].

Listed below are the release notes for the available firmware versions, in descending order starting with the most recent. The most recent version of software will also include all of the features and other changes listed in every previous releases.

==Release 3.4==
Release 3.4 makes the following changes and improvements to the UWT-100:

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds a configuration option for disabling or changing the sensitivity of the ballistic tracking (acceleration) for the encoder knob. ''Menu > 8 Settings > 1 Throttle Settings > 3 Drive Settings > Encoder Ballistics > Off/Low/Mid/High.'' The default of this setting will be Mid, whereas throttle software until 3.2 had the same behavior as High. Changing the setting to Off will disable all ballistics and the knob will control the speed at a constant rate with the rotation.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixes bug when the locomotive speed would jump to 126 unexpectedly after the throttle has been sitting idle for some time.
*The sensitivity of the thumbwheel is adjusted down in the text entry window to match that of the menus. This will make it easier to select individual characters and enter text.

===Misc changes:===

*Updated DCC accessory addresses according to the newest standard RCN-213 and NMRA S-9.1.2 from 2023. This changes the behavior of turnout address 2045-2047, and extends the maximum to turnout address 2048. Turnouts 1-2044 did not change as part of this update.
*Fixed corner case when the same locomotive is selected on both sides in Dual Throttle mode and speed changes would not update each other. The speed and direction displayed will now follow each other as expected.
*Various fixes regarding LCC standards compliance. The Producer Identified Messages are updated. The CDI XML has an additional null terminator. Some non-user-visible but non-compliant parts in the XML are fixed.

 

==Release 3.2==
This release adds support for the magnetic encoder. The type of the encoder hardware is auto-detected, and printed in the About This Throttle page (Menu > 7).

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds support for Magnetic Encoder in UWT-100.
*Removes ballistic tracking when using the thumbwheel in the menus and text entry window.

===Bug Fixes===

*Bug fixes and performance improvements in specific situations.
*LCC turnout change screen: documents in the help text that ENTER will toggle the accessory and exit back to the main screen. Fixes a rare bug when it forgot to exit.
*Fixes crash when the LCC Command Station was slow in responding to requests during a select locomotive operation.

 

==Release 3.0==
UWT Firmware Version 3.0 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 and UWT-50 which adds full support for the CS-105 at initial release. Most of the changes focus on improvements and bug fixes in LCC mode. Continue reading to see the full list of changes.
{| class="wikitable"
|'''UWT Firmware Version 3.0 or newer is REQUIRED to operate a CS-105 when connected in LCC mode. Use of an older UWT firmware version with a CS-105 will result in most features of the system not working properly, and error messages and connection issues.'''
|}

===CS-105 Feature Support===
'''NOTE:''' All of the items below only apply when the UWT is connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode, and do not apply when in the WiThrottle Protocol connection mode. Many of the features described in this section are feature integrations with the Command Station. Listed below are ''some'' of the highlight features. For more detailed information on these features and how to use them, please refer to our [[CS-105|Wiki Documentation for the CS-105]].

Fun Fact: If your layout is run with assistance from JMRI, you can control your trains with a UWT in LCC mode using JMRI. In order to do this, you MUST be running JMRI Version 5.0 or newer otherwise you will not have the feature support. JMRI can be used to run an LCC/OpenMRN “Hub” (similar to a WiThrottle server) to connect an unlimited number of UWT’s to your CS-105.

'''Programming Track'''

To access this user interface, navigate to ''Menu>4 CV Programming>2 Programming Track''

[Image]

NOTE: CV programming is only available when connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode.

'''Roster Data Entry for Locomotives'''

Add, modify, and remove locomotives in the CS-105’s Internal Roster. Configure options such as:

*Name of locomotive
*Speed Step Mode
*Names/Labels for each button-controlled function
*Button-controlled functions which respond while in a system-controlled consist

To set up and access roster settings, first select a locomotive, then navigate to ''Menu>8 Settings>3 Roster Settings''

Train name and metadata on the display of the current throttle will refresh automatically after editing Roster Settings.

'''Miscellaneous Train Selection and Control Changes'''

*Adds support for selecting a locomotive using Marklin-Motorola (trinary) protocol by adding double-zero before the locomotive address. Example: to select M/M address 25, press the Loco key, type in “0025” and press ENTER. Note that entering “025” will select DCC long address 25.
*Function labels used for soft key settings will match CS-105 software version 1.0. As an example, when Button [:.] is configured under Throttle Settings > Change Buttons for “Coupler Open”, and the CS-105 presents a F9 as “Uncouple”, then pressing [:.] will trigger F9 on the locomotive.

'''LCC Throttle “Heartbeats”'''

*Adds support for heartbeats in the LCC train protocol.

'''NOTE:''' The CS-105 requires heartbeats from a throttle by default. When a UWT throttle with software prior to this version controls a train in LCC mode, the operator will find that the train speed resets to zero after ~10 seconds of running. This is resolved in the 3.0 release. If UWT’s with older software versions should not need to be used with a CS-105, heartbeat must be disabled in the command station settings.

Notifies LCC train to stop sending heartbeat requests when the throttle is powered down (intentionally or due to inactivity timeout).

'''Accessory Control'''

*Makes accessory screen in LCC mode work similarly to WiThrottle Protocol mode:
**Pressing ENTER will toggle-and-exit
**Pressing the Turnout Button will toggle and stay in the accessory screen.
*Adds support for triggering Command Station Macros on the CS-105. To trigger a macro, press the turnout button, enter zero followed by the macro number, then enter. As an example, type “042 ENTER” to run macro number 42.
*Adds support for turnout addresses up to 2047 according to the RCN-213 standard.

'''Short Circuit Indicator'''

*Adds an indicator to the top-right of the screen whenever a short circuit is present. This icon will appear instead of the WiFi signal strength indicator.

[Image]

'''NOTE:''' This feature will only work when connected to a TCS CS-105 and TCS Boosters.

'''Fast Clock'''

*Adds Fast Clock support in LCC mode. In LCC mode the throttle can automatically detect whether there is a Fast Clock generator available on LCC.

===Bug Fixes for LCC Connections===

*Fixes an issue where trailing locomotives in LCC consists did not respond to function button presses.
*Fixes a rare network-related lockup in LCC mode.
*Fixes incorrect display on screen when selecting a locomotive fails.
*Fixes incorrect display of address in the DCC Address Programming screen when a locomotive is being reprogrammed from a long address to a short address.
*Fixes a crash that was dependent on the serial number of the throttle.

===Miscellaneous Changes===
Items in this section apply regardless of the connection mode (LCC or WiThrottle Protocol).

*Improved the behaviour of the UWT-50P when the knob is moved while the user is in the menu screens. After exiting the menu, the knob will have to be first returned near the current speed before the locomotive speed can be changed. This is the same behavior as just after selecting or recalling a locomotive which avoids a sudden change of speed.
*Menu Name for Menu>8 Settings>2 Consist Functions changed to “2 WT Consist Funcs” for clarity purposes. This menu is used to handle function routing when creating and running In-Throttle Consists with the UWT, and does not apply or change any settings in LCC mode. The menu title was changed to reflect this to avoid confusion with consist function settings in the CS-105 Internal Roster.
*Improved clarity of some error messages
*Improved Help Text in many areas, and added new Help Text for new menu items.

 

==Release 2.4==
Release 2.4 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 that adds additional features, brings improvements to existing features based on the feedback of our users, and fixes some minor bugs. Release 2.4 is the first production firmware version for the UWT-50.

=== Feature Additions & Changes ===
'''Fast Clock'''

*Under the WiThrottle Protocol mode, the throttle will display the Fast Clock if the WiThrottle Server supports it. The Fast Clock display works with all known fast clocks, but support will depend on the connection to your layout and supporting infrastructure.
*12 hour and 24 hour clock formats are select-able in the settings.
*The Fast Clock displays on the right-hand-side. If the layout is in E-STOP, or Dual Throttle Mode (UWT-100 only) is enabled, that covers up the fast clock display.
*If the Fast Clock is not in use at the layout you are operating at, but the display is still turned on in the throttle settings, there is a possibility that a clock will display. By default, JMRI will create a “fast” clock which matches the current time of day and has a rate of 1:1. These clocks can be disabled in the JMRI WiThrottle Server settings (applies to all throttles), or individually on a per-throttle basis as stated above.
*To enable the Fast Clock automatic display, go to: Throttle Settings > Fast Clock > Show Fast Clock. (Default = OFF)

'''Remappable Button (Softkey) Changes'''

*To select F0 to F28 as fixed locomotive function number for a remappable button, enter the chosen number in the new “F0 - F28” menu. Found at: Menu > Settings > Throttle Settings > Change Buttons > [Button]
*Further to the above, The long list of entries F0, F1, … F28 is now removed from the "Common Functions" list in order to improve performance and give a better user experience. Common Functions list still exists, and consists of only named functions now.
*After selecting a remappable button in the Change Buttons menu, the current setting is now printed in the title.
*“Stop” is a new selectable function that can be assigned to any remappable button. The behavior is that it sets the locomotive speed to zero (with normal deceleration).
*The operations on the 1-dot, 2-dot, 3-dot and 4-dot keys are slightly rearranged on the UWT-100 in certain auxiliary screens to be aligned with the UWT-50 and be more intuitive to use. For example a confirmation dialog is now presented as “Yes | No” instead of “No | Yes”.

'''Accessory Mode Control Improvements'''

*Added new "toggle-and-exit" feature to the Accessory Window. ''This feature was recommended through user feedback.''

To use the toggle-and-exit feature, first select an accessory (e.g. typing in a number), then press the Enter button to toggle the accessory and immediately exit the Accessory Window. If you want to toggle and ''remain'' in the Accessory Window (for example to change multiple accessories), select the accessory, and then press the Accessory (turnout icon) button to toggle, OR use the "Normal" and "Reverse" (N/On / R/Off) buttons on the 2-dot and 3-dot keys.

*The Accessory button no longer exits to the drive window if an accessory number is selected. Use the "Esc" key to exit back to the drive window.

[Image]

===LCC-related Changes===
(Changes listed below do not affect connections over WiThrottle protocol)

*Added an assisted/automatic DCC Address Programming process. This can be found when connected through LCC under: Menu > CV Programming > DCC Address.
*This menu allows one to view the current address(es) of a locomotive on the Programming Track, set a short or long DCC Address, as well as view, set and clear CV19 Consist Address in an automatic and easy-to-use manner.
*Removed an unneeded step after accessing Menu > Settings > Roster Settings.
*Updated Consist Function Routing menus to support the advanced capabilities of LCC consisting in the CS-105.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed an issue where trying to add a new WiFi profile beyond the supported maximum (seven) did not prompt the user that their profiles were full. The throttle ''appeared'' to take the 8th WiFi but it would not take/would not work correctly; instead, the throttle now prompts the user before adding a new WiFi, when their profiles are full, to delete a profile before proceeding.
*After locking in (latching) a speed in yard mode on the UWT-100 and UWT-50E, entering and exiting the menu incorrectly changed the display.
*Removed an incorrect and out-of-context message from the built-in website from the Add WiFi box.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*In the text entry window, added visual clarification between the space and underscore characters. This avoids confusion where entering a WiFi name or password with underscores appearing to be not accepted by the throttle.
*In the text entry window, the most common punctuation characters (dot, minus, underscore and space) now appear on almost all pages when entering text.
*Accelerated (“ballistic”) behavior of the encoder-based thumb wheel is now disabled in menus. ''This change was made in response to user feedback.''
*Removed scanning on WiFi channel 13. This channel is not universally accessible due to regulatory constraints. Use channels 1 to 11 for maximum compatibility.
*Added a "refresh" button to the "About This Throttle" menu. This allows you to periodically refresh the window to update info displayed there. This can help users troubleshoot connectivity issues by having a "live update" on signal strength, SSID, IP, etc.
*Added some new icons to the user interface

===Firmware Synchronicity With UWT-50===
From this point forward, the firmware release numbers between the UWT-50 and UWT-100 throttles are always going to be the same. This means that the same release numbers will have the same features, performance and bug fixes. Most changes made can affect both devices, but there is also the possibility of having new updates which primarily address features or bugs on one device only. TCS' release schedule for firmware updates on the UWT-100 and UWT-50 is scheduled to include updates for both devices in synchronicity.
 

==Release 2.0==
Release 2.0 is a major software release that adds new features, brings improvements in different areas based on the feedback of our users and our development schedule, and fixes some minor bugs.

===New Feature Additions===
The TCS UWT-100 throttle can now be used to control two locomotives at the same time. Both locomotives will be visible on the screen with their address, speed and direction.

'''Dual Throttle Mode Features:'''

*You can enable or disable Dual Throttle Mode by going Menu > Operations > Dual Throttle or typing [≡][2][6] on the keypad.
*While Dual Throttle Mode is active, the Recall ''softkey'' (default ['''·''']) will display as ‘Swap’. Swap may be used to flip the positions of the two throttles. '''NOTE:''' If you have changed the settings for your remappable buttons (softkeys) and have removed or overwritten the Recall option, but would still like to use Swap, you may use the Recall Menu instead and select the first option at the top of the list. Using the keypad would go like this: [≡][1][1]
*The single chevron keys will operate the right throttle’s speed while the double chevron keys, the thumbwheel, the direction key, and the function buttons operate the left throttle. Using the Select Loco key or Menu > Recall will replace the locomotive on the left throttle.
*If needed, a softkey (such as ['''∷''']) can be re-configured to operate as the Dual Direction button for the secondary throttle (In the Settings > Change Buttons menu, pick “Dual Direction” from the Common Functions list).
*Both throttles can be independently set to drive consists. The consist change operations manipulate the consist on the left throttle.
*Both throttles can be independently set to Yard Mode. We recommend using the right throttle to control a locomotive in Yard Mode because the direction can be controlled by using exclusively the chevron keys without the need to swap sides or reconfigure a soft key for the Dual Direction function.

We especially recommend Dual Throttle Mode for operators working a yard and users who would like to monitor and control two locomotives at the same time.

'''Accessory and Route Support'''

*The Accessory Control Screen now has separate keys for setting a turnout to Normal or Reversed. Pressing ENTER will “throw” the switch or toggle the accessory if the underlying system supports it. More details can be found in the new [[UWT-100#The%20.E2.80.9CHelp.E2.80.9D%20Button|Help Text]] for the Accessory Control Screen.
*The soft buttons in the Accessory Control Screen will now highlight to show you that your command was sent to the layout.
*'''Controlling turnouts over an LNWI connection is now supported'''. Press the Accessory key, enter the turnout number, then press the N/On or R/Off keys to set the turnout to Normal (aka. Closed) or Reversed (aka. Thrown). “Toggling” or throwing a turnout using the Enter key is not supported by the LNWI.
*'''Controlling Routes via JMRI'''. The UWT-100 throttle is now able to show and set Routes entered into JMRI. Routes will show when pressing the Accessory key in the list after the turnouts. The list can be restricted to show routes only by typing 0 on the keypad, after which typing more digits will further restrict the shown routes. A route from the list can be activated by scrolling to highlight it, then pressing the [··] (Select) key. Blind typing is also supported, for example if you have a route called “Yard entry 28”, you can trigger that with [ACCY] [0] [2] [8] [ENTER]. NCE macros can be operated using the Accessory Control Screen with the Appropriate JMRI Configuration.

'''Recall Functionality Tweaks'''

*The throttle will now remember if a locomotive was in [[Yard Mode]] through power cycles and Recall button presses. This allows for seamless transitions between a switcher in Yard Mode and a road locomotive in normal mode when using the Recall key -- the throttle will automatically switch to the last used mode for each locomotive. The throttle will remember the Yard Mode setting for all recently used locomotives that are still in the Recall list (up to 20), and apply it even if you select a recently used locomotive by address.
*Certain system connections via JMRI are incorrectly reporting locomotives acquired as zero speed and all functions off, even if the locomotive is running on the layout. This makes the quick switching between locomotives using the Recall button very difficult to use. We recommend using Dual Throttle Mode which does not exhibit this issue and makes switching between two locomotives much faster.
*If you regularly need to switch between ''more than two locomotives'', we added a workaround in Settings > Throttle Settings > Drive Settings > Workaround for Recall 0 Speed. This will make the throttle keep all locomotives which were selected in the current session in a hidden consist, causing JMRI to correctly remember the locomotive state. You can still explicitly release a locomotive with Menu > Operations > Release/Dispatch. '''WARNING:''' this behavior can make most command stations really unhappy, so make sure you only enable it if absolutely necessary. So far we’ve only seen this issue on the NCE PowerCab and PowerHouse Pro when using it via JMRI and the NCE USB or Serial connections. The WFD-30 module from WiFiTrax does successfully report speed and function status to the throttle, and does not require this workaround. Use this feature at your own risk. If transitioning between layouts and command stations, turn this feature on or off as necessary.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed incorrect scrolling when exiting the Advanced parameters menu in the Network Profile.
*Fixed incorrect line breaks on the Locomotive Steal dialog.
*Fixed bug where it was impossible to use the E-STOP button to turn track power on when using an LNWI connection.
*Fixed bug where selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect showed a locomotive on the screen that could not be controlled. The locomotive is now correctly re-acquired after the reconnect.
*Fixed bug where an unintuitive error message was left on the screen in Offline mode.
*Fixed bug when an empty menu item was shown in the Main Menu under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where selecting an accessory from the search results was sometimes impossible if it was the only result in the list.
*Fixed bug where the menu labels in the Consist Functions menu displayed 1 for F0.
*Fixed bug where “Connected to {WiFi}” message was stuck on screen under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where F0/headlight was not correctly displayed after acquiring a locomotive under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the direction sign was not correctly shown in Yard Mode under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the double chevrons failed to repeatedly change speed when held down in normal speed control mode, whereas single chevrons worked with repeats.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*Added Help text to the Select Loco and Select Accessory screens. Use the [?] button on these screens to access the help.
*Yard Mode On/Off can now be assigned as a function to any of the eight remappable buttons (including the soft keys), allowing you to turn Yard Mode on or off on any locomotive at any time with one button press.
*In Yard Mode the double chevrons are permanently assigned to control the locomotive; any other functions specified for the double chevrons will be active only in Standard mode. Similarly, in Dual Throttle Mode the single chevrons are permanently assigned to the right side throttle.
*Added a menu option to display and control track power in Menu > Settings > Track Power. This menu option can control layout power on any system that supports it. Track power may still be controlled via the E-STOP button if configured as a more convenient option.
*The main screen will display when the throttle is in Offline mode. You may now exit Offline mode by selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect, or by selecting a specific profile and the Connect Now command. Previously you had to turn off the throttle to exit Offline mode.
*The throttle now supports pressing two buttons at the same time. For example while holding down the horn button, a chevron key in Yard Mode can be pressed. This also allows you to drive two locomotives in Dual Throttle Mode at the same time, including when both locos are in Yard Mode.
*When the throttle gets into the automatic network discovery after turning on (this happens after a few seconds if reconnecting fails), it will print the name of the WiFi network it connected to on the top to aid in troubleshooting.

Throttle Release Notes

2024-08-22T00:22:45Z

Dan Mycio:

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!

==Instructions for Updating==
For instructions on how to apply the latest update to your UWT-100, please refer to our [[Instructions for Updating WiFi-Enabled Throttles]].

Listed below are the release notes for the available firmware versions, in descending order starting with the most recent. The most recent version of software will also include all of the features and other changes listed in every previous releases.

==Release 3.4==
Release 3.4 makes the following changes and improvements to the UWT-100:

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds a configuration option for disabling or changing the sensitivity of the ballistic tracking (acceleration) for the encoder knob. ''Menu > 8 Settings > 1 Throttle Settings > 3 Drive Settings > Encoder Ballistics > Off/Low/Mid/High.'' The default of this setting will be Mid, whereas throttle software until 3.2 had the same behavior as High. Changing the setting to Off will disable all ballistics and the knob will control the speed at a constant rate with the rotation.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixes bug when the locomotive speed would jump to 126 unexpectedly after the throttle has been sitting idle for some time.
*The sensitivity of the thumbwheel is adjusted down in the text entry window to match that of the menus. This will make it easier to select individual characters and enter text.

===Misc changes:===

*Updated DCC accessory addresses according to the newest standard RCN-213 and NMRA S-9.1.2 from 2023. This changes the behavior of turnout address 2045-2047, and extends the maximum to turnout address 2048. Turnouts 1-2044 did not change as part of this update.
*Fixed corner case when the same locomotive is selected on both sides in Dual Throttle mode and speed changes would not update each other. The speed and direction displayed will now follow each other as expected.
*Various fixes regarding LCC standards compliance. The Producer Identified Messages are updated. The CDI XML has an additional null terminator. Some non-user-visible but non-compliant parts in the XML are fixed.

 

==Release 3.2==
This release adds support for the magnetic encoder. The type of the encoder hardware is auto-detected, and printed in the About This Throttle page (Menu > 7).

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds support for Magnetic Encoder in UWT-100.
*Removes ballistic tracking when using the thumbwheel in the menus and text entry window.

===Bug Fixes===

*Bug fixes and performance improvements in specific situations.
*LCC turnout change screen: documents in the help text that ENTER will toggle the accessory and exit back to the main screen. Fixes a rare bug when it forgot to exit.
*Fixes crash when the LCC Command Station was slow in responding to requests during a select locomotive operation.

 

==Release 3.0==
UWT Firmware Version 3.0 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 and UWT-50 which adds full support for the CS-105 at initial release. Most of the changes focus on improvements and bug fixes in LCC mode. Continue reading to see the full list of changes.
{| class="wikitable"
|'''UWT Firmware Version 3.0 or newer is REQUIRED to operate a CS-105 when connected in LCC mode. Use of an older UWT firmware version with a CS-105 will result in most features of the system not working properly, and error messages and connection issues.'''
|}

===CS-105 Feature Support===
'''NOTE:''' All of the items below only apply when the UWT is connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode, and do not apply when in the WiThrottle Protocol connection mode. Many of the features described in this section are feature integrations with the Command Station. Listed below are ''some'' of the highlight features. For more detailed information on these features and how to use them, please refer to our [[CS-105|Wiki Documentation for the CS-105]].

Fun Fact: If your layout is run with assistance from JMRI, you can control your trains with a UWT in LCC mode using JMRI. In order to do this, you MUST be running JMRI Version 5.0 or newer otherwise you will not have the feature support. JMRI can be used to run an LCC/OpenMRN “Hub” (similar to a WiThrottle server) to connect an unlimited number of UWT’s to your CS-105.

'''Programming Track'''

To access this user interface, navigate to ''Menu>4 CV Programming>2 Programming Track''

[Image]

NOTE: CV programming is only available when connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode.

'''Roster Data Entry for Locomotives'''

Add, modify, and remove locomotives in the CS-105’s Internal Roster. Configure options such as:

*Name of locomotive
*Speed Step Mode
*Names/Labels for each button-controlled function
*Button-controlled functions which respond while in a system-controlled consist

To set up and access roster settings, first select a locomotive, then navigate to ''Menu>8 Settings>3 Roster Settings''

Train name and metadata on the display of the current throttle will refresh automatically after editing Roster Settings.

'''Miscellaneous Train Selection and Control Changes'''

*Adds support for selecting a locomotive using Marklin-Motorola (trinary) protocol by adding double-zero before the locomotive address. Example: to select M/M address 25, press the Loco key, type in “0025” and press ENTER. Note that entering “025” will select DCC long address 25.
*Function labels used for soft key settings will match CS-105 software version 1.0. As an example, when Button [:.] is configured under Throttle Settings > Change Buttons for “Coupler Open”, and the CS-105 presents a F9 as “Uncouple”, then pressing [:.] will trigger F9 on the locomotive.

'''LCC Throttle “Heartbeats”'''

*Adds support for heartbeats in the LCC train protocol.

'''NOTE:''' The CS-105 requires heartbeats from a throttle by default. When a UWT throttle with software prior to this version controls a train in LCC mode, the operator will find that the train speed resets to zero after ~10 seconds of running. This is resolved in the 3.0 release. If UWT’s with older software versions should not need to be used with a CS-105, heartbeat must be disabled in the command station settings.

Notifies LCC train to stop sending heartbeat requests when the throttle is powered down (intentionally or due to inactivity timeout).

'''Accessory Control'''

*Makes accessory screen in LCC mode work similarly to WiThrottle Protocol mode:
**Pressing ENTER will toggle-and-exit
**Pressing the Turnout Button will toggle and stay in the accessory screen.
*Adds support for triggering Command Station Macros on the CS-105. To trigger a macro, press the turnout button, enter zero followed by the macro number, then enter. As an example, type “042 ENTER” to run macro number 42.
*Adds support for turnout addresses up to 2047 according to the RCN-213 standard.

'''Short Circuit Indicator'''

*Adds an indicator to the top-right of the screen whenever a short circuit is present. This icon will appear instead of the WiFi signal strength indicator.

[Image]

'''NOTE:''' This feature will only work when connected to a TCS CS-105 and TCS Boosters.

'''Fast Clock'''

*Adds Fast Clock support in LCC mode. In LCC mode the throttle can automatically detect whether there is a Fast Clock generator available on LCC.

===Bug Fixes for LCC Connections===

*Fixes an issue where trailing locomotives in LCC consists did not respond to function button presses.
*Fixes a rare network-related lockup in LCC mode.
*Fixes incorrect display on screen when selecting a locomotive fails.
*Fixes incorrect display of address in the DCC Address Programming screen when a locomotive is being reprogrammed from a long address to a short address.
*Fixes a crash that was dependent on the serial number of the throttle.

===Miscellaneous Changes===
Items in this section apply regardless of the connection mode (LCC or WiThrottle Protocol).

*Improved the behaviour of the UWT-50P when the knob is moved while the user is in the menu screens. After exiting the menu, the knob will have to be first returned near the current speed before the locomotive speed can be changed. This is the same behavior as just after selecting or recalling a locomotive which avoids a sudden change of speed.
*Menu Name for Menu>8 Settings>2 Consist Functions changed to “2 WT Consist Funcs” for clarity purposes. This menu is used to handle function routing when creating and running In-Throttle Consists with the UWT, and does not apply or change any settings in LCC mode. The menu title was changed to reflect this to avoid confusion with consist function settings in the CS-105 Internal Roster.
*Improved clarity of some error messages
*Improved Help Text in many areas, and added new Help Text for new menu items.

 

==Release 2.4==
Release 2.4 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 that adds additional features, brings improvements to existing features based on the feedback of our users, and fixes some minor bugs. Release 2.4 is the first production firmware version for the UWT-50.

===Fast Clock===

*Under the WiThrottle Protocol mode, the throttle will display the Fast Clock if the WiThrottle Server supports it. The Fast Clock display works with all known fast clocks, but support will depend on the connection to your layout and supporting infrastructure.
*12 hour and 24 hour clock formats are select-able in the settings.
*The Fast Clock displays on the right-hand-side. If the layout is in E-STOP, or Dual Throttle Mode (UWT-100 only) is enabled, that covers up the fast clock display.
*If the Fast Clock is not in use at the layout you are operating at, but the display is still turned on in the throttle settings, there is a possibility that a clock will display. By default, JMRI will create a “fast” clock which matches the current time of day and has a rate of 1:1. These clocks can be disabled in the JMRI WiThrottle Server settings (applies to all throttles), or individually on a per-throttle basis as stated above.
*To enable the Fast Clock automatic display, go to: Throttle Settings > Fast Clock > Show Fast Clock. (Default = OFF)

===Remappable Button (Softkey) Changes===

*To select F0 to F28 as fixed locomotive function number for a remappable button, enter the chosen number in the new “F0 - F28” menu. Found at: Menu > Settings > Throttle Settings > Change Buttons > [Button]
*Further to the above, The long list of entries F0, F1, … F28 is now removed from the "Common Functions" list in order to improve performance and give a better user experience. Common Functions list still exists, and consists of only named functions now.
*After selecting a remappable button in the Change Buttons menu, the current setting is now printed in the title.
*“Stop” is a new selectable function that can be assigned to any remappable button. The behavior is that it sets the locomotive speed to zero (with normal deceleration).
*The operations on the 1-dot, 2-dot, 3-dot and 4-dot keys are slightly rearranged on the UWT-100 in certain auxiliary screens to be aligned with the UWT-50 and be more intuitive to use. For example a confirmation dialog is now presented as “Yes | No” instead of “No | Yes”.

===Accessory Mode Control Improvements===

*Added new "toggle-and-exit" feature to the Accessory Window. ''This feature was recommended through user feedback.''

To use the toggle-and-exit feature, first select an accessory (e.g. typing in a number), then press the Enter button to toggle the accessory and immediately exit the Accessory Window. If you want to toggle and ''remain'' in the Accessory Window (for example to change multiple accessories), select the accessory, and then press the Accessory (turnout icon) button to toggle, OR use the "Normal" and "Reverse" (N/On / R/Off) buttons on the 2-dot and 3-dot keys.

*The Accessory button no longer exits to the drive window if an accessory number is selected. Use the "Esc" key to exit back to the drive window.

[Image]

===LCC-related Changes ===
(Changes listed below do not affect connections over WiThrottle protocol)

*Added an assisted/automatic DCC Address Programming process. This can be found when connected through LCC under: Menu > CV Programming > DCC Address.
*This menu allows one to view the current address(es) of a locomotive on the Programming Track, set a short or long DCC Address, as well as view, set and clear CV19 Consist Address in an automatic and easy-to-use manner.
*Removed an unneeded step after accessing Menu > Settings > Roster Settings.
*Updated Consist Function Routing menus to support the advanced capabilities of LCC consisting in the CS-105.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed an issue where trying to add a new WiFi profile beyond the supported maximum (seven) did not prompt the user that their profiles were full. The throttle ''appeared'' to take the 8th WiFi but it would not take/would not work correctly; instead, the throttle now prompts the user before adding a new WiFi, when their profiles are full, to delete a profile before proceeding.
*After locking in (latching) a speed in yard mode on the UWT-100 and UWT-50E, entering and exiting the menu incorrectly changed the display.
*Removed an incorrect and out-of-context message from the built-in website from the Add WiFi box.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*In the text entry window, added visual clarification between the space and underscore characters. This avoids confusion where entering a WiFi name or password with underscores appearing to be not accepted by the throttle.
*In the text entry window, the most common punctuation characters (dot, minus, underscore and space) now appear on almost all pages when entering text.
*Accelerated (“ballistic”) behavior of the encoder-based thumb wheel is now disabled in menus. ''This change was made in response to user feedback.''
*Removed scanning on WiFi channel 13. This channel is not universally accessible due to regulatory constraints. Use channels 1 to 11 for maximum compatibility.
*Added a "refresh" button to the "About This Throttle" menu. This allows you to periodically refresh the window to update info displayed there. This can help users troubleshoot connectivity issues by having a "live update" on signal strength, SSID, IP, etc.
*Added some new icons to the user interface

===Note: Firmware Synchronicity With UWT-50===
From this point forward, the firmware release numbers between the UWT-50 and UWT-100 throttles are always going to be the same. This means that the same release numbers will have the same features, performance and bug fixes. Most changes made can affect both devices, but there is also the possibility of having new updates which primarily address features or bugs on one device only. TCS' release schedule for firmware updates on the UWT-100 and UWT-50 is scheduled to include updates for both devices in synchronicity.
 

==Release 2.0==
Release 2.0 is a major software release that adds new features, brings improvements in different areas based on the feedback of our users and our development schedule, and fixes some minor bugs.

===New Feature Additions===
The TCS UWT-100 throttle can now be used to control two locomotives at the same time. Both locomotives will be visible on the screen with their address, speed and direction.

'''Dual Throttle Mode Features:'''

*You can enable or disable Dual Throttle Mode by going Menu > Operations > Dual Throttle or typing [≡][2][6] on the keypad.
*While Dual Throttle Mode is active, the Recall ''softkey'' (default ['''·''']) will display as ‘Swap’. Swap may be used to flip the positions of the two throttles. '''NOTE:''' If you have changed the settings for your remappable buttons (softkeys) and have removed or overwritten the Recall option, but would still like to use Swap, you may use the Recall Menu instead and select the first option at the top of the list. Using the keypad would go like this: [≡][1][1]
*The single chevron keys will operate the right throttle’s speed while the double chevron keys, the thumbwheel, the direction key, and the function buttons operate the left throttle. Using the Select Loco key or Menu > Recall will replace the locomotive on the left throttle.
*If needed, a softkey (such as ['''∷''']) can be re-configured to operate as the Dual Direction button for the secondary throttle (In the Settings > Change Buttons menu, pick “Dual Direction” from the Common Functions list).
*Both throttles can be independently set to drive consists. The consist change operations manipulate the consist on the left throttle.
*Both throttles can be independently set to Yard Mode. We recommend using the right throttle to control a locomotive in Yard Mode because the direction can be controlled by using exclusively the chevron keys without the need to swap sides or reconfigure a soft key for the Dual Direction function.

We especially recommend Dual Throttle Mode for operators working a yard and users who would like to monitor and control two locomotives at the same time.

'''Accessory and Route Support'''

*The Accessory Control Screen now has separate keys for setting a turnout to Normal or Reversed. Pressing ENTER will “throw” the switch or toggle the accessory if the underlying system supports it. More details can be found in the new [[UWT-100#The%20.E2.80.9CHelp.E2.80.9D%20Button|Help Text]] for the Accessory Control Screen.
*The soft buttons in the Accessory Control Screen will now highlight to show you that your command was sent to the layout.
*'''Controlling turnouts over an LNWI connection is now supported'''. Press the Accessory key, enter the turnout number, then press the N/On or R/Off keys to set the turnout to Normal (aka. Closed) or Reversed (aka. Thrown). “Toggling” or throwing a turnout using the Enter key is not supported by the LNWI.
*'''Controlling Routes via JMRI'''. The UWT-100 throttle is now able to show and set Routes entered into JMRI. Routes will show when pressing the Accessory key in the list after the turnouts. The list can be restricted to show routes only by typing 0 on the keypad, after which typing more digits will further restrict the shown routes. A route from the list can be activated by scrolling to highlight it, then pressing the [··] (Select) key. Blind typing is also supported, for example if you have a route called “Yard entry 28”, you can trigger that with [ACCY] [0] [2] [8] [ENTER]. NCE macros can be operated using the Accessory Control Screen with the Appropriate JMRI Configuration.

'''Recall Functionality Tweaks'''

*The throttle will now remember if a locomotive was in [[Yard Mode]] through power cycles and Recall button presses. This allows for seamless transitions between a switcher in Yard Mode and a road locomotive in normal mode when using the Recall key -- the throttle will automatically switch to the last used mode for each locomotive. The throttle will remember the Yard Mode setting for all recently used locomotives that are still in the Recall list (up to 20), and apply it even if you select a recently used locomotive by address.
*Certain system connections via JMRI are incorrectly reporting locomotives acquired as zero speed and all functions off, even if the locomotive is running on the layout. This makes the quick switching between locomotives using the Recall button very difficult to use. We recommend using Dual Throttle Mode which does not exhibit this issue and makes switching between two locomotives much faster.
*If you regularly need to switch between ''more than two locomotives'', we added a workaround in Settings > Throttle Settings > Drive Settings > Workaround for Recall 0 Speed. This will make the throttle keep all locomotives which were selected in the current session in a hidden consist, causing JMRI to correctly remember the locomotive state. You can still explicitly release a locomotive with Menu > Operations > Release/Dispatch. '''WARNING:''' this behavior can make most command stations really unhappy, so make sure you only enable it if absolutely necessary. So far we’ve only seen this issue on the NCE PowerCab and PowerHouse Pro when using it via JMRI and the NCE USB or Serial connections. The WFD-30 module from WiFiTrax does successfully report speed and function status to the throttle, and does not require this workaround. Use this feature at your own risk. If transitioning between layouts and command stations, turn this feature on or off as necessary.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed incorrect scrolling when exiting the Advanced parameters menu in the Network Profile.
*Fixed incorrect line breaks on the Locomotive Steal dialog.
*Fixed bug where it was impossible to use the E-STOP button to turn track power on when using an LNWI connection.
*Fixed bug where selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect showed a locomotive on the screen that could not be controlled. The locomotive is now correctly re-acquired after the reconnect.
*Fixed bug where an unintuitive error message was left on the screen in Offline mode.
*Fixed bug when an empty menu item was shown in the Main Menu under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where selecting an accessory from the search results was sometimes impossible if it was the only result in the list.
*Fixed bug where the menu labels in the Consist Functions menu displayed 1 for F0.
*Fixed bug where “Connected to {WiFi}” message was stuck on screen under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where F0/headlight was not correctly displayed after acquiring a locomotive under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the direction sign was not correctly shown in Yard Mode under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the double chevrons failed to repeatedly change speed when held down in normal speed control mode, whereas single chevrons worked with repeats.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*Added Help text to the Select Loco and Select Accessory screens. Use the [?] button on these screens to access the help.
*Yard Mode On/Off can now be assigned as a function to any of the eight remappable buttons (including the soft keys), allowing you to turn Yard Mode on or off on any locomotive at any time with one button press.
*In Yard Mode the double chevrons are permanently assigned to control the locomotive; any other functions specified for the double chevrons will be active only in Standard mode. Similarly, in Dual Throttle Mode the single chevrons are permanently assigned to the right side throttle.
*Added a menu option to display and control track power in Menu > Settings > Track Power. This menu option can control layout power on any system that supports it. Track power may still be controlled via the E-STOP button if configured as a more convenient option.
*The main screen will display when the throttle is in Offline mode. You may now exit Offline mode by selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect, or by selecting a specific profile and the Connect Now command. Previously you had to turn off the throttle to exit Offline mode.
*The throttle now supports pressing two buttons at the same time. For example while holding down the horn button, a chevron key in Yard Mode can be pressed. This also allows you to drive two locomotives in Dual Throttle Mode at the same time, including when both locos are in Yard Mode.
*When the throttle gets into the automatic network discovery after turning on (this happens after a few seconds if reconnecting fails), it will print the name of the WiFi network it connected to on the top to aid in troubleshooting.

Throttle Release Notes

2024-08-22T00:21:06Z

Dan Mycio: moved instructions

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!

== Instructions for Updating ==
For instructions on how to apply the latest update to your UWT-100, please refer to our [[Instructions for Updating WiFi-Enabled Throttles]].

Listed below are the release notes for the available firmware versions, in descending order starting with the most recent. The most recent version of software will also include all of the features and other changes listed in every previous releases.

==Release 3.4==
Release 3.4 makes the following changes and improvements to the UWT-100:

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds a configuration option for disabling or changing the sensitivity of the ballistic tracking (acceleration) for the encoder knob. ''Menu > 8 Settings > 1 Throttle Settings > 3 Drive Settings > Encoder Ballistics > Off/Low/Mid/High.'' The default of this setting will be Mid, whereas throttle software until 3.2 had the same behavior as High. Changing the setting to Off will disable all ballistics and the knob will control the speed at a constant rate with the rotation.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixes bug when the locomotive speed would jump to 126 unexpectedly after the throttle has been sitting idle for some time.
*The sensitivity of the thumbwheel is adjusted down in the text entry window to match that of the menus. This will make it easier to select individual characters and enter text.

===Misc changes:===

*Updated DCC accessory addresses according to the newest standard RCN-213 and NMRA S-9.1.2 from 2023. This changes the behavior of turnout address 2045-2047, and extends the maximum to turnout address 2048. Turnouts 1-2044 did not change as part of this update.
*Fixed corner case when the same locomotive is selected on both sides in Dual Throttle mode and speed changes would not update each other. The speed and direction displayed will now follow each other as expected.
*Various fixes regarding LCC standards compliance. The Producer Identified Messages are updated. The CDI XML has an additional null terminator. Some non-user-visible but non-compliant parts in the XML are fixed.

 

==Release 3.2==
This release adds support for the magnetic encoder. The type of the encoder hardware is auto-detected, and printed in the About This Throttle page (Menu > 7).

===Feature Additions & Changes===

*Adds support for Magnetic Encoder in UWT-100.
*Removes ballistic tracking when using the thumbwheel in the menus and text entry window.

===Bug Fixes===

*Bug fixes and performance improvements in specific situations.
*LCC turnout change screen: documents in the help text that ENTER will toggle the accessory and exit back to the main screen. Fixes a rare bug when it forgot to exit.
*Fixes crash when the LCC Command Station was slow in responding to requests during a select locomotive operation.

 

==Release 3.0==
UWT Firmware Version 3.0 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 and UWT-50 which adds full support for the CS-105 at initial release. Most of the changes focus on improvements and bug fixes in LCC mode. Continue reading to see the full list of changes.
{| class="wikitable"
|'''UWT Firmware Version 3.0 or newer is REQUIRED to operate a CS-105 when connected in LCC mode. Use of an older UWT firmware version with a CS-105 will result in most features of the system not working properly, and error messages and connection issues.'''
|}

===CS-105 Feature Support===
'''NOTE:''' All of the items below only apply when the UWT is connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode, and do not apply when in the WiThrottle Protocol connection mode. Many of the features described in this section are feature integrations with the Command Station. Listed below are ''some'' of the highlight features. For more detailed information on these features and how to use them, please refer to our [[CS-105|Wiki Documentation for the CS-105]].

Fun Fact: If your layout is run with assistance from JMRI, you can control your trains with a UWT in LCC mode using JMRI. In order to do this, you MUST be running JMRI Version 5.0 or newer otherwise you will not have the feature support. JMRI can be used to run an LCC/OpenMRN “Hub” (similar to a WiThrottle server) to connect an unlimited number of UWT’s to your CS-105.

'''Programming Track'''

To access this user interface, navigate to ''Menu>4 CV Programming>2 Programming Track''

[Image]

NOTE: CV programming is only available when connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode.

'''Roster Data Entry for Locomotives'''

Add, modify, and remove locomotives in the CS-105’s Internal Roster. Configure options such as:

*Name of locomotive
*Speed Step Mode
*Names/Labels for each button-controlled function
*Button-controlled functions which respond while in a system-controlled consist

To set up and access roster settings, first select a locomotive, then navigate to ''Menu>8 Settings>3 Roster Settings''

Train name and metadata on the display of the current throttle will refresh automatically after editing Roster Settings.

'''Miscellaneous Train Selection and Control Changes'''

*Adds support for selecting a locomotive using Marklin-Motorola (trinary) protocol by adding double-zero before the locomotive address. Example: to select M/M address 25, press the Loco key, type in “0025” and press ENTER. Note that entering “025” will select DCC long address 25.
*Function labels used for soft key settings will match CS-105 software version 1.0. As an example, when Button [:.] is configured under Throttle Settings > Change Buttons for “Coupler Open”, and the CS-105 presents a F9 as “Uncouple”, then pressing [:.] will trigger F9 on the locomotive.

'''LCC Throttle “Heartbeats”'''

*Adds support for heartbeats in the LCC train protocol.

'''NOTE:''' The CS-105 requires heartbeats from a throttle by default. When a UWT throttle with software prior to this version controls a train in LCC mode, the operator will find that the train speed resets to zero after ~10 seconds of running. This is resolved in the 3.0 release. If UWT’s with older software versions should not need to be used with a CS-105, heartbeat must be disabled in the command station settings.

Notifies LCC train to stop sending heartbeat requests when the throttle is powered down (intentionally or due to inactivity timeout).

'''Accessory Control'''

*Makes accessory screen in LCC mode work similarly to WiThrottle Protocol mode:
**Pressing ENTER will toggle-and-exit
**Pressing the Turnout Button will toggle and stay in the accessory screen.
*Adds support for triggering Command Station Macros on the CS-105. To trigger a macro, press the turnout button, enter zero followed by the macro number, then enter. As an example, type “042 ENTER” to run macro number 42.
*Adds support for turnout addresses up to 2047 according to the RCN-213 standard.

'''Short Circuit Indicator'''

*Adds an indicator to the top-right of the screen whenever a short circuit is present. This icon will appear instead of the WiFi signal strength indicator.

[Image]

'''NOTE:''' This feature will only work when connected to a TCS CS-105 and TCS Boosters.

'''Fast Clock'''

*Adds Fast Clock support in LCC mode. In LCC mode the throttle can automatically detect whether there is a Fast Clock generator available on LCC.

===Bug Fixes for LCC Connections===

*Fixes an issue where trailing locomotives in LCC consists did not respond to function button presses.
*Fixes a rare network-related lockup in LCC mode.
*Fixes incorrect display on screen when selecting a locomotive fails.
*Fixes incorrect display of address in the DCC Address Programming screen when a locomotive is being reprogrammed from a long address to a short address.
*Fixes a crash that was dependent on the serial number of the throttle.

===Miscellaneous Changes===
Items in this section apply regardless of the connection mode (LCC or WiThrottle Protocol).

*Improved the behaviour of the UWT-50P when the knob is moved while the user is in the menu screens. After exiting the menu, the knob will have to be first returned near the current speed before the locomotive speed can be changed. This is the same behavior as just after selecting or recalling a locomotive which avoids a sudden change of speed.
*Menu Name for Menu>8 Settings>2 Consist Functions changed to “2 WT Consist Funcs” for clarity purposes. This menu is used to handle function routing when creating and running In-Throttle Consists with the UWT, and does not apply or change any settings in LCC mode. The menu title was changed to reflect this to avoid confusion with consist function settings in the CS-105 Internal Roster.
*Improved clarity of some error messages
*Improved Help Text in many areas, and added new Help Text for new menu items.

 

==Release 2.4==
Release 2.4 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 that adds additional features, brings improvements to existing features based on the feedback of our users, and fixes some minor bugs. Release 2.4 is the first production firmware version for the UWT-50.

===Fast Clock===

*Under the WiThrottle Protocol mode, the throttle will display the Fast Clock if the WiThrottle Server supports it. The Fast Clock display works with all known fast clocks, but support will depend on the connection to your layout and supporting infrastructure.
*12 hour and 24 hour clock formats are select-able in the settings.
*The Fast Clock displays on the right-hand-side. If the layout is in E-STOP, or Dual Throttle Mode (UWT-100 only) is enabled, that covers up the fast clock display.
*If the Fast Clock is not in use at the layout you are operating at, but the display is still turned on in the throttle settings, there is a possibility that a clock will display. By default, JMRI will create a “fast” clock which matches the current time of day and has a rate of 1:1. These clocks can be disabled in the JMRI WiThrottle Server settings (applies to all throttles), or individually on a per-throttle basis as stated above.
*To enable the Fast Clock automatic display, go to: Throttle Settings > Fast Clock > Show Fast Clock. (Default = OFF)

===Remappable Button (Softkey) Changes===

*To select F0 to F28 as fixed locomotive function number for a remappable button, enter the chosen number in the new “F0 - F28” menu. Found at: Menu > Settings > Throttle Settings > Change Buttons > [Button]
*Further to the above, The long list of entries F0, F1, … F28 is now removed from the "Common Functions" list in order to improve performance and give a better user experience. Common Functions list still exists, and consists of only named functions now.
*After selecting a remappable button in the Change Buttons menu, the current setting is now printed in the title.
*“Stop” is a new selectable function that can be assigned to any remappable button. The behavior is that it sets the locomotive speed to zero (with normal deceleration).
*The operations on the 1-dot, 2-dot, 3-dot and 4-dot keys are slightly rearranged on the UWT-100 in certain auxiliary screens to be aligned with the UWT-50 and be more intuitive to use. For example a confirmation dialog is now presented as “Yes | No” instead of “No | Yes”.

===Accessory Mode Control Improvements===

*Added new "toggle-and-exit" feature to the Accessory Window. ''This feature was recommended through user feedback.''

To use the toggle-and-exit feature, first select an accessory (e.g. typing in a number), then press the Enter button to toggle the accessory and immediately exit the Accessory Window. If you want to toggle and ''remain'' in the Accessory Window (for example to change multiple accessories), select the accessory, and then press the Accessory (turnout icon) button to toggle, OR use the "Normal" and "Reverse" (N/On / R/Off) buttons on the 2-dot and 3-dot keys.

*The Accessory button no longer exits to the drive window if an accessory number is selected. Use the "Esc" key to exit back to the drive window.

[Image]

===LCC-related Changes (Do not affect connections over WiThrottle protocol)===

*Added an assisted/automatic DCC Address Programming process. This can be found when connected through LCC under: Menu > CV Programming > DCC Address.
*This menu allows one to view the current address(es) of a locomotive on the Programming Track, set a short or long DCC Address, as well as view, set and clear CV19 Consist Address in an automatic and easy-to-use manner.
*Removed an unneeded step after accessing Menu > Settings > Roster Settings.
*Updated Consist Function Routing menus to support the advanced capabilities of LCC consisting in the CS-105.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed an issue where trying to add a new WiFi profile beyond the supported maximum (seven) did not prompt the user that their profiles were full. The throttle ''appeared'' to take the 8th WiFi but it would not take/would not work correctly; instead, the throttle now prompts the user before adding a new WiFi, when their profiles are full, to delete a profile before proceeding.
*After locking in (latching) a speed in yard mode on the UWT-100 and UWT-50E, entering and exiting the menu incorrectly changed the display.
*Removed an incorrect and out-of-context message from the built-in website from the Add WiFi box.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*In the text entry window, added visual clarification between the space and underscore characters. This avoids confusion where entering a WiFi name or password with underscores appearing to be not accepted by the throttle.
*In the text entry window, the most common punctuation characters (dot, minus, underscore and space) now appear on almost all pages when entering text.
*Accelerated (“ballistic”) behavior of the encoder-based thumb wheel is now disabled in menus. ''This change was made in response to user feedback.''
*Removed scanning on WiFi channel 13. This channel is not universally accessible due to regulatory constraints. Use channels 1 to 11 for maximum compatibility.
*Added a "refresh" button to the "About This Throttle" menu. This allows you to periodically refresh the window to update info displayed there. This can help users troubleshoot connectivity issues by having a "live update" on signal strength, SSID, IP, etc.
*Added some new icons to the user interface

===Note: Firmware Synchronicity With UWT-50===
From this point forward, the firmware release numbers between the UWT-50 and UWT-100 throttles are always going to be the same. This means that the same release numbers will have the same features, performance and bug fixes. Most changes made can affect both devices, but there is also the possibility of having new updates which primarily address features or bugs on one device only. TCS' release schedule for firmware updates on the UWT-100 and UWT-50 is scheduled to include updates for both devices in synchronicity.
 

==Release 2.0==
Release 2.0 is a major software release that adds new features, brings improvements in different areas based on the feedback of our users and our development schedule, and fixes some minor bugs.

===New Feature Additions===
The TCS UWT-100 throttle can now be used to control two locomotives at the same time. Both locomotives will be visible on the screen with their address, speed and direction.

'''Dual Throttle Mode Features:'''

*You can enable or disable Dual Throttle Mode by going Menu > Operations > Dual Throttle or typing [≡][2][6] on the keypad.
*While Dual Throttle Mode is active, the Recall ''softkey'' (default ['''·''']) will display as ‘Swap’. Swap may be used to flip the positions of the two throttles. '''NOTE:''' If you have changed the settings for your remappable buttons (softkeys) and have removed or overwritten the Recall option, but would still like to use Swap, you may use the Recall Menu instead and select the first option at the top of the list. Using the keypad would go like this: [≡][1][1]
*The single chevron keys will operate the right throttle’s speed while the double chevron keys, the thumbwheel, the direction key, and the function buttons operate the left throttle. Using the Select Loco key or Menu > Recall will replace the locomotive on the left throttle.
*If needed, a softkey (such as ['''∷''']) can be re-configured to operate as the Dual Direction button for the secondary throttle (In the Settings > Change Buttons menu, pick “Dual Direction” from the Common Functions list).
*Both throttles can be independently set to drive consists. The consist change operations manipulate the consist on the left throttle.
*Both throttles can be independently set to Yard Mode. We recommend using the right throttle to control a locomotive in Yard Mode because the direction can be controlled by using exclusively the chevron keys without the need to swap sides or reconfigure a soft key for the Dual Direction function.

We especially recommend Dual Throttle Mode for operators working a yard and users who would like to monitor and control two locomotives at the same time.

'''Accessory and Route Support'''

*The Accessory Control Screen now has separate keys for setting a turnout to Normal or Reversed. Pressing ENTER will “throw” the switch or toggle the accessory if the underlying system supports it. More details can be found in the new [[UWT-100#The%20.E2.80.9CHelp.E2.80.9D%20Button|Help Text]] for the Accessory Control Screen.
*The soft buttons in the Accessory Control Screen will now highlight to show you that your command was sent to the layout.
*'''Controlling turnouts over an LNWI connection is now supported'''. Press the Accessory key, enter the turnout number, then press the N/On or R/Off keys to set the turnout to Normal (aka. Closed) or Reversed (aka. Thrown). “Toggling” or throwing a turnout using the Enter key is not supported by the LNWI.
*'''Controlling Routes via JMRI'''. The UWT-100 throttle is now able to show and set Routes entered into JMRI. Routes will show when pressing the Accessory key in the list after the turnouts. The list can be restricted to show routes only by typing 0 on the keypad, after which typing more digits will further restrict the shown routes. A route from the list can be activated by scrolling to highlight it, then pressing the [··] (Select) key. Blind typing is also supported, for example if you have a route called “Yard entry 28”, you can trigger that with [ACCY] [0] [2] [8] [ENTER]. NCE macros can be operated using the Accessory Control Screen with the Appropriate JMRI Configuration.

'''Recall Functionality Tweaks'''

*The throttle will now remember if a locomotive was in [[Yard Mode]] through power cycles and Recall button presses. This allows for seamless transitions between a switcher in Yard Mode and a road locomotive in normal mode when using the Recall key -- the throttle will automatically switch to the last used mode for each locomotive. The throttle will remember the Yard Mode setting for all recently used locomotives that are still in the Recall list (up to 20), and apply it even if you select a recently used locomotive by address.
*Certain system connections via JMRI are incorrectly reporting locomotives acquired as zero speed and all functions off, even if the locomotive is running on the layout. This makes the quick switching between locomotives using the Recall button very difficult to use. We recommend using Dual Throttle Mode which does not exhibit this issue and makes switching between two locomotives much faster.
*If you regularly need to switch between ''more than two locomotives'', we added a workaround in Settings > Throttle Settings > Drive Settings > Workaround for Recall 0 Speed. This will make the throttle keep all locomotives which were selected in the current session in a hidden consist, causing JMRI to correctly remember the locomotive state. You can still explicitly release a locomotive with Menu > Operations > Release/Dispatch. '''WARNING:''' this behavior can make most command stations really unhappy, so make sure you only enable it if absolutely necessary. So far we’ve only seen this issue on the NCE PowerCab and PowerHouse Pro when using it via JMRI and the NCE USB or Serial connections. The WFD-30 module from WiFiTrax does successfully report speed and function status to the throttle, and does not require this workaround. Use this feature at your own risk. If transitioning between layouts and command stations, turn this feature on or off as necessary.

===Bug Fixes===

*Fixed incorrect scrolling when exiting the Advanced parameters menu in the Network Profile.
*Fixed incorrect line breaks on the Locomotive Steal dialog.
*Fixed bug where it was impossible to use the E-STOP button to turn track power on when using an LNWI connection.
*Fixed bug where selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect showed a locomotive on the screen that could not be controlled. The locomotive is now correctly re-acquired after the reconnect.
*Fixed bug where an unintuitive error message was left on the screen in Offline mode.
*Fixed bug when an empty menu item was shown in the Main Menu under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where selecting an accessory from the search results was sometimes impossible if it was the only result in the list.
*Fixed bug where the menu labels in the Consist Functions menu displayed 1 for F0.
*Fixed bug where “Connected to {WiFi}” message was stuck on screen under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where F0/headlight was not correctly displayed after acquiring a locomotive under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the direction sign was not correctly shown in Yard Mode under some circumstances.
*Fixed bug where the double chevrons failed to repeatedly change speed when held down in normal speed control mode, whereas single chevrons worked with repeats.

===Miscellaneous Changes===

*Added Help text to the Select Loco and Select Accessory screens. Use the [?] button on these screens to access the help.
*Yard Mode On/Off can now be assigned as a function to any of the eight remappable buttons (including the soft keys), allowing you to turn Yard Mode on or off on any locomotive at any time with one button press.
*In Yard Mode the double chevrons are permanently assigned to control the locomotive; any other functions specified for the double chevrons will be active only in Standard mode. Similarly, in Dual Throttle Mode the single chevrons are permanently assigned to the right side throttle.
*Added a menu option to display and control track power in Menu > Settings > Track Power. This menu option can control layout power on any system that supports it. Track power may still be controlled via the E-STOP button if configured as a more convenient option.
*The main screen will display when the throttle is in Offline mode. You may now exit Offline mode by selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect, or by selecting a specific profile and the Connect Now command. Previously you had to turn off the throttle to exit Offline mode.
*The throttle now supports pressing two buttons at the same time. For example while holding down the horn button, a chevron key in Yard Mode can be pressed. This also allows you to drive two locomotives in Dual Throttle Mode at the same time, including when both locos are in Yard Mode.
*When the throttle gets into the automatic network discovery after turning on (this happens after a few seconds if reconnecting fails), it will print the name of the WiFi network it connected to on the top to aid in troubleshooting.

Instructions for Updating WiFi-Enabled Throttles

2024-08-22T00:17:52Z

Dan Mycio: template page for transcluding or linking - updating UWTs

== Instructions for Updating WiFi-enabled Throttles ==
{| class="wikitable"
|'''NOTE:''' Before getting started it is recommended that you first power up the throttle normally, then observe the battery level before starting the update process. If your indicator shows less than 25% remaining, replace your batteries as a precaution. If the device you are updating loses power while performing the update, you will need to start over.
|}

=== Connecting to WiFi ===
Devices such as the UWT-50, UWT-100, and CS-105 feature on-board WiFi. These WiFi-enabled devices can be updated wirelessly using TCS depot and a PC. Before updating, you need to get the computer and the device connected over WiFi. These steps below will guide you through that process.

'''You may skip this section and proceed to the Installing The Update IF...'''

# You have already performed this setup before
# Your device is already connected to the same WiFi as the computer being used to update the device
# You use the same WiFi for your trains and your computer

==== Option 1: Using An Available WiFi Network ====
If this is the first time you are updating your device, complete the normal booting process so that you can add a new WiFi connection. Make sure your computer is ON and connected to a network with WiFi - this could be your home WiFi for example.

'''How to Add a Network to Universal WiFi Throttles (UWT):'''

# Open the Menu [≡] and select "6 Network Options"
# Select "3 Add Network" from the list of options
# Select "1 Scan For WiFi"
# From the list, select the WiFi name that is the same as what your computer is connected to.
# If necessary, you will be prompted to enter the password.
# Once the throttle has successfully connected to the network, power down the throttle
# Proceed to the next section for instructions on updating.

==== Option 2: Using Access Point Mode ====
To eliminate the complexities of multiple WiFi networks, and make your updating process a little more streamlined, you can use the built-in WiFi of the device and connect your PC directly. To do this, the device needs to be put into a special mode so that it can broadcast its own WiFi - Access Point Mode.

'''Entering Access Point Mode on a UWT:'''

# Wake up your UWT by holding any button for two seconds. DO NOT press button 2 to finish the startup.
# Press Button 7 to enter the Bootloader for updating the firmware
# Press Button 8 to enter Access Point Mode
# Connect your PC to the WiFi network created by the throttle. The name will be "tcs_thr_xxxx" ("xxxx" is the serial number of the throttle.) If prompted to enter a password, the default password is "123456789" ''WARNING: If you are using Access Point Mode from your device, changing the network connection of your PC may interrupt your connection to the internet. Unless your computer also has a wired connection, launch Depot first so that any new firmware files are downloaded before severing the connection.''
# Proceed to the next section for instructions on updating.

=== Installing The Update ===
These instructions will guide you through the process using TCS Depot to install the firmware update. Before getting started, make sure your computer is connected to the internet when you launch TCS Depot. If there are new firmware files available, they will be downloaded automatically.

[Image]
{| class="wikitable"
|'''NOTE:''' If you are normally using LNWI/MRC-WiFi/WifiTrax devices, it is recommended to power them down. TCS WiFi throttles and devices will always try to reconnect to networks it knows, starting with the most recent successful connection. If you are not using the same WiFi to update your device as you do to run your layout, you need to power these other WiFi sources down or manually connect the UWT to the correct WiFi network in the normal operating mode '''before powering it down again for updating'''.
|}
'''Follow These Steps To Update Your WiFi-enabled Device:'''

# Launch TCS Depot
# Click the "Scan For Devices" Button
# Follow the instructions on the screen. Once you complete each step, click the "Next" button [Image] [Image]
# If your device was detected as the pictures show below, you could skip to step 6 and instead press the button for the device that was found. If you have to click connect manually, proceed with step 5. [Image]
# Depot will give you an error (as shown below) if no devices were detected. It will then prompt you to select which device you would like to update. Enter the IP Address of the device to be updated, then click "Connect" ''Note: On any UWT, the WiFi name and IP Address are shown on the screen. In Access Point Mode, the IP address is always 10.0.0.1'' [Image] [Image]
# You will be presented with an option to "Select a file to update your throttle" Depot will automatically select the newest file for your device. If for some reason you want to load an older version, you can click the file name to display a list of all of the options for the connected device. [Image] [Image]
# Click the button to begin the updating process. The UWT will blink the flashlight LED's as the update progresses. Once the update is complete, Depot will confirm the success. [Image] [Image]

{| class="wikitable"
|''Click the Back button to return to the main menu if you want to continue updating more devices.''
|}
'''If you encounter issues during the updating process, follow these troubleshooting steps before contacting TCS technical support:'''

# Ensure your throttle is connected to the '''same network as the computer''' you will be using to update it.
# Ensure that WiFi is turned ON if you are using a Laptop, WiFi dongle, or PC with integrated WiFi.
# Ensure you have downloaded and installed the most recent version of Depot (Current Version is 2.1.0)
# Ensure the computer you are using is not running a WiThrottle server or OpenMRN/LCC hub.
# Verify that the WiFi name displayed on the throttle screen in Bootloader Mode is the same as the WiFi name that your computer is connected to.
# Ensure that TCS Depot has permission to pass through the firewall on your computer (Windows Defender, etc.)
# If you are running an add-on or additional antivirus software program on your computer, you may need to disable it temporarily.

'''If you are having connectivity problems between your UWT-100 and Depot, perform the following steps in order:'''

# Reboot your throttle (press 9 while in Bootloader Mode to exit into standard operation mode. Power Down again, then reboot into the Bootloader Mode again). Restart Depot and start over.
# Make sure that Windows User Account Control does not have a window open in the background asking for permission to allow Depot through the Firewall (Windows Defender).

Note: If you use JMRI to run your railroad and have an LCC and/or WiThrottle server running, stop the server(s) or Quit JMRI before updating any devices using Depot

Throttle Release Notes

2024-08-22T00:14:55Z

Dan Mycio: Added content back to R2.0

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!

==Instructions for Updating WiFi-enabled Throttles==
{| class="wikitable"
|'''NOTE:''' Before getting started it is recommended that you first power up the throttle normally, then observe the battery level before starting the update process. If your indicator shows less than 25% remaining, replace your batteries as a precaution. If the device you are updating loses power while performing the update, you will need to start over.
|}

===Connecting to WiFi===
Devices such as the UWT-50, UWT-100, and CS-105 feature on-board WiFi. These WiFi-enabled devices can be updated wirelessly using TCS depot and a PC. Before updating, you need to get the computer and the device connected over WiFi. These steps below will guide you through that process.

'''You may skip this section and proceed to the Installing The Update IF...'''

#You have already performed this setup before
#Your device is already connected to the same WiFi as the computer being used to update the device
#You use the same WiFi for your trains and your computer

====Option 1: Using An Available WiFi Network====
If this is the first time you are updating your device, complete the normal booting process so that you can add a new WiFi connection. Make sure your computer is ON and connected to a network with WiFi - this could be your home WiFi for example.

'''How to Add a Network to Universal WiFi Throttles (UWT):'''

#Open the Menu [≡] and select "6 Network Options"
#Select "3 Add Network" from the list of options
#Select "1 Scan For WiFi"
#From the list, select the WiFi name that is the same as what your computer is connected to.
#If necessary, you will be prompted to enter the password.
#Once the throttle has successfully connected to the network, power down the throttle
#Proceed to the next section for instructions on updating.

====Option 2: Using Access Point Mode====
To eliminate the complexities of multiple WiFi networks, and make your updating process a little more streamlined, you can use the built-in WiFi of the device and connect your PC directly. To do this, the device needs to be put into a special mode so that it can broadcast its own WiFi - Access Point Mode.

'''Entering Access Point Mode on a UWT:'''

#Wake up your UWT by holding any button for two seconds. DO NOT press button 2 to finish the startup.
#Press Button 7 to enter the Bootloader for updating the firmware
#Press Button 8 to enter Access Point Mode
#Connect your PC to the WiFi network created by the throttle. The name will be "tcs_thr_xxxx" ("xxxx" is the serial number of the throttle.) If prompted to enter a password, the default password is "123456789" ''WARNING: If you are using Access Point Mode from your device, changing the network connection of your PC may interrupt your connection to the internet. Unless your computer also has a wired connection, launch Depot first so that any new firmware files are downloaded before severing the connection.''
#Proceed to the next section for instructions on updating.

===Installing The Update===
These instructions will guide you through the process using TCS Depot to install the firmware update. Before getting started, make sure your computer is connected to the internet when you launch TCS Depot. If there are new firmware files available, they will be downloaded automatically.

[Image]
{| class="wikitable"
|'''NOTE:''' If you are normally using LNWI/MRC-WiFi/WifiTrax devices, it is recommended to power them down. TCS WiFi throttles and devices will always try to reconnect to networks it knows, starting with the most recent successful connection. If you are not using the same WiFi to update your device as you do to run your layout, you need to power these other WiFi sources down or manually connect the UWT to the correct WiFi network in the normal operating mode '''before powering it down again for updating'''.
|}
'''Follow These Steps To Update Your WiFi-enabled Device:'''

#Launch TCS Depot
#Click the "Scan For Devices" Button
#Follow the instructions on the screen. Once you complete each step, click the "Next" button [Image] [Image]
#If your device was detected as the pictures show below, you could skip to step 6 and instead press the button for the device that was found. If you have to click connect manually, proceed with step 5. [Image]
#Depot will give you an error (as shown below) if no devices were detected. It will then prompt you to select which device you would like to update. Enter the IP Address of the device to be updated, then click "Connect" ''Note: On any UWT, the WiFi name and IP Address are shown on the screen. In Access Point Mode, the IP address is always 10.0.0.1'' [Image] [Image]
#You will be presented with an option to "Select a file to update your throttle" Depot will automatically select the newest file for your device. If for some reason you want to load an older version, you can click the file name to display a list of all of the options for the connected device. [Image] [Image]
#Click the button to begin the updating process. The UWT will blink the flashlight LED's as the update progresses. Once the update is complete, Depot will confirm the success. [Image] [Image]

{| class="wikitable"
|''Click the Back button to return to the main menu if you want to continue updating more devices.''
|}
'''If you encounter issues during the updating process, follow these troubleshooting steps before contacting TCS technical support:'''

#Ensure your throttle is connected to the '''same network as the computer''' you will be using to update it.
#Ensure that WiFi is turned ON if you are using a Laptop, WiFi dongle, or PC with integrated WiFi.
#Ensure you have downloaded and installed the most recent version of Depot (Current Version is 2.1.0)
#Ensure the computer you are using is not running a WiThrottle server or OpenMRN/LCC hub.
#Verify that the WiFi name displayed on the throttle screen in Bootloader Mode is the same as the WiFi name that your computer is connected to.
#Ensure that TCS Depot has permission to pass through the firewall on your computer (Windows Defender, etc.)
#If you are running an add-on or additional antivirus software program on your computer, you may need to disable it temporarily.

'''If you are having connectivity problems between your UWT-100 and Depot, perform the following steps in order:'''

#Reboot your throttle (press 9 while in Bootloader Mode to exit into standard operation mode. Power Down again, then reboot into the Bootloader Mode again). Restart Depot and start over.
#Make sure that Windows User Account Control does not have a window open in the background asking for permission to allow Depot through the Firewall (Windows Defender).

Note: If you use JMRI to run your railroad and have an LCC and/or WiThrottle server running, stop the server(s) or Quit JMRI before updating any devices using Depot

 

== Release 3.4 ==
Release 3.4 makes the following changes and improvements to the UWT-100:

=== Feature Additions & Changes ===

* Adds a configuration option for disabling or changing the sensitivity of the ballistic tracking (acceleration) for the encoder knob. ''Menu > 8 Settings > 1 Throttle Settings > 3 Drive Settings > Encoder Ballistics > Off/Low/Mid/High.'' The default of this setting will be Mid, whereas throttle software until 3.2 had the same behavior as High. Changing the setting to Off will disable all ballistics and the knob will control the speed at a constant rate with the rotation.

=== Bug Fixes ===

* Fixes bug when the locomotive speed would jump to 126 unexpectedly after the throttle has been sitting idle for some time.
* The sensitivity of the thumbwheel is adjusted down in the text entry window to match that of the menus. This will make it easier to select individual characters and enter text.

=== Misc changes: ===

* Updated DCC accessory addresses according to the newest standard RCN-213 and NMRA S-9.1.2 from 2023. This changes the behavior of turnout address 2045-2047, and extends the maximum to turnout address 2048. Turnouts 1-2044 did not change as part of this update.
* Fixed corner case when the same locomotive is selected on both sides in Dual Throttle mode and speed changes would not update each other. The speed and direction displayed will now follow each other as expected.
* Various fixes regarding LCC standards compliance. The Producer Identified Messages are updated. The CDI XML has an additional null terminator. Some non-user-visible but non-compliant parts in the XML are fixed.

 

== Release 3.2 ==
This release adds support for the magnetic encoder. The type of the encoder hardware is auto-detected, and printed in the About This Throttle page (Menu > 7).

=== Feature Additions & Changes ===

* Adds support for Magnetic Encoder in UWT-100.
* Removes ballistic tracking when using the thumbwheel in the menus and text entry window.

=== Bug Fixes ===

* Bug fixes and performance improvements in specific situations.
* LCC turnout change screen: documents in the help text that ENTER will toggle the accessory and exit back to the main screen. Fixes a rare bug when it forgot to exit.
* Fixes crash when the LCC Command Station was slow in responding to requests during a select locomotive operation.

 

== Release 3.0 ==
UWT Firmware Version 3.0 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 and UWT-50 which adds full support for the CS-105 at initial release. Most of the changes focus on improvements and bug fixes in LCC mode. Continue reading to see the full list of changes.
{| class="wikitable"
|'''UWT Firmware Version 3.0 or newer is REQUIRED to operate a CS-105 when connected in LCC mode. Use of an older UWT firmware version with a CS-105 will result in most features of the system not working properly, and error messages and connection issues.'''
|}

=== CS-105 Feature Support ===
'''NOTE:''' All of the items below only apply when the UWT is connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode, and do not apply when in the WiThrottle Protocol connection mode. Many of the features described in this section are feature integrations with the Command Station. Listed below are ''some'' of the highlight features. For more detailed information on these features and how to use them, please refer to our [[CS-105|Wiki Documentation for the CS-105]].

Fun Fact: If your layout is run with assistance from JMRI, you can control your trains with a UWT in LCC mode using JMRI. In order to do this, you MUST be running JMRI Version 5.0 or newer otherwise you will not have the feature support. JMRI can be used to run an LCC/OpenMRN “Hub” (similar to a WiThrottle server) to connect an unlimited number of UWT’s to your CS-105.

'''Programming Track'''

To access this user interface, navigate to ''Menu>4 CV Programming>2 Programming Track''

[Image]

NOTE: CV programming is only available when connected to a CS-105 in LCC mode.

'''Roster Data Entry for Locomotives'''

Add, modify, and remove locomotives in the CS-105’s Internal Roster. Configure options such as:

* Name of locomotive
* Speed Step Mode
* Names/Labels for each button-controlled function
* Button-controlled functions which respond while in a system-controlled consist

To set up and access roster settings, first select a locomotive, then navigate to ''Menu>8 Settings>3 Roster Settings''

Train name and metadata on the display of the current throttle will refresh automatically after editing Roster Settings.

'''Miscellaneous Train Selection and Control Changes'''

* Adds support for selecting a locomotive using Marklin-Motorola (trinary) protocol by adding double-zero before the locomotive address. Example: to select M/M address 25, press the Loco key, type in “0025” and press ENTER. Note that entering “025” will select DCC long address 25.
* Function labels used for soft key settings will match CS-105 software version 1.0. As an example, when Button [:.] is configured under Throttle Settings > Change Buttons for “Coupler Open”, and the CS-105 presents a F9 as “Uncouple”, then pressing [:.] will trigger F9 on the locomotive.

'''LCC Throttle “Heartbeats”'''

* Adds support for heartbeats in the LCC train protocol.

'''NOTE:''' The CS-105 requires heartbeats from a throttle by default. When a UWT throttle with software prior to this version controls a train in LCC mode, the operator will find that the train speed resets to zero after ~10 seconds of running. This is resolved in the 3.0 release. If UWT’s with older software versions should not need to be used with a CS-105, heartbeat must be disabled in the command station settings.

Notifies LCC train to stop sending heartbeat requests when the throttle is powered down (intentionally or due to inactivity timeout).

'''Accessory Control'''

* Makes accessory screen in LCC mode work similarly to WiThrottle Protocol mode:
** Pressing ENTER will toggle-and-exit
** Pressing the Turnout Button will toggle and stay in the accessory screen.
* Adds support for triggering Command Station Macros on the CS-105. To trigger a macro, press the turnout button, enter zero followed by the macro number, then enter. As an example, type “042 ENTER” to run macro number 42.
* Adds support for turnout addresses up to 2047 according to the RCN-213 standard.

'''Short Circuit Indicator'''

* Adds an indicator to the top-right of the screen whenever a short circuit is present. This icon will appear instead of the WiFi signal strength indicator.

[Image]

'''NOTE:''' This feature will only work when connected to a TCS CS-105 and TCS Boosters.

'''Fast Clock'''

* Adds Fast Clock support in LCC mode. In LCC mode the throttle can automatically detect whether there is a Fast Clock generator available on LCC.

=== Bug Fixes for LCC Connections ===

* Fixes an issue where trailing locomotives in LCC consists did not respond to function button presses.
* Fixes a rare network-related lockup in LCC mode.
* Fixes incorrect display on screen when selecting a locomotive fails.
* Fixes incorrect display of address in the DCC Address Programming screen when a locomotive is being reprogrammed from a long address to a short address.
* Fixes a crash that was dependent on the serial number of the throttle.

=== Miscellaneous Changes ===
Items in this section apply regardless of the connection mode (LCC or WiThrottle Protocol).

* Improved the behaviour of the UWT-50P when the knob is moved while the user is in the menu screens. After exiting the menu, the knob will have to be first returned near the current speed before the locomotive speed can be changed. This is the same behavior as just after selecting or recalling a locomotive which avoids a sudden change of speed.
* Menu Name for Menu>8 Settings>2 Consist Functions changed to “2 WT Consist Funcs” for clarity purposes. This menu is used to handle function routing when creating and running In-Throttle Consists with the UWT, and does not apply or change any settings in LCC mode. The menu title was changed to reflect this to avoid confusion with consist function settings in the CS-105 Internal Roster.
* Improved clarity of some error messages
* Improved Help Text in many areas, and added new Help Text for new menu items.

 

== Release 2.4 ==
Release 2.4 is a scheduled software release for the UWT-100 that adds additional features, brings improvements to existing features based on the feedback of our users, and fixes some minor bugs. Release 2.4 is the first production firmware version for the UWT-50.

=== Fast Clock ===

* Under the WiThrottle Protocol mode, the throttle will display the Fast Clock if the WiThrottle Server supports it. The Fast Clock display works with all known fast clocks, but support will depend on the connection to your layout and supporting infrastructure.
* 12 hour and 24 hour clock formats are select-able in the settings.
* The Fast Clock displays on the right-hand-side. If the layout is in E-STOP, or Dual Throttle Mode (UWT-100 only) is enabled, that covers up the fast clock display.
* If the Fast Clock is not in use at the layout you are operating at, but the display is still turned on in the throttle settings, there is a possibility that a clock will display. By default, JMRI will create a “fast” clock which matches the current time of day and has a rate of 1:1. These clocks can be disabled in the JMRI WiThrottle Server settings (applies to all throttles), or individually on a per-throttle basis as stated above.
* To enable the Fast Clock automatic display, go to: Throttle Settings > Fast Clock > Show Fast Clock. (Default = OFF)

=== Remappable Button (Softkey) Changes ===

* To select F0 to F28 as fixed locomotive function number for a remappable button, enter the chosen number in the new “F0 - F28” menu. Found at: Menu > Settings > Throttle Settings > Change Buttons > [Button]
* Further to the above, The long list of entries F0, F1, … F28 is now removed from the "Common Functions" list in order to improve performance and give a better user experience. Common Functions list still exists, and consists of only named functions now.
* After selecting a remappable button in the Change Buttons menu, the current setting is now printed in the title.
* “Stop” is a new selectable function that can be assigned to any remappable button. The behavior is that it sets the locomotive speed to zero (with normal deceleration).
* The operations on the 1-dot, 2-dot, 3-dot and 4-dot keys are slightly rearranged on the UWT-100 in certain auxiliary screens to be aligned with the UWT-50 and be more intuitive to use. For example a confirmation dialog is now presented as “Yes | No” instead of “No | Yes”.

=== Accessory Mode Control Improvements ===

* Added new "toggle-and-exit" feature to the Accessory Window. ''This feature was recommended through user feedback.''

To use the toggle-and-exit feature, first select an accessory (e.g. typing in a number), then press the Enter button to toggle the accessory and immediately exit the Accessory Window. If you want to toggle and ''remain'' in the Accessory Window (for example to change multiple accessories), select the accessory, and then press the Accessory (turnout icon) button to toggle, OR use the "Normal" and "Reverse" (N/On / R/Off) buttons on the 2-dot and 3-dot keys.

* The Accessory button no longer exits to the drive window if an accessory number is selected. Use the "Esc" key to exit back to the drive window.

[Image]

=== LCC-related Changes (Do not affect connections over WiThrottle protocol) ===

* Added an assisted/automatic DCC Address Programming process. This can be found when connected through LCC under: Menu > CV Programming > DCC Address.
* This menu allows one to view the current address(es) of a locomotive on the Programming Track, set a short or long DCC Address, as well as view, set and clear CV19 Consist Address in an automatic and easy-to-use manner.
* Removed an unneeded step after accessing Menu > Settings > Roster Settings.
* Updated Consist Function Routing menus to support the advanced capabilities of LCC consisting in the CS-105.

=== Bug Fixes ===

* Fixed an issue where trying to add a new WiFi profile beyond the supported maximum (seven) did not prompt the user that their profiles were full. The throttle ''appeared'' to take the 8th WiFi but it would not take/would not work correctly; instead, the throttle now prompts the user before adding a new WiFi, when their profiles are full, to delete a profile before proceeding.
* After locking in (latching) a speed in yard mode on the UWT-100 and UWT-50E, entering and exiting the menu incorrectly changed the display.
* Removed an incorrect and out-of-context message from the built-in website from the Add WiFi box.

=== Miscellaneous Changes ===

* In the text entry window, added visual clarification between the space and underscore characters. This avoids confusion where entering a WiFi name or password with underscores appearing to be not accepted by the throttle.
* In the text entry window, the most common punctuation characters (dot, minus, underscore and space) now appear on almost all pages when entering text.
* Accelerated (“ballistic”) behavior of the encoder-based thumb wheel is now disabled in menus. ''This change was made in response to user feedback.''
* Removed scanning on WiFi channel 13. This channel is not universally accessible due to regulatory constraints. Use channels 1 to 11 for maximum compatibility.
* Added a "refresh" button to the "About This Throttle" menu. This allows you to periodically refresh the window to update info displayed there. This can help users troubleshoot connectivity issues by having a "live update" on signal strength, SSID, IP, etc.
* Added some new icons to the user interface

=== Note: Firmware Synchronicity With UWT-50 ===
From this point forward, the firmware release numbers between the UWT-50 and UWT-100 throttles are always going to be the same. This means that the same release numbers will have the same features, performance and bug fixes. Most changes made can affect both devices, but there is also the possibility of having new updates which primarily address features or bugs on one device only. TCS' release schedule for firmware updates on the UWT-100 and UWT-50 is scheduled to include updates for both devices in synchronicity.
 

== Release 2.0 ==
Release 2.0 is a major software release that adds new features, brings improvements in different areas based on the feedback of our users and our development schedule, and fixes some minor bugs.

=== New Feature Additions ===
The TCS UWT-100 throttle can now be used to control two locomotives at the same time. Both locomotives will be visible on the screen with their address, speed and direction.

'''Dual Throttle Mode Features:'''

* You can enable or disable Dual Throttle Mode by going Menu > Operations > Dual Throttle or typing [≡][2][6] on the keypad.
* While Dual Throttle Mode is active, the Recall ''softkey'' (default ['''·''']) will display as ‘Swap’. Swap may be used to flip the positions of the two throttles. '''NOTE:''' If you have changed the settings for your remappable buttons (softkeys) and have removed or overwritten the Recall option, but would still like to use Swap, you may use the Recall Menu instead and select the first option at the top of the list. Using the keypad would go like this: [≡][1][1]
* The single chevron keys will operate the right throttle’s speed while the double chevron keys, the thumbwheel, the direction key, and the function buttons operate the left throttle. Using the Select Loco key or Menu > Recall will replace the locomotive on the left throttle.
* If needed, a softkey (such as ['''∷''']) can be re-configured to operate as the Dual Direction button for the secondary throttle (In the Settings > Change Buttons menu, pick “Dual Direction” from the Common Functions list).
* Both throttles can be independently set to drive consists. The consist change operations manipulate the consist on the left throttle.
* Both throttles can be independently set to Yard Mode. We recommend using the right throttle to control a locomotive in Yard Mode because the direction can be controlled by using exclusively the chevron keys without the need to swap sides or reconfigure a soft key for the Dual Direction function.

We especially recommend Dual Throttle Mode for operators working a yard and users who would like to monitor and control two locomotives at the same time.

'''Accessory and Route Support'''

* The Accessory Control Screen now has separate keys for setting a turnout to Normal or Reversed. Pressing ENTER will “throw” the switch or toggle the accessory if the underlying system supports it. More details can be found in the new [[UWT-100#The%20.E2.80.9CHelp.E2.80.9D%20Button|Help Text]] for the Accessory Control Screen.
* The soft buttons in the Accessory Control Screen will now highlight to show you that your command was sent to the layout.
* '''Controlling turnouts over an LNWI connection is now supported'''. Press the Accessory key, enter the turnout number, then press the N/On or R/Off keys to set the turnout to Normal (aka. Closed) or Reversed (aka. Thrown). “Toggling” or throwing a turnout using the Enter key is not supported by the LNWI.
* '''Controlling Routes via JMRI'''. The UWT-100 throttle is now able to show and set Routes entered into JMRI. Routes will show when pressing the Accessory key in the list after the turnouts. The list can be restricted to show routes only by typing 0 on the keypad, after which typing more digits will further restrict the shown routes. A route from the list can be activated by scrolling to highlight it, then pressing the [··] (Select) key. Blind typing is also supported, for example if you have a route called “Yard entry 28”, you can trigger that with [ACCY] [0] [2] [8] [ENTER]. NCE macros can be operated using the Accessory Control Screen with the Appropriate JMRI Configuration.

'''Recall Functionality Tweaks'''

* The throttle will now remember if a locomotive was in [[Yard Mode]] through power cycles and Recall button presses. This allows for seamless transitions between a switcher in Yard Mode and a road locomotive in normal mode when using the Recall key -- the throttle will automatically switch to the last used mode for each locomotive. The throttle will remember the Yard Mode setting for all recently used locomotives that are still in the Recall list (up to 20), and apply it even if you select a recently used locomotive by address.
* Certain system connections via JMRI are incorrectly reporting locomotives acquired as zero speed and all functions off, even if the locomotive is running on the layout. This makes the quick switching between locomotives using the Recall button very difficult to use. We recommend using Dual Throttle Mode which does not exhibit this issue and makes switching between two locomotives much faster.
* If you regularly need to switch between ''more than two locomotives'', we added a workaround in Settings > Throttle Settings > Drive Settings > Workaround for Recall 0 Speed. This will make the throttle keep all locomotives which were selected in the current session in a hidden consist, causing JMRI to correctly remember the locomotive state. You can still explicitly release a locomotive with Menu > Operations > Release/Dispatch. '''WARNING:''' this behavior can make most command stations really unhappy, so make sure you only enable it if absolutely necessary. So far we’ve only seen this issue on the NCE PowerCab and PowerHouse Pro when using it via JMRI and the NCE USB or Serial connections. The WFD-30 module from WiFiTrax does successfully report speed and function status to the throttle, and does not require this workaround. Use this feature at your own risk. If transitioning between layouts and command stations, turn this feature on or off as necessary.

=== Bug Fixes ===

* Fixed incorrect scrolling when exiting the Advanced parameters menu in the Network Profile.
* Fixed incorrect line breaks on the Locomotive Steal dialog.
* Fixed bug where it was impossible to use the E-STOP button to turn track power on when using an LNWI connection.
* Fixed bug where selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect showed a locomotive on the screen that could not be controlled. The locomotive is now correctly re-acquired after the reconnect.
* Fixed bug where an unintuitive error message was left on the screen in Offline mode.
* Fixed bug when an empty menu item was shown in the Main Menu under some circumstances.
* Fixed bug where selecting an accessory from the search results was sometimes impossible if it was the only result in the list.
* Fixed bug where the menu labels in the Consist Functions menu displayed 1 for F0.
* Fixed bug where “Connected to {WiFi}” message was stuck on screen under some circumstances.
* Fixed bug where F0/headlight was not correctly displayed after acquiring a locomotive under some circumstances.
* Fixed bug where the direction sign was not correctly shown in Yard Mode under some circumstances.
* Fixed bug where the double chevrons failed to repeatedly change speed when held down in normal speed control mode, whereas single chevrons worked with repeats.

=== Miscellaneous Changes ===

* Added Help text to the Select Loco and Select Accessory screens. Use the [?] button on these screens to access the help.
* Yard Mode On/Off can now be assigned as a function to any of the eight remappable buttons (including the soft keys), allowing you to turn Yard Mode on or off on any locomotive at any time with one button press.
* In Yard Mode the double chevrons are permanently assigned to control the locomotive; any other functions specified for the double chevrons will be active only in Standard mode. Similarly, in Dual Throttle Mode the single chevrons are permanently assigned to the right side throttle.
* Added a menu option to display and control track power in Menu > Settings > Track Power. This menu option can control layout power on any system that supports it. Track power may still be controlled via the E-STOP button if configured as a more convenient option.
* The main screen will display when the throttle is in Offline mode. You may now exit Offline mode by selecting Menu > Network > Current Network > Reconnect, or by selecting a specific profile and the Connect Now command. Previously you had to turn off the throttle to exit Offline mode.
* The throttle now supports pressing two buttons at the same time. For example while holding down the horn button, a chevron key in Yard Mode can be pressed. This also allows you to drive two locomotives in Dual Throttle Mode at the same time, including when both locos are in Yard Mode.
* When the throttle gets into the automatic network discovery after turning on (this happens after a few seconds if reconnecting fails), it will print the name of the WiFi network it connected to on the top to aid in troubleshooting.

Throttle Release Notes

2024-08-21T23:55:04Z

Dan Mycio: placeholder for update process - copied from update-with-depot on tcs website

CV 58

2024-08-21T23:32:06Z

Dan Mycio: smoke unit note

{{Infobox CV
|cv name=F6 Lighting Effect
|cv range=0-255
|cv accepted=0-255
|cv default=0
}}

==NMRA CV 58 - F6 Lighting Effect==
This CV controls which [[{{NAMESPACE}}:Lighting_Effects|Lighting Effect]] is assigned to the F6 light output. On wired decoders F6 is assigned to the Green&Brown wire.

See [[{{NAMESPACE}}:Lighting_Effects|Light Effects]] or [[{{NAMESPACE}}:Support_-_Lighting|Support - Lighting]] for more information on programming this CV.

=== Note: Smoke Units ===
Version 4 WOWSound decoders with smoke unit support can use this CV as a "macro" to set up smoke unit support. By programming a value of 9 into this CV, F5 and F6 will be reconfigured to operate a smoke coil and fan. See your decoder literature pamphlet to see if your decoder supports this feature.
[[Category:Standard CV]]
[[Category:Lights]]

WOWSound Mute On Startup Feature

2024-08-21T22:46:55Z

Dan Mycio:

Mute On Startup is a feature available in WOWSound decoders starting in Version 4. this feature has evolved over time, and the behavior may be slightly different between sound decoder types and Versions. This page provides information on the feature itself, and will direct you to the resources you need for your specific Decoder Type and Version.

==How Mute On Startup Works==
Fundamentally, Mute on Startup works by delaying the WOWSound decoder's audio startup sequence. This delay will begin when the decoder receives power, and will end when the decoder receives a DCC packet addressed to itself. This can be a change in speed, turning the headlight on, blowing the horn/whistle, etc. ANY packet that addresses the decoder will "wake it up."

Version 4.5 WOWDiesel decoders will start up with the prime mover off, but will still respond to inputs for sounds and lights. In order to start the prime mover, the operator must use the Prime Mover Ignition function (default F12) to start the engine sound. This change prevents some of the undesirable behaviors reported by uses as a result of the issues described below in the troubleshooting section.

===Troubleshooting Mute On Startup===
''"I enabled Mute on Startup but my decoder is not muted!"''

Mute on Startup is dependent upon whether or not the decoder receives a packet addressed to it, particularly those which reflect a change in state from what is stored in memory.

With some command stations, One or more "refresh packets" will be sent out to the currently addressed engine(s) on the throttle(s). As a result, you may have a situation where one or more of your locomotives continues to power up when the system starts if it is actively being addressed. You can prevent this from happening by releasing that decoder from your throttle, or selecting a bogus address prior to powering down your system.

If you do NOT have the decoder in question selected and either reboot your system OR remove it from the track (let it power down ''all the way'') and place it back on the track, it should remain quiet. The exception to this is if your system uses "refresh packets" to periodically communicate to the decoder the status.
Note also that if the function for the startup sequence (idling sounds, prime mover ignition, etc.) is ON, the decoder may receive this command when the system powers up, and will start. If the function state is ''different'' from what was in memory when the decoder powered down, this can also force the decoder to power up since it saw a change in the function status. Many command stations flush the function status when they power down, meaning all functions are OFF on power-up. This will often cause the decoder to react since one or more functions may have been ON (the headlight for example).

Mute on Startup also does not go into effect until the decoder powers down after enabling the setting. You must program the CV's to enable MoS, then power the decoder down completely (include Keep Alive® if connected). On the next power up, the decoder should be muted.

==Programming (Enable/Disable) Mute On Startup==
Version 4 decoders use TCS' Indexed CV's to enable or disable the feature. The indexed CV used is "User Options" whose options and defaults vary between each decoder type. For more information on [[WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's|Version 4 Indexed CV's click HERE]].

The User Options indexed CV is 4:19 and the Mute on Startup option is controlled by Bit 2 of CV204.

'''Program a value of 4 into CV 201, then Program a value of 19 into CV 202. Use the values listed below for CV 203 and CV 204.'''
{| class="wikitable"
|'''''!!!WARNING!!!''' IF you have already made previous modifications to the User Options, it is recommended that you first READ the User Options index - Refer to instructions in our [[WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's|Version 4 Indexed CV]] documentation.''

Use the links below to the Guided Programmers if you would like to configure the other users options. These tools will generate the values to program based on your choices.
|}

===WOWDiesel Version 4.0/4.5===
[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/4CVDieselV4 WOWDiesel V4 Guided Programming Tool]

[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/4CVDieselV4Prime WOWDiesel V4.5 Guided Programming Tool]

[[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's|WOWDiesel V4.X Indexed CV's]]

CV 203 Default = 18

CV 204 Default = 251

To Enable MoS, ADD 4 to CV 204. (Default + 4 = 255)

===WOWSteam Version 4.0/4.6===
[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/4CVSteamV4 WOWSteam V4.0 Guided Programing Tool]

[[WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's#Index 4:X - Sound Options|WOWSteam V4.X Indexed CV's]]

CV 203 Default = 56

CV 204 Default = 248

To Enable MoS, ADD 4 to CV 204. (Default + 4 = 252)

LT-50 Release Notes

2024-08-21T01:28:42Z

Dan Mycio: added brief update instructions

== Instructions for Updating ==
As of the authoring of these instructions, it is only possible to update firmware on the LT-50 using [https://www.jmri.org JMRI] and a [https://www.tcsdcc.com/product-page/lcc-buffer-usb LCC USB] device.

Visit our [https://www.tcsdcc.com/firmware Firmware] page to find and download the latest firmware file.

When using JMRI to apply an update, the LT-50 will enter bootloader mode automatically. To update your LT-50, follow these steps:

# Plug in the LT-50 to the LT-50 jack.
# Connect the LCC USB device to the LT panel using any available LCC port.
# Connect the LCC USB device to your PC
# Open JMRI Panel Pro. ''(If you have not created a profile, you must do so. See the instructions in the LT-50 Quick Start Guide on how to do so.)''
# On the Panel Pro main window, select "LCC" (or "OpenLCB") from the menu, then select Firmware Update.
# in the Firmware Update window, browse for the firmware file, select the correct device (Node ID), then click the Load button.

This process is slow, and can take a minute or more to complete. During the update, the LT-50 screen will go blank and flash periodically. Once the update is complete, the LT-50 will reboot.

==Release 2.2.1==

===<nowiki>======== Command Station Changes ========</nowiki>===

====New Feature Additions====

*Adds support for backup and restore of the entire internal database of the LT-50. Use the LCC Memory Tool in JMRI (Version 5.4 or newer required) to “get” and “put” memory space 80. Get will create a backup, Put will restore a backup onto the LT-50. '''Warning:''' performing a write to this memory space will overwrite all of the consists and roster entries in your CS-105 with the backup you are restoring!
*Adds support for controlling DCC extended accessories using the LCC Well-Known event identifiers 01.01.02.00.01.<addr>.<addr>.<aspect>, with the two address bytes being 0..2047 (MSB-first), and aspect being 0..255. Example: to set Signal address 1123 (binary address 0x460) to aspect 99 (binary 0x63), send Event 01.01.02.00.01.04.60.63.
*Adds Program On Main (POM) support for accessory decoders. To use this feature, currently you must perform an LCC memory config protocol write to memory space 0xf8. To compute the address, use formula 0x04C00000 + (turnout binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. This is addressed using output numbers. Example: to program CV 515 (binary representation 0x202) for turnout 650 (binary address 0x287), use address 0x04CA2A02 (which is 80357890 in decimal). For DCC Extended accessories, use 0x04A00000 + (accessory binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. The accessory binary address is denoted by A10A9…A1A0 in the DCC and RCN standards.
*Adds support for the draft LCC Stream protocol. '''This is considered experimental.'''
*Adds Macro editor into the Settings menu.

====Bug Fixes and Misc. Changes:====

*Fixes a bug in macro creation where the configuration display for “Normal” and “Reverse” on a DCC accessory turnout were mistakenly flipped. The bug fix aligns the displayed text for "Normal" and "Reverse" in the Command Station’s macro configuration with the UWT-100’s "Normal" and "Reverse" buttons, as well as the DCC & LCC standardized commands. This is a display-only change in the configuration window. '''Stored macros''' will continue to send the same DCC packets and LCC messages, and thus '''do not need to be updated'''.
*This release optimizes the roster storage in the LT-50, which fixes issues with locomotive selection after the LT-50 has been in use for an extended period of time. Existing locomotive roster entries will be optimized when the LT-50 is first turned on after updating the software.
*Adjustments have been made to the Program Track to improve the reliability when reading CVs, particularly with locomotives with large capacitance on board. These changes now better support the case when a (second) locomotive is placed on the program track when the programming track is already in operation.
*To improve safety and standards compliance, the “high current” mode of the Program Track will only be in effect only until the next power cycle, at which time the setting will automatically revert to the normal 250mA limit.
*Fixes an issue where the throttle display would not visually update the state of a function when running a macro which controlled said function.
*Changes the LCC “Custom Short Event” producer to simply indicate whether the track output is on or off. Now the LT-50 produces events that indicate the reason why the track was turned off (see [[LCC Events Information]]).
*Fixes issue where a momentary function on a roster entry does not operate as momentary when a function name is not configured.
*Fixes to the LCC initialization steps: removes spurious “Track voltage brownout” and “Track Fault” events at startup. Removes unneeded duplicate initialization messages at startup when the LCC cable is already plugged in. Adjusts incorrect Producer Range Identified message. Removes global AME message when starting up in throttle mode.
*Avoids crashes on non-compliant LCC messages that have a zero source alias.
*Minor fixes for LCC standards compliance in the CDI XML: added a trailing zero, removed non-compliant empty groups, and fixed a case where min/max was not matching the map values. Updated capitalization of menu items.
*Fixes issues when there is exactly one other CAN-bus device, which gets sometimes unplugged, sometimes plugged in again (e.g. a layout with just two LT-50’s). Displays “Throttle Mode: No Conn” when the LT-50 is in throttle mode (not plugged into the track socket), powered but there is no LCC network (e.g. not plugged into another LT-50 or a CS-105).
*Fixes ‘free storage’ information in the status window.
*Adds e-Label for current consumption in LCC Throttle mode.
*Updated DCC accessory addresses according to the newest standard RCN-213 and NMRA S-9.1.2 from 2023. This changes the behavior of turnout address 2045-2047, and extends the maximum to turnout address 2048. Turnouts 1-2044 did not change as part of this update.

===<nowiki>======== Throttle Changes ========</nowiki>===

*Fixes bug when the locomotive speed would jump to 126 unexpectedly after the throttle has been sitting idle for some time.
*Adds a configuration option for disabling or changing the sensitivity of the ballistic tracking (acceleration) for the encoder knob. ''Menu > 8 Settings > 1 Throttle Settings > 3 Drive Settings > Encoder Ballistics > Off/Low/Mid/High''. The default of this setting will be Mid, whereas software before 2.x had the same behavior as Low. Changing the setting to Off will disable all ballistics and the knob will control the speed at a constant rate with the rotation.
*Removed ballistic tracking when using the Encoder knob in the menus and text entry window.
*Improved behavior when the encoder knob is turned very fast. ''This is independent of the Ballistic setting'' and will have more consistent behavior even with Ballistics turned Off. Users who are accustomed to the behavior before this release may prefer to reduce the ballistics setting to Low or Off.

===Download Release 2.2.1===
[https://github.com/TCSDCC/Public-Software-Resources/raw/master/LCC%20Firmware%20Files/device/LT-50/LT-50%20R2.2.1%20(06-06-2024).bin Download LT-50 R2.2.1 (06-06-2024)]

==Note on Downgrading to R1.0 from R2.X==
TCS does not recommend downgrading the software from Version 2 to any earlier version. Such a downgrade, as well as any following upgrade will cause loss or inconsistency of Consist and Roster information. A computer backup of Roster information is strongly advised.

For Instructions on how to back up your CS-105 database and configurations/settings [[LT-50 Database Backup|CLICK HERE]].

==Release 1.0==
Release 1.0 is the first production release for the LT-50 which was shipped in the first production run.

CS-105 Release Notes

2024-08-21T01:18:43Z

Dan Mycio: added brief updating instructions

== Instructions for Updating ==
The CS-105 can be updated using several methods. TCS recommend using the [https://www.tcsdcc.com/update-with-depot TCS Depot] or the [https://www.tcsdcc.com/update-with-web Integrated Web Interface] to apply the update, but it is also possible to use [https://www.tcsdcc.com/update-with-jmri JMRI] to update the CS-105.

When using TCS Depot, it is not necessary to download copies of the firmware files for this device. To use the other methods, first visit our [https://www.tcsdcc.com/firmware Firmware] page to find and download the correct firmware file. TCS Depot will automatically download the firmware files as long as you are connected to the internet. If you need to change WiFi connections from your home internet to the CS-105, start the depot program ''before'' changing WiFi connections so that the program can download the firmware files correctly.

It is necessary to put the CS-105 into bootloader mode to apply a firmware update. To put the CS-105 into bootloader mode, follow these steps:

# Unplug the power from the CS-105.
# While the CS-105 is powered down, press and hold the tactile button on the side.
# While holding the tactile button, reconnect the power supply.
# Continue to hold the button until you see the LEDs on the LCC jack start blinking in an alternating pattern (like a grade crossing), then release the button.
# Connect your PC to the same WiFi as the CS-105 - this may be the CS-105's own WiFi when using Access Point mode, or your home or layout WiFi if using Client Mode.

From here, follow the steps as described in the links above for updating via whichever method you have chosen. For the Web Interface and JMRI methods, make sure you have the firmware file downloaded to your PC first.

==Release 2.2.1==

===New Feature Additions===

*Adds support for XpressNet throttles in the AUX Cabs port. Enable it via the DCC System Settings > AUX Cabs > Mode. Cab Bus and XpressNet ''cannot'' be used simultaneously. More details on the supported and unsupported features can be found here: [[XpressNet|https://docs.tcsdcc.com/wiki/XpressNet]]
*When two or more different throttles on the AUX Cab port in Cab Bus mode have the same locomotive selected, the screen will now update from each others’ changes. The screen will also update from macros executed.
*Adds support for backup and restore of the entire internal database of the CS-105. Use the LCC Memory Tool in JMRI (Version 5.4 or newer required) to “get” and “put” memory space 80. Get will create a backup, Put will restore a backup onto the CS-105. '''Warning:''' performing a write to this memory space will overwrite all of the consists and roster entries in your CS-105 with the backup you are restoring! For detailed instructions, [[CS-105 Database Backup|CLICK HERE]].
*Adds support for controlling DCC extended accessories using the LCC Well-Known event identifiers 01.01.02.00.01.<addr>.<addr>.<aspect>, with the two address bytes being 0..2047 (MSB-first), and aspect being 0..255. Example: to set Signal address 1123 (binary address 0x460) to aspect 99 (binary 0x63), send Event 01.01.02.00.01.04.60.63.
*Adds Program On Main (POM) support for accessory decoders. To use this feature, currently you must perform an LCC memory config protocol write to memory space 0xf8. To compute the address, use formula 0x04C00000 + (turnout binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. This is addressed using output numbers. Example: to program CV 515 (binary representation 0x202) for turnout 650 (binary address 0x287), use address 0x04CA2A02 (which is 80357890 in decimal). For DCC Extended accessories, use 0x04A00000 + (accessory binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. The accessory binary address is denoted by A10A9…A1A0 in the DCC and RCN standards.
*Adds support for the draft LCC Stream protocol. '''This is considered experimental.'''

===Bug Fixes and Misc. Changes===

*Fixes a bug in macro creation where the configuration display for “Normal” and “Reverse” on a DCC accessory turnout were mistakenly flipped. The bug fix aligns the displayed text for "Normal" and "Reverse" in the Command Station’s macro configuration with the UWT-100’s "Normal" and "Reverse" buttons, as well as the DCC & LCC standardized commands. This is a display-only change in the configuration window. '''Stored macros''' will continue to send the same DCC packets and LCC messages, and thus '''do not need to be updated'''.
*This release optimizes the roster storage in the CS-105, which fixes issues with locomotive selection after the CS-105 has been in use for an extended period of time. Existing locomotive roster entries will be optimized when the CS-105 is first turned on after updating the software.
*Adjustments have been made to the Program Track to improve the reliability when reading CVs, particularly with locomotives with large capacitance on board. These changes now better support the case when a (second) locomotive is placed on the program track when the programming track is already in operation.
*To improve safety and standards compliance, the “high current” mode of the Program Track will only be in effect only until the next power cycle of the command station, at which time the setting will automatically revert to the normal 250mA limit.
*Fixes issue with UWT throttles in LCC mode, where a function configured to be "Momentary" on a roster entry would not operate as momentary if the function's name was not also configured.
*Shows a "[[wikipedia:Splash_screen|splash screen]]" on AUX Cabs in Cab Bus Mode. This fixes the issue where a NCE PowerCab would sometimes start up in command station mode when connected to the CS-105.
*Improvements have been made to the response in Cab Bus mode when many AUX Cabs are in use.
*The CS-105 will now ensure that auxiliary boosters such as the B-106 are shut down if the CS-105 encounters a software failure.

====LCC-Related Changes and Bug Fixes====

*Changes the LCC “Custom Short Event” producer to simply indicate whether the track output is ON or OFF. Now the CS-105 produces events that indicate the reason why the track was turned off (see [[LCC Events Information]] for details).
*Minor fixes for LCC standards compliance in the CDI XML: added a trailing zero, removed non-compliant empty groups, and fixed a case where min/max was not matching the map values. Updated capitalization of menu items.
*Updates to the built-in LCC WiFi Hub: Adds newlines after the individual frames. Optimizes latency for memory configuration transfers.
*Avoids crashes on non-compliant LCC messages that have a zero source alias.
*Fixes crash when invalid Time values were entered in the fast clock configuration.
*Fixes to the LCC initialization steps: removes spurious “Track voltage brownout” and “Track Fault” events at startup. Removes unneeded duplicate initialization messages at startup when the LCC cable is already plugged in. Adjusts incorrect Producer Range Identified message.

===Download Release 2.2.1===
[https://github.com/TCSDCC/Public-Software-Resources/raw/master/LCC%20Firmware%20Files/device/CS-105/CS-105%20R2.2.1%20(06-06-2024).bin Download CS-105 R2.2.1 (06-06-2024)]

==Note on Downgrading to R1.X from R2.X==
'''TCS does not recommend downgrading the software from Version 2+ to any earlier version. Such a downgrade, as well as any following upgrade, will cause loss or inconsistency of Consist and Roster information. A computer backup of Roster information is strongly advised.'''

For Instructions on how to back up your CS-105 database and configurations/settings [[CS-105 Database Backup|CLICK HERE]].

==Release 1.0.1==
Release 1.0.1 fixes an issue with compatibility and communication with a LCC Hub when run using JMRI.

Release 1.0 is the first production release for the CS-105, including pre-orders, and should be updated to 1.0.1 to fix this issue if you encounter it.

===Download Release 1.0.1===
[https://github.com/TCSDCC/Public-Software-Resources/raw/master/LCC%20Firmware%20Files/device/CS-105/CS-105%20R1.0.1%20(12-29-2022).bin Download CS-105 R1.0.1 (12-29-2022)]

WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's

2024-08-14T21:40:17Z

Dan Mycio: Added Index 6

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!
{{:WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's}}

==List of WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's==

===Index 1:X - Sound Button Remapping===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|1:1
|Function Button 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:2
|Function Button 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:3
|Function Button 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:4
|Function Button 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|1:28
|Function Button 28 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:29
|Random Sound 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:30
|Random Sound 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:31
|Random Sound 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:32
|Random Sound 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:33
|AUX Input Sound Mapping
|}

===Index 4:X - Sound Options===
This is the primary index which holds most of the configuration options for the WOWSound decoder, especially those pertaining to how the decoder operates.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.x "Sound Options"
!Indexed CV
!Name/Feature
!Description
|-
|4:1
|Quill Selection
|(0)* Short Quill,

(1)* Medium Quill

(2)* Long Quill

(3 - 6) Not used

(7) Randomize Quill Play Order

If a value of zero is entered, the short quill is defaulted to. In order to disable the whistle quill function, the button mapping for Grade X Quill must be overwritten or disabled.

'''Default = 7 (X:7) | Short, Medium, and Long quill enabled.'''
|-
|4:2
|Random Sound Channel #1 Frequency
|
|-
|4:3
|Random Sound Channel #2 Frequency
|
|-
|4:4
|Random Sound Channel #3 Frequency
|
|-
|4:5
|Random Sound Channel #4 Frequency
|
|-
|4:6
|Random Sounds Overall Frequency
|
|-
|4:7
|Random Sounds Cut-out Speed Step
|
|-
|4:8
|Rotate Horn Pointer / Horn Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Horn Type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:9
|Notching Mechanism
|
|-
|4:10
|Master Volume
|
|-
|4:11
|Prime Mover Type
|Uses CV 204 to select the Prime Mover number from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:12
|Automatic Sounds Selection
|(0) Crew Alert (ON if set)
(1) NU

(2) NU

(3) NU

(4) Enable Automatic Forward Whistle Quill

(5) Enable Automatic Reverse Whistle Quill

(6) Enable Automatic Stop Whistle Quill

(7) Enable Direction Change Sound (not used)

(8)* Enable Random Sound 1

(9)* Enable Random Sound 2

(10) Enable Random Sound 3

(11) Enable Random Sound 4

(12-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on except Automatic Whistles and Bell

'''Default (XXXX0011 00000000) = 768 (3:0)'''
|-
|4:13
|Brake Grinding Noise Start Speed
|Speed step at which "squeals" stop and "grinding" starts while braking. Brake grinding noises are sounds more accurate to low speeds and heavy brake application.
Range of Values is 0-126. A Value of 0 disables brake grinding and only uses brake squeal.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:14
|Dual-Enabled Functions
|For functions F0F-F12, set bit to have a function button available in both Light Mode and Sound Mode.
<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is F0F, F0R, and F8 (mute) dual-enabled.

'''Default (XXX00010 00000011) = 515 (1:3)'''
|-
|4:15
|Dynamic Brake Notch
|The notch the prime mover will go to under dynamic braking. See also: Notch Up with Dynamic Brakes feature.
|-
|4:16
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:17
|BEMF Low Calibration
|Used in the calculation to determine which notch the prime mover should be in. This calibration value is the BEMF level when running across a level surface without a load.
|-
|4:18
|BEMF High Calibration
|Used in the calculation to determine which notch the prime mover should be in. This calibration value is the BEMF level when running up a grade or otherwise pulling a heavy load.
|-
|4:19
|User Options
|(0)* Enable Manual Notching Audio Feedback
(1)* Auto Notch Down Prime Mover When Brakes Are Applied

(2) Enable Mute on startup

(3)* Enable Switching/Mainline Mode Audio Feedback

(4)* Enable Rotate Horn/Bell Audio feedback

(5)* Enable Light Mode/Sound Mode Audio feedback

(6)* Enable Audio Auto Shutoff Timer

(7)* "Momentary F2" - Improves performance while in Audio Assist with some throttles.

(8) Enable Dual Prime Movers

(9) Enable Prime Mover Notching Up with Dynamic Brakes

(10) Reverse Directional Whistles

(11) Use Jump-Notching in Switching Momentum Mode

(12)* Use Jump-Notching in Mainline Momentum Mode

(13-15) Not Used

'''Default (XXX10010 11111011) = 4859 (18:251)'''
|-
|4:20
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:21
|Automatic Audio Shut-off Timer
|This feature will automatically mute the decoder after the set period of time. To completely disable this feature, see Index 4:19 "User Options." This feature will extend the life of your decoder by muting the sound when stationary without any user input received. A value of 256 equals approximately three minutes.
Valid range of values is 1-65535

'''Default = 2600 (4:20) - Approximately 30 Minutes'''
|-
|4:22
|Dual Prime Mover Delay
|Sets the amount of time the second prime mover sound (if enabled) will wait before changing notches.
|-
|4:23
|Rotate Bell / Bell Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Bell type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:24
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:25
|Speed-to-notch Ratio
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:26
|Momentum-to-notch Ratio
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:27
|BEMF Load Sensitivity
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:28
|Prime Mover Hysteresis
|Defines how much +/- the load/notch calculation has to be above or below the notch set points for the notch to change. Valid range of values is 0 to 2040. Every increment of 255 is a different notch up to 2040.
|-
|4:29
|Crew Alert Timer
|Sets a timer for how long the engineer must be idle for the Crew Alert alarm to sound.
'''Default = 43 (0:43) | (Approximately 2 minutes)'''
|-
|4:30
|Crew Alert Light Function
|Selects a lighting output (from 0 to 12) to turn on when the crew alert sound begins playing. For the best experience, it is recommended to also change the Lighting Effect for this output to a Flashing Light or Strobe.
A value greater than 12 disables this feature.

'''Default = 13 (Disabled)'''
|-
|4:31
|Traditional Mode Notch 1 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Idle to Notch 1 at this speed.
'''Default = 1'''
|-
|4:32
|Traditional Mode Notch 2 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 1 to Notch 2 at this speed.
'''Default = 6'''
|-
|4:33
|Traditional Mode Notch 3 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 2 to Notch 3 at this speed.
'''Default = 13'''
|-
|4:34
|Traditional Mode Notch 4 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 3 to Notch 4 at this speed.
'''Default = 20'''
|-
|4:35
|Traditional Mode Notch 5 Transition Speed
||When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 4 to Notch 5 at this speed.
'''Default = 27'''
|-
|4:36
|Traditional Mode Notch 6 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 5 to Notch 6 at this speed.
'''Default = 34'''
|-
|4:37
|Traditional Mode Notch 7 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 6 to Notch 7 at this speed.
'''Default = 41'''
|-
|4:38
|Traditional Mode Notch 8 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 7 to Notch 8 at this speed.
'''Default = 48'''
|-
|4:39
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:40
|AUX Input Loop Timer
|Controls how long a sound file triggered by the AUX Input is allowed to loop (if a looping sound). A value of 42 = approximately 3 seconds.
'''Default = 42'''
|-
|4:41
|Smoke Unit On Time
|'''***IF SUPPORTED***''' controls the PWM ratio to the smoke unit fan output.
|-
|4:42
|Smoke Unit Off Time
|'''***IF SUPPORTED'''*** controls the PWM ratio to the smoke unit fan output.
|-
|4:43-4:46
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:47
|Thermal Overload Limit
|'''***WOW501 ONLY***'''
This CV sets the temperature at which the decoder will trip the thermal overload. It is not recommended to adjust this CV unless otherwise guided to do so by TCS technical support. If the thermal overload is tripping, your decoder is overheating!
|-
|4:48
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:49
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:50
|Switching Mode Acceleration
|'''Default = 5'''
|-
|4:51
|Switching Mode Deceleration
|'''Default = 5'''
|-
|4:52
|Mainline Mode Acceleration
|'''Default = 20'''
|-
|4:53
|Mainline Mode Deceleration
|'''Default = 60'''
|}

===Index 5.X - User Preset and Resets===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use the two numbers in the "Value" column to program CV 203 and CV 204. Once CV 204 is written to, the reset will start or preset will be loaded. A few seconds may be required for the operation to complete.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|-
|''NOTE: It is only possible to save the current decoder settings to a User Preset by using Audio Assist.''
''Loading an un-saved user preset will be the same as performing a factory reset.''
|}

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to perform these operations, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 5 "User Presets and Resets"
!Indexed CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|5:0
|0:2
|Complete Decoder Reset (Factory Reset)
|-
|5:0
|0:3
|Reset Sound Button Mappings Only
|-
|5:0
|0:4
|Reset Volumes of all Individual Sounds
|-
|5:0
|0:5
|''Not Used''
|-
|5:0
|0:6
|Reset all Sound CVs (Index 4.x)
|-
|5:0
|0:7
|Reset Volumes of all Sound Types
|-
|5:0
|0:8
|Load User Preset #1
|-
|5:0
|0:9
|Load User Preset #2
|-
|5:0
|0:10
|Load User Preset #3
|}

===Index 6.X - Sound Type Volumes===
Index 6 is used for sound type volume control. To change the volume of a sound type, start by setting CV 201 to 6 to select the Sound Type Volumes Index. CV 202 is used to set the sound type Volume Level as a percentage from 0 to 100%. Values above 100 are invalid and must not be used. Use CV 204 to select the sound type. Refer to the table below.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|-
|''NOTE: For this index, CV 203 is not used and is irrelevant. A value of 0 in 203 should be used.''
|}

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to change sound type volumes, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 6 "Sound Type Volume Control"
!CV201
!CV202
!CV204
!Sound Type
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|1
|Air Compressor
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|2
|Air Spitter
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|3
|Bell
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|4
|Brake Release
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|5
|Brake Squeal
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|6
|Coupler Clank
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|7
|Crew Alert
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|9
|Dynamic Brakes
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|10
|Exhaust Fan
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|11
|Horn Forward Quill
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|12
|Playable (Long) Horn
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|13
|Horn Grade X Quill
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|14
|Horn Short Blast
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|15
|Manual Notch Down
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|16
|Manual Notch Up
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|19
|Prime Mover
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|20
|Prime Mover Ignition
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|21
|Horn Reverse Quill
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|23
|Sanding Valve
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|24
|Horn Stop Quill
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|25
|Windshield Wipers
|}

[[Category:Indexed CV]]
[[Category:Technical Support]]

WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's

2024-08-14T21:39:58Z

Dan Mycio: Added Index 6

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!
{{:WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's}}

==List of WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's==

===Index 1:X - Sound Button Remapping===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|1:1
|Function Button 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:2
|Function Button 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:3
|Function Button 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:4
|Function Button 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|1:28
|Function Button 28 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:29
|Random Sound 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:30
|Random Sound 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:31
|Random Sound 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:32
|Random Sound 4 Sound Mapping
|}

===Index 3:X - Individual Chuff Timings===
Set CV 201 to 3, and CV 202 to a value between 1 and 126 to select a speed step. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to set the chuff timing. The higher the value, the more quickly you will hear a chuff during the rotation of the motor.

'''Note: This is an advanced feature which is made easier with a graphical user interface such as JMRI.''' These settings can be done in real-time using mainline programming, and often require a lot of trial-and-error to get right. You may consider the use of a CAM to trigger your chuffs for prefectly-timed chuff sounds.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 3.X "Individual Chuff Timing"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|3:1
|Speed Step 1 Chuff Timing
|-
|3:2
|Speed Step 2 Chuff Timing
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|3:126
|Speed Step 126 Chuff Timing
|}

===Index 4:X - Sound Options===
This is the primary index which holds most of the configuration options for the WOWSound decoder, especially those pertaining to how the decoder operates.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.x "Sound Options"
!Indexed CV
!Name/Feature
!Description
|-
|4:1
|Cylinder Cox Shut-off Speed Step
|Above this speed step (of 128), the Cylinder Cocks sound will stop playing, either when turned on automatically or manually. Range of values is 0-126. A value of 0 will never allow the cylinder cocks to play; a value of 126 will never cut out the cylinder cocks automatically (must be turned off with button).

'''Default = 16'''
|-
|4:2
|Random Sound Channel #1 Frequency
|Random Sound Channel 1 is reserved for the Air Pump/Air Compressor. Higher values = higher frequency of playing.
'''Default = 215'''
|-
|4:3
|Random Sound Channel #2 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 96'''
|-
|4:4
|Random Sound Channel #3 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 64'''
|-
|4:5
|Random Sound Channel #4 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 1'''
|-
|4:6
|Random Sounds Overall Frequency
|Higher values = lower frequency of playing.

'''Default = 768 (3:0)'''
|-
|4:7
|Random Sounds Cut-out Speed Step
|When the locomotive is moving above this speed step (of 128), the Random Sounds will not play.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:8
|Rotate Whistle Pointer / Whistle Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Whistle Type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:9
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:10
|Master Volume
|
|-
|4:11
|Chuff Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Chuff Set number from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:12
|Automatic Sounds Selection
|(0)* Snifter Valves
(1)* Rod Clank

(2)* Idling Sound

(3) Enable Automatic Bell '''| VERSION 4.6 ONLY not used in V4.0 and older'''

(4) Enable Automatic Forward Whistle Quill

(5) Enable Automatic Reverse Whistle Quill

(6) Enable Automatic Stop Whistle Quill

(7)* Enable Direction Change Sound (power reverser)

(8)* Enable Random Sound 1

(9)* Enable Random Sound 2

(10)* Enable Random Sound 3

(11)* Enable Random Sound 4

(12-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on except Automatic Whistles and Bell

'''Default (XXXX1111 10000111) = 3975 (15:135)'''
|-
|4:13
|Brake Grinding Noise Start Speed
|Speed step at which "squeals" stop and "grinding" starts while braking. Brake grinding noises are sounds more accurate to low speeds and heavy brake application.
Range of Values is 0-126. A Value of 0 disables brake grinding and only uses brake squeal.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:14
|Dual-Enabled Functions
|For functions F0F-F12, set bit to have a function button available in both Light Mode and Sound Mode.
<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is F0F, F0R, and F8 (mute) dual-enabled.

'''Default (XXX00010 00000011) = 515 (2:3)'''
|-
|4:15
|''WOWSteam V4.6 ONLY''
|''See Below''
|-
|4:16
|Chuff Rate Overall Adjustment
|Percentage of adjustment to increase or decrease the chuff rate at all speed steps. Valid range of values is 1-200
'''Default = 100 (X:100)'''
|-
|4:17
|Rod Clank Set Selection
|Determines which set of Rod clank sounds are played. The number of Rod Clank sound sets is determined by the Sound List.
|-
|4:18
|Cylinder Cox Auto Turn-on Time
|Sets how long the locomotive must be stationary before the cylinder cox will come on automatically the next time the locomotive starts moving.
Valid Range of values 1 - 65535

'''Default = 256 (1:0)'''
|-
|4:19
|User Options
|(0) Enable CAM
(1) (Not Used)

(2) Enable Mute on startup

(3)* Allow Articulated Chuff to Slip

(4)* Enable Rotate whistle/bell Audio feedback

(5)* Enable Light Mode/Sound Mode Audio feedback

(6)* Enable Audio auto shutoff timer

(7)* "Momentary F2" - Improves performance while in Audio Assist with some throttles.

(8) Enable Articulated Chuff

(9) (Not Used)

(10) Reverse Directional Whistles

(11)* Enable Power Braking

(12)* Enable Momentum Mode Audio Feedback

(13)* Enable Johnson Bar Audio Feedback

(14) ''Enable "Function Pagination" |'' WOWSteam Version 4.6 ONLY

(15) [reserved]

'''*Default (X0111000 11111000) = 14584 (56:248)'''
|-
|4:20
|Articulated Chuff Slip Rate
|Determines how frequently articulated chuffs slip in and out of sync. The higher the number the more frequently it happens.
Valid values are 0-255

'''Default = 240 (X:240)'''
|-
|4:21
|Automatic Audio Shut-off Timer
|This feature will automatically mute the decoder after the set period of time. To completely disable this feature, see Index 4:19 "User Options." This feature will extend the life of your decoder by muting the sound when stationary without any user input received. A value of 256 equals approximately three minutes.
Valid range of values is 1-65535

'''Default = 1200 (4:176) - Approximately 15 Minutes'''
|-
|4:22
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:23
|Minimum Chuff Volume
|This setting will set the minimum volume the chuff volume can fall to, regardless of the BEMF/load. Changing this setting will prevent the sound from behaving prototypical, but can force the decoder to always "chuff chuff chuff" as long as it is moving.
Valid range of values is 0 - 32767

'''Default = 0 (chuff/throttle can shut off completely)'''
|-
|4:24
|Rotate Bell / Bell Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Bell type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:25
|Grade Crossing Quill Options
|TCS records multiple grade crossing quills, and puts up to three of them in the decoder. This CV's selection controls which quills will play when the Grade X Quill Button is pressed.
(0)* Short Quill,

(1)* Medium Quill

(2)* Long Quill

(3 - 6) Not used

(7) Randomize Quill Play Order

If a value of zero is entered, the short quill is defaulted to. In order to disable the whistle quill function, the button mapping for Grade X Quill must be overwritten or disabled.

'''Default = 7 (X:7)'''
|-
|4:26
|Cylinder Cox Set
|Determines which set of cox sounds are active
''NOTE: Using CV programming to assign a cylinder cox sound to a button will put the cylinder cocks sound type on that button, but might not set up the correct set. I.E. if you remap the "cylinder cox set 2" sound onto a button, but don't change this CV, that button will play a "cylinder cox set 1" instead. Changing this CV will affect any button or buttons already mapped with the Cylinder Cox sound type.''

Valid values are 1-2

'''Default = 1 (X:1)'''
|-
|4:27
|Idling Sounds Selection
|Determines which "Idling Sounds" sound plays while the locomotive is idle.
Valid values are determined by the Sound List.
|-
|4:28
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:29
|Chuff Volume Change Time
|Controls how fast the chuff volume can change from one level to another in response to a change in the load. This setting effectively adds "hysteresis" to the chuff volume if you feel the locomotive's chuff sound response is too sensitive and changes too quickly. A change of "1" adds or subtracts approximately 0.5 milliseconds to the responsiveness. This setting only affects the responsiveness when coasting at a set speed, and does not affect the performance and responsiveness when changing speed. See 4:32 "Chuff Volume Velocity Factor" for more info.
'''Default = 4500 (17:148) | (Approximately 2.25 seconds transition time from min to max)'''
|-
|4:30
|BEMF Low Calibration (Forward)
|
|-
|4:31
|BEMF High Calibration (Forward)
|
|-
|4:32
|Chuff Volume Velocity Factor
|This CV controls the effects accelerating and decelerating have upon the chuff volume. The higher the value the more drastic the change in volume from accelerating and decelerating.

'''Default = 612 (2:100) | (Approximately 0.3 seconds to transition from min to max)'''
|-
|4:33
|BEMF Low Calibration (Reverse)
|
|-
|4:34
|BEMF High Calibration (Reverse)
|
|-
|4:35
|Rod Clank Volume from BEMF
|At the calculated minimum BEMF volume (BEMF Low Calibration) rod clank will be at full volume (rod clank type volume) and will fade away as the load increases. This CV is a percentage above the BEMF Low Calibration value that the rod clank will cut out.
Valid values are 0-100

'''Default = 30 (X:30)'''
|-
|
|
|
|-
|4:42
|Throttle Mode Selection
|0 = Traditional Throttle Mode
1 = Prototype Throttle Mode
This setting controls how the chuff sound behaves:
In "traditional" mode, the chuff volume is constant and determined by the "Chuff" Sound Type Volume. Snifters will play at their maximum programmable volume when the throttle is shut off, rod clank will not play at all.

In "Prototype" throttle mode, the chuff volume is determined by the velocity, speed, BEMF/load, and calibration settings. The snifter valve and rod clank volume are also controlled dynamically by prototype throttle mode. Snifters will play when the throttle is deemed to be "off" and rod clank will start playing when the throttle is deemed to be appropriate (See Index 4:35)

'''Default = 1 (Prototype Throttle Mode)'''
|-
|4:43-4:46
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:47
|Thermal Overload Limit
|'''***WOW501 ONLY***'''
This CV sets the temperature at which the decoder will trip the thermal overload. It is not recommended to adjust this CV unless otherwise guided to do so by TCS technical support. If the thermal overload is tripping, your decoder is overheating!
|-
|4:48
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Regulated Supply Mode
|Default = 431
|-
|4:49
|''WOWSteam V4.6 ONLY''
|''See Below''
|-
|4:50
|Switching Mode Acceleration
|Default = 5
|-
|4:51
|Switching Mode Deceleration
|Default = 5
|-
|4:52
|Mainline Mode Acceleration
|Default = 20
|-
|4:53
|Mainline Mode Deceleration
|Default = 60
|} 
===Index 5.X - User Preset and Resets===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use the two numbers in the "Value" column to program CV 203 and CV 204. Once CV 204 is written to, the reset will start or preset will be loaded. A few seconds may be required for the operation to complete.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|-
|''NOTE: It is only possible to save the current decoder settings to a User Preset by using Audio Assist.''
''Loading an un-saved user preset will be the same as performing a factory reset.''
|}'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to perform these operations, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 5 "User Presets and Resets"
!Indexed CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|5:0
|0:2
|Complete Decoder Reset (Factory Reset)
|-
|5:0
|0:3
|Reset Sound Button Mappings Only
|-
|5:0
|0:4
|Reset Volumes of all Individual Sounds
|-
|5:0
|0:5
|Reset All Chuff Timing Values
|-
|5:0
|0:6
|Reset all Sound CVs (Index 4.x)
|-
|5:0
|0:7
|Reset Volumes of all Sound Types
|-
|5:0
|0:8
|Load User Preset #1
|-
|5:0
|0:9
|Load User Preset #2
|-
|5:0
|0:10
|Load User Preset #3
|} 
===Index 6.X - Sound Type Volumes===
Index 6 is used for sound type volume control. To change the volume of a sound type, start by setting CV 201 to 6 to select the Sound Type Volumes Index. CV 202 is used to set the sound type Volume Level as a percentage from 0 to 100%. Values above 100 are invalid and must not be used. Use CV 204 to select the sound type. Refer to the table below.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|-
|''NOTE: For this index, CV 203 is not used and is irrelevant. A value of 0 in 203 should be used.''
|}
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|-
|''NOTE: In Version 4.6, new sound types were added (starting at 26), which changes the CV204 value for Sound Type Selection. Refer to the table below.''
|}'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to change sound type volumes, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 6 "Sound Type Volume Control"
!CV201
!CV202
!CV204
!Sound Type
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|1
|Air Pump
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|2
|Ash Dump
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|3
|Bell
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|4
|Blow Down
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|5
|Blower
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|6
|Brake Release
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|7
|Brake Squeal
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|8
|Chuff
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|9
|Coupler Clank
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|10
|Cylinder Cocks
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|11
|Power Reverser
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|12
|Whistle Forward Quill
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|13
|Generator
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|14
|Idling Sounds
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|15
|Injectors
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|16
|Johnson Bar Down
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|19
|Johnson Bar Up
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|20
|Whistle Reverse Quill
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|21
|Rod Clank
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|23
|Safeties
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|24
|Coal Shoveling
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|25
|Snifter Valve
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|26
|Whistle Stop Quill
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|27
|Water Filling
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|28
|Playable (Long) Whistle
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|29
|Whistle Grade X Quill
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|30
|Whistle Short Blast
|-
| colspan="4" |'''Version 4.6 Sound Types (26 and Beyond)'''
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|26
|Arriving Station Announcements '''(V4.6 Only)'''
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|27
|Departing Station Announcements '''(V4.6 Only)'''
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|28
|Whistle Stop Quill
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|29
|Water Filling
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|30
|Playable (Long) Whistle
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|31
|Whistle Grade X Quill
|-
|6
|[Volume]
|32
|Whistle Short Blast
|}
==New Indexed CV's Unique to WOWSteam Version 4.6==
This section includes only the new Sound Options for WOWSteam V4.6 decoders. These Indexed CV's are included within index 4.X but are not present in Version 4.0 or older WOWSteam decoders.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.X "Sound Options" (NEW!)
!Indexed CV
!Description
!
|-
| colspan="3" |NOTE: ALL OF THE INDEXED CV NUMBERS LISTED ABOVE IN THE SAME PRIMARY INDEX (4:X) STILL APPLY. THE CV'S LISTED IN THIS TABLE ARE ADDITIONS OR REVISIONS TO THE PREVIOUS TABLE
|-
|4:15
|DC Mode Sounds Selection
|(0)* DC mode automatic bell enabled
(1)* DC mode Forward Sound

(2)* DC mode Reverse Sound

(3)* DC mode stop sound

(4)* DC mode quill enabled

(5-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on.

'''Default (XXXXXXXX XXX11111) = 31 (X:31)'''
|-
|4:41
|DC Mode Chuff Volume
|Sets the chuff volume level while in DC mode. If you are using a high power speaker and an power pack with poor regulation, loud chuffs can cause a significant drop in voltage. Lowering the maximum chuff volume can alleviate this issue.
'''Default = 5888'''
|-
|4:43
|DC Mode Start Voltage - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2400'''
|-
|4:44
|DC Mode Bell Cutout Voltage - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2525'''
|-
|4:45
|Automatic Bell Cutout Speed
|DCC speed step above which the bell will stop playing (when enabled to play automatically).
'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:46
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 600'''
|-
|4:48
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 431'''
|-
|4:49
|Track Voltage BEMF Offset Factor
|'''Default = 0'''
|-
|4:54
|DC Mode Max ADC Value - Regulated Supply Mode
|Sets the expected maximum ADC value the decoder can expect to see when running in Analog mode. This gives the decoder a range that can be used to determine which speed to go depending on the track voltage. By default=, this CV is set to the maximum resolution size, which means the decoder will max out at about 14.5V on the rails. This CV will not help for DC power packs with higher max outputs than 15V, but for max outputs below 15V, the speed step range can be tuned; additionally, going above the ADC range, or increasing this CV, can limit the speed step at full throttle. This often does sound nicer, and gives more of a range in the "nice chuff rate zone" where speed is limited but enjoy-ability is increased.
Range of values is 0-4250. Recommended absolute minimum value is 2800.

''This CV MUST NOT be less than or equal to the Motor Start Voltage''

'''Default = 4250 (16:154)'''
|-
|4:66
|DC Mode Start Voltage - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2816'''
|-
|4:67
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 1250'''
|-
|4:68
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 12'''
|-
|4:69
|DC Mode Bell Cutout Voltage - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2500'''
|-
|4:70
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 1000'''
|-
|4:72
|DC Mode Speed Step Hysteresis - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 8'''
|}

[[Category:Indexed CV]]
[[Category:Technical Support]]

WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's

2024-08-14T21:15:03Z

Dan Mycio: fixed index 5 table name

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!
{{:WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's}}

==List of WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's==

===Index 1:X - Sound Button Remapping===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|1:1
|Function Button 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:2
|Function Button 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:3
|Function Button 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:4
|Function Button 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|1:28
|Function Button 28 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:29
|Random Sound 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:30
|Random Sound 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:31
|Random Sound 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:32
|Random Sound 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:33
|AUX Input Sound Mapping
|}

===Index 4:X - Sound Options===
This is the primary index which holds most of the configuration options for the WOWSound decoder, especially those pertaining to how the decoder operates.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.x "Sound Options"
!Indexed CV
!Name/Feature
!Description
|-
|4:1
|Quill Selection
|(0)* Short Quill,

(1)* Medium Quill

(2)* Long Quill

(3 - 6) Not used

(7) Randomize Quill Play Order

If a value of zero is entered, the short quill is defaulted to. In order to disable the whistle quill function, the button mapping for Grade X Quill must be overwritten or disabled.

'''Default = 7 (X:7) | Short, Medium, and Long quill enabled.'''
|-
|4:2
|Random Sound Channel #1 Frequency
|
|-
|4:3
|Random Sound Channel #2 Frequency
|
|-
|4:4
|Random Sound Channel #3 Frequency
|
|-
|4:5
|Random Sound Channel #4 Frequency
|
|-
|4:6
|Random Sounds Overall Frequency
|
|-
|4:7
|Random Sounds Cut-out Speed Step
|
|-
|4:8
|Rotate Horn Pointer / Horn Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Horn Type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:9
|Notching Mechanism
|
|-
|4:10
|Master Volume
|
|-
|4:11
|Prime Mover Type
|Uses CV 204 to select the Prime Mover number from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:12
|Automatic Sounds Selection
|(0) Crew Alert (ON if set)
(1) NU

(2) NU

(3) NU

(4) Enable Automatic Forward Whistle Quill

(5) Enable Automatic Reverse Whistle Quill

(6) Enable Automatic Stop Whistle Quill

(7) Enable Direction Change Sound (not used)

(8)* Enable Random Sound 1

(9)* Enable Random Sound 2

(10) Enable Random Sound 3

(11) Enable Random Sound 4

(12-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on except Automatic Whistles and Bell

'''Default (XXXX0011 00000000) = 768 (3:0)'''
|-
|4:13
|Brake Grinding Noise Start Speed
|Speed step at which "squeals" stop and "grinding" starts while braking. Brake grinding noises are sounds more accurate to low speeds and heavy brake application.
Range of Values is 0-126. A Value of 0 disables brake grinding and only uses brake squeal.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:14
|Dual-Enabled Functions
|For functions F0F-F12, set bit to have a function button available in both Light Mode and Sound Mode.
<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is F0F, F0R, and F8 (mute) dual-enabled.

'''Default (XXX00010 00000011) = 515 (1:3)'''
|-
|4:15
|Dynamic Brake Notch
|The notch the prime mover will go to under dynamic braking. See also: Notch Up with Dynamic Brakes feature.
|-
|4:16
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:17
|BEMF Low Calibration
|Used in the calculation to determine which notch the prime mover should be in. This calibration value is the BEMF level when running across a level surface without a load.
|-
|4:18
|BEMF High Calibration
|Used in the calculation to determine which notch the prime mover should be in. This calibration value is the BEMF level when running up a grade or otherwise pulling a heavy load.
|-
|4:19
|User Options
|(0)* Enable Manual Notching Audio Feedback
(1)* Auto Notch Down Prime Mover When Brakes Are Applied

(2) Enable Mute on startup

(3)* Enable Switching/Mainline Mode Audio Feedback

(4)* Enable Rotate Horn/Bell Audio feedback

(5)* Enable Light Mode/Sound Mode Audio feedback

(6)* Enable Audio Auto Shutoff Timer

(7)* "Momentary F2" - Improves performance while in Audio Assist with some throttles.

(8) Enable Dual Prime Movers

(9) Enable Prime Mover Notching Up with Dynamic Brakes

(10) Reverse Directional Whistles

(11) Use Jump-Notching in Switching Momentum Mode

(12)* Use Jump-Notching in Mainline Momentum Mode

(13-15) Not Used

'''Default (XXX10010 11111011) = 4859 (18:251)'''
|-
|4:20
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:21
|Automatic Audio Shut-off Timer
|This feature will automatically mute the decoder after the set period of time. To completely disable this feature, see Index 4:19 "User Options." This feature will extend the life of your decoder by muting the sound when stationary without any user input received. A value of 256 equals approximately three minutes.
Valid range of values is 1-65535

'''Default = 2600 (4:20) - Approximately 30 Minutes'''
|-
|4:22
|Dual Prime Mover Delay
|Sets the amount of time the second prime mover sound (if enabled) will wait before changing notches.
|-
|4:23
|Rotate Bell / Bell Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Bell type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:24
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:25
|Speed-to-notch Ratio
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:26
|Momentum-to-notch Ratio
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:27
|BEMF Load Sensitivity
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:28
|Prime Mover Hysteresis
|Defines how much +/- the load/notch calculation has to be above or below the notch set points for the notch to change. Valid range of values is 0 to 2040. Every increment of 255 is a different notch up to 2040.
|-
|4:29
|Crew Alert Timer
|Sets a timer for how long the engineer must be idle for the Crew Alert alarm to sound.
'''Default = 43 (0:43) | (Approximately 2 minutes)'''
|-
|4:30
|Crew Alert Light Function
|Selects a lighting output (from 0 to 12) to turn on when the crew alert sound begins playing. For the best experience, it is recommended to also change the Lighting Effect for this output to a Flashing Light or Strobe.
A value greater than 12 disables this feature.

'''Default = 13 (Disabled)'''
|-
|4:31
|Traditional Mode Notch 1 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Idle to Notch 1 at this speed.
'''Default = 1'''
|-
|4:32
|Traditional Mode Notch 2 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 1 to Notch 2 at this speed.
'''Default = 6'''
|-
|4:33
|Traditional Mode Notch 3 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 2 to Notch 3 at this speed.
'''Default = 13'''
|-
|4:34
|Traditional Mode Notch 4 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 3 to Notch 4 at this speed.
'''Default = 20'''
|-
|4:35
|Traditional Mode Notch 5 Transition Speed
||When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 4 to Notch 5 at this speed.
'''Default = 27'''
|-
|4:36
|Traditional Mode Notch 6 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 5 to Notch 6 at this speed.
'''Default = 34'''
|-
|4:37
|Traditional Mode Notch 7 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 6 to Notch 7 at this speed.
'''Default = 41'''
|-
|4:38
|Traditional Mode Notch 8 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 7 to Notch 8 at this speed.
'''Default = 48'''
|-
|4:39
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:40
|AUX Input Loop Timer
|Controls how long a sound file triggered by the AUX Input is allowed to loop (if a looping sound). A value of 42 = approximately 3 seconds.
'''Default = 42'''
|-
|4:41
|Smoke Unit On Time
|'''***IF SUPPORTED***''' controls the PWM ratio to the smoke unit fan output.
|-
|4:42
|Smoke Unit Off Time
|'''***IF SUPPORTED'''*** controls the PWM ratio to the smoke unit fan output.
|-
|4:43-4:46
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:47
|Thermal Overload Limit
|'''***WOW501 ONLY***'''
This CV sets the temperature at which the decoder will trip the thermal overload. It is not recommended to adjust this CV unless otherwise guided to do so by TCS technical support. If the thermal overload is tripping, your decoder is overheating!
|-
|4:48
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:49
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:50
|Switching Mode Acceleration
|'''Default = 5'''
|-
|4:51
|Switching Mode Deceleration
|'''Default = 5'''
|-
|4:52
|Mainline Mode Acceleration
|'''Default = 20'''
|-
|4:53
|Mainline Mode Deceleration
|'''Default = 60'''
|}

===Index 5.X - User Preset and Resets===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use the two numbers in the "Value" column to program CV 203 and CV 204. Once CV 204 is written to, the reset will start or preset will be loaded. A few seconds may be required for the operation to complete.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|-
|''NOTE: It is only possible to save the current decoder settings to a User Preset by using Audio Assist.''
''Loading an un-saved user preset will be the same as performing a factory reset.''
|}

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to perform these operations, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 5 "User Presets and Resets"
!Indexed CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|5:0
|0:2
|Complete Decoder Reset (Factory Reset)
|-
|5:0
|0:3
|Reset Sound Button Mappings Only
|-
|5:0
|0:4
|Reset Volumes of all Individual Sounds
|-
|5:0
|0:5
|''Not Used''
|-
|5:0
|0:6
|Reset all Sound CVs (Index 4.x)
|-
|5:0
|0:7
|Reset Volumes of all Sound Types
|-
|5:0
|0:8
|Load User Preset #1
|-
|5:0
|0:9
|Load User Preset #2
|-
|5:0
|0:10
|Load User Preset #3
|}

[[Category:Indexed CV]]
[[Category:Technical Support]]

WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's

2024-08-14T21:14:33Z

Dan Mycio: moved index 5

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!
{{:WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's}}

==List of WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's==

===Index 1:X - Sound Button Remapping===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|1:1
|Function Button 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:2
|Function Button 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:3
|Function Button 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:4
|Function Button 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|1:28
|Function Button 28 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:29
|Random Sound 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:30
|Random Sound 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:31
|Random Sound 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:32
|Random Sound 4 Sound Mapping
|}

===Index 3:X - Individual Chuff Timings===
Set CV 201 to 3, and CV 202 to a value between 1 and 126 to select a speed step. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to set the chuff timing. The higher the value, the more quickly you will hear a chuff during the rotation of the motor.

'''Note: This is an advanced feature which is made easier with a graphical user interface such as JMRI.''' These settings can be done in real-time using mainline programming, and often require a lot of trial-and-error to get right. You may consider the use of a CAM to trigger your chuffs for prefectly-timed chuff sounds.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 3.X "Individual Chuff Timing"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|3:1
|Speed Step 1 Chuff Timing
|-
|3:2
|Speed Step 2 Chuff Timing
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|3:126
|Speed Step 126 Chuff Timing
|}

===Index 4:X - Sound Options===
This is the primary index which holds most of the configuration options for the WOWSound decoder, especially those pertaining to how the decoder operates.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.x "Sound Options"
!Indexed CV
!Name/Feature
!Description
|-
|4:1
|Cylinder Cox Shut-off Speed Step
|Above this speed step (of 128), the Cylinder Cocks sound will stop playing, either when turned on automatically or manually. Range of values is 0-126. A value of 0 will never allow the cylinder cocks to play; a value of 126 will never cut out the cylinder cocks automatically (must be turned off with button).

'''Default = 16'''
|-
|4:2
|Random Sound Channel #1 Frequency
|Random Sound Channel 1 is reserved for the Air Pump/Air Compressor. Higher values = higher frequency of playing.
'''Default = 215'''
|-
|4:3
|Random Sound Channel #2 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 96'''
|-
|4:4
|Random Sound Channel #3 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 64'''
|-
|4:5
|Random Sound Channel #4 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 1'''
|-
|4:6
|Random Sounds Overall Frequency
|Higher values = lower frequency of playing.

'''Default = 768 (3:0)'''
|-
|4:7
|Random Sounds Cut-out Speed Step
|When the locomotive is moving above this speed step (of 128), the Random Sounds will not play.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:8
|Rotate Whistle Pointer / Whistle Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Whistle Type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:9
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:10
|Master Volume
|
|-
|4:11
|Chuff Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Chuff Set number from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:12
|Automatic Sounds Selection
|(0)* Snifter Valves
(1)* Rod Clank

(2)* Idling Sound

(3) Enable Automatic Bell '''| VERSION 4.6 ONLY not used in V4.0 and older'''

(4) Enable Automatic Forward Whistle Quill

(5) Enable Automatic Reverse Whistle Quill

(6) Enable Automatic Stop Whistle Quill

(7)* Enable Direction Change Sound (power reverser)

(8)* Enable Random Sound 1

(9)* Enable Random Sound 2

(10)* Enable Random Sound 3

(11)* Enable Random Sound 4

(12-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on except Automatic Whistles and Bell

'''Default (XXXX1111 10000111) = 3975 (15:135)'''
|-
|4:13
|Brake Grinding Noise Start Speed
|Speed step at which "squeals" stop and "grinding" starts while braking. Brake grinding noises are sounds more accurate to low speeds and heavy brake application.
Range of Values is 0-126. A Value of 0 disables brake grinding and only uses brake squeal.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:14
|Dual-Enabled Functions
|For functions F0F-F12, set bit to have a function button available in both Light Mode and Sound Mode.
<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is F0F, F0R, and F8 (mute) dual-enabled.

'''Default (XXX00010 00000011) = 515 (2:3)'''
|-
|4:15
|''WOWSteam V4.6 ONLY''
|''See Below''
|-
|4:16
|Chuff Rate Overall Adjustment
|Percentage of adjustment to increase or decrease the chuff rate at all speed steps. Valid range of values is 1-200
'''Default = 100 (X:100)'''
|-
|4:17
|Rod Clank Set Selection
|Determines which set of Rod clank sounds are played. The number of Rod Clank sound sets is determined by the Sound List.
|-
|4:18
|Cylinder Cox Auto Turn-on Time
|Sets how long the locomotive must be stationary before the cylinder cox will come on automatically the next time the locomotive starts moving.
Valid Range of values 1 - 65535

'''Default = 256 (1:0)'''
|-
|4:19
|User Options
|(0) Enable CAM
(1) (Not Used)

(2) Enable Mute on startup

(3)* Allow Articulated Chuff to Slip

(4)* Enable Rotate whistle/bell Audio feedback

(5)* Enable Light Mode/Sound Mode Audio feedback

(6)* Enable Audio auto shutoff timer

(7)* "Momentary F2" - Improves performance while in Audio Assist with some throttles.

(8) Enable Articulated Chuff

(9) (Not Used)

(10) Reverse Directional Whistles

(11)* Enable Power Braking

(12)* Enable Momentum Mode Audio Feedback

(13)* Enable Johnson Bar Audio Feedback

(14) ''Enable "Function Pagination" |'' WOWSteam Version 4.6 ONLY

(15) [reserved]

'''*Default (X0111000 11111000) = 14584 (56:248)'''
|-
|4:20
|Articulated Chuff Slip Rate
|Determines how frequently articulated chuffs slip in and out of sync. The higher the number the more frequently it happens.
Valid values are 0-255

'''Default = 240 (X:240)'''
|-
|4:21
|Automatic Audio Shut-off Timer
|This feature will automatically mute the decoder after the set period of time. To completely disable this feature, see Index 4:19 "User Options." This feature will extend the life of your decoder by muting the sound when stationary without any user input received. A value of 256 equals approximately three minutes.
Valid range of values is 1-65535

'''Default = 1200 (4:176) - Approximately 15 Minutes'''
|-
|4:22
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:23
|Minimum Chuff Volume
|This setting will set the minimum volume the chuff volume can fall to, regardless of the BEMF/load. Changing this setting will prevent the sound from behaving prototypical, but can force the decoder to always "chuff chuff chuff" as long as it is moving.
Valid range of values is 0 - 32767

'''Default = 0 (chuff/throttle can shut off completely)'''
|-
|4:24
|Rotate Bell / Bell Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Bell type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:25
|Grade Crossing Quill Options
|TCS records multiple grade crossing quills, and puts up to three of them in the decoder. This CV's selection controls which quills will play when the Grade X Quill Button is pressed.
(0)* Short Quill,

(1)* Medium Quill

(2)* Long Quill

(3 - 6) Not used

(7) Randomize Quill Play Order

If a value of zero is entered, the short quill is defaulted to. In order to disable the whistle quill function, the button mapping for Grade X Quill must be overwritten or disabled.

'''Default = 7 (X:7)'''
|-
|4:26
|Cylinder Cox Set
|Determines which set of cox sounds are active
''NOTE: Using CV programming to assign a cylinder cox sound to a button will put the cylinder cocks sound type on that button, but might not set up the correct set. I.E. if you remap the "cylinder cox set 2" sound onto a button, but don't change this CV, that button will play a "cylinder cox set 1" instead. Changing this CV will affect any button or buttons already mapped with the Cylinder Cox sound type.''

Valid values are 1-2

'''Default = 1 (X:1)'''
|-
|4:27
|Idling Sounds Selection
|Determines which "Idling Sounds" sound plays while the locomotive is idle.
Valid values are determined by the Sound List.
|-
|4:28
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:29
|Chuff Volume Change Time
|Controls how fast the chuff volume can change from one level to another in response to a change in the load. This setting effectively adds "hysteresis" to the chuff volume if you feel the locomotive's chuff sound response is too sensitive and changes too quickly. A change of "1" adds or subtracts approximately 0.5 milliseconds to the responsiveness. This setting only affects the responsiveness when coasting at a set speed, and does not affect the performance and responsiveness when changing speed. See 4:32 "Chuff Volume Velocity Factor" for more info.
'''Default = 4500 (17:148) | (Approximately 2.25 seconds transition time from min to max)'''
|-
|4:30
|BEMF Low Calibration (Forward)
|
|-
|4:31
|BEMF High Calibration (Forward)
|
|-
|4:32
|Chuff Volume Velocity Factor
|This CV controls the effects accelerating and decelerating have upon the chuff volume. The higher the value the more drastic the change in volume from accelerating and decelerating.

'''Default = 612 (2:100) | (Approximately 0.3 seconds to transition from min to max)'''
|-
|4:33
|BEMF Low Calibration (Reverse)
|
|-
|4:34
|BEMF High Calibration (Reverse)
|
|-
|4:35
|Rod Clank Volume from BEMF
|At the calculated minimum BEMF volume (BEMF Low Calibration) rod clank will be at full volume (rod clank type volume) and will fade away as the load increases. This CV is a percentage above the BEMF Low Calibration value that the rod clank will cut out.
Valid values are 0-100

'''Default = 30 (X:30)'''
|-
|
|
|
|-
|4:42
|Throttle Mode Selection
|0 = Traditional Throttle Mode
1 = Prototype Throttle Mode
This setting controls how the chuff sound behaves:
In "traditional" mode, the chuff volume is constant and determined by the "Chuff" Sound Type Volume. Snifters will play at their maximum programmable volume when the throttle is shut off, rod clank will not play at all.

In "Prototype" throttle mode, the chuff volume is determined by the velocity, speed, BEMF/load, and calibration settings. The snifter valve and rod clank volume are also controlled dynamically by prototype throttle mode. Snifters will play when the throttle is deemed to be "off" and rod clank will start playing when the throttle is deemed to be appropriate (See Index 4:35)

'''Default = 1 (Prototype Throttle Mode)'''
|-
|4:43-4:46
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:47
|Thermal Overload Limit
|'''***WOW501 ONLY***'''
This CV sets the temperature at which the decoder will trip the thermal overload. It is not recommended to adjust this CV unless otherwise guided to do so by TCS technical support. If the thermal overload is tripping, your decoder is overheating!
|-
|4:48
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Regulated Supply Mode
|Default = 431
|-
|4:49
|''WOWSteam V4.6 ONLY''
|''See Below''
|-
|4:50
|Switching Mode Acceleration
|Default = 5
|-
|4:51
|Switching Mode Deceleration
|Default = 5
|-
|4:52
|Mainline Mode Acceleration
|Default = 20
|-
|4:53
|Mainline Mode Deceleration
|Default = 60
|} 
===Index 5.X - User Preset and Resets===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use the two numbers in the "Value" column to program CV 203 and CV 204. Once CV 204 is written to, the reset will start or preset will be loaded. A few seconds may be required for the operation to complete.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|-
|''NOTE: It is only possible to save the current decoder settings to a User Preset by using Audio Assist.''
''Loading an un-saved user preset will be the same as performing a factory reset.''
|}'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to perform these operations, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 5 "User Presets and Resets"
!Indexed CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|5:0
|0:2
|Complete Decoder Reset (Factory Reset)
|-
|5:0
|0:3
|Reset Sound Button Mappings Only
|-
|5:0
|0:4
|Reset Volumes of all Individual Sounds
|-
|5:0
|0:5
|Reset All Chuff Timing Values
|-
|5:0
|0:6
|Reset all Sound CVs (Index 4.x)
|-
|5:0
|0:7
|Reset Volumes of all Sound Types
|-
|5:0
|0:8
|Load User Preset #1
|-
|5:0
|0:9
|Load User Preset #2
|-
|5:0
|0:10
|Load User Preset #3
|}
==New Indexed CV's Unique to WOWSteam Version 4.6==
This section includes only the new Sound Options for WOWSteam V4.6 decoders. These Indexed CV's are included within index 4.X but are not present in Version 4.0 or older WOWSteam decoders.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.X "Sound Options" (NEW!)
!Indexed CV
!Description
!
|-
| colspan="3" |NOTE: ALL OF THE INDEXED CV NUMBERS LISTED ABOVE IN THE SAME PRIMARY INDEX (4:X) STILL APPLY. THE CV'S LISTED IN THIS TABLE ARE ADDITIONS OR REVISIONS TO THE PREVIOUS TABLE
|-
|4:15
|DC Mode Sounds Selection
|(0)* DC mode automatic bell enabled
(1)* DC mode Forward Sound

(2)* DC mode Reverse Sound

(3)* DC mode stop sound

(4)* DC mode quill enabled

(5-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on.

'''Default (XXXXXXXX XXX11111) = 31 (X:31)'''
|-
|4:41
|DC Mode Chuff Volume
|Sets the chuff volume level while in DC mode. If you are using a high power speaker and an power pack with poor regulation, loud chuffs can cause a significant drop in voltage. Lowering the maximum chuff volume can alleviate this issue.
'''Default = 5888'''
|-
|4:43
|DC Mode Start Voltage - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2400'''
|-
|4:44
|DC Mode Bell Cutout Voltage - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2525'''
|-
|4:45
|Automatic Bell Cutout Speed
|DCC speed step above which the bell will stop playing (when enabled to play automatically).
'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:46
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 600'''
|-
|4:48
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 431'''
|-
|4:49
|Track Voltage BEMF Offset Factor
|'''Default = 0'''
|-
|4:54
|DC Mode Max ADC Value - Regulated Supply Mode
|Sets the expected maximum ADC value the decoder can expect to see when running in Analog mode. This gives the decoder a range that can be used to determine which speed to go depending on the track voltage. By default=, this CV is set to the maximum resolution size, which means the decoder will max out at about 14.5V on the rails. This CV will not help for DC power packs with higher max outputs than 15V, but for max outputs below 15V, the speed step range can be tuned; additionally, going above the ADC range, or increasing this CV, can limit the speed step at full throttle. This often does sound nicer, and gives more of a range in the "nice chuff rate zone" where speed is limited but enjoy-ability is increased.
Range of values is 0-4250. Recommended absolute minimum value is 2800.

''This CV MUST NOT be less than or equal to the Motor Start Voltage''

'''Default = 4250 (16:154)'''
|-
|4:66
|DC Mode Start Voltage - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2816'''
|-
|4:67
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 1250'''
|-
|4:68
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 12'''
|-
|4:69
|DC Mode Bell Cutout Voltage - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2500'''
|-
|4:70
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 1000'''
|-
|4:72
|DC Mode Speed Step Hysteresis - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 8'''
|}

[[Category:Indexed CV]]
[[Category:Technical Support]]

WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's

2024-08-14T21:07:02Z

Dan Mycio:

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!
{{:WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's}}

==List of WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's==

===Index 1:X - Sound Button Remapping===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|1:1
|Function Button 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:2
|Function Button 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:3
|Function Button 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:4
|Function Button 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|1:28
|Function Button 28 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:29
|Random Sound 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:30
|Random Sound 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:31
|Random Sound 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:32
|Random Sound 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:33
|AUX Input Sound Mapping
|}

===Index 4:X - Sound Options===
This is the primary index which holds most of the configuration options for the WOWSound decoder, especially those pertaining to how the decoder operates.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.x "Sound Options"
!Indexed CV
!Name/Feature
!Description
|-
|4:1
|Quill Selection
|(0)* Short Quill,

(1)* Medium Quill

(2)* Long Quill

(3 - 6) Not used

(7) Randomize Quill Play Order

If a value of zero is entered, the short quill is defaulted to. In order to disable the whistle quill function, the button mapping for Grade X Quill must be overwritten or disabled.

'''Default = 7 (X:7) | Short, Medium, and Long quill enabled.'''
|-
|4:2
|Random Sound Channel #1 Frequency
|
|-
|4:3
|Random Sound Channel #2 Frequency
|
|-
|4:4
|Random Sound Channel #3 Frequency
|
|-
|4:5
|Random Sound Channel #4 Frequency
|
|-
|4:6
|Random Sounds Overall Frequency
|
|-
|4:7
|Random Sounds Cut-out Speed Step
|
|-
|4:8
|Rotate Horn Pointer / Horn Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Horn Type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:9
|Notching Mechanism
|
|-
|4:10
|Master Volume
|
|-
|4:11
|Prime Mover Type
|Uses CV 204 to select the Prime Mover number from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:12
|Automatic Sounds Selection
|(0) Crew Alert (ON if set)
(1) NU

(2) NU

(3) NU

(4) Enable Automatic Forward Whistle Quill

(5) Enable Automatic Reverse Whistle Quill

(6) Enable Automatic Stop Whistle Quill

(7) Enable Direction Change Sound (not used)

(8)* Enable Random Sound 1

(9)* Enable Random Sound 2

(10) Enable Random Sound 3

(11) Enable Random Sound 4

(12-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on except Automatic Whistles and Bell

'''Default (XXXX0011 00000000) = 768 (3:0)'''
|-
|4:13
|Brake Grinding Noise Start Speed
|Speed step at which "squeals" stop and "grinding" starts while braking. Brake grinding noises are sounds more accurate to low speeds and heavy brake application.
Range of Values is 0-126. A Value of 0 disables brake grinding and only uses brake squeal.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:14
|Dual-Enabled Functions
|For functions F0F-F12, set bit to have a function button available in both Light Mode and Sound Mode.
<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is F0F, F0R, and F8 (mute) dual-enabled.

'''Default (XXX00010 00000011) = 515 (1:3)'''
|-
|4:15
|Dynamic Brake Notch
|The notch the prime mover will go to under dynamic braking. See also: Notch Up with Dynamic Brakes feature.
|-
|4:16
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:17
|BEMF Low Calibration
|Used in the calculation to determine which notch the prime mover should be in. This calibration value is the BEMF level when running across a level surface without a load.
|-
|4:18
|BEMF High Calibration
|Used in the calculation to determine which notch the prime mover should be in. This calibration value is the BEMF level when running up a grade or otherwise pulling a heavy load.
|-
|4:19
|User Options
|(0)* Enable Manual Notching Audio Feedback
(1)* Auto Notch Down Prime Mover When Brakes Are Applied

(2) Enable Mute on startup

(3)* Enable Switching/Mainline Mode Audio Feedback

(4)* Enable Rotate Horn/Bell Audio feedback

(5)* Enable Light Mode/Sound Mode Audio feedback

(6)* Enable Audio Auto Shutoff Timer

(7)* "Momentary F2" - Improves performance while in Audio Assist with some throttles.

(8) Enable Dual Prime Movers

(9) Enable Prime Mover Notching Up with Dynamic Brakes

(10) Reverse Directional Whistles

(11) Use Jump-Notching in Switching Momentum Mode

(12)* Use Jump-Notching in Mainline Momentum Mode

(13-15) Not Used

'''Default (XXX10010 11111011) = 4859 (18:251)'''
|-
|4:20
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:21
|Automatic Audio Shut-off Timer
|This feature will automatically mute the decoder after the set period of time. To completely disable this feature, see Index 4:19 "User Options." This feature will extend the life of your decoder by muting the sound when stationary without any user input received. A value of 256 equals approximately three minutes.
Valid range of values is 1-65535

'''Default = 2600 (4:20) - Approximately 30 Minutes'''
|-
|4:22
|Dual Prime Mover Delay
|Sets the amount of time the second prime mover sound (if enabled) will wait before changing notches.
|-
|4:23
|Rotate Bell / Bell Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Bell type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:24
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:25
|Speed-to-notch Ratio
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:26
|Momentum-to-notch Ratio
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:27
|BEMF Load Sensitivity
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:28
|Prime Mover Hysteresis
|Defines how much +/- the load/notch calculation has to be above or below the notch set points for the notch to change. Valid range of values is 0 to 2040. Every increment of 255 is a different notch up to 2040.
|-
|4:29
|Crew Alert Timer
|Sets a timer for how long the engineer must be idle for the Crew Alert alarm to sound.
'''Default = 43 (0:43) | (Approximately 2 minutes)'''
|-
|4:30
|Crew Alert Light Function
|Selects a lighting output (from 0 to 12) to turn on when the crew alert sound begins playing. For the best experience, it is recommended to also change the Lighting Effect for this output to a Flashing Light or Strobe.
A value greater than 12 disables this feature.

'''Default = 13 (Disabled)'''
|-
|4:31
|Traditional Mode Notch 1 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Idle to Notch 1 at this speed.
'''Default = 1'''
|-
|4:32
|Traditional Mode Notch 2 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 1 to Notch 2 at this speed.
'''Default = 6'''
|-
|4:33
|Traditional Mode Notch 3 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 2 to Notch 3 at this speed.
'''Default = 13'''
|-
|4:34
|Traditional Mode Notch 4 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 3 to Notch 4 at this speed.
'''Default = 20'''
|-
|4:35
|Traditional Mode Notch 5 Transition Speed
||When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 4 to Notch 5 at this speed.
'''Default = 27'''
|-
|4:36
|Traditional Mode Notch 6 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 5 to Notch 6 at this speed.
'''Default = 34'''
|-
|4:37
|Traditional Mode Notch 7 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 6 to Notch 7 at this speed.
'''Default = 41'''
|-
|4:38
|Traditional Mode Notch 8 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 7 to Notch 8 at this speed.
'''Default = 48'''
|-
|4:39
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:40
|AUX Input Loop Timer
|Controls how long a sound file triggered by the AUX Input is allowed to loop (if a looping sound). A value of 42 = approximately 3 seconds.
'''Default = 42'''
|-
|4:41
|Smoke Unit On Time
|'''***IF SUPPORTED***''' controls the PWM ratio to the smoke unit fan output.
|-
|4:42
|Smoke Unit Off Time
|'''***IF SUPPORTED'''*** controls the PWM ratio to the smoke unit fan output.
|-
|4:43-4:46
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:47
|Thermal Overload Limit
|'''***WOW501 ONLY***'''
This CV sets the temperature at which the decoder will trip the thermal overload. It is not recommended to adjust this CV unless otherwise guided to do so by TCS technical support. If the thermal overload is tripping, your decoder is overheating!
|-
|4:48
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:49
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:50
|Switching Mode Acceleration
|'''Default = 5'''
|-
|4:51
|Switching Mode Deceleration
|'''Default = 5'''
|-
|4:52
|Mainline Mode Acceleration
|'''Default = 20'''
|-
|4:53
|Mainline Mode Deceleration
|'''Default = 60'''
|}

===Index 5.X - User Preset and Resets===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use the two numbers in the "Value" column to program CV 203 and CV 204. Once CV 204 is written to, the reset will start or preset will be loaded. A few seconds may be required for the operation to complete.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|-
|''NOTE: It is only possible to save the current decoder settings to a User Preset by using Audio Assist.''
''Loading an un-saved user preset will be the same as performing a factory reset.''
|}

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to perform these operations, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|5:0
|0:2
|Complete Decoder Reset (Factory Reset)
|-
|5:0
|0:3
|Reset Sound Button Mappings Only
|-
|5:0
|0:4
|Reset Volumes of all Individual Sounds
|-
|5:0
|0:5
|''Not Used''
|-
|5:0
|0:6
|Reset all Sound CVs (Index 4.x)
|-
|5:0
|0:7
|Reset Volumes of all Sound Types
|-
|5:0
|0:8
|Load User Preset #1
|-
|5:0
|0:9
|Load User Preset #2
|-
|5:0
|0:10
|Load User Preset #3
|}

[[Category:Indexed CV]]
[[Category:Technical Support]]

WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's

2024-08-14T21:06:34Z

Dan Mycio: added index 5

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!
{{:WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's}}

==List of WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's==

===Index 1:X - Sound Button Remapping===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|1:1
|Function Button 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:2
|Function Button 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:3
|Function Button 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:4
|Function Button 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|1:28
|Function Button 28 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:29
|Random Sound 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:30
|Random Sound 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:31
|Random Sound 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:32
|Random Sound 4 Sound Mapping
|}

===Index 3:X - Individual Chuff Timings===
Set CV 201 to 3, and CV 202 to a value between 1 and 126 to select a speed step. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to set the chuff timing. The higher the value, the more quickly you will hear a chuff during the rotation of the motor.

'''Note: This is an advanced feature which is made easier with a graphical user interface such as JMRI.''' These settings can be done in real-time using mainline programming, and often require a lot of trial-and-error to get right. You may consider the use of a CAM to trigger your chuffs for prefectly-timed chuff sounds.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 3.X "Individual Chuff Timing"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|3:1
|Speed Step 1 Chuff Timing
|-
|3:2
|Speed Step 2 Chuff Timing
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|3:126
|Speed Step 126 Chuff Timing
|}

===Index 4:X - Sound Options===
This is the primary index which holds most of the configuration options for the WOWSound decoder, especially those pertaining to how the decoder operates.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.x "Sound Options"
!Indexed CV
!Name/Feature
!Description
|-
|4:1
|Cylinder Cox Shut-off Speed Step
|Above this speed step (of 128), the Cylinder Cocks sound will stop playing, either when turned on automatically or manually. Range of values is 0-126. A value of 0 will never allow the cylinder cocks to play; a value of 126 will never cut out the cylinder cocks automatically (must be turned off with button).

'''Default = 16'''
|-
|4:2
|Random Sound Channel #1 Frequency
|Random Sound Channel 1 is reserved for the Air Pump/Air Compressor. Higher values = higher frequency of playing.
'''Default = 215'''
|-
|4:3
|Random Sound Channel #2 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 96'''
|-
|4:4
|Random Sound Channel #3 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 64'''
|-
|4:5
|Random Sound Channel #4 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 1'''
|-
|4:6
|Random Sounds Overall Frequency
|Higher values = lower frequency of playing.

'''Default = 768 (3:0)'''
|-
|4:7
|Random Sounds Cut-out Speed Step
|When the locomotive is moving above this speed step (of 128), the Random Sounds will not play.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:8
|Rotate Whistle Pointer / Whistle Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Whistle Type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:9
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:10
|Master Volume
|
|-
|4:11
|Chuff Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Chuff Set number from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:12
|Automatic Sounds Selection
|(0)* Snifter Valves
(1)* Rod Clank

(2)* Idling Sound

(3) Enable Automatic Bell '''| VERSION 4.6 ONLY not used in V4.0 and older'''

(4) Enable Automatic Forward Whistle Quill

(5) Enable Automatic Reverse Whistle Quill

(6) Enable Automatic Stop Whistle Quill

(7)* Enable Direction Change Sound (power reverser)

(8)* Enable Random Sound 1

(9)* Enable Random Sound 2

(10)* Enable Random Sound 3

(11)* Enable Random Sound 4

(12-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on except Automatic Whistles and Bell

'''Default (XXXX1111 10000111) = 3975 (15:135)'''
|-
|4:13
|Brake Grinding Noise Start Speed
|Speed step at which "squeals" stop and "grinding" starts while braking. Brake grinding noises are sounds more accurate to low speeds and heavy brake application.
Range of Values is 0-126. A Value of 0 disables brake grinding and only uses brake squeal.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:14
|Dual-Enabled Functions
|For functions F0F-F12, set bit to have a function button available in both Light Mode and Sound Mode.
<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is F0F, F0R, and F8 (mute) dual-enabled.

'''Default (XXX00010 00000011) = 515 (2:3)'''
|-
|4:15
|''WOWSteam V4.6 ONLY''
|''See Below''
|-
|4:16
|Chuff Rate Overall Adjustment
|Percentage of adjustment to increase or decrease the chuff rate at all speed steps. Valid range of values is 1-200
'''Default = 100 (X:100)'''
|-
|4:17
|Rod Clank Set Selection
|Determines which set of Rod clank sounds are played. The number of Rod Clank sound sets is determined by the Sound List.
|-
|4:18
|Cylinder Cox Auto Turn-on Time
|Sets how long the locomotive must be stationary before the cylinder cox will come on automatically the next time the locomotive starts moving.
Valid Range of values 1 - 65535

'''Default = 256 (1:0)'''
|-
|4:19
|User Options
|(0) Enable CAM
(1) (Not Used)

(2) Enable Mute on startup

(3)* Allow Articulated Chuff to Slip

(4)* Enable Rotate whistle/bell Audio feedback

(5)* Enable Light Mode/Sound Mode Audio feedback

(6)* Enable Audio auto shutoff timer

(7)* "Momentary F2" - Improves performance while in Audio Assist with some throttles.

(8) Enable Articulated Chuff

(9) (Not Used)

(10) Reverse Directional Whistles

(11)* Enable Power Braking

(12)* Enable Momentum Mode Audio Feedback

(13)* Enable Johnson Bar Audio Feedback

(14) ''Enable "Function Pagination" |'' WOWSteam Version 4.6 ONLY

(15) [reserved]

'''*Default (X0111000 11111000) = 14584 (56:248)'''
|-
|4:20
|Articulated Chuff Slip Rate
|Determines how frequently articulated chuffs slip in and out of sync. The higher the number the more frequently it happens.
Valid values are 0-255

'''Default = 240 (X:240)'''
|-
|4:21
|Automatic Audio Shut-off Timer
|This feature will automatically mute the decoder after the set period of time. To completely disable this feature, see Index 4:19 "User Options." This feature will extend the life of your decoder by muting the sound when stationary without any user input received. A value of 256 equals approximately three minutes.
Valid range of values is 1-65535

'''Default = 1200 (4:176) - Approximately 15 Minutes'''
|-
|4:22
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:23
|Minimum Chuff Volume
|This setting will set the minimum volume the chuff volume can fall to, regardless of the BEMF/load. Changing this setting will prevent the sound from behaving prototypical, but can force the decoder to always "chuff chuff chuff" as long as it is moving.
Valid range of values is 0 - 32767

'''Default = 0 (chuff/throttle can shut off completely)'''
|-
|4:24
|Rotate Bell / Bell Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Bell type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:25
|Grade Crossing Quill Options
|TCS records multiple grade crossing quills, and puts up to three of them in the decoder. This CV's selection controls which quills will play when the Grade X Quill Button is pressed.
(0)* Short Quill,

(1)* Medium Quill

(2)* Long Quill

(3 - 6) Not used

(7) Randomize Quill Play Order

If a value of zero is entered, the short quill is defaulted to. In order to disable the whistle quill function, the button mapping for Grade X Quill must be overwritten or disabled.

'''Default = 7 (X:7)'''
|-
|4:26
|Cylinder Cox Set
|Determines which set of cox sounds are active
''NOTE: Using CV programming to assign a cylinder cox sound to a button will put the cylinder cocks sound type on that button, but might not set up the correct set. I.E. if you remap the "cylinder cox set 2" sound onto a button, but don't change this CV, that button will play a "cylinder cox set 1" instead. Changing this CV will affect any button or buttons already mapped with the Cylinder Cox sound type.''

Valid values are 1-2

'''Default = 1 (X:1)'''
|-
|4:27
|Idling Sounds Selection
|Determines which "Idling Sounds" sound plays while the locomotive is idle.
Valid values are determined by the Sound List.
|-
|4:28
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:29
|Chuff Volume Change Time
|Controls how fast the chuff volume can change from one level to another in response to a change in the load. This setting effectively adds "hysteresis" to the chuff volume if you feel the locomotive's chuff sound response is too sensitive and changes too quickly. A change of "1" adds or subtracts approximately 0.5 milliseconds to the responsiveness. This setting only affects the responsiveness when coasting at a set speed, and does not affect the performance and responsiveness when changing speed. See 4:32 "Chuff Volume Velocity Factor" for more info.
'''Default = 4500 (17:148) | (Approximately 2.25 seconds transition time from min to max)'''
|-
|4:30
|BEMF Low Calibration (Forward)
|
|-
|4:31
|BEMF High Calibration (Forward)
|
|-
|4:32
|Chuff Volume Velocity Factor
|This CV controls the effects accelerating and decelerating have upon the chuff volume. The higher the value the more drastic the change in volume from accelerating and decelerating.

'''Default = 612 (2:100) | (Approximately 0.3 seconds to transition from min to max)'''
|-
|4:33
|BEMF Low Calibration (Reverse)
|
|-
|4:34
|BEMF High Calibration (Reverse)
|
|-
|4:35
|Rod Clank Volume from BEMF
|At the calculated minimum BEMF volume (BEMF Low Calibration) rod clank will be at full volume (rod clank type volume) and will fade away as the load increases. This CV is a percentage above the BEMF Low Calibration value that the rod clank will cut out.
Valid values are 0-100

'''Default = 30 (X:30)'''
|-
|
|
|
|-
|4:42
|Throttle Mode Selection
|0 = Traditional Throttle Mode
1 = Prototype Throttle Mode
This setting controls how the chuff sound behaves:
In "traditional" mode, the chuff volume is constant and determined by the "Chuff" Sound Type Volume. Snifters will play at their maximum programmable volume when the throttle is shut off, rod clank will not play at all.

In "Prototype" throttle mode, the chuff volume is determined by the velocity, speed, BEMF/load, and calibration settings. The snifter valve and rod clank volume are also controlled dynamically by prototype throttle mode. Snifters will play when the throttle is deemed to be "off" and rod clank will start playing when the throttle is deemed to be appropriate (See Index 4:35)

'''Default = 1 (Prototype Throttle Mode)'''
|-
|4:43-4:46
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:47
|Thermal Overload Limit
|'''***WOW501 ONLY***'''
This CV sets the temperature at which the decoder will trip the thermal overload. It is not recommended to adjust this CV unless otherwise guided to do so by TCS technical support. If the thermal overload is tripping, your decoder is overheating!
|-
|4:48
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Regulated Supply Mode
|Default = 431
|-
|4:49
|''WOWSteam V4.6 ONLY''
|''See Below''
|-
|4:50
|Switching Mode Acceleration
|Default = 5
|-
|4:51
|Switching Mode Deceleration
|Default = 5
|-
|4:52
|Mainline Mode Acceleration
|Default = 20
|-
|4:53
|Mainline Mode Deceleration
|Default = 60
|}

==New Indexed CV's Unique to WOWSteam Version 4.6==
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.X "Sound Options" (NEW!)
!Indexed CV
!Description
!
|-
| colspan="3" |NOTE: ALL OF THE INDEXED CV NUMBERS LISTED ABOVE IN THE SAME PRIMARY INDEX (4:X) STILL APPLY. THE CV'S LISTED IN THIS TABLE ARE ADDITIONS OR REVISIONS TO THE PREVIOUS TABLE
|-
|4:15
|DC Mode Sounds Selection
|(0)* DC mode automatic bell enabled
(1)* DC mode Forward Sound

(2)* DC mode Reverse Sound

(3)* DC mode stop sound

(4)* DC mode quill enabled

(5-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on.

'''Default (XXXXXXXX XXX11111) = 31 (X:31)'''
|-
|4:41
|DC Mode Chuff Volume
|Sets the chuff volume level while in DC mode. If you are using a high power speaker and an power pack with poor regulation, loud chuffs can cause a significant drop in voltage. Lowering the maximum chuff volume can alleviate this issue.
'''Default = 5888'''
|-
|4:43
|DC Mode Start Voltage - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2400'''
|-
|4:44
|DC Mode Bell Cutout Voltage - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2525'''
|-
|4:45
|Automatic Bell Cutout Speed
|DCC speed step above which the bell will stop playing (when enabled to play automatically).
'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:46
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 600'''
|-
|4:48
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 431'''
|-
|4:49
|Track Voltage BEMF Offset Factor
|'''Default = 0'''
|-
|4:54
|DC Mode Max ADC Value - Regulated Supply Mode
|Sets the expected maximum ADC value the decoder can expect to see when running in Analog mode. This gives the decoder a range that can be used to determine which speed to go depending on the track voltage. By default=, this CV is set to the maximum resolution size, which means the decoder will max out at about 14.5V on the rails. This CV will not help for DC power packs with higher max outputs than 15V, but for max outputs below 15V, the speed step range can be tuned; additionally, going above the ADC range, or increasing this CV, can limit the speed step at full throttle. This often does sound nicer, and gives more of a range in the "nice chuff rate zone" where speed is limited but enjoy-ability is increased.
Range of values is 0-4250. Recommended absolute minimum value is 2800.

''This CV MUST NOT be less than or equal to the Motor Start Voltage''

'''Default = 4250 (16:154)'''
|-
|4:66
|DC Mode Start Voltage - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2816'''
|-
|4:67
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 1250'''
|-
|4:68
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 12'''
|-
|4:69
|DC Mode Bell Cutout Voltage - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2500'''
|-
|4:70
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 1000'''
|-
|4:72
|DC Mode Speed Step Hysteresis - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 8'''
|}

=== Index 5.X - User Preset and Resets ===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use the two numbers in the "Value" column to program CV 203 and CV 204. Once CV 204 is written to, the reset will start or preset will be loaded. A few seconds may be required for the operation to complete.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|-
|''NOTE: It is only possible to save the current decoder settings to a User Preset by using Audio Assist.''
''Loading an un-saved user preset will be the same as performing a factory reset.''
|}'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to perform these operations, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|5:0
|0:2
|Complete Decoder Reset (Factory Reset)
|-
|5:0
|0:3
|Reset Sound Button Mappings Only
|-
|5:0
|0:4
|Reset Volumes of all Individual Sounds
|-
|5:0
|0:5
|Reset All Chuff Timing Values
|-
|5:0
|0:6
|Reset all Sound CVs (Index 4.x)
|-
|5:0
|0:7
|Reset Volumes of all Sound Types
|-
|5:0
|0:8
|Load User Preset #1
|-
|5:0
|0:9
|Load User Preset #2
|-
|5:0
|0:10
|Load User Preset #3
|}
[[Category:Indexed CV]]
[[Category:Technical Support]]

WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's

2024-08-14T21:06:14Z

Dan Mycio: Added index 5

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!
{{:WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's}}

==List of WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's==

===Index 1:X - Sound Button Remapping===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|1:1
|Function Button 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:2
|Function Button 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:3
|Function Button 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:4
|Function Button 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|1:28
|Function Button 28 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:29
|Random Sound 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:30
|Random Sound 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:31
|Random Sound 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:32
|Random Sound 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:33
|AUX Input Sound Mapping
|}

===Index 4:X - Sound Options===
This is the primary index which holds most of the configuration options for the WOWSound decoder, especially those pertaining to how the decoder operates.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.x "Sound Options"
!Indexed CV
!Name/Feature
!Description
|-
|4:1
|Quill Selection
|(0)* Short Quill,

(1)* Medium Quill

(2)* Long Quill

(3 - 6) Not used

(7) Randomize Quill Play Order

If a value of zero is entered, the short quill is defaulted to. In order to disable the whistle quill function, the button mapping for Grade X Quill must be overwritten or disabled.

'''Default = 7 (X:7) | Short, Medium, and Long quill enabled.'''
|-
|4:2
|Random Sound Channel #1 Frequency
|
|-
|4:3
|Random Sound Channel #2 Frequency
|
|-
|4:4
|Random Sound Channel #3 Frequency
|
|-
|4:5
|Random Sound Channel #4 Frequency
|
|-
|4:6
|Random Sounds Overall Frequency
|
|-
|4:7
|Random Sounds Cut-out Speed Step
|
|-
|4:8
|Rotate Horn Pointer / Horn Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Horn Type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:9
|Notching Mechanism
|
|-
|4:10
|Master Volume
|
|-
|4:11
|Prime Mover Type
|Uses CV 204 to select the Prime Mover number from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:12
|Automatic Sounds Selection
|(0) Crew Alert (ON if set)
(1) NU

(2) NU

(3) NU

(4) Enable Automatic Forward Whistle Quill

(5) Enable Automatic Reverse Whistle Quill

(6) Enable Automatic Stop Whistle Quill

(7) Enable Direction Change Sound (not used)

(8)* Enable Random Sound 1

(9)* Enable Random Sound 2

(10) Enable Random Sound 3

(11) Enable Random Sound 4

(12-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on except Automatic Whistles and Bell

'''Default (XXXX0011 00000000) = 768 (3:0)'''
|-
|4:13
|Brake Grinding Noise Start Speed
|Speed step at which "squeals" stop and "grinding" starts while braking. Brake grinding noises are sounds more accurate to low speeds and heavy brake application.
Range of Values is 0-126. A Value of 0 disables brake grinding and only uses brake squeal.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:14
|Dual-Enabled Functions
|For functions F0F-F12, set bit to have a function button available in both Light Mode and Sound Mode.
<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is F0F, F0R, and F8 (mute) dual-enabled.

'''Default (XXX00010 00000011) = 515 (1:3)'''
|-
|4:15
|Dynamic Brake Notch
|The notch the prime mover will go to under dynamic braking. See also: Notch Up with Dynamic Brakes feature.
|-
|4:16
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:17
|BEMF Low Calibration
|Used in the calculation to determine which notch the prime mover should be in. This calibration value is the BEMF level when running across a level surface without a load.
|-
|4:18
|BEMF High Calibration
|Used in the calculation to determine which notch the prime mover should be in. This calibration value is the BEMF level when running up a grade or otherwise pulling a heavy load.
|-
|4:19
|User Options
|(0)* Enable Manual Notching Audio Feedback
(1)* Auto Notch Down Prime Mover When Brakes Are Applied

(2) Enable Mute on startup

(3)* Enable Switching/Mainline Mode Audio Feedback

(4)* Enable Rotate Horn/Bell Audio feedback

(5)* Enable Light Mode/Sound Mode Audio feedback

(6)* Enable Audio Auto Shutoff Timer

(7)* "Momentary F2" - Improves performance while in Audio Assist with some throttles.

(8) Enable Dual Prime Movers

(9) Enable Prime Mover Notching Up with Dynamic Brakes

(10) Reverse Directional Whistles

(11) Use Jump-Notching in Switching Momentum Mode

(12)* Use Jump-Notching in Mainline Momentum Mode

(13-15) Not Used

'''Default (XXX10010 11111011) = 4859 (18:251)'''
|-
|4:20
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:21
|Automatic Audio Shut-off Timer
|This feature will automatically mute the decoder after the set period of time. To completely disable this feature, see Index 4:19 "User Options." This feature will extend the life of your decoder by muting the sound when stationary without any user input received. A value of 256 equals approximately three minutes.
Valid range of values is 1-65535

'''Default = 2600 (4:20) - Approximately 30 Minutes'''
|-
|4:22
|Dual Prime Mover Delay
|Sets the amount of time the second prime mover sound (if enabled) will wait before changing notches.
|-
|4:23
|Rotate Bell / Bell Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Bell type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:24
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:25
|Speed-to-notch Ratio
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:26
|Momentum-to-notch Ratio
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:27
|BEMF Load Sensitivity
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:28
|Prime Mover Hysteresis
|Defines how much +/- the load/notch calculation has to be above or below the notch set points for the notch to change. Valid range of values is 0 to 2040. Every increment of 255 is a different notch up to 2040.
|-
|4:29
|Crew Alert Timer
|Sets a timer for how long the engineer must be idle for the Crew Alert alarm to sound.
'''Default = 43 (0:43) | (Approximately 2 minutes)'''
|-
|4:30
|Crew Alert Light Function
|Selects a lighting output (from 0 to 12) to turn on when the crew alert sound begins playing. For the best experience, it is recommended to also change the Lighting Effect for this output to a Flashing Light or Strobe.
A value greater than 12 disables this feature.

'''Default = 13 (Disabled)'''
|-
|4:31
|Traditional Mode Notch 1 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Idle to Notch 1 at this speed.
'''Default = 1'''
|-
|4:32
|Traditional Mode Notch 2 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 1 to Notch 2 at this speed.
'''Default = 6'''
|-
|4:33
|Traditional Mode Notch 3 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 2 to Notch 3 at this speed.
'''Default = 13'''
|-
|4:34
|Traditional Mode Notch 4 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 3 to Notch 4 at this speed.
'''Default = 20'''
|-
|4:35
|Traditional Mode Notch 5 Transition Speed
||When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 4 to Notch 5 at this speed.
'''Default = 27'''
|-
|4:36
|Traditional Mode Notch 6 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 5 to Notch 6 at this speed.
'''Default = 34'''
|-
|4:37
|Traditional Mode Notch 7 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 6 to Notch 7 at this speed.
'''Default = 41'''
|-
|4:38
|Traditional Mode Notch 8 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 7 to Notch 8 at this speed.
'''Default = 48'''
|-
|4:39
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:40
|AUX Input Loop Timer
|Controls how long a sound file triggered by the AUX Input is allowed to loop (if a looping sound). A value of 42 = approximately 3 seconds.
'''Default = 42'''
|-
|4:41
|Smoke Unit On Time
|'''***IF SUPPORTED***''' controls the PWM ratio to the smoke unit fan output.
|-
|4:42
|Smoke Unit Off Time
|'''***IF SUPPORTED'''*** controls the PWM ratio to the smoke unit fan output.
|-
|4:43-4:46
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:47
|Thermal Overload Limit
|'''***WOW501 ONLY***'''
This CV sets the temperature at which the decoder will trip the thermal overload. It is not recommended to adjust this CV unless otherwise guided to do so by TCS technical support. If the thermal overload is tripping, your decoder is overheating!
|-
|4:48
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:49
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:50
|Switching Mode Acceleration
|'''Default = 5'''
|-
|4:51
|Switching Mode Deceleration
|'''Default = 5'''
|-
|4:52
|Mainline Mode Acceleration
|'''Default = 20'''
|-
|4:53
|Mainline Mode Deceleration
|'''Default = 60'''
|}

=== Index 5.X - User Preset and Resets ===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use the two numbers in the "Value" column to program CV 203 and CV 204. Once CV 204 is written to, the reset will start or preset will be loaded. A few seconds may be required for the operation to complete.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|-
|''NOTE: It is only possible to save the current decoder settings to a User Preset by using Audio Assist.''
''Loading an un-saved user preset will be the same as performing a factory reset.''
|}

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to perform these operations, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|5:0
|0:2
|Complete Decoder Reset (Factory Reset)
|-
|5:0
|0:3
|Reset Sound Button Mappings Only
|-
|5:0
|0:4
|Reset Volumes of all Individual Sounds
|-
|5:0
|0:5
|Reset All Chuff Timing Values
|-
|5:0
|0:6
|Reset all Sound CVs (Index 4.x)
|-
|5:0
|0:7
|Reset Volumes of all Sound Types
|-
|5:0
|0:8
|Load User Preset #1
|-
|5:0
|0:9
|Load User Preset #2
|-
|5:0
|0:10
|Load User Preset #3
|}

[[Category:Indexed CV]]
[[Category:Technical Support]]

WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's

2024-08-13T16:16:23Z

Dan Mycio: added random sound and aux input mapping

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!
{{:WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's}}

==List of WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's==

===Index 1:X - Sound Button Remapping===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|1:1
|Function Button 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:2
|Function Button 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:3
|Function Button 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:4
|Function Button 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|1:28
|Function Button 28 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:29
|Random Sound 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:30
|Random Sound 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:31
|Random Sound 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:32
|Random Sound 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:33
|AUX Input Sound Mapping
|}

===Index 4:X - Sound Options===
This is the primary index which holds most of the configuration options for the WOWSound decoder, especially those pertaining to how the decoder operates.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.x "Sound Options"
!Indexed CV
!Name/Feature
!Description
|-
|4:1
|Quill Selection
|(0)* Short Quill,

(1)* Medium Quill

(2)* Long Quill

(3 - 6) Not used

(7) Randomize Quill Play Order

If a value of zero is entered, the short quill is defaulted to. In order to disable the whistle quill function, the button mapping for Grade X Quill must be overwritten or disabled.

'''Default = 7 (X:7) | Short, Medium, and Long quill enabled.'''
|-
|4:2
|Random Sound Channel #1 Frequency
|
|-
|4:3
|Random Sound Channel #2 Frequency
|
|-
|4:4
|Random Sound Channel #3 Frequency
|
|-
|4:5
|Random Sound Channel #4 Frequency
|
|-
|4:6
|Random Sounds Overall Frequency
|
|-
|4:7
|Random Sounds Cut-out Speed Step
|
|-
|4:8
|Rotate Horn Pointer / Horn Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Horn Type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:9
|Notching Mechanism
|
|-
|4:10
|Master Volume
|
|-
|4:11
|Prime Mover Type
|Uses CV 204 to select the Prime Mover number from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:12
|Automatic Sounds Selection
|(0) Crew Alert (ON if set)
(1) NU

(2) NU

(3) NU

(4) Enable Automatic Forward Whistle Quill

(5) Enable Automatic Reverse Whistle Quill

(6) Enable Automatic Stop Whistle Quill

(7) Enable Direction Change Sound (not used)

(8)* Enable Random Sound 1

(9)* Enable Random Sound 2

(10) Enable Random Sound 3

(11) Enable Random Sound 4

(12-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on except Automatic Whistles and Bell

'''Default (XXXX0011 00000000) = 768 (3:0)'''
|-
|4:13
|Brake Grinding Noise Start Speed
|Speed step at which "squeals" stop and "grinding" starts while braking. Brake grinding noises are sounds more accurate to low speeds and heavy brake application.
Range of Values is 0-126. A Value of 0 disables brake grinding and only uses brake squeal.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:14
|Dual-Enabled Functions
|For functions F0F-F12, set bit to have a function button available in both Light Mode and Sound Mode.
<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is F0F, F0R, and F8 (mute) dual-enabled.

'''Default (XXX00010 00000011) = 515 (1:3)'''
|-
|4:15
|Dynamic Brake Notch
|The notch the prime mover will go to under dynamic braking. See also: Notch Up with Dynamic Brakes feature.
|-
|4:16
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:17
|BEMF Low Calibration
|Used in the calculation to determine which notch the prime mover should be in. This calibration value is the BEMF level when running across a level surface without a load.
|-
|4:18
|BEMF High Calibration
|Used in the calculation to determine which notch the prime mover should be in. This calibration value is the BEMF level when running up a grade or otherwise pulling a heavy load.
|-
|4:19
|User Options
|(0)* Enable Manual Notching Audio Feedback
(1)* Auto Notch Down Prime Mover When Brakes Are Applied

(2) Enable Mute on startup

(3)* Enable Switching/Mainline Mode Audio Feedback

(4)* Enable Rotate Horn/Bell Audio feedback

(5)* Enable Light Mode/Sound Mode Audio feedback

(6)* Enable Audio Auto Shutoff Timer

(7)* "Momentary F2" - Improves performance while in Audio Assist with some throttles.

(8) Enable Dual Prime Movers

(9) Enable Prime Mover Notching Up with Dynamic Brakes

(10) Reverse Directional Whistles

(11) Use Jump-Notching in Switching Momentum Mode

(12)* Use Jump-Notching in Mainline Momentum Mode

(13-15) Not Used

'''Default (XXX10010 11111011) = 4859 (18:251)'''
|-
|4:20
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:21
|Automatic Audio Shut-off Timer
|This feature will automatically mute the decoder after the set period of time. To completely disable this feature, see Index 4:19 "User Options." This feature will extend the life of your decoder by muting the sound when stationary without any user input received. A value of 256 equals approximately three minutes.
Valid range of values is 1-65535

'''Default = 2600 (4:20) - Approximately 30 Minutes'''
|-
|4:22
|Dual Prime Mover Delay
|Sets the amount of time the second prime mover sound (if enabled) will wait before changing notches.
|-
|4:23
|Rotate Bell / Bell Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Bell type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:24
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:25
|Speed-to-notch Ratio
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:26
|Momentum-to-notch Ratio
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:27
|BEMF Load Sensitivity
|Used as part of a calculation to determine how many notches the prime mover should change by when accelerating or decelerating. Best when used with high momentum values. Valid range of values is 0-255. Higher values will increase the sensitivity.
|-
|4:28
|Prime Mover Hysteresis
|Defines how much +/- the load/notch calculation has to be above or below the notch set points for the notch to change. Valid range of values is 0 to 2040. Every increment of 255 is a different notch up to 2040.
|-
|4:29
|Crew Alert Timer
|Sets a timer for how long the engineer must be idle for the Crew Alert alarm to sound.
'''Default = 43 (0:43) | (Approximately 2 minutes)'''
|-
|4:30
|Crew Alert Light Function
|Selects a lighting output (from 0 to 12) to turn on when the crew alert sound begins playing. For the best experience, it is recommended to also change the Lighting Effect for this output to a Flashing Light or Strobe.
A value greater than 12 disables this feature.

'''Default = 13 (Disabled)'''
|-
|4:31
|Traditional Mode Notch 1 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Idle to Notch 1 at this speed.
'''Default = 1'''
|-
|4:32
|Traditional Mode Notch 2 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 1 to Notch 2 at this speed.
'''Default = 6'''
|-
|4:33
|Traditional Mode Notch 3 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 2 to Notch 3 at this speed.
'''Default = 13'''
|-
|4:34
|Traditional Mode Notch 4 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 3 to Notch 4 at this speed.
'''Default = 20'''
|-
|4:35
|Traditional Mode Notch 5 Transition Speed
||When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 4 to Notch 5 at this speed.
'''Default = 27'''
|-
|4:36
|Traditional Mode Notch 6 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 5 to Notch 6 at this speed.
'''Default = 34'''
|-
|4:37
|Traditional Mode Notch 7 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 6 to Notch 7 at this speed.
'''Default = 41'''
|-
|4:38
|Traditional Mode Notch 8 Transition Speed
|When using Traditional Throttle Mode, the prime mover with transition from Notch 7 to Notch 8 at this speed.
'''Default = 48'''
|-
|4:39
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:40
|AUX Input Loop Timer
|Controls how long a sound file triggered by the AUX Input is allowed to loop (if a looping sound). A value of 42 = approximately 3 seconds.
'''Default = 42'''
|-
|4:41
|Smoke Unit On Time
|'''***IF SUPPORTED***''' controls the PWM ratio to the smoke unit fan output.
|-
|4:42
|Smoke Unit Off Time
|'''***IF SUPPORTED'''*** controls the PWM ratio to the smoke unit fan output.
|-
|4:43-4:46
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:47
|Thermal Overload Limit
|'''***WOW501 ONLY***'''
This CV sets the temperature at which the decoder will trip the thermal overload. It is not recommended to adjust this CV unless otherwise guided to do so by TCS technical support. If the thermal overload is tripping, your decoder is overheating!
|-
|4:48
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:49
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:50
|Switching Mode Acceleration
|'''Default = 5'''
|-
|4:51
|Switching Mode Deceleration
|'''Default = 5'''
|-
|4:52
|Mainline Mode Acceleration
|'''Default = 20'''
|-
|4:53
|Mainline Mode Deceleration
|'''Default = 60'''
|}

[[Category:Indexed CV]]
[[Category:Technical Support]]

WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's

2024-08-13T16:15:23Z

Dan Mycio: added random sound mapping

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!
{{:WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's}}

==List of WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's==

===Index 1:X - Sound Button Remapping===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|1:1
|Function Button 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:2
|Function Button 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:3
|Function Button 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:4
|Function Button 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|1:28
|Function Button 28 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:29
|Random Sound 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:30
|Random Sound 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:31
|Random Sound 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:32
|Random Sound 4 Sound Mapping
|}

===Index 3:X - Individual Chuff Timings===
Set CV 201 to 3, and CV 202 to a value between 1 and 126 to select a speed step. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to set the chuff timing. The higher the value, the more quickly you will hear a chuff during the rotation of the motor.

'''Note: This is an advanced feature which is made easier with a graphical user interface such as JMRI.''' These settings can be done in real-time using mainline programming, and often require a lot of trial-and-error to get right. You may consider the use of a CAM to trigger your chuffs for prefectly-timed chuff sounds.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 3.X "Individual Chuff Timing"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|3:1
|Speed Step 1 Chuff Timing
|-
|3:2
|Speed Step 2 Chuff Timing
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|3:126
|Speed Step 126 Chuff Timing
|}

===Index 4:X - Sound Options===
This is the primary index which holds most of the configuration options for the WOWSound decoder, especially those pertaining to how the decoder operates.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.x "Sound Options"
!Indexed CV
!Name/Feature
!Description
|-
|4:1
|Cylinder Cox Shut-off Speed Step
|Above this speed step (of 128), the Cylinder Cocks sound will stop playing, either when turned on automatically or manually. Range of values is 0-126. A value of 0 will never allow the cylinder cocks to play; a value of 126 will never cut out the cylinder cocks automatically (must be turned off with button).

'''Default = 16'''
|-
|4:2
|Random Sound Channel #1 Frequency
|Random Sound Channel 1 is reserved for the Air Pump/Air Compressor. Higher values = higher frequency of playing.
'''Default = 215'''
|-
|4:3
|Random Sound Channel #2 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 96'''
|-
|4:4
|Random Sound Channel #3 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 64'''
|-
|4:5
|Random Sound Channel #4 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 1'''
|-
|4:6
|Random Sounds Overall Frequency
|Higher values = lower frequency of playing.

'''Default = 768 (3:0)'''
|-
|4:7
|Random Sounds Cut-out Speed Step
|When the locomotive is moving above this speed step (of 128), the Random Sounds will not play.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:8
|Rotate Whistle Pointer / Whistle Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Whistle Type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:9
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:10
|Master Volume
|
|-
|4:11
|Chuff Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Chuff Set number from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:12
|Automatic Sounds Selection
|(0)* Snifter Valves
(1)* Rod Clank

(2)* Idling Sound

(3) Enable Automatic Bell '''| VERSION 4.6 ONLY not used in V4.0 and older'''

(4) Enable Automatic Forward Whistle Quill

(5) Enable Automatic Reverse Whistle Quill

(6) Enable Automatic Stop Whistle Quill

(7)* Enable Direction Change Sound (power reverser)

(8)* Enable Random Sound 1

(9)* Enable Random Sound 2

(10)* Enable Random Sound 3

(11)* Enable Random Sound 4

(12-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on except Automatic Whistles and Bell

'''Default (XXXX1111 10000111) = 3975 (15:135)'''
|-
|4:13
|Brake Grinding Noise Start Speed
|Speed step at which "squeals" stop and "grinding" starts while braking. Brake grinding noises are sounds more accurate to low speeds and heavy brake application.
Range of Values is 0-126. A Value of 0 disables brake grinding and only uses brake squeal.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:14
|Dual-Enabled Functions
|For functions F0F-F12, set bit to have a function button available in both Light Mode and Sound Mode.
<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is F0F, F0R, and F8 (mute) dual-enabled.

'''Default (XXX00010 00000011) = 515 (2:3)'''
|-
|4:15
|''WOWSteam V4.6 ONLY''
|''See Below''
|-
|4:16
|Chuff Rate Overall Adjustment
|Percentage of adjustment to increase or decrease the chuff rate at all speed steps. Valid range of values is 1-200
'''Default = 100 (X:100)'''
|-
|4:17
|Rod Clank Set Selection
|Determines which set of Rod clank sounds are played. The number of Rod Clank sound sets is determined by the Sound List.
|-
|4:18
|Cylinder Cox Auto Turn-on Time
|Sets how long the locomotive must be stationary before the cylinder cox will come on automatically the next time the locomotive starts moving.
Valid Range of values 1 - 65535

'''Default = 256 (1:0)'''
|-
|4:19
|User Options
|(0) Enable CAM
(1) (Not Used)

(2) Enable Mute on startup

(3)* Allow Articulated Chuff to Slip

(4)* Enable Rotate whistle/bell Audio feedback

(5)* Enable Light Mode/Sound Mode Audio feedback

(6)* Enable Audio auto shutoff timer

(7)* "Momentary F2" - Improves performance while in Audio Assist with some throttles.

(8) Enable Articulated Chuff

(9) (Not Used)

(10) Reverse Directional Whistles

(11)* Enable Power Braking

(12)* Enable Momentum Mode Audio Feedback

(13)* Enable Johnson Bar Audio Feedback

(14) ''Enable "Function Pagination" |'' WOWSteam Version 4.6 ONLY

(15) [reserved]

'''*Default (X0111000 11111000) = 14584 (56:248)'''
|-
|4:20
|Articulated Chuff Slip Rate
|Determines how frequently articulated chuffs slip in and out of sync. The higher the number the more frequently it happens.
Valid values are 0-255

'''Default = 240 (X:240)'''
|-
|4:21
|Automatic Audio Shut-off Timer
|This feature will automatically mute the decoder after the set period of time. To completely disable this feature, see Index 4:19 "User Options." This feature will extend the life of your decoder by muting the sound when stationary without any user input received. A value of 256 equals approximately three minutes.
Valid range of values is 1-65535

'''Default = 1200 (4:176) - Approximately 15 Minutes'''
|-
|4:22
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:23
|Minimum Chuff Volume
|This setting will set the minimum volume the chuff volume can fall to, regardless of the BEMF/load. Changing this setting will prevent the sound from behaving prototypical, but can force the decoder to always "chuff chuff chuff" as long as it is moving.
Valid range of values is 0 - 32767

'''Default = 0 (chuff/throttle can shut off completely)'''
|-
|4:24
|Rotate Bell / Bell Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Bell type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:25
|Grade Crossing Quill Options
|TCS records multiple grade crossing quills, and puts up to three of them in the decoder. This CV's selection controls which quills will play when the Grade X Quill Button is pressed.
(0)* Short Quill,

(1)* Medium Quill

(2)* Long Quill

(3 - 6) Not used

(7) Randomize Quill Play Order

If a value of zero is entered, the short quill is defaulted to. In order to disable the whistle quill function, the button mapping for Grade X Quill must be overwritten or disabled.

'''Default = 7 (X:7)'''
|-
|4:26
|Cylinder Cox Set
|Determines which set of cox sounds are active
''NOTE: Using CV programming to assign a cylinder cox sound to a button will put the cylinder cocks sound type on that button, but might not set up the correct set. I.E. if you remap the "cylinder cox set 2" sound onto a button, but don't change this CV, that button will play a "cylinder cox set 1" instead. Changing this CV will affect any button or buttons already mapped with the Cylinder Cox sound type.''

Valid values are 1-2

'''Default = 1 (X:1)'''
|-
|4:27
|Idling Sounds Selection
|Determines which "Idling Sounds" sound plays while the locomotive is idle.
Valid values are determined by the Sound List.
|-
|4:28
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:29
|Chuff Volume Change Time
|Controls how fast the chuff volume can change from one level to another in response to a change in the load. This setting effectively adds "hysteresis" to the chuff volume if you feel the locomotive's chuff sound response is too sensitive and changes too quickly. A change of "1" adds or subtracts approximately 0.5 milliseconds to the responsiveness. This setting only affects the responsiveness when coasting at a set speed, and does not affect the performance and responsiveness when changing speed. See 4:32 "Chuff Volume Velocity Factor" for more info.
'''Default = 4500 (17:148) | (Approximately 2.25 seconds transition time from min to max)'''
|-
|4:30
|BEMF Low Calibration (Forward)
|
|-
|4:31
|BEMF High Calibration (Forward)
|
|-
|4:32
|Chuff Volume Velocity Factor
|This CV controls the effects accelerating and decelerating have upon the chuff volume. The higher the value the more drastic the change in volume from accelerating and decelerating.

'''Default = 612 (2:100) | (Approximately 0.3 seconds to transition from min to max)'''
|-
|4:33
|BEMF Low Calibration (Reverse)
|
|-
|4:34
|BEMF High Calibration (Reverse)
|
|-
|4:35
|Rod Clank Volume from BEMF
|At the calculated minimum BEMF volume (BEMF Low Calibration) rod clank will be at full volume (rod clank type volume) and will fade away as the load increases. This CV is a percentage above the BEMF Low Calibration value that the rod clank will cut out.
Valid values are 0-100

'''Default = 30 (X:30)'''
|-
|
|
|
|-
|4:42
|Throttle Mode Selection
|0 = Traditional Throttle Mode
1 = Prototype Throttle Mode
This setting controls how the chuff sound behaves:
In "traditional" mode, the chuff volume is constant and determined by the "Chuff" Sound Type Volume. Snifters will play at their maximum programmable volume when the throttle is shut off, rod clank will not play at all.

In "Prototype" throttle mode, the chuff volume is determined by the velocity, speed, BEMF/load, and calibration settings. The snifter valve and rod clank volume are also controlled dynamically by prototype throttle mode. Snifters will play when the throttle is deemed to be "off" and rod clank will start playing when the throttle is deemed to be appropriate (See Index 4:35)

'''Default = 1 (Prototype Throttle Mode)'''
|-
|4:43-4:46
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:47
|Thermal Overload Limit
|'''***WOW501 ONLY***'''
This CV sets the temperature at which the decoder will trip the thermal overload. It is not recommended to adjust this CV unless otherwise guided to do so by TCS technical support. If the thermal overload is tripping, your decoder is overheating!
|-
|4:48
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Regulated Supply Mode
|Default = 431
|-
|4:49
|''WOWSteam V4.6 ONLY''
|''See Below''
|-
|4:50
|Switching Mode Acceleration
|Default = 5
|-
|4:51
|Switching Mode Deceleration
|Default = 5
|-
|4:52
|Mainline Mode Acceleration
|Default = 20
|-
|4:53
|Mainline Mode Deceleration
|Default = 60
|}

==New Indexed CV's Unique to WOWSteam Version 4.6==
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.X "Sound Options" (NEW!)
!Indexed CV
!Description
!
|-
| colspan="3" |NOTE: ALL OF THE INDEXED CV NUMBERS LISTED ABOVE IN THE SAME PRIMARY INDEX (4:X) STILL APPLY. THE CV'S LISTED IN THIS TABLE ARE ADDITIONS OR REVISIONS TO THE PREVIOUS TABLE
|-
|4:15
|DC Mode Sounds Selection
|(0)* DC mode automatic bell enabled
(1)* DC mode Forward Sound

(2)* DC mode Reverse Sound

(3)* DC mode stop sound

(4)* DC mode quill enabled

(5-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on.

'''Default (XXXXXXXX XXX11111) = 31 (X:31)'''
|-
|4:41
|DC Mode Chuff Volume
|Sets the chuff volume level while in DC mode. If you are using a high power speaker and an power pack with poor regulation, loud chuffs can cause a significant drop in voltage. Lowering the maximum chuff volume can alleviate this issue.
'''Default = 5888'''
|-
|4:43
|DC Mode Start Voltage - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2400'''
|-
|4:44
|DC Mode Bell Cutout Voltage - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2525'''
|-
|4:45
|Automatic Bell Cutout Speed
|DCC speed step above which the bell will stop playing (when enabled to play automatically).
'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:46
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 600'''
|-
|4:48
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 431'''
|-
|4:49
|Track Voltage BEMF Offset Factor
|'''Default = 0'''
|-
|4:54
|DC Mode Max ADC Value - Regulated Supply Mode
|Sets the expected maximum ADC value the decoder can expect to see when running in Analog mode. This gives the decoder a range that can be used to determine which speed to go depending on the track voltage. By default=, this CV is set to the maximum resolution size, which means the decoder will max out at about 14.5V on the rails. This CV will not help for DC power packs with higher max outputs than 15V, but for max outputs below 15V, the speed step range can be tuned; additionally, going above the ADC range, or increasing this CV, can limit the speed step at full throttle. This often does sound nicer, and gives more of a range in the "nice chuff rate zone" where speed is limited but enjoy-ability is increased.
Range of values is 0-4250. Recommended absolute minimum value is 2800.

''This CV MUST NOT be less than or equal to the Motor Start Voltage''

'''Default = 4250 (16:154)'''
|-
|4:66
|DC Mode Start Voltage - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2816'''
|-
|4:67
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 1250'''
|-
|4:68
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 12'''
|-
|4:69
|DC Mode Bell Cutout Voltage - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2500'''
|-
|4:70
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 1000'''
|-
|4:72
|DC Mode Speed Step Hysteresis - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 8'''
|}

[[Category:Indexed CV]]
[[Category:Technical Support]]

Rapido Bay Area Rapid Transit (BART) Subway - HO Scale

2024-07-25T20:28:23Z

Dan Mycio:

Information on this wiki page provides particular details about this model not found in the quick start guide.
{{Infobox locomotive
|name=Rapido BART Subway
|Manufacturer=Rapido
|Scale=HO-Scale
|Stock Number=
|Power Type=DCC Dual Mode w/Sound
|Release Date=First Run: July 2024
|Retail Price=$339.95 USD
|Decoder Type=WOWElectric (OEM)
|Version=5
|Sound Set=1
|Functions=5
|Builder=First Delivery A/B - Rohr Industries C1 Delivery - Alsthom (Alstom) C2 Delivery - Morrison Knudsen AC Traction Rebuild - ADtranz
|Build Date=1968-1996 First Delivery A&B 1968-1975 C1 Delivery 1987-1989 C2 Delivery 1994-1996 A&B Rebuild 1998-2002
|Motive Power=Third-Rail Electric
|Power Output=
|Prototype Link=[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bay_Area_Rapid_Transit]
|image=BART_A-car_Thumb.jpg}}

==Overview==
This page details features and other information regarding Rapido Trains’ San Fransisco Bay Area Rapid Transit (BART) Subway cars. This model has been faithfully recreated in HO-scale using modern 3D scanning technology, as well as original design documentation. This model includes a TCS WOWSound® decoder with authentic sound files recorded from the prototype, and on-board Keep-Alive® device for uninterrupted operation, even over dirty track. The WOWSound® electric locomotive sound package includes sounds for horn, traction motor, air compressor, HVAC, coupler close/release, brake release and application, and many more!

Loaded with prototypical features, the Bay Area Rapid Transit cars in HO-scale from Rapido Trains and TCS brings all the sights and sounds of yesterday's tomorrow to your layout!

Features include:

*DCC sound-equipped for sound, speed, direction, and lighting control
*Dual-mode NMRA-compliant decoder operates sound, motor, and lights on DCC or DC power.
*TCS true CD-quality audio with 16-bit depth resolution at 44,100Hz
*Authentic sounds recorded directly from the real thing
*On-board Keep-Alive® device that keeps your engine running during power interruptions due to dirty track or loss of electrical contact
*Directional headlight and marker lights
*Hostling Lights (C-car only)
*Interior lights operated by "magic wand"
*Forward-mounted "high light", with authentic amber color
*TCS' industry-leading "quiet drive" Back EMF motor control for superior slow-speed performance and load compensation
*User-loadable speed table options (3-point, 28-point, and 126-point curves)
*Two select-able horn options: "Beeper" horn and emergency air horn
*Two configurable [[WOWSound Momentum Function|Momentum Modes]]
*Separately-applied windshield wipers, grab irons and other detail parts
*MPH-accurate speed curve up to 80mph* (*Results will vary due to electrical and mechanical tolerances. Assumes 15V DCC track voltage.)

==Specific Features==

====DC Mode Operation====
When operating in DC mode, the decoder will sit still and silent until a sufficient track voltage is present. Once the minimum voltage is met, the idling sounds will turn on. As the voltage continues to increase, the locomotive will begin to move once the next threshold is met. A directional horn quill will play automatically based on the direction of travel. Users may trigger a station approach horn quill by quickly adjusting the track voltage up and back down quickly. The directional horn blasts and quill are enabled by default and are controlled by the DC Mode Sounds CV. Program CV 181 with a value of 0 to disable all of the automatic horn sounds on DC power. Other DC mode operational behaviors such as the startup voltage can be adjusted using the DC Mode Indexed CVs which are detailed in the Indexed CVs section below.

By default, all available lighting functions will turn on when DC power is present. All lighting outputs will operate the same lighting effects and directional control in the same way as on DCC power. Lighting configurations for DC can be changed using DCC CV programming. See the Standard CV section below for more details.

==== Consisting ====
In real-life operation, all of the BART cars (be they A, B, or C) are powered and contribute to the tractive effort. In the model, this is limited to the A and C cars; regardless, it is normal and expected that users will operate multiple powered cars in a push-pull configuration. There are multiple ways to go about creating a consist of multiple decoders. The most simplistic way to do this is to start by assigning unique DCC addresses to each powered unit, and then using a TCS command station to create a consist. The individual cars can then be configured exactly to your liking thereafter. Please see our documentation on [[CS-105#Consisting|Consisting with the TCS Command Station]] for more information.

Alternatively, many configuration options are available via CVs. We recommend following these steps to set up a [[CV 19 Consisting|CV 19 Consist]]:

# Assign unique DCC addresses to each powered unit
# Program the CV 19 Consist Address of all units in the consist to the same number (be sure to use the correct CV value for forward and reverse direction).
# Program CV 21 in each unit to 165
# Program CV 22 in each unit to 3

To remove one or more units from the consist, program CV 19 to 0.

====Traction Motor Sound Features====
The BART decoder features prototypical traction noises like “traction motor” and “traction motor chopper" for the as-delivered DC powered traction motors. TCS recorded the DC traction sounds from C-Car #339 prior to its decommissioning. The sound package in the BART decoder authentically recreates the on-board experience of the DC-powered BART cars.

There are two elements that make up the traction sound on the DC-powered cars - the traction motor and gearbox, and the "chopper." DC traction motors have a dramatically different sound, as they do not have the audible 'stages' of acceleration as with AC traction motors and inverters. The DC traction motors on the BART cars are most audible when traveling at very high speeds where the gearbox whine becomes prevalent. As the speed changes, the traction motor will change its pitch and dynamics to an appropriate sound based on the speed.

The most prevalent sound in these cars is not the motors themselves, but instead the "chopper" which is an analog control module which converts the incoming power from the third rail into an appropriate DC voltage and current for the set speed. This control module is very clearly audible inside the car, and externally as well. Since the module is constantly working to regulate the power to the motor, the audible sound will fade in and out based on the conditions the specific car is under. Any time the car needs to change speed, either accelerating ''or'' decelerating, the 'chopper' sound becomes louder; whereas while coasting at a consistent speed, the sound fades down to a low level, and sometimes becoming inaudible. TCS has faithfully recreated this behavior by including the 'chopper' sound as a separate sound file which plays at a variable volume. This variable volume is based on the load, as well as the acceleration and deceleration. When changing speed to accelerate or decelerate, the sound will play at its loudest (as set by the sound type volume). When coasting (traveling at a set speed), the traction chopper volume will vary based on the load on the motor.

====High Speed Sounds====
The BART decoder features a brand new high speed sounds feature. Once the car reaches a set speed, the decoder will randomly start playing sounds heard when the BART cars are traveling at high speed. This includes the sounds heard when traveling underground through a tunnel, as well as when running above ground on the raised rail platforms. The decoder will select a random high speed sound to play, play it for a random amount of time, and then wait a random amount of time before playing another high speed sound. If the speed drops below the minimum speed for high speed sounds to play, the sound will stop playing immediately. This feature is enabled automatically on every power cycle, but can be manually disabled and re-enabled by using Button 20. You can configure the speed at which the high speed sounds will start playing using CV 194.

====Station Announcement and Whoosh Sound Features====
The BART decoder has two types of station announcements. Both of these announcement types operate by randomly selecting and playing one of the available sounds whenever the button is pressed.

*The first type was recorded from a real BART locomotive operator who announced all of the lines (colors) and destinations over the intercom within the cars. These announcements would be spoken by the operator before departing from a station.
*The second type of announcements were recorded at a BART station. Each of these announcements feature the "robot voice" which would be heard while waiting on the platform at a BART station.

The BART decoder features seven unique "Whoosh" runby sounds which include all different consist lengths from 4 to 10 cars. The Whoosh feature randomly selects and plays one of the available sounds whenever the button is pressed. Pressing the button a second time while a sound is playing should stop the sound currently playing.

====Train Brake Options====
The BART decoder feature a new, configurable braking mode. By default the BART decoder ships with the new, single-stage braking mode enabled. In this mode, a single button is used to apply and release the brakes. Pressing the button once to "on" will apply the brakes; Pressing the brake button a second time will release the brakes. In the real-life operation of the BART system, most of the braking is done regeneratively using the traction motors, with only the final ~10mph of speed being cut off by the disc brakes. The braking rate in legacy brake mode is determined by the value in [[CV 183]].

Users familiar with other WOWSound decoders will likely be familiar with our normal [[Train Brake]] feature which has a 5-stage braking system. With the 5-stage brake system, a separate brake application and brake release button are used. Each press of the brake application button increases the braking force.

To restore the 5-stage braking system, change the value of [[Electric Version 5:CV 61|CV 61]] to disable Legacy Braking Mode.

By default, the BART decoder is programmed with momentum for acceleration and deceleration which we believe accurately represents the regenerative braking deceleration rate. You can change the momentum on-the-fly by mapping the [[WOWSound Momentum Function|Momentum Function]] to a button. You can also make use of our [[Variable Momentum]] feature to make dynamic acceleration and deceleration curves based on the current speed, just like the real thing! With this feature, you can set a faster deceleration rate for high speeds and faster acceleration for low speeds which can add even more realism!

====New Lighting Features====
The BART decoder features an optional "high high", positioned centrally on the front of the car just below the roof line. Both A cars and C cars had these lights installed as a safety feature during the retrofit period between 1998 and 2002; however, their installation was not universal and is based on the road number. In operation, these lights are always on for each end unit as long as the locomotive has power and is in operation. Mid-train units will not have this or any lights on. On the C cars, this light is placed dead-center above the door in the front of the car; whereas on the A cars, the light is slightly offset away from the window of the operator's cabin.

TCS has implemented automatic and manual control modes for the high beam. In automatic mode, the high light will turn on as long as the headlight/marker lights are on. To manually take control of this light function, you can use CV 37 to remap the function control for F3. Any decimal value programmed into CV 37 will remap the high light control to that button. To only allow the high light to be active on the forward-facing unit, program CV 53 on BOTH end units to 0. To disable the high light, you can program CV 53 with a value of 255.

In order to use this function of the decoder, you must install the physical hardware for the high light onto the body of the A or C car. Please refer to the instructions from Rapido on how to do this.

The BART decoder also features interior lighting. By default, the interior lights are controlled using the Rapido "magic wand" which has a magnet inside. This magnet will trigger an on-board "[[wikipedia:Hall_effect|Hall Effect]]" sensor which will then toggle the lights on or off. The location of the sensor is immediately behind the cab end, in the middle of the body. To trigger the sensor, swipe a magnet in any direction across the sensor.

The brightness of the interior light can be changed by adjusting the value of indexed CVs 16.6.439 and 16.6.441. The brightness value as a percentage of 0-100 is held in NMRA indexed. 0 is off and 100 is maximum brightness. Both of these need to be changed to the desired 0-100 value. The default brightness is 80 percent.

The status of the interior lights (as well as all other light functions) will be remembered through a power cycle unless otherwise turned off or disabled. The interior lighting may be programmed to also accept a DCC function command. In order to remap the interior lights to a DCC function button, simply reprogram CV 36 to a decimal value from 0-28. To remove the operation of the light from the magnetic sensor, you must also change the [[Diesel Version 5:CV 16.0.292|AUX Input Light Mapping indexed CV 16.0.292]].

====AUX Input Sound Mapping====
Optionally, a user may choose to map a sound function to the magnetic sensor. By default, no sound is mapped to the sensor, and it is used exclusively to control the interior lights, as described above. Some examples of valid configurations are listed below:

*If an individual sound (example: Station Arriving Horn Quill) is mapped to the AUX input, that sound will play every time the sensor is triggered.
*If a sound type with two elements (example: Doors Open/Close) is mapped to the AUX input, the sound played will toggle each time the sensor is triggered. In this example, the first trigger will open the doors, and the second trigger will close the doors.
*If a sound type with a looping element (example: Air Compressor) is mapped to the AUX input, the sound will play for a designated amount of time. The duration of the sound can be set using CV 173. The value is 172 divided by 2 is the number of seconds the looping sound will play before it shuts off.
*If the "Mute" sound is mapped to the AUX input, the decoder will mute until the next time the input is triggered or a power cycle occurs.

If you map a sound to the AUX input, such as the Doors, you should remove the interior light function control from the AUX input and assign it to another DCC function using CV 36 and Indexed CV 16.0.292

==== RailCom® ====
This decoder features the DCC Bi-directional communications standard, RailCom®, as an enabled feature by default. RailCom support requires both the decoder and the Command Station to include the supporting hardware and software. Examples of RailCom-enabled command stations include the TCS [[CS-105]] and [[LT-50]]. Some features of RailCom include mainline CV read-back, advanced block detection, and receipt confirmation for function commands. RailCom is a constantly evolving technology whose scope of features has yet to be fully realized.

RailCom can be completely disabled by changing [[Diesel Version 5:CV 29|CV 29]]. Specific (supported) RailCom features can be selectively Enabled or Disabled by modifying [[CV 28]].

''RailCom® is a registered trademark of Lenz Elektronik GmbH.''

==Button Mappings==
The tables below outline the default sounds and lights assigned to DCC function buttons for this particular decoder from the factory.
{| class="wikitable"
|+
BART Function Map for Sounds and Lights
! colspan="4" |Button Mappings
|-
|Function Button
|Sound Function
|Light Function
|Fx #
|-
|0
|(''None)''
|Headlight / Markers / High Light
|F0F & F0R & F3
|-
|1
|Open/Close Doors
|
|
|-
|2
|Horn - Playable
|
|
|-
|3
|Flange Squeal
|
|
|-
|4
|Station Announcements (Intercom)
|
|
|-
|5
|Station Announcements (Robot Voice)
|
|
|-
|6
|Brake On/Off
|
|
|-
|7
|(''None)''
|Hostling Lights On/Off (C-Car Only)
|F1
|-
|8
|Mute / Un-mute All Sounds
|
|
|-
|9
|Whoosh (Runby)
|
|
|-
|10
|Horn - Station Approach Quill (Random)
|
|
|-
|11
|Horn - Forward Quill
|
|
|-
|12
|Horn - Stop Quill
|
|
|-
|13
|Horn - Reverse Quill
|
|
|-
|14
|Couple
|
|
|-
|15
|Uncouple
|
|
|-
|16
|HVAC (Idling) Sounds On/Off
|
|
|-
|17
|Air Compressor On/Off
|
|
|-
|18
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|19
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|20
|Enable/Disable High Speed Sounds
|
|
|-
|21
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|22
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|23
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|24
|Change Horn Type
|
|
|-
|25
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|26
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|27
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|28
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|AUX
|(''None)''
|Interior Lights On/Off
|F2
|}
{| class="wikitable"
|+
! colspan="2" |Random Sound Mapping
|-
|Random
Sound Channel
|Sound
Played
|-
|1
|Air Compressor (Type 1)
|-
|2
|(''None)''
|-
|3
|(''None)''
|-
|4
|(''None)''
|}

==Sound List==

===Complete List of Sounds===
''To change sound mappings, use indexed CV 16.4.X See the Sound Mapping Indexed CVs table in the Indexed CVs section below for more information.''

Set CV 31 to 16. Set CV 32 to 4. Then, use CVs 257 through 324 to select the button and the sound you would like to map to the button.
{| class="wikitable"
!Sound Type
!Sound Number
!High Byte
!Low Byte
!Sound Name
|-
|Air Compressor
|0
|0
|0
|BART Air Compressor Type 1
|-
|
|1
|0
|1
|BART Air Compressor Type 2
|-
|Brake Squeal
|3
|0
|3
|Brake Squeal Sounds *
|-
|High Speed Tunnel Sounds
|33
|0
|33
|Tunnel Sounds
|-
|High Speed High Rail Sounds
|34
|0
|34
|High Rail Sounds
|-
|Coupler Clank
|35
|0
|35
|BART Coupling 1
|-
|
|36
|0
|36
|BART Coupling 2
|-
|
|37
|0
|37
|BART Uncoupling
|-
|Door Sounds
|38
|0
|38
|BART Door Open/Close
|-
|Flange Squeal
|39
|0
|39
|Flange Squeal 1
|-
|
|40
|0
|40
|Flange Squeal 2
|-
|Horn Forward Quill *
|41
|0
|41
|
|-
|Horn (Playable) *
|43
|0
|43
|
|-
|Horn Station Arriving Quill *
|45
|0
|45
|
|-
|Horn Reverse Quill *
|51
|0
|51
|
|-
|Horn Stop Quill *
|56
|0
|56
|
|-
|Idling Sounds
|57
|0
|57
|BART Idle (HVAC) Sounds
|-
|Momentum Feature
|58
|0
|58
|[[WOWSound Momentum Function|Momentum Feature]]
|-
|Mute
|60
|0
|60
|Mute All Sounds
|-
|Rotate Feature
|61
|0
|61
|[[WOWSound Rotate Feature|Rotate Feature]]
|-
|Station Announcements (Intercom) *
|63
|0
|63
|
|-
|Station Announcements (Robot Voice) *
|73
|0
|73
|
|-
|Whoosh *
|84
|0
|84
|BART Runby Sounds
|}
'''* For sound types marked with this symbol, use the listed sound number to map the sound type to a button; otherwise special randomization elements may stop functioning, or expected behavior of the sound type may not function properly.'''

===Horn===
{| class="wikitable"
!CV 120 Value
!Active Horn
|-
|0 (default)
|BART "Beeper"
|-
|1
|BART Emergency Air Horn
|}

==Standard CVs==
The BART decoder follows the motor and lighting CVs as outlined in the Version 5 Standard CV list. Listed below are common CVs which may be modified or referenced by the user.
{| class="wikitable"
|+Standard CVs (1-256) and Default Values for BART Decoder
!CV Number
!CV Value
!Description
|-
![[CV 1]]
|3
|2-digit DCC Address
|-
![[CV 2]]
|0
|3-point Speed Table - Start
|-
![[CV 3]]
|40
|Acceleration
|-
![[CV 4]]
|40
|Deceleration
|-
![[CV 5]]
|0
|3-point Speed Table - Max
|-
![[CV 6]]
|0
|3-point Speed Table - Mid
|-
![[CV 7]] *
|5
|TCS Decoder Architecture Version
|-
![[CV 8]] *
|153
|TCS Manufacturer ID
|-
![[Electric Version 5:CV 11|CV 11]]
|0
|Keep Alive® Timeout (Disabled by Default)
|-
![[CV 13]]
|7
|DC Mode lights F1-F8
|-
![[CV 14]]
|3
|DC Mode Lights F0 F/R & F9-F12
|-
![[CV 15]]
|2
|Decoder Lock KEY
|-
![[CV 16]]
|2
|Decoder Lock LOCK
|-
![[CV 17]]
|192
|4-digit DCC Address MSB
|-
![[CV 18]]
|0
|4-digit DCC Address LSB
|-
![[CV 19]]
|0
|DCC Consist Address
|-
![[CV 21]]
|255
|Consist Function Button Control (F1-F8)
|-
![[CV 22]]
|255
|Consist Function Button Control (F0 & F9-F12)
|-
![[Version 5:CV 28|CV 28]]
|7
|RailCom® Configuration
|-
![[Electric Version 5:CV 29|CV 29]]
|14
|User Configuration CV #1
|-
![[Version 5:Indexed CVs|CV 31]]
|16
|Indexed CV Selector - High Byte
|-
![[Version 5:Indexed CVs|CV 32]]
|0
|Indexed CV Selector - Low Byte
|-
!CV 33
|0
|Function Button Remapping - F0F
|-
!CV 34
|0
|Function Button Remapping - F0R
|-
!CV 35
|7
|Function Button Remapping - F1
|-
!CV 36
|255
|Function Button Remapping - F2
|-
!CV 37
|0
|Function Button Remapping - F3
|-
!CV 49
|0
|Lighting Effect - F0F
|-
!CV 50
|16
|Lighting Effect - F0R
|-
!CV 51
|32
|Lighting Effect - F1
|-
!CV 52
|44
|Lighting Effect - F2
|-
!CV 53
|32
|Lighting Effect - F3
|-
![[Electric Version 5:CV 61|CV 61]]
|37
|User Configuration CV #2
|-
![[CV 66]]
|128
|Motor Trim - Forward
|-
!CV 67 to
CV 94
|
|28-point Speed Table
|-
![[CV 95]]
|128
|Motor Trim - Reverse
|-
!CV 105
|0
|User Identification CV #1
|-
!CV 106
|0
|User Identification CV #2
|-
!CV 109
|3
|TCS Decoder Extended Identification - High Byte
|-
!CV 110
|0
|TCS Decoder Extended Identification - Mid Byte
|-
!CV 111
|1
|TCS Decoder Extended Identification - Low Byte
|-
!CV 118 *
|0
|Traction Motor Type Selection
|-
!CV 120
|0
|Horn Type Selection (0 or 1 valid for this project)
|-
!CV 141
|200
|Random Sound 1 (Air Compressor) Frequency
|-
!CV 145
|100
|Random Sound Cutout Frequency
|-
!CV 152
|10
|Traction motor Chopper Low Load Calibration
|-
!CV 154
|85
|Traction motor Chopper High Load Calibration
|-
!CV 173
|20
|AUX Input Looping Sound Timer (x/2 = Seconds)
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 176|CV 176]]
|240
|User Sound Options CV #1
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 177|CV 177]]
|160
|User Sound Options CV #2
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 178|CV 178]]
|0
|Automatic DCC Sound Options #1
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 179|CV 179]]
|15
|Automatic DCC Sound Options #2
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 181|CV 181]]
|255
|DC Mode Sound Configuration
|-
!CV 183
|32
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 1
|-
!CV 184
|26
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 2
|-
!CV 185
|16
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 3
|-
!CV 186
|8
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 4
|-
!CV 187
|3
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 5
|-
!CV 194
|70
|High Speed Sounds Start Speed (of 126)
|-
![[CV 248]] *
|1
|Sound Set Revision Identifier. First Run = 1
|-
![[CV 249]] *
|183
|Decoder Hardware Model Identifier
|}
''* Note: CVs marked with this symbol are read-only and cannot be modified.''

''Note: Programming CV 8 with a value of 8 OR 2 will perform a factory reset.''
{| class="wikitable"
|+Volume Control CVs and Default Values for BART Decoder
!CV Number
!CV Value
!Description
|-
!CV 195
|15
|Volume - Air Compressor
|-
!CV 197
|0
|Volume - Brake Release
|-
!CV 198
|50
|Volume - Brake Squeal
|-
!CV 201
|100
|Volume - High Speed Sounds
|-
!CV 202
|15
|Volume - Coupler Clank
|-
!CV 205
|100
|Volume - Doors
|-
!CV 207
|50
|Volume - Flange Squeal
|-
!CV 208
|100
|Volume - Horn Forward Quill
|-
!CV 209
|100
|Volume - Horn (Playable)
|-
!CV 210
|100
|Volume - Horn Station Arrival Quill
|-
!CV 211
|100
|Volume - Horn Reverse Quill
|-
!CV 213
|100
|Volume - Horn Stop Quill
|-
!CV 215
|15
|Volume - Idling (HVAC) Sounds
|-
!CV 225
|80
|Volume - Station Announcements (Intercom)
|-
!CV 226
|80
|Volume - Station Announcements (Robot Voice)
|-
!CV 227
|75
|Max Volume - Traction Motor
|-
!CV 228
|70
|Max Volume - DC "Chopper" Sound
|-
!CV 230
|80
|Volume - "Whoosh"
|}
''Note: All Volume CVs have a valid range of values from 0 to 100''

==Indexed CVs==
The BART decoder uses a selection of "Indexed CVs" for advanced configuration. Below is a list of the available indexed CVs. For a fill list of Indexed CVs with detailed descriptions, [[Version 5:Indexed CVs|CLICK HERE]].
{| class="wikitable"
|+BART Indexed CVs
!CV 31
!CV 32
!High Byte CV
!Value
!Low Byte CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|16
|0
|262
|0
|261
|5
|DC Mode Horn Quill Delta - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|264
|0
|263
|75
|DC Mode Motor Start Voltage - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|266
|0
|265
|10
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|268
|0
|267
|116
|DC Mode Max Voltage - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|276
|0
|275
|10
|DC Mode Horn Quill Delta - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|278
|0
|277
|100
|DC Mode Motor Start Voltage - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|280
|0
|279
|29
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|282
|0
|281
|180
|DC Mode Max Voltage - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|292
|0
|291
|8
|Light Function Mapping - AUX Input
|-
! colspan="7" |Interior Light Brightness Control (Constant Dim)
|-
|16
|6
|440
|0
|439
|80
|Interior Light Brightness
|-
|16
|6
|442
|0
|441
|80
|Interior Light Brightness
|}
The values shown in the Sound Mapping table below correspond to the Sound Numbers in the Sound List for this project.
{| class="wikitable"
|+Sound Mapping Indexed CVs
!CV 31
!CV 32
!High Byte CV
!Value
!Low Byte CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|16
|4
|258
|255
|257
|255
|Sound Mapping - F0
|-
|16
|4
|260
|0
|259
|38
|Sound Mapping - F1
|-
|16
|4
|262
|0
|261
|43
|Sound Mapping - F2
|-
|16
|4
|264
|0
|263
|39
|Sound Mapping - F3
|-
|16
|4
|266
|0
|265
|63
|Sound Mapping - F4
|-
|16
|4
|268
|0
|267
|73
|Sound Mapping - F5
|-
|16
|4
|270
|0
|269
|3
|Sound Mapping - F6
|-
|16
|4
|272
|255
|271
|255
|Sound Mapping - F7
|-
|16
|4
|274
|0
|273
|60
|Sound Mapping - F8
|-
|16
|4
|276
|0
|275
|84
|Sound Mapping - F9
|-
|16
|4
|278
|0
|277
|45
|Sound Mapping - F10
|-
|16
|4
|280
|0
|291
|41
|Sound Mapping - F11
|-
|16
|4
|282
|0
|281
|55
|Sound Mapping - F12
|-
|16
|4
|284
|0
|283
|51
|Sound Mapping - F13
|-
|16
|4
|286
|0
|285
|35
|Sound Mapping - F14
|-
|16
|4
|288
|0
|287
|37
|Sound Mapping - F15
|-
|16
|4
|290
|0
|289
|57
|Sound Mapping - F16
|-
|16
|4
|292
|0
|291
|1
|Sound Mapping - F17
|-
|16
|4
|294
|255
|293
|255
|Sound Mapping - F18
|-
|16
|4
|298
|0
|297
|33
|Sound Mapping - F20
|-
|16
|4
|300
|0
|299
|34
|Sound Mapping - F21
|-
|16
|4
|302
|255
|301
|255
|Sound Mapping - F22
|-
|16
|4
|304
|255
|303
|255
|Sound Mapping - F23
|-
|16
|4
|306
|0
|305
|61
|Sound Mapping - F24
|-
|16
|4
|308
|255
|307
|255
|Sound Mapping - F25
|-
|16
|4
|310
|255
|309
|255
|Sound Mapping - F26
|-
|16
|4
|314
|255
|313
|255
|Sound Mapping - F28
|-
|16
|4
|316
|0
|315
|0
|Sound Mapping - R1
|-
|16
|4
|318
|255
|317
|255
|Sound Mapping - R2
|-
|16
|4
|320
|255
|319
|255
|Sound Mapping - R4
|-
|16
|4
|322
|255
|321
|255
|Sound Mapping - R4
|-
|16
|4
|324
|255
|323
|255
|Sound Mapping - AUX
|}

Rapido Bay Area Rapid Transit (BART) Subway - HO Scale

2024-07-23T18:27:04Z

Dan Mycio:

Information on this wiki page provides particular details about this model not found in the quick start guide.
{{Infobox locomotive
|name=Rapido BART Subway
|Manufacturer=Rapido
|Scale=HO-Scale
|Stock Number=
|Power Type=DCC Dual Mode w/Sound
|Release Date=First Run: July 2024
|Retail Price=$339.95 USD
|Decoder Type=WOWElectric (OEM)
|Version=5
|Sound Set=1
|Functions=5
|Builder=First Delivery A/B - Rohr Industries C1 Delivery - Alsthom (Alstom) C2 Delivery - Morrison Knudsen AC Traction Rebuild - ADtranz
|Build Date=1968-1996 First Delivery A&B 1968-1975 C1 Delivery 1987-1989 C2 Delivery 1994-1996 A&B Rebuild 1998-2002
|Motive Power=Third-Rail Electric
|Power Output=
|Prototype Link=[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bay_Area_Rapid_Transit]
|image=BART_A-car_Thumb.jpg}}

==Overview==
This page details features and other information regarding Rapido Trains’ San Fransisco Bay Area Rapid Transit (BART) Subway cars. This model has been faithfully recreated in HO-scale using modern 3D scanning technology, as well as original design documentation. This model includes a TCS WOWSound® decoder with authentic sound files recorded from the prototype, and on-board Keep-Alive® device for uninterrupted operation, even over dirty track. The WOWSound® electric locomotive sound package includes sounds for horn, traction motor, air compressor, HVAC, coupler close/release, brake release and application, and many more!

Loaded with prototypical features, the SCV-42 Charger in HO-scale from Bachmann Trains brings all the sights and sounds of Siemens' sleek new diesel-electric locomotive to your layout.

Features include:

*DCC sound-equipped for sound, speed, direction, and lighting control
*Dual-mode NMRA-compliant decoder operates sound, motor, and lights on DCC or DC power.
*TCS true CD-quality audio with 16-bit depth resolution at 44,100Hz
*Authentic and prototypical sounds
*On-board Keep-Alive® device that keeps your engine running during power interruptions due to dirty track or loss of electrical contact
*Directional headlight and marker lights
*Interior lights operated by "magic wand"
*Forward-mounted "high light", with authentic amber color
*TCS' industry-leading "quiet drive" Back EMF motor control for superior slow-speed performance and load compensation
*User-loadable speed table options (3-point, 28-point, and 126-point curves)
*Two select-able horn options - "beeper" horn and emergency air horn
*Two configurable [[WOWSound Momentum Function|Momentum Modes]]
*Separately-applied windshield wipers, grab irons and other detail parts
*Realistic top speed (limited in some cases by track voltage)

==Specific Features==

====DC Mode Operation====
When operating in DC mode, the decoder will sit still and silent until a sufficient track voltage is present. Once the minimum voltage is met, the idling sounds will turn on. As the voltage continues to increase, the locomotive will begin to move once the next threshold is met. A directional horn quill will play automatically based on the direction of travel. Users may trigger a station approach horn quill by quickly adjusting the track voltage up and back down quickly. The directional horn blasts and quill are enabled by default and are controlled by the DC Mode Sounds CV. Program CV 181 with a value of 0 to disable all of the automatic horn sounds on DC power. Other DC mode operational behaviors such as the startup voltage can be adjusted using the DC Mode Indexed CVs which are detailed in the Indexed CVs section below.

By default, all available lighting functions will turn on when DC power is present. All lighting outputs will operate the same lighting effects and directional control in the same way as on DCC power. Lighting configurations for DC can be changed using DCC CV programming. See the Standard CV section below for more details.

====Traction Motor Sound Features====
The BART decoder features prototypical traction noises like “traction motor” and “traction motor chopper" for the as-delivered DC powered traction motors. TCS recorded the DC traction sounds from C-Car #339 prior to its decommissioning. The sound package in the BART decoder authentically recreates the on-board experience of the DC-powered BART cars.

There are two elements that make up the traction sound on the DC-powered cars - the traction motor and gearbox, and the "chopper." DC traction motors have a dramatically different sound, as they do not have the audible 'stages' of acceleration as with AC traction motors and inverters. The DC traction motors on the BART cars are most audible when traveling at very high speeds where the gearbox whine becomes prevalent. As the speed changes, the traction motor will change its pitch and dynamics to an appropriate sound based on the speed.

The most prevalent sound in these cars is not the motors themselves, but instead the "chopper" which is an analog control module which converts the incoming power from the third rail into an appropriate DC voltage and current for the set speed. This control module is very clearly audible inside the car, and externally as well. Since the module is constantly working to regulate the power to the motor, the audible sound will fade in and out based on the conditions the specific car is under. Any time the car needs to change speed, either accelerating ''or'' decelerating, the 'chopper' sound becomes louder; whereas while coasting at a consistent speed, the sound fades down to a low level, and sometimes becoming inaudible. TCS has faithfully recreated this behavior by including the 'chopper' sound as a separate sound file which plays at a variable volume. This variable volume is based on the load, as well as the acceleration and deceleration. When changing speed to accelerate or decelerate, the sound will play at its loudest (as set by the sound type volume). When coasting (traveling at a set speed), the traction chopper volume will vary based on the load on the motor.

====High Speed Sounds====
The BART decoder features a brand new high speed sounds feature. Once the car reaches a set speed, the decoder will randomly start playing sounds heard when the BART cars are traveling at high speed. This includes the sounds heard when traveling underground through a tunnel, as well as when running above ground on the raised rail platforms. The decoder will select a random high speed sound to play, play it for a random amount of time, and then wait a random amount of time before playing another high speed sound. If the speed drops below the minimum speed for high speed sounds to play, the sound will stop playing immediately. This feature is enabled automatically on every power cycle, but can be manually disabled and re-enabled by using Button 20. You can configure the speed at which the high speed sounds will start playing using CV 194.

====Station Announcement and Whoosh Sound Features====
The BART decoder has two types of station announcements. Both of these announcement types operate by randomly selecting and playing one of the available sounds whenever the button is pressed.

*The first type was recorded from a real BART locomotive operator who announced all of the lines (colors) and destinations over the intercom within the cars. These announcements would be spoken by the operator before departing from a station.
*The second type of announcements were recorded at a BART station. Each of these announcements feature the "robot voice" which would be heard while waiting on the platform at a BART station.

The BART decoder features seven unique "Whoosh" runby sounds which include all different consist lengths from 4 to 10 cars. The Whoosh feature randomly selects and plays one of the available sounds whenever the button is pressed. Pressing the button a second time while a sound is playing should stop the sound currently playing.

====Train Brake Options====
The BART decoder feature a new, configurable braking mode. By default the BART decoder ships with the new, single-stage braking mode enabled. In this mode, a single button is used to apply and release the brakes. Pressing the button once to "on" will apply the brakes; Pressing the brake button a second time will release the brakes. The braking rate in legacy brake mode is determined by the value in [[CV 183]].

Users familiar with other WOWSound decoders will likely be familiar with our normal [[Train Brake]] feature which has a 5-stage braking system. With the 5-stage brake system, a separate brake application and brake release button are used. Each press of the brake application button increases the braking force.

To restore the 5-stage braking system, change the value of [[Electric Version 5:CV 61|CV 61]] to disable Legacy Braking Mode.

====New Lighting Features====
The BART decoder features an optional "high high", positioned centrally on the front of the car just below the roof line. Both A cars and C cars had these lights installed as a safety feature during the retrofit period between 1998 and 2002; however, their installation was not universal and is based on the road number. In operation, these lights are always on for each end unit as long as the locomotive has power and is in operation. Mid-train units will not have this or any lights on. On the C cars, this light is placed dead-center above the door in the front of the car; whereas on the A cars, the light is slightly offset away from the window of the operator's cabin.

TCS has implemented automatic and manual control modes for the high beam. In automatic mode, the high light will turn on as long as the headlight/marker lights are on. To manually take control of this light function, you can use CV 37 to remap the function control for F3. Any decimal value programmed into CV 37 will remap the high light control to that button. To only allow the high light to be active on the forward-facing unit, program CV 53 on BOTH end units to 0. To disable the high light, you can program CV 53 with a value of 255.

In order to use this function of the decoder, you must install the physical hardware for the high light onto the body of the A or C car. Please refer to the instructions from Rapido on how to do this.

The BART decoder also features interior lighting. By default, the interior lights are controlled using the Rapido "magic wand" which has a magnet inside. This magnet will trigger an on-board "[[wikipedia:Hall_effect|Hall Effect]]" sensor which will then toggle the lights on or off. The location of the sensor is immediately behind the cab end, in the middle of the body. To trigger the sensor, swipe a magnet in any direction across the sensor.

The brightness of the interior light can be changed by adjusting the value of indexed CVs 16.6.439 and 16.6.441. The brightness value as a percentage of 0-100 is held in NMRA indexed. 0 is off and 100 is maximum brightness. Both of these need to be changed to the desired 0-100 value. The default brightness is 80 percent.

The status of the interior lights (as well as all other light functions) will be remembered through a power cycle unless otherwise turned off or disabled. The interior lighting may be programmed to also accept a DCC function command. In order to remap the interior lights to a DCC function button, simply reprogram CV 36 to a decimal value from 0-28. To remove the operation of the light from the magnetic sensor, you must also change the [[Diesel Version 5:CV 16.0.292|AUX Input Light Mapping indexed CV 16.0.292]].

====AUX Input Sound Mapping====
Optionally, a user may choose to map a sound function to the magnetic sensor. By default, no sound is mapped to the sensor, and it is used exclusively to control the interior lights, as described above. Some examples of valid configurations are listed below:

*If an individual sound (example: Station Arriving Horn Quill) is mapped to the AUX input, that sound will play every time the sensor is triggered.
*If a sound type with two elements (example: Doors Open/Close) is mapped to the AUX input, the sound played will toggle each time the sensor is triggered. In this example, the first trigger will open the doors, and the second trigger will close the doors.
*If a sound type with a looping element (example: Air Compressor) is mapped to the AUX input, the sound will play for a designated amount of time. The duration of the sound can be set using CV 173. The value is 172 divided by 2 is the number of seconds the looping sound will play before it shuts off.
*If the "Mute" sound is mapped to the AUX input, the decoder will mute until the next time the input is triggered or a power cycle occurs.

If you map a sound to the AUX input, such as the Doors, you should remove the interior light function control from the AUX input and assign it to another DCC function using CV 36 and Indexed CV 16.0.292

==Button Mappings==
The tables below outline the default sounds and lights assigned to DCC function buttons for this particular decoder from the factory.
{| class="wikitable"
|+
BART Function Map for Sounds and Lights
! colspan="4" |Button Mappings
|-
|Function Button
|Sound Function
|Light Function
|Fx #
|-
|0
|(''None)''
|Headlight / Markers / High Light
|F0F & F0R & F3
|-
|1
|Open/Close Doors
|
|
|-
|2
|Horn - Playable
|
|
|-
|3
|Flange Squeal
|
|
|-
|4
|Station Announcements (Intercom)
|
|
|-
|5
|Station Announcements (Robot Voice)
|
|
|-
|6
|Brake On/Off
|
|
|-
|7
|(''None)''
|Hostling Lights On/Off (C-Car Only)
|F1
|-
|8
|Mute / Un-mute All Sounds
|
|
|-
|9
|Whoosh (Runby)
|
|
|-
|10
|Horn - Station Approach Quill (Random)
|
|
|-
|11
|Horn - Forward Quill
|
|
|-
|12
|Horn - Stop Quill
|
|
|-
|13
|Horn - Reverse Quill
|
|
|-
|14
|Couple
|
|
|-
|15
|Uncouple
|
|
|-
|16
|HVAC (Idling) Sounds On/Off
|
|
|-
|17
|Air Compressor On/Off
|
|
|-
|18
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|19
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|20
|Enable/Disable High Speed Sounds
|
|
|-
|21
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|22
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|23
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|24
|Change Horn Type
|
|
|-
|25
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|26
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|27
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|28
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|AUX
|(''None)''
|Interior Lights On/Off
|F2
|}
{| class="wikitable"
|+
! colspan="2" |Random Sound Mapping
|-
|Random
Sound Channel
|Sound
Played
|-
|1
|Air Compressor (Type 1)
|-
|2
|(''None)''
|-
|3
|(''None)''
|-
|4
|(''None)''
|}

==Sound List==

===Complete List of Sounds===
''To change sound mappings, use indexed CV 16.4.X See the Sound Mapping Indexed CVs table in the Indexed CVs section below for more information.''

Set CV 31 to 16. Set CV 32 to 4. Then, use CVs 257 through 324 to select the button and the sound you would like to map to the button.
{| class="wikitable"
!Sound Type
!Sound Number
!High Byte
!Low Byte
!Sound Name
|-
|Air Compressor
|0
|0
|0
|BART Air Compressor Type 1
|-
|
|1
|0
|1
|BART Air Compressor Type 2
|-
|Brake Squeal
|3
|0
|3
|Brake Squeal Sounds *
|-
|High Speed Tunnel Sounds
|33
|0
|33
|Tunnel Sounds
|-
|High Speed High Rail Sounds
|34
|0
|34
|High Rail Sounds
|-
|Coupler Clank
|35
|0
|35
|BART Coupling 1
|-
|
|36
|0
|36
|BART Coupling 2
|-
|
|37
|0
|37
|BART Uncoupling
|-
|Door Sounds
|38
|0
|38
|BART Door Open/Close
|-
|Flange Squeal
|39
|0
|39
|Flange Squeal 1
|-
|
|40
|0
|40
|Flange Squeal 2
|-
|Horn Forward Quill *
|41
|0
|41
|
|-
|Horn (Playable) *
|43
|0
|43
|
|-
|Horn Station Arriving Quill *
|45
|0
|45
|
|-
|Horn Reverse Quill *
|51
|0
|51
|
|-
|Horn Stop Quill *
|56
|0
|56
|
|-
|Idling Sounds
|57
|0
|57
|BART Idle (HVAC) Sounds
|-
|Momentum Feature
|58
|0
|58
|[[WOWSound Momentum Function|Momentum Feature]]
|-
|Mute
|60
|0
|60
|Mute All Sounds
|-
|Rotate Feature
|61
|0
|61
|[[WOWSound Rotate Feature|Rotate Feature]]
|-
|Station Announcements (Intercom) *
|63
|0
|63
|
|-
|Station Announcements (Robot Voice) *
|73
|0
|73
|
|-
|Whoosh *
|84
|0
|84
|BART Runby Sounds
|}
'''* For sound types marked with this symbol, use the listed sound number to map the sound type to a button; otherwise special randomization elements may stop functioning, or expected behavior of the sound type may not function properly.'''

===Horn===
{| class="wikitable"
!CV 120 Value
!Active Horn
|-
|0 (default)
|BART "Beeper"
|-
|1
|BART Emergency Air Horn
|}

==Standard CVs==
The BART decoder follows the motor and lighting CVs as outlined in the Version 5 Standard CV list. Listed below are common CVs which may be modified or referenced by the user.
{| class="wikitable"
|+Standard CVs (1-256) and Default Values for BART Decoder
!CV Number
!CV Value
!Description
|-
![[CV 1]]
|3
|2-digit DCC Address
|-
![[CV 2]]
|0
|3-point Speed Table - Start
|-
![[CV 3]]
|40
|Acceleration
|-
![[CV 4]]
|40
|Deceleration
|-
![[CV 5]]
|0
|3-point Speed Table - Max
|-
![[CV 6]]
|0
|3-point Speed Table - Mid
|-
![[CV 7]] *
|5
|TCS Decoder Architecture Version
|-
![[CV 8]] *
|153
|TCS Manufacturer ID
|-
![[Electric Version 5:CV 11|CV 11]]
|0
|Keep Alive® Timeout (Disabled by Default)
|-
![[CV 13]]
|7
|DC Mode lights F1-F8
|-
![[CV 14]]
|3
|DC Mode Lights F0 F/R & F9-F12
|-
![[CV 15]]
|2
|Decoder Lock KEY
|-
![[CV 16]]
|2
|Decoder Lock LOCK
|-
![[CV 17]]
|192
|4-digit DCC Address MSB
|-
![[CV 18]]
|0
|4-digit DCC Address LSB
|-
![[CV 19]]
|0
|DCC Consist Address
|-
![[CV 21]]
|255
|Consist Function Button Control (F1-F8)
|-
![[CV 22]]
|255
|Consist Function Button Control (F0 & F9-F12)
|-
![[Version 5:CV 28|CV 28]]
|7
|RailCom® Configuration
|-
![[Electric Version 5:CV 29|CV 29]]
|14
|User Configuration CV #1
|-
![[Version 5:Indexed CVs|CV 31]]
|16
|Indexed CV Selector - High Byte
|-
![[Version 5:Indexed CVs|CV 32]]
|0
|Indexed CV Selector - Low Byte
|-
!CV 33
|0
|Function Button Remapping - F0F
|-
!CV 34
|0
|Function Button Remapping - F0R
|-
!CV 35
|7
|Function Button Remapping - F1
|-
!CV 36
|255
|Function Button Remapping - F2
|-
!CV 37
|0
|Function Button Remapping - F3
|-
!CV 49
|0
|Lighting Effect - F0F
|-
!CV 50
|16
|Lighting Effect - F0R
|-
!CV 51
|32
|Lighting Effect - F1
|-
!CV 52
|44
|Lighting Effect - F2
|-
!CV 53
|32
|Lighting Effect - F3
|-
![[Electric Version 5:CV 61|CV 61]]
|37
|User Configuration CV #2
|-
![[CV 66]]
|128
|Motor Trim - Forward
|-
!CV 67 to
CV 94
|
|28-point Speed Table
|-
![[CV 95]]
|128
|Motor Trim - Reverse
|-
!CV 105
|0
|User Identification CV #1
|-
!CV 106
|0
|User Identification CV #2
|-
!CV 109
|3
|TCS Decoder Extended Identification - High Byte
|-
!CV 110
|0
|TCS Decoder Extended Identification - Mid Byte
|-
!CV 111
|1
|TCS Decoder Extended Identification - Low Byte
|-
!CV 118 *
|0
|Traction Motor Type Selection
|-
!CV 120
|0
|Horn Type Selection (0 or 1 valid for this project)
|-
!CV 141
|200
|Random Sound 1 (Air Compressor) Frequency
|-
!CV 145
|100
|Random Sound Cutout Frequency
|-
!CV 152
|10
|Traction motor Chopper Low Load Calibration
|-
!CV 154
|85
|Traction motor Chopper High Load Calibration
|-
!CV 173
|20
|AUX Input Looping Sound Timer (x/2 = Seconds)
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 176|CV 176]]
|240
|User Sound Options CV #1
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 177|CV 177]]
|160
|User Sound Options CV #2
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 178|CV 178]]
|0
|Automatic DCC Sound Options #1
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 179|CV 179]]
|15
|Automatic DCC Sound Options #2
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 181|CV 181]]
|255
|DC Mode Sound Configuration
|-
!CV 183
|32
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 1
|-
!CV 184
|26
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 2
|-
!CV 185
|16
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 3
|-
!CV 186
|8
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 4
|-
!CV 187
|3
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 5
|-
!CV 194
|70
|High Speed Sounds Start Speed (of 126)
|-
![[CV 248]] *
|1
|Sound Set Revision Identifier. First Run = 1
|-
![[CV 249]] *
|183
|Decoder Hardware Model Identifier
|}
''* Note: CVs marked with this symbol are read-only and cannot be modified.''

''Note: Programming CV 8 with a value of 8 OR 2 will perform a factory reset.''
{| class="wikitable"
|+Volume Control CVs and Default Values for BART Decoder
!CV Number
!CV Value
!Description
|-
!CV 195
|15
|Volume - Air Compressor
|-
!CV 197
|0
|Volume - Brake Release
|-
!CV 198
|50
|Volume - Brake Squeal
|-
!CV 201
|100
|Volume - High Speed Sounds
|-
!CV 202
|15
|Volume - Coupler Clank
|-
!CV 205
|100
|Volume - Doors
|-
!CV 207
|50
|Volume - Flange Squeal
|-
!CV 208
|100
|Volume - Horn Forward Quill
|-
!CV 209
|100
|Volume - Horn (Playable)
|-
!CV 210
|100
|Volume - Horn Station Arrival Quill
|-
!CV 211
|100
|Volume - Horn Reverse Quill
|-
!CV 213
|100
|Volume - Horn Stop Quill
|-
!CV 215
|15
|Volume - Idling (HVAC) Sounds
|-
!CV 225
|80
|Volume - Station Announcements (Intercom)
|-
!CV 226
|80
|Volume - Station Announcements (Robot Voice)
|-
!CV 227
|75
|Max Volume - Traction Motor
|-
!CV 228
|70
|Max Volume - DC "Chopper" Sound
|-
!CV 230
|80
|Volume - "Whoosh"
|}
''Note: All Volume CVs have a valid range of values from 0 to 100''

==Indexed CVs==
The BART decoder uses a selection of "Indexed CVs" for advanced configuration. Below is a list of the available indexed CVs. For a fill list of Indexed CVs with detailed descriptions, [[Version 5:Indexed CVs|CLICK HERE]].
{| class="wikitable"
|+BART Indexed CVs
!CV 31
!CV 32
!High Byte CV
!Value
!Low Byte CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|16
|0
|262
|0
|261
|5
|DC Mode Horn Quill Delta - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|264
|0
|263
|75
|DC Mode Motor Start Voltage - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|266
|0
|265
|10
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|268
|0
|267
|116
|DC Mode Max Voltage - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|276
|0
|275
|10
|DC Mode Horn Quill Delta - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|278
|0
|277
|100
|DC Mode Motor Start Voltage - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|280
|0
|279
|29
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|282
|0
|281
|180
|DC Mode Max Voltage - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|292
|0
|291
|8
|Light Function Mapping - AUX Input
|-
! colspan="7" |Interior Light Brightness Control (Constant Dim)
|-
|16
|6
|440
|0
|439
|80
|Interior Light Brightness
|-
|16
|6
|442
|0
|441
|80
|Interior Light Brightness
|}
The values shown in the Sound Mapping table below correspond to the Sound Numbers in the Sound List for this project.
{| class="wikitable"
|+Sound Mapping Indexed CVs
!CV 31
!CV 32
!High Byte CV
!Value
!Low Byte CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|16
|4
|258
|255
|257
|255
|Sound Mapping - F0
|-
|16
|4
|260
|0
|259
|38
|Sound Mapping - F1
|-
|16
|4
|262
|0
|261
|43
|Sound Mapping - F2
|-
|16
|4
|264
|0
|263
|39
|Sound Mapping - F3
|-
|16
|4
|266
|0
|265
|63
|Sound Mapping - F4
|-
|16
|4
|268
|0
|267
|73
|Sound Mapping - F5
|-
|16
|4
|270
|0
|269
|3
|Sound Mapping - F6
|-
|16
|4
|272
|255
|271
|255
|Sound Mapping - F7
|-
|16
|4
|274
|0
|273
|60
|Sound Mapping - F8
|-
|16
|4
|276
|0
|275
|84
|Sound Mapping - F9
|-
|16
|4
|278
|0
|277
|45
|Sound Mapping - F10
|-
|16
|4
|280
|0
|291
|41
|Sound Mapping - F11
|-
|16
|4
|282
|0
|281
|55
|Sound Mapping - F12
|-
|16
|4
|284
|0
|283
|51
|Sound Mapping - F13
|-
|16
|4
|286
|0
|285
|35
|Sound Mapping - F14
|-
|16
|4
|288
|0
|287
|37
|Sound Mapping - F15
|-
|16
|4
|290
|0
|289
|57
|Sound Mapping - F16
|-
|16
|4
|292
|0
|291
|1
|Sound Mapping - F17
|-
|16
|4
|294
|255
|293
|255
|Sound Mapping - F18
|-
|16
|4
|298
|0
|297
|33
|Sound Mapping - F20
|-
|16
|4
|300
|0
|299
|34
|Sound Mapping - F21
|-
|16
|4
|302
|255
|301
|255
|Sound Mapping - F22
|-
|16
|4
|304
|255
|303
|255
|Sound Mapping - F23
|-
|16
|4
|306
|0
|305
|61
|Sound Mapping - F24
|-
|16
|4
|308
|255
|307
|255
|Sound Mapping - F25
|-
|16
|4
|310
|255
|309
|255
|Sound Mapping - F26
|-
|16
|4
|314
|255
|313
|255
|Sound Mapping - F28
|-
|16
|4
|316
|0
|315
|0
|Sound Mapping - R1
|-
|16
|4
|318
|255
|317
|255
|Sound Mapping - R2
|-
|16
|4
|320
|255
|319
|255
|Sound Mapping - R4
|-
|16
|4
|322
|255
|321
|255
|Sound Mapping - R4
|-
|16
|4
|324
|255
|323
|255
|Sound Mapping - AUX
|}

Rapido Bay Area Rapid Transit (BART) Subway - HO Scale

2024-07-17T20:04:04Z

Dan Mycio: interior light brightness

Information on this wiki page provides particular details about this model not found in the quick start guide.
{{Infobox locomotive
|name=Rapido BART Subway
|Manufacturer=Rapido
|Scale=HO-Scale
|Stock Number=
|Power Type=DCC Dual Mode w/Sound
|Release Date=First Run: July 2024
|Retail Price=$339.95 USD
|Decoder Type=WOWElectric (OEM)
|Version=5
|Sound Set=1
|Functions=5
|Builder=First Delivery A/B - Rohr Industries C1 Delivery - Alsthom (Alstom) C2 Delivery - Morrison Knudsen AC Traction Rebuild - ADtranz
|Build Date=1968-1996 First Delivery A&B 1968-1975 C1 Delivery 1987-1989 C2 Delivery 1994-1996 A&B Rebuild 1998-2002
|Motive Power=Third-Rail Electric
|Power Output=
|Prototype Link=[https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bay_Area_Rapid_Transit]
|image=BART_A-car_Thumb.jpg}}

==Overview==
This page details features and other information regarding Rapido Trains’ San Fransisco Bay Area Rapid Transit (BART) Subway cars. This model has been faithfully recreated in HO-scale using modern 3D scanning technology, as well as original design documentation. This model includes a TCS WOWSound® decoder with authentic sound files recorded from the prototype, and on-board Keep-Alive® device for uninterrupted operation, even over dirty track. The WOWSound® electric locomotive sound package includes sounds for horn, traction motor, air compressor, HVAC, coupler close/release, brake release and application, and many more!

Loaded with prototypical features, the SCV-42 Charger in HO-scale from Bachmann Trains brings all the sights and sounds of Siemens' sleek new diesel-electric locomotive to your layout.

Features include:

*DCC sound-equipped for sound, speed, direction, and lighting control
*Dual-mode NMRA-compliant decoder operates sound, motor, and lights on DCC or DC power.
*TCS true CD-quality audio with 16-bit depth resolution at 44,100Hz
*Authentic and prototypical sounds
*On-board Keep-Alive® device that keeps your engine running during power interruptions due to dirty track or loss of electrical contact
*Directional headlight and marker lights
*Interior lights operated by "magic wand"
*Forward-mounted "high light", with authentic amber color
*TCS' industry-leading "quiet drive" Back EMF motor control for superior slow-speed performance and load compensation
*User-loadable speed table options (3-point, 28-point, and 126-point curves)
*Two select-able horn options - "beeper" horn and emergency air horn
*Two configurable [[WOWSound Momentum Function|Momentum Modes]]
*Separately-applied windshield wipers, grab irons and other detail parts
*Realistic top speed (limited in some cases by track voltage)

==Specific Features==

====DC Mode Operation====
When operating in DC mode, the decoder will sit still and silent until a sufficient track voltage is present. Once the minimum voltage is met, the idling sounds will turn on. As the voltage continues to increase, the locomotive will begin to move once the next threshold is met. A directional horn quill will play automatically based on the direction of travel. Users may trigger a station approach horn quill by quickly adjusting the track voltage up and back down quickly. The directional horn blasts and quill are enabled by default and are controlled by the DC Mode Sounds CV. Program CV 181 with a value of 0 to disable all of the automatic horn sounds on DC power. Other DC mode operational behaviors such as the startup voltage can be adjusted using the DC Mode Indexed CVs which are detailed in the Indexed CVs section below.

By default, all available lighting functions will turn on when DC power is present. All lighting outputs will operate the same lighting effects and directional control in the same way as on DCC power. Lighting configurations for DC can be changed using DCC CV programming. See the Standard CV section below for more details.

====Traction Motor Sound Features====
The BART decoder features prototypical traction noises like “traction motor” and “traction motor chopper" for the as-delivered DC powered traction motors. TCS recorded the DC traction sounds from C-Car #339 prior to its decommissioning. The sound package in the BART decoder authentically recreates the on-board experience of the DC-powered BART cars.

There are two elements that make up the traction sound on the DC-powered cars - the traction motor and gearbox, and the "chopper." DC traction motors have a dramatically different sound, as they do not have the audible 'stages' of acceleration as with AC traction motors and inverters. The DC traction motors on the BART cars are most audible when traveling at very high speeds where the gearbox whine becomes prevalent. As the speed changes, the traction motor will change its pitch and dynamics to an appropriate sound based on the speed.

The most prevalent sound in these cars is not the motors themselves, but instead the "chopper" which is an analog control module which converts the incoming power from the third rail into an appropriate DC voltage and current for the set speed. This control module is very clearly audible inside the car, and externally as well. Since the module is constantly working to regulate the power to the motor, the audible sound will fade in and out based on the conditions the specific car is under. Any time the car needs to change speed, either accelerating ''or'' decelerating, the 'chopper' sound becomes louder; whereas while coasting at a consistent speed, the sound fades down to a low level, and sometimes becoming inaudible. TCS has faithfully recreated this behavior by including the 'chopper' sound as a separate sound file which plays at a variable volume. This variable volume is based on the load, as well as the acceleration and deceleration. When changing speed to accelerate or decelerate, the sound will play at its loudest (as set by the sound type volume). When coasting (traveling at a set speed), the traction chopper volume will vary based on the load on the motor.

====High Speed Sounds====
The BART decoder features a brand new high speed sounds feature. Once the car reaches a set speed, the decoder will randomly start playing sounds heard when the BART cars are traveling at high speed. This includes the sounds heard when traveling underground through a tunnel, as well as when running above ground on the raised rail platforms. The decoder will select a random high speed sound to play, play it for a random amount of time, and then wait a random amount of time before playing another high speed sound. If the speed drops below the minimum speed for high speed sounds to play, the sound will stop playing immediately. This feature is enabled automatically on every power cycle, but can be manually disabled and re-enabled by using Button 20. You can configure the speed at which the high speed sounds will start playing using CV 194.

====Station Announcement and Whoosh Sound Features====
The BART decoder has two types of station announcements. Both of these announcement types operate by randomly selecting and playing one of the available sounds whenever the button is pressed.

*The first type was recorded from a real BART locomotive operator who announced all of the lines (colors) and destinations over the intercom within the cars. These announcements would be spoken by the operator before departing from a station.
*The second type of announcements were recorded at a BART station. Each of these announcements feature the "robot voice" which would be heard while waiting on the platform at a BART station.

The BART decoder features seven unique "Whoosh" runby sounds which include all different consist lengths from 4 to 10 cars. The Whoosh feature randomly selects and plays one of the available sounds whenever the button is pressed. Pressing the button a second time while a sound is playing should stop the sound currently playing.

====Train Brake Options====
The BART decoder feature a new, configurable braking mode. By default the BART decoder ships with the new, single-stage braking mode enabled. In this mode, a single button is used to apply and release the brakes. Pressing the button once to "on" will apply the brakes; Pressing the brake button a second time will release the brakes. The braking rate in legacy brake mode is determined by the value in [[CV 183]].

Users familiar with other WOWSound decoders will likely be familiar with our normal [[Train Brake]] feature which has a 5-stage braking system. With the 5-stage brake system, a separate brake application and brake release button are used. Each press of the brake application button increases the braking force.

To restore the 5-stage braking system, change the value of [[Electric Version 5:CV 61|CV 61]] to disable Legacy Braking Mode.

====New Lighting Features====
The BART decoder features an optional "high high", positioned centrally on the front of the car just below the roof line. Both A cars and C cars had these lights installed as a safety feature during the retrofit period between 1998 and 2002; however, their installation was not universal and is based on the road number. In operation, these lights are always on for each end unit as long as the locomotive has power and is in operation. Mid-train units will not have this or any lights on. On the C cars, this light is placed dead-center above the door in the front of the car; whereas on the A cars, the light is slightly offset away from the window of the operator's cabin.

TCS has implemented automatic and manual control modes for the high beam. In automatic mode, the high light will turn on as long as the headlight/marker lights are on. To manually take control of this light function, you can use CV 37 to remap the function control for F3. Any decimal value programmed into CV 37 will remap the high light control to that button. To only allow the high light to be active on the forward-facing unit, program CV 53 on BOTH end units to 0. To disable the high light, you can program CV 53 with a value of 255.

In order to use this function of the decoder, you must install the physical hardware for the high light onto the body of the A or C car. Please refer to the instructions from Rapido on how to do this.

The BART decoder also features interior lighting. By default, the interior lights are controlled using the Rapido "magic wand" which has a magnet inside. This magnet will trigger an on-board "[[wikipedia:Hall_effect|Hall Effect]]" sensor which will then toggle the lights on or off. The location of the sensor is immediately behind the cab end, in the middle of the body. To trigger the sensor, swipe a magnet in any direction across the sensor.

The brightness of the interior light can be changed by adjusting the value of indexed CVs 16.6.439 and 16.6.441. The brightness value as a percentage of 0-100 is held in NMRA indexed. 0 is off and 100 is maximum brightness. Both of these need to be changed to the desired 0-100 value. The default brightness is 80 percent.

The status of the interior lights (as well as all other light functions) will be remembered through a power cycle unless otherwise turned off or disabled. The interior lighting may be programmed to also accept a DCC function command. In order to remap the interior lights to a DCC function button, simply reprogram CV 36 to a decimal value from 0-28. To remove the operation of the light from the magnetic sensor, you must also change the [[Diesel Version 5:CV 16.0.292|AUX Input Light Mapping indexed CV 16.0.292]].

====AUX Input Sound Mapping====
Optionally, a user may choose to map a sound function to the magnetic sensor. By default, no sound is mapped to the sensor, and it is used exclusively to control the interior lights, as described above. Some examples of valid configurations are listed below:

*If an individual sound (example: Station Arriving Horn Quill) is mapped to the AUX input, that sound will play every time the sensor is triggered.
*If a sound type with two elements (example: Doors Open/Close) is mapped to the AUX input, the sound played will toggle each time the sensor is triggered. In this example, the first trigger will open the doors, and the second trigger will close the doors.
*If a sound type with a looping element (example: Air Compressor) is mapped to the AUX input, the sound will play for a designated amount of time. The duration of the sound can be set using CV 173. The value is 172 divided by 2 is the number of seconds the looping sound will play before it shuts off.
*If the "Mute" sound is mapped to the AUX input, the decoder will mute until the next time the input is triggered or a power cycle occurs.

If you map a sound to the AUX input, such as the Doors, you should remove the interior light function control from the AUX input and assign it to another DCC function using CV 36 and Indexed CV 16.0.292

==Button Mappings==
The tables below outline the default sounds and lights assigned to DCC function buttons for this particular decoder from the factory.
{| class="wikitable"
|+
BART Function Map for Sounds and Lights
! colspan="4" |Button Mappings
|-
|Function Button
|Sound Function
|Light Function
|Fx #
|-
|0
|(''None)''
|Headlight / Markers / High Light
|F0F & F0R & F3
|-
|1
|Open/Close Doors
|
|
|-
|2
|Horn - Playable
|
|
|-
|3
|Flange Squeal
|
|
|-
|4
|Station Announcements (Intercom)
|
|
|-
|5
|Station Announcements (Robot Voice)
|
|
|-
|6
|Brake On/Off
|
|
|-
|7
|(''None)''
|Hostling Lights On/Off (C-Car Only)
|F1
|-
|8
|Mute / Un-mute All Sounds
|
|
|-
|9
|Whoosh (Runby)
|
|
|-
|10
|Horn - Station Approach Quill (Random)
|
|
|-
|11
|Horn - Forward Quill
|
|
|-
|12
|Horn - Stop Quill
|
|
|-
|13
|Horn - Reverse Quill
|
|
|-
|14
|Couple
|
|
|-
|15
|Uncouple
|
|
|-
|16
|HVAC (Idling) Sounds On/Off
|
|
|-
|17
|Air Compressor On/Off
|
|
|-
|18
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|19
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|20
|Enable/Disable High Speed Sounds
|
|
|-
|21
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|22
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|23
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|24
|Change Horn Type
|
|
|-
|25
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|26
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|27
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|28
|(''None)''
|
|
|-
|AUX
|(''None)''
|Interior Lights On/Off
|F2
|}
{| class="wikitable"
|+
! colspan="2" |Random Sound Mapping
|-
|Random
Sound Channel
|Sound
Played
|-
|1
|Air Compressor (Type 1)
|-
|2
|(''None)''
|-
|3
|(''None)''
|-
|4
|(''None)''
|}

==Sound List==

===Complete List of Sounds===
''To change sound mappings, use indexed CV 16.4.X See the Sound Mapping Indexed CVs table in the Indexed CVs section below for more information.''

Set CV 31 to 16. Set CV 32 to 4. Then, use CVs 257 through 324 to select the button and the sound you would like to map to the button.
{| class="wikitable"
!Sound Type
!Sound Number
!High Byte
!Low Byte
!Sound Name
|-
|Air Compressor
|0
|0
|0
|BART Air Compressor Type 1
|-
|
|1
|0
|1
|BART Air Compressor Type 2
|-
|Brake Squeal
|3
|0
|3
|Brake Squeal Sounds *
|-
|High Speed Tunnel Sounds
|33
|0
|33
|Tunnel Sounds
|-
|High Speed High Rail Sounds
|34
|0
|34
|High Rail Sounds
|-
|Coupler Clank
|35
|0
|35
|BART Coupling 1
|-
|
|36
|0
|36
|BART Coupling 2
|-
|
|37
|0
|37
|BART Uncoupling
|-
|Door Sounds
|38
|0
|38
|BART Door Open/Close
|-
|Flange Squeal
|39
|0
|39
|Flange Squeal 1
|-
|
|40
|0
|40
|Flange Squeal 2
|-
|Horn Forward Quill *
|41
|0
|41
|
|-
|Horn (Playable) *
|43
|0
|43
|
|-
|Horn Station Arriving Quill *
|45
|0
|45
|
|-
|Horn Reverse Quill *
|51
|0
|51
|
|-
|Horn Stop Quill *
|56
|0
|56
|
|-
|Idling Sounds
|57
|0
|57
|BART Idle (HVAC) Sounds
|-
|Momentum Feature
|58
|0
|58
|[[WOWSound Momentum Function|Momentum Feature]]
|-
|Mute
|60
|0
|60
|Mute All Sounds
|-
|Rotate Feature
|61
|0
|61
|[[WOWSound Rotate Feature|Rotate Feature]]
|-
|Station Announcements (Intercom) *
|63
|0
|63
|
|-
|Station Announcements (Robot Voice) *
|73
|0
|73
|
|-
|Whoosh *
|84
|0
|84
|BART Runby Sounds
|}
'''* For sound types marked with this symbol, use the listed sound number to map the sound type to a button; otherwise special randomization elements may stop functioning, or expected behavior of the sound type may not function properly.'''

===Horn===
{| class="wikitable"
!CV 120 Value
!Active Horn
|-
|0 (default)
|BART "Beeper"
|-
|1
|BART Emergency Air Horn
|}

==Standard CVs==
The BART decoder follows the motor and lighting CVs as outlined in the Version 5 Standard CV list. Listed below are common CVs which may be modified or referenced by the user.
{| class="wikitable"
|+Standard CVs (1-256) and Default Values for BART Decoder
!CV Number
!CV Value
!Description
|-
![[CV 1]]
|3
|2-digit DCC Address
|-
![[CV 2]]
|0
|3-point Speed Table - Start
|-
![[CV 3]]
|40
|Acceleration
|-
![[CV 4]]
|40
|Deceleration
|-
![[CV 5]]
|0
|3-point Speed Table - Max
|-
![[CV 6]]
|0
|3-point Speed Table - Mid
|-
![[CV 7]] *
|5
|TCS Decoder Architecture Version
|-
![[CV 8]] *
|153
|TCS Manufacturer ID
|-
![[Electric Version 5:CV 11|CV 11]]
|0
|Keep Alive® Timeout (Disabled by Default)
|-
![[CV 13]]
|255
|DC Mode lights F1-F8
|-
![[CV 14]]
|255
|DC Mode Lights F0 F/R & F9-F12
|-
![[CV 15]]
|2
|Decoder Lock KEY
|-
![[CV 16]]
|2
|Decoder Lock LOCK
|-
![[CV 17]]
|192
|4-digit DCC Address MSB
|-
![[CV 18]]
|0
|4-digit DCC Address LSB
|-
![[CV 19]]
|0
|DCC Consist Address
|-
![[CV 21]]
|255
|Consist Function Button Control (F1-F8)
|-
![[CV 22]]
|255
|Consist Function Button Control (F0 & F9-F12)
|-
![[Version 5:CV 28|CV 28]]
|7
|RailCom® Configuration
|-
![[Electric Version 5:CV 29|CV 29]]
|14
|User Configuration CV #1
|-
![[Version 5:Indexed CVs|CV 31]]
|16
|Indexed CV Selector - High Byte
|-
![[Version 5:Indexed CVs|CV 32]]
|0
|Indexed CV Selector - Low Byte
|-
!CV 33
|0
|Function Button Remapping - F0F
|-
!CV 34
|0
|Function Button Remapping - F0R
|-
!CV 35
|7
|Function Button Remapping - F1
|-
!CV 36
|255
|Function Button Remapping - F2
|-
!CV 37
|0
|Function Button Remapping - F3
|-
!CV 49
|0
|Lighting Effect - F0F
|-
!CV 50
|16
|Lighting Effect - F0R
|-
!CV 51
|32
|Lighting Effect - F1
|-
!CV 52
|44
|Lighting Effect - F2
|-
!CV 53
|32
|Lighting Effect - F3
|-
![[Electric Version 5:CV 61|CV 61]]
|37
|User Configuration CV #2
|-
![[CV 66]]
|128
|Motor Trim - Forward
|-
!CV 67 to
CV 94
|
|28-point Speed Table
|-
![[CV 95]]
|128
|Motor Trim - Reverse
|-
!CV 105
|0
|User Identification CV #1
|-
!CV 106
|0
|User Identification CV #2
|-
!CV 109
|3
|TCS Decoder Extended Identification - High Byte
|-
!CV 110
|0
|TCS Decoder Extended Identification - Mid Byte
|-
!CV 111
|1
|TCS Decoder Extended Identification - Low Byte
|-
!CV 118 *
|0
|Traction Motor Type Selection
|-
!CV 120
|0
|Horn Type Selection (0 or 1 valid for this project)
|-
!CV 141
|200
|Random Sound 1 (Air Compressor) Frequency
|-
!CV 145
|100
|Random Sound Cutout Frequency
|-
!CV 152
|10
|Traction motor Chopper Low Load Calibration
|-
!CV 154
|85
|Traction motor Chopper High Load Calibration
|-
!CV 173
|20
|AUX Input Looping Sound Timer (x/2 = Seconds)
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 176|CV 176]]
|240
|User Sound Options CV #1
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 177|CV 177]]
|160
|User Sound Options CV #2
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 178|CV 178]]
|0
|Automatic DCC Sound Options #1
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 179|CV 179]]
|15
|Automatic DCC Sound Options #2
|-
![[Diesel Version 5:CV 181|CV 181]]
|255
|DC Mode Sound Configuration
|-
!CV 183
|32
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 1
|-
!CV 184
|26
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 2
|-
!CV 185
|16
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 3
|-
!CV 186
|8
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 4
|-
!CV 187
|3
|Train Brake Deceleration Rate - Stage 5
|-
!CV 194
|70
|High Speed Sounds Start Speed (of 126)
|-
![[CV 248]] *
|1
|Sound Set Revision Identifier. First Run = 1
|-
![[CV 249]] *
|183
|Decoder Hardware Model Identifier
|}
''* Note: CVs marked with this symbol are read-only and cannot be modified.''

''Note: Programming CV 8 with a value of 8 OR 2 will perform a factory reset.''
{| class="wikitable"
|+Volume Control CVs and Default Values for BART Decoder
!CV Number
!CV Value
!Description
|-
!CV 195
|15
|Volume - Air Compressor
|-
!CV 197
|0
|Volume - Brake Release
|-
!CV 198
|50
|Volume - Brake Squeal
|-
!CV 201
|100
|Volume - High Speed Sounds
|-
!CV 202
|15
|Volume - Coupler Clank
|-
!CV 205
|100
|Volume - Doors
|-
!CV 207
|50
|Volume - Flange Squeal
|-
!CV 208
|100
|Volume - Horn Forward Quill
|-
!CV 209
|100
|Volume - Horn (Playable)
|-
!CV 210
|100
|Volume - Horn Station Arrival Quill
|-
!CV 211
|100
|Volume - Horn Reverse Quill
|-
!CV 213
|100
|Volume - Horn Stop Quill
|-
!CV 215
|15
|Volume - Idling (HVAC) Sounds
|-
!CV 225
|80
|Volume - Station Announcements (Intercom)
|-
!CV 226
|80
|Volume - Station Announcements (Robot Voice)
|-
!CV 227
|75
|Max Volume - Traction Motor
|-
!CV 228
|70
|Max Volume - DC "Chopper" Sound
|-
!CV 230
|80
|Volume - "Whoosh"
|}
''Note: All Volume CVs have a valid range of values from 0 to 100''

==Indexed CVs==
The BART decoder uses a selection of "Indexed CVs" for advanced configuration. Below is a list of the available indexed CVs. For a fill list of Indexed CVs with detailed descriptions, [[Version 5:Indexed CVs|CLICK HERE]].
{| class="wikitable"
|+BART Indexed CVs
!CV 31
!CV 32
!High Byte CV
!Value
!Low Byte CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|16
|0
|262
|0
|261
|5
|DC Mode Horn Quill Delta - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|264
|0
|263
|75
|DC Mode Motor Start Voltage - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|266
|0
|265
|10
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|268
|0
|267
|116
|DC Mode Max Voltage - Regulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|276
|0
|275
|10
|DC Mode Horn Quill Delta - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|278
|0
|277
|100
|DC Mode Motor Start Voltage - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|280
|0
|279
|29
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|282
|0
|281
|180
|DC Mode Max Voltage - Unregulated Power Pack
|-
|16
|0
|292
|0
|291
|8
|Light Function Mapping - AUX Input
|-
! colspan="7" |Interior Light Brightness Control (Constant Dim)
|-
|16
|6
|440
|0
|439
|80
|Interior Light Brightness
|-
|16
|6
|442
|0
|441
|80
|Interior Light Brightness
|}
The values shown in the Sound Mapping table below correspond to the Sound Numbers in the Sound List for this project.
{| class="wikitable"
|+Sound Mapping Indexed CVs
!CV 31
!CV 32
!High Byte CV
!Value
!Low Byte CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|16
|4
|258
|255
|257
|255
|Sound Mapping - F0
|-
|16
|4
|260
|0
|259
|38
|Sound Mapping - F1
|-
|16
|4
|262
|0
|261
|43
|Sound Mapping - F2
|-
|16
|4
|264
|0
|263
|39
|Sound Mapping - F3
|-
|16
|4
|266
|0
|265
|63
|Sound Mapping - F4
|-
|16
|4
|268
|0
|267
|73
|Sound Mapping - F5
|-
|16
|4
|270
|0
|269
|3
|Sound Mapping - F6
|-
|16
|4
|272
|255
|271
|255
|Sound Mapping - F7
|-
|16
|4
|274
|0
|273
|60
|Sound Mapping - F8
|-
|16
|4
|276
|0
|275
|84
|Sound Mapping - F9
|-
|16
|4
|278
|0
|277
|45
|Sound Mapping - F10
|-
|16
|4
|280
|0
|291
|41
|Sound Mapping - F11
|-
|16
|4
|282
|0
|281
|55
|Sound Mapping - F12
|-
|16
|4
|284
|0
|283
|51
|Sound Mapping - F13
|-
|16
|4
|286
|0
|285
|35
|Sound Mapping - F14
|-
|16
|4
|288
|0
|287
|37
|Sound Mapping - F15
|-
|16
|4
|290
|0
|289
|57
|Sound Mapping - F16
|-
|16
|4
|292
|0
|291
|1
|Sound Mapping - F17
|-
|16
|4
|294
|255
|293
|255
|Sound Mapping - F18
|-
|16
|4
|298
|0
|297
|33
|Sound Mapping - F20
|-
|16
|4
|300
|0
|299
|34
|Sound Mapping - F21
|-
|16
|4
|302
|255
|301
|255
|Sound Mapping - F22
|-
|16
|4
|304
|255
|303
|255
|Sound Mapping - F23
|-
|16
|4
|306
|0
|305
|61
|Sound Mapping - F24
|-
|16
|4
|308
|255
|307
|255
|Sound Mapping - F25
|-
|16
|4
|310
|255
|309
|255
|Sound Mapping - F26
|-
|16
|4
|314
|255
|313
|255
|Sound Mapping - F28
|-
|16
|4
|316
|0
|315
|0
|Sound Mapping - R1
|-
|16
|4
|318
|255
|317
|255
|Sound Mapping - R2
|-
|16
|4
|320
|255
|319
|255
|Sound Mapping - R4
|-
|16
|4
|322
|255
|321
|255
|Sound Mapping - R4
|-
|16
|4
|324
|255
|323
|255
|Sound Mapping - AUX
|}

LT-50

2024-07-12T01:09:36Z

Dan Mycio: added link to release notes

[[Category:TCS Products]]
[[Category:Command System]]
[[Category:LCC Device]]

{{Infobox throttle
| Manufacturer=Train Control Systems
| Type=Command Station
| SKU=LT-50
| rDate=08-09-2022
| MSRP=$259.95
| Wireless=No
| Batteries=DC 15V/36W
| image=LT-50_Render(1).png}}

The LT-50 "Layout Throttle" is an intelligently-designed wired LCC throttle with a built-in command station. Ergonomically designed to comfortably fit your hand and provide easy access to all of the buttons, the LT-50 is the perfect DCC command station for newcomers, or layout operators and builders looking for a highly-capable, portable command station and throttle. Like the [[CS-105]], the LT-50 is overflowing with features, including RailCom® - but there's so much more it can do!

The LT-50 Layout Throttle from TCS is the new standard in utility for model railroads. This system brings a new level of operational convenience, as well as a wide range of new features compared to the competition. Instead of spending time with your head in a manual trying to understand your throttle, the intuitive interface of the LT-50 allows you to focus on the important things - operating and enjoying your trains! We are confident that the LT-50 will quickly become your favorite throttle to use.

The LT-50 features an encoder-style knob for easy menu navigation as well as speed control. Package includes two inter-change-able knob wheels.

Also included in the package is a 15V power supply, a single LT-50 fascia panel and fascia cover plate, screws for mounting the fascia board and plate, detachable track power connector, and a single RJ-45 cable.

==Overview==
[[File:LT-50 Diagram.png|thumb|LT-50 Overview - Click to Enlarge]]
Large, Full-text Screen 1.42" x 0.92" LCD screen with white backlight. Brightness is entirely adjustable for a variety of operating conditions.

Programmable Buttons The encoder button, two buttons on the face of the throttle, as well as two multi-position switches on the side (9 total) can be reassigned to control many functions. Examples include dynamic braking, manual notching, and more! Higher-numbered functions are now a simple button press or switch flick away!

Multiple Connection Modes The LT-50 can be used as a standalone command station, but if connected into an LCC network, the LT-50 will act as a normal LCC throttle. For operators who prefer a wired throttle, the LT-50 can connected to a [[CS-105]] to offer that wired throttle experience.

Integrated Consisting System Consisting doesn’t have to be difficult, intimidating, or complicated! The LT-50 features a simple consisting interface where users can make, modify, and break up consists in mere seconds.

Yard Mode Yard Mode is an innovative, TCS exclusive feature designed for switching operations and control. Perfect for spicing up repetitive yard moves!

Full-Text Menus Menus present all options in full words and phrases. No guess work or manuals needed!

Help Text Use the [?] button on the keypad in any menu to access help text for that menu item. The throttle will display a simple description of the highlighted option. Help is always one button press away!

Flashlight The LT-50 unit comes equipped with two bright white LED's that can be activated at any time - handy for those dropped screws, lost detail parts, decoupling, and ventures under dark, cavernous benchwork.

'''Field Update-able'''

Easily update your software to add new features to your command station from the comfort of your own home. And don't worry, you won't lose your settings or your roster! Please refer to the [[LT-50 Release Notes]] page for details on what is new and improved in recent updates.

==Specifications==

===DCC System===

*1.4A continuous, 2.8A peak current limit with soft start, configurable current limit, and load reporting
*Up to 25 locomotives running simultaneously
*Integrated RailCom® detector
*Programming Track over main output with automatic switchover, supporting Direct, Paged, and Register modes
*DCC accessory control for addresses 1 - 2044
*Up to 20, 10-step Macros, including LCC accessory control
*Configuration through on-screen menu

===Throttle Features===

*Handheld design based on the lightweight and ergonomic UWT-50
*Nine user-programmable buttons for convenient operations
*Encoder knob for throttle control and menu navigation
*Plain English configuration through menu
*On-sceen help function
*Can be used as a throttle on LCC and NCE layouts (Learn how to make your own adapter cable [[LT-50 Adapter Cable for NCE Systems|HERE]]) 

===NMRA Layout Command Control (LCC) Features===

*LT-50-specific RJ-45 jack (1x)
*RJ-45 jack for LCC communication through CAN-bus (3x)
*Expandable with additional LCC throttles (sold separately)
*400ma LCC power injection points (2x)
*Low-power DCC passthrough (optional with configuration)
*Configuration through CAN-bus interface to PC (sold separately)
*Firmware updates via LCC interface

===Maximum Number of Locos===
The nominal current limit of the LT-50 is 1.4A continuous. The LT-50 will shut off automatically once a set thermal cutout is reached, and will automatically resume once it has cooled down. Below, we have included a table for some examples of exaggerated load values which can help you determine approximately how many individual locomotives you can operate simultaneously. Note that you will likely be able to run more than the specified Maximum. Your loads/results will vary.
{| class="wikitable"
|+Maximum Number of Locos You Can Run Simultaneously with the LT-50
!Loco Scale & State
!Typical Current Draw
!Maximum Loco Count
|-
|(All Scales) Idle/Stationary
|0.05A - 0.10A
|15 - 25
|-
|(All Scales) Idle/Stationary With Sound
|0.15A - 0.25A
|5 - 10
|-
|(N) Under Heavy Load
|0.15A - 0.35A
|5 - 10
|-
|(N) Under Heavy Load w/Sound
|0.30A - 0.50A
|3 - 5
|-
|(H0) Under Load
|0.25A - 0.75A
|3 - 6
|-
|(H0) Under Load w/Sound
|0.35A - 1.00A
|2 - 4
|}

==Related==

*[[LT Panel]]
*[[LCC Throttle Panel]]
*[[CS-105]]
*[[UWT-50]]
*[[T-50]]

CS-105

2024-07-12T01:05:23Z

Dan Mycio: added linking to release notes, lcc event ids, and database backup

[[Category:TCS Products]]
[[Category:Command System]]
[[Category:LCC Device]]

{{Infobox throttle
| Manufacturer=Train Control Systems
| Type=Command Station
| SKU=CS-105
| rDate=08-09-2022
| MSRP=$529.95
| Wireless=Yes
| Batteries=DC 12V/90W or 15V/90W
| image=CS-105 Final Production Image (1)(smaller).png}}

The CS-105 is an intelligently-designed DCC command station with LCC integration as well as a built-in RailCom® detector. Thoughtfully designed to outperform in every area, the CS-105 is the perfect DCC command station for newcomers, or layout builders or renovators looking for a highly-capable command station with the latest and greatest technology available.

The CS-105 Command Station from TCS is the new DCC standard for model railroads. This system brings a new level of operational convenience to DCC, especially when paired with a UWT-100. The CS-105 also features a wide range of new features compared to the competition. "Soft Start" as well as configurable short circuit detection for the mainline track output decreases the likelihood of burning up fouled decoders as well. Instead of spending time with your head in a manual trying to understand your system, you can consult the intuitive configuration interface of the CS-105 through a TCS throttle such as the UWT-100, allowing you to focus on the important things - operating and enjoying your trains! We are confident that the CS-105 will quickly become your favorite command station to use.

Also included in the package with the CS-105, power supply, and AC cord are two LCC terminators, detachable track power connector, and detachable programming track connector.
{| class="wikitable"
| colspan="3" |This product has two Power Supply options: 12 Volts or 15 Volts
'''Click on one of the options below to shop:'''
|-
|[https://www.tcsdcc.com/product-page/CS-105-Command-Station 12V Power Supply]
|[https://www.tcsdcc.com/product-page/CS-105-Command-Station 15V Power Supply]
|}
'''Power Supply Selection:''' When selecting a power supply voltage, you choice should depend on two factors: 1) Modeling Scale 2) Maximum loco speed. For smaller scales such as Z, N, TT, etc., the 12V supply is recommended. The 12V supply is also acceptable for larger scales such as HO; however, if you like to run your trains at higher speeds the 15V supply increases the maximum voltage available to the motor, allowing your models to reach higher top speeds. This is particularly beneficial to modelers of bullet trains and other high-speed passenger services. Both power supply options are rated to supply the CS-105 with up to 5 Amperes of continuous current all day long!

'''Small Package; Big Power'''

The CS-105 is not only feature-packed, but also highly capable with plenty of horsepower for your railroad. The CS-105 has a user-configurable short circuit protection algorithm and current limit up to 5 Amperes. Unlike many systems on the market, when we say "5A continuous" we mean it! The CS-105 can supply up to 5 Amperes of current to your railroad all day and all night long. The CS-105 can also simultaneously operate up to 260 individual locomotives (consisted or solo) thanks to a highly-intelligent packet handler and "stack" management algorithm.

'''Auxiliary Boosters'''

5 Amps not enough? We understand. That's why we offer auxiliary boosters such as the [[B-106]]! Expand out your current capacity while maintaining your RailCom® network using the LCC-enabled [[B-106]] auxiliary booster. Already have a large layout with boosters you don't want to upgrade yet? No problem! The CS-105 can be integrated into existing ecosystems such as Lenz, NCE, Digitrax, and more using our Booster Adapter (sold separately).

'''Multiple Connection Modes'''

The CS-105 can be used as a standalone access point for WiFi throttles such as the UWT-50, but can also connect to an auxiliary AP (router) to expand the network and maximum number of throttle connections. In addition to WiFi throttles, wired throttles such as the [[LT-50]] and [[T-50]] wired LCC throttles can be connected through the LCC Can Bus. But that's not all! The "Aux Cabs" jack on the CS-105 allows you to connect and use some other manufacturers' throttles (such as NCE, Ramtraxx, SystemOne, and more) with the CS-105. Add-on devices such as the "LCC-LocoNet Gateway" from RR-CirKits can also be used to interface Digitrax throttles and a PC.

'''LCC Integration'''

LCC Bus connections on the command station allow for direct interfacing with LCC layout devices and modules. You can communicate with any LCC system to control switches, adjust layout lighting, and anything else that the LCC bus is connected to.

'''RailCom® Integration'''

RailCom enables bi-directional communication between the command station and decoders. This allows for read-back of CVs while programming on the mainline. The inclusion of RailCom opens up significant opportunities for future features and expansion.

''RailCom® is a registered trademark of Lenz Elektronik, GmbH''

'''Consisting'''

Consisting doesn’t have to be difficult, intimidating, or complicated! The CS-105 features a simple consisting interface where users can make, modify, and break up consists in mere seconds. The CS-105's consisting system also features new and unique configuration options for consisted engines which will make your consisting experience more realistic than ever without having to spend hours setting it up!

'''Full-Text Menus'''

The settings of the CS-105 can be accessed through a TCS throttle or JMRI. Configuration menus and options are listed in full words and phrases. No guess work or manuals needed! Use the [?] button on the TCS throttle keypad in any menu to access help text for that menu item. The throttle will display a simple description of the highlighted option. Help is always one button press away!

'''Programming Options'''

Take advantage of several different programming options with the TCS Command Station. RailCom® programming on the mainline allows for live CV read-back without the need for a dedicated programming track! Or, you may use an isolated programming track to use Direct or Paged mode programming. The TCS CS-105 Command Station does not require an add-on "programming booster" for programming operations, unlike some command stations offered today, and older-generation systems available in the past.

When programming a decoder, the TCS throttle can display information about the CV down to the individual bit, giving users the ability to further understand and visualize CV's, and manipulate them at the bit level, which is especially useful for CV's used to configure multiple options, such as CV29 or CV61. In addition, when using a TCS throttle, you may press the Help button after entering a a NMRA standard CV number to display a "plain text" explanation of the CV and what it does.* TCS is striving to offer the most user-friendly programming interface possible, while not compromising the operational capabilities in favor of "simplicity."

'''Easily Updatable'''

Field-update your software to add new features to your command station from the comfort of your own home. And don't worry, you won't lose your settings or your roster! Please refer to the [[CS-105 Release Notes]] page for details on what is new and improved in recent updates.

==Specifications==

===DCC System===

*5 Ampere continuous current rating with soft start, configurable current limit, and load reporting
*Up to 260 locomotives running simultaneously
*Up to 300 10-step Macros using both DCC and LCC accessories
*Integrated RailCom® detector on Mainline and Programming Track
*Global detector for compatible Boosters, supporting “Ops” CV reads
*Dedicated Programming Track output with automatic switchover, supporting Direct, Paged, and Register modes

===Throttle Support===

*Up to 4 LCC WiFi throttles via on-board WiFi Access Point (AP)
*Up to 10 LCC WiFi throttles through Client (Router) connection
*Up to 250 LCC WiFi throttles via LCC Hub ([https://www.jmri.org/help/en/html/hardware/can/index.shtml available in JMRI])
*Up to 62 Cab Bus (NCE wired and wireless, Ramtraxx, and SystemOne) throttles and accessories via "AUX Cabs" RJ-11 jack Support includes ISE ProtoThrottle™ and WifiTrax WFD-30/31. WFD's can be added to the CS-105 to connect cellphones and tablets using the WiThrottle Protocol.
*Up to 31 XpressNet™ (Lenz, Roco, ZTC, etc.) throttles and accessories via "AUX Cabs" RJ-11 jack (starting from software version 2.0)

'''For more information about throttle capacity, please see [[CS-105 Throttle and Device Capacity]].'''

'''For more information on the behaviour of your NCE throttle(s) when using the Aux Cab bus, please see [[Cab Bus]].'''

'''For more information on the behaviour of your Lenz throttle(s) when using the Aux Cab bus, please see [[XpressNet]].'''

WiThrottle™ and Engine Driver throttles can be connected to the CS-105 by using the WiThrottle Protocol server in JMRI or by using the WFD-30/31 modules from WiFiTrax connected through the AUX Cabs connector in "Cab Bus" (NCE/Ramtraxx/SystemOne) mode.

===NMRA Layout Command Control (LCC) Features===

*Dual RJ-45 jack for LCC communication through CAN-bus
*400mA output current per LCC port (on pin 8)
*Built-in WiFi LCC computer interface
*Plain English configuration via TCS throttles or a PC
*Supports various DCC boosters connected via LCC cable (up to 400 mA current available for driving boosters on pin 4/5 of the LCC port)
*Global RailCom® transmissions over LCC for supporting Boosters
*Firmware updates via WiFi or LCC interface

==Physical Overview==
The CS-105 features a case design which is symmetrical in nature, meaning that it can be mounted or oriented in just about any way you could possibly need to, even vertically! TCS does advise against having any obstruction on the vented sides of the case in order to allow for passive air flow, however. We will be referring to these vented sides as Side A and Side B, since what the “back” and “front” are are up to you.

Side A features: 5) Single RJ-11 jack 6) Tactile push button 7) Single red LED.
[[File:CS-105 Side A R1.png|center|thumb|600x600px|Side "A" of the CS-105]]

Side B features: 1) Green 3-pin connector with detachable screw terminal 2) Black 2-pin connector with detachable screw terminal 3) DC Power input jack 4) Dual RJ-45 LCC connector with four LEDs
[[File:CS-105 Side B.png|center|thumb|600x600px|Side "B" of the CS-105]]

The purpose of the LEDs is described in detail in the section below.
 

==Status LED's==
The CS-105 includes a total of five LEDs for providing information about the device’s status. The LEDs are also used during configuration as described in the Push Button Configuration section. Additionally, both the user and TCS support can use these LEDs in order to Troubleshoot issues.

On Side A of the CS-105 there is a single red Power LED. This LED is constantly on whenever the CS-105 has incoming power. On Side B, the dual RJ-45 LCC connector has the remaining four LEDs in a Yellow, Green, Yellow, Green pattern as shown below:
[[File:Status LEDs R0.png|center|thumb|489x489px|CS-105 Status LED's]]

===Normal Operation===
{| class="wikitable"
|'''(From L to R)'''
|'''CS'''
|'''Booster'''
|-
|'''LED 1 - Yellow'''

closest to the barrel jack
| colspan="2" |Track Power

- solid on: track power on

- solid off: track power off

- fast blink, short circuit

- slow blink: thermal overload
|-
|'''LED 2 - Green'''
| colspan="2" |CAN Active and LCC Activity

- solid on: CAN bus connected

- solid off: CAN bus disconnected

- blink: LCC activity (TX)
|-
|'''LED 3 - Yellow'''
|WiFi Status

- blink: searching / connecting

- constant off, AP mode

- constant on, client mode
|Incoming DCC signal

- on DCC signal present

- off DCC signal absent
|-
|'''LED 4 - Green'''
|WiFi/LCC Full - '''Either:'''

- 4 WiFi clients (on)

- 10 LCC sockets (on)
|Identify LED

Press button in CDI - LED comes on for 30 seconds
|-
|'''LED 4 - Green'''

'''(upon crash)'''
| colspan="2" |Blink Codes
|}

===Bootloader===
When the device is in Firmware Upgrade mode, LED 1 and LED 4 are alternately blinking like a grade crossing. LED 2 (LCC) and LED 3 (WiFi) are operating as normal.

To start the unit in Firmware Upgrade mode, unplug the power, then press and hold the tactile button on Side A while you plug in the power again.

=Track Output=
The CS-105 track output can be driven from a wide range of voltages. The output voltage of the system to the track will be the same as the input voltage. The output voltage of the system can be displayed at any time from a TCS throttle as described in the Configuration section of this manual.

The built-in DCC track output booster of the CS-105 is designed for a continuous capacity of 5 Amps. This output is also compatible with the Märklin/Motorola protocol, and both protocols can be in use at the same time. The CS-105 may be used to power any scale, but it is important to ensure that you are capable of powering your layout with the system. In some cases, one or more add-on devices such as the TCS [[B-106]] Booster may be necessary in order to supply some extra current capacity. Modern N and HO scale locomotive motors are typically very efficient, even under load. Below, we have included a table for some examples of typical load values which can help you determine if the CS-105 is capable of supplying your typical operation by itself:
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Locomotive Type'''
|'''Typical Current Draw'''
|'''Locomotive Max Count (Typical)'''
|-
|Idle/Stationary
|0.05A - 0.10A
|50 - 100
|-
|Idle/Stationary with sound
|0.15A - 0.25A
|20 - 33
|-
|N scale under load
|0.15A - 0.35A
|14 - 33
|-
|N scale under load with sound
|0.30A - 0.50A
|10 - 16
|-
|HO scale under load
|0.25A - 0.50A
|10 - 20
|-
|HO scale under load with sound
|0.35A - 0.65A
|7 - 14
|}
Note that the values in the table above are very generalized. Your results will vary for your own locomotives. Some older HO and N scale locomotives used much less efficient motors and can subsequently draw more current. The built in booster has the ability to measure track current, and this feature can be used to characterize a given locomotive for its typical current draw.

The built in booster is equipped with a soft-start mechanism to automatically limit the inrush current symptomatic of older first generation sound decoders. Additional external boosters may be added to the system for supplemental power, always be sure to include the booster common shown in the diagram below (green wire):
[[File:CS-105 With B-106 Booster.png|center|thumb|800x800px|Shown above is a simplified diagram of how to wire the CS-105 into a LCC network with an additional [[B-106]]]]

==RailCom®==
RailCom is a bi-directional data communications technology found in The NMRA Recommended Practices RP S-9.3.1 and S-9.3.2. RailCom enables bi-directional communication between the command station and decoders, unlike in traditional DCC where the communication is done exclusively in one direction (from the Command Station to the Decoder). The inclusion of RailCom opens up significant opportunities for future features and expansion. For example, the use of RailCom allows for real-time read-back of CVs while programming on the mainline. In traditional DCC, you would only be able to write to a CV, whereas with RailCom, writing and reading on the mainline are both possible.

Some other possibilities such as live feedback on a throttle for fuel/water level, temperature, and many other statistics are also unlocked with RailCom technology. Block detection becomes more integrated with RailCom as well, including the possibility of knowing ''who'' is occupying a block, rather than just knowing a block is occupied. This data could be used further to aide in automation setups and macros. A fleet of rolling stock could also be equipped with basic RailCom decoders to keep track of cars in yards or trains. The potential applications for RailCom are still being explored, and is an untapped wealth of possibilities! What will you do with RailCom and the CS-105?

RailCom is a highly-responsive system as well, allowing up to ~126 individual operations per second (depending on the available DCC bandwidth) at a bitrate of 250Kbps by introducing a very brief interruption to the DCC track power. During this interruption, the RailCom detector on the Command Station will send or receive information to and from the decoder.
Please refer to our online documentation on the TCS Wiki for more information on RailCom, including prerequisites, configuration options, and hardware support within TCS’ product lines. [[Support - RailCom®]]

===CS-105 RailCom® Settings===
The CS-105 has the following configuration options regarding RailCom:

#RailCom Cutout This setting effectively will control if RailCom is On or Off. This setting controls whether or not the RailCom cutout will be created by the CS-105 and included in the DCC packet stream. This setting affects both the signal sent out on the Track A/B connector as well as the signal sent over the LCC cable (if enabled). Options: '''Enabled''' / Disabled
#Post-RailCom Synchronization - Enabled/Disabled Some DCC systems and decoders, particularly older ones, require a special bit pattern following the RailCom cutout in order to resynchronize to the DCC data signal. If enabled, this special bit pattern is used. Options: '''Enabled''' / Disabled

=LCC Connections (CAN-Bus)=
In addition to LCC over WiFi, the CS-105 supports LCC over CAN using the dual RJ-45 sockets. In order to perform well electrically, CAN requires a linear topology. Short stubs may be used, but should ideally be used sparingly and kept under 6 feet or 2 meters. If you are using other wired LCC devices, a terminator is required at each end of the LCC CAN bus. Two of these terminators are included with the system. It is easy to know if a LCC CAN bus has been properly terminated, because there will be no unused RJ-45 sockets.
[[File:Simple LCC Network.png|center|frameless|698x698px]]
''NOTE: The CS-105 supplies power to the LCC cable, up to 400 mA in each direction. If your LCC nwtwork requires more power, add-on power supplies such as those offered by [https://www.rr-cirkits.com/ RR CirKits], or the [https://www.tcsdcc.com/shop?Category=Fascia+Panels Throttle Panels] or [https://www.tcsdcc.com/product-page/booster-adapter Booster Adapter] offered by TCS can supplement the power demands.''

=Internal Locomotive and Consist Roster=
The CS-105 stores settings about each DCC (and M/M) address, called the Roster Settings. This information is persisted across power cycles, and also includes the consists. You can check the amount of available storage in DCC System Settings > Status > Free Storage.

The purpose of the database is to keep track of locomotive specific configuration that can enhance the operating experience. For example, the database can keep track of what DCC function numbers correspond to a given feature such as bell or whistle. A user specified name for the locomotive can also be configured, and this will be shown on the throttles. This can allow the user to recall and control locomotives by a convenient name rather than by DCC address. ''Note:'' it is not possible to have multiple roster entries with the same DCC address.

For example, we have two locomotives:

#Santa Fe SD40 with cab number 567
#Southern Pacific SD50 with cab number 567

The traditional method is to assign a DCC address of 567 to the locomotive matching the cab number. Because of the address conflict in this example, this is no longer possible. The database can be used to associate an arbitrary DCC address to a specific locomotive name that will be displayed on the throttle.
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Assigned DCC Address'''
|'''Example Database Name (displayed on throttle to the user)'''
|-
|1
|SF 567 SD40
|-
|2
|SP 567 SD50
|}
For this reason, we also recommend never assigning short address 3 to a roster entry. Short address 3 is the default address for all DCC decoders. If you want to be able to test a decoder on address 3 before reprogramming its address, you should leave address 3 out of your saved roster.

Some throttles such as the TCS UWT-100, as well as NCE throttles with an LCD display, have the ability to present a list of possible locomotive names based on a search. In this example, if the user enters the number 567 on the throttle, a list is provided containing both the Santa Fe SD40 and the Southern Pacific SD50. The user can choose the appropriate locomotive to control without knowledge or regard to its arbitrarily assigned DCC address. You can type in other numbers that appear in the stored names as well, such as ‘40’ to get all SD40’s, or ‘35’ to get all GP35’s.

==Creating a New Roster Entry==
In order to create a new database entry for a locomotive, you first need to use a throttle to enter its address. After entering the address of the new locomotive on the throttle, it will appear in the system’s operational memory, the list under “Select Loco”, and the packet handler stack. This entry will exist only until the system powers down, whether or not it is ever given any commands. The persistent storage is only used when some settings of the locomotive are changed. There are a few ways to do this.

===Roster Configuration Using TCS Throttles===
Through a TCS throttle such as the UWT-100, you can view and modify roster data for any locomotive at any time. After selecting the address you would like to modify, enter the menu, then navigate to 8 Settings > 3 Roster Settings. The throttle may take a few moments to download the contents of the roster file from the command station.

Once in the Roster Settings menu, you will be presented with all of the options for the loco. These options are:

#Loco Name
#User Description
#Speed Step Mode
#F0 Behavior
#Functions
#Delete From Roster?

Note: F0 Behavior is covered in greater detail in the Consist Configuration section of this documentation.

===Roster Configuration Using JMRI===
Once you have set up a JMRI connection to your CS-105, you can view and modify the internal roster data through a DecoderPro or PanelPro interface for any locomotive at any time. After launching either program, select the LCC dropdown from the menu, then select Configure Nodes. A new window will appear which displays all of the “nodes” in your LCC network, which will include trains and consists in the operational memory of the system, as well as any connected LCC throttles, boosters, and other LCC accessories.

To modify the roster data for any of the locos in the system, select it from within the window, and then press “Open Configuration dialog.” The program may take a few moments to download the contents of the roster file from the command station.

Once in the Roster Settings menu, you will be presented with all of the options for the loco. These options are identical to the ones available when changing the configuration through a TCS throttle.You can see an example configuration below:

==Deleting an Existing Roster Entry==
An individual roster entry can be deleted by using the “Delete From Roster?” option in the throttle or JMRI node configuration menu. If you would like to delete your entire roster, you can perform a Factory Reset as described in the Factory Reset section.

==Function Configuration for Roster Entries==
The TCS system has extensive configuration settings for each locomotive and each function thereof, enabling convenient and prototypical operations for both solo and consisted locomotives. Additionally, a help feature is available on all TCS throttles, enabling the engineer to view a list of all functions on the throttle display, and displaying upon each function button press the matching function. This is convenient, because operators do not have to memorize which button number performs what function.

===Function Names===
To select the displayed name of a given function number, go into Functions, select the number, then Display. A list of common function names will appear for selection.

If the list under Display does not contain the desired name, then select Description to enter arbitrary text for the function name. After the text in Description has been changed, the selection under Display is ignored. To return to the list-based selection, an empty Description has to be written.

===Momentary Functions===
A momentary function is active on the locomotive so long as the respective throttle button is held down, and turned off when the button is released. A typical momentary function is horn or whistle.

A latching function is turned on upon a button press, then stays on when the button is released. The function is turned off when the button is pressed again.

Each function can separately be configured as momentary or latching. By default F2 is momentary and all other functions are latching.

==Consist Settings==
The consisting system within the TCS Command Station is unique, and functions differently than other consisting systems. For more details on how internal consisting works within the CS-105, please refer to the section on Consisting.

Consist settings for locomotive functions are stored within the roster configuration for each locomotive. These settings only become active when said locomotive is in a consist, and are automatically disabled when the consist is disbanded, or the locomotive is returned to single-unit operation. The main advantage to this method is that if the same locomotive is entered into the same consist, or another again in the future, the same settings are immediately restored without any need to reconfigure the consist settings from scratch.

===Consist Behavior===
This setting can be individually adjusted for every function from two options: A) Current Cab Only B) Consist.

In Current Cab Only mode, the function is activated by a throttle only if that throttle has selected this particular locomotive. An example for using “current cab only” control would be a function such as the bell or horn, as well as certain light functions such as ditch lights, which in real life is only activated by the lead unit in a consist.

In Consist mode the function is activated by all throttles, independent of which locomotive is dialed on the throttle. All functions influencing the motor or movement of the locomotives should be set to Consist mode, such as Momentum, ABV, Brake, Brake Release, Rev Up/Down (Manual Notch Up/Down), etc.

By default, all function numbers are set to Consist mode except for Function 1 and Function 2, which are assumed to be Bell and Horn/Whistle respectively.

===Headlight MU switch===
The MU Switch feature, available under the F0 submenu, is a unique feature of the TCS command station which aims to add another layer of realism to consist control. This feature is based on real-life locomotive operation, particularly in “modern” diesel locomotives. Depending on the configuration of this “switch”, the lighting setup and control for F0F and F0R will change behind the scenes. The MU Switch feature has four options to select from.

#Solo Unit

Solo Unit is the default configuration, and makes no changes to the behavior and operation of the loco.

#Coupled at Rear

Coupled at Rear means that this loco is an out-ward facing locomotive at either the front OR rear of the consist, and is coupled to the rest of the consist or cars by its REAR coupler. In this mode, if F0 is ON, only the “front” facing headlight will come on and the “rear” headlight facing the consist will remain off all the time.

#Coupled at Front

Coupled at Front means that this loco is an out-ward facing locomotive at either the front OR rear of the consist, and is coupled to the rest of the consist or cars by its FRONT coupler. In this mode if F0 is ON, only the “rear” facing headlight will come on and the “front” headlight facing the consist will remain off all the time.

#Middle Unit

Middle Unit means that this loco is somewhere in the middle of the consist, and is coupled to the rest of the consist or cars by BOTH couplers. In this mode, neither the “front” or “rear” facing headlights will come on, and will remain off all the time regardless of the status of Button 0.

==Special Features of Headlight (F0)==
For headlight, the Consist Behavior and MU switch options as described above are available in the Roster Settings > F0 submenu.

===Directional Control===
Directional Control is a unique feature to the TCS command station. This option, which is disabled by default, works behind the scenes to simulate the real-life headlight control of a locomotive without the need to do CV programming to remap the headlights to different buttons. This feature is not exclusive to consisted locomotives, nor is it enabled or disabled by entering or disbanding a consist; however, it is a feature which many users may find most useful when operating a locomotive which is frequently added to and removed from consists.

If this feature is enabled, the command station will keep in its memory separate controls and registers for Button 0 when traveling in the forward direction and the reverse direction. This means that if you are traveling in the forward direction and press button 0, the forward headlight will come on. When you change directions to reverse, the reverse headlight will be off until you press Button 0 again. Your throttle will reflect this as well, by toggling the function status on-screen when you change direction.

NOTE: This feature assumes that your decoder is in a “default” state where F0F and F0R outputs from your decoder are tied to the same button (F0), and are configured for directional lighting. This feature may break Rule 17 configurations of your decoder depending on the implementation from the decoder manufacturer.

Directional Control is also available as F100 under Menu > Operations > Loco Functions on TCS throttles. This controls the same setting and is persistent across power cycles.

===Blank F0 Forward/Reverse===
Blank F0 Forward means that the headlight will not come on when the direction on the throttle is Forward. This setting is helpful when there is a train or other engines coupled to the loco at the front coupler. Similar for Reverse, with the rear coupler.

These options are available as F101/F102 under Menu > Operations > Loco Functions on TCS throttles. When changing these settings, the MU switch will be adjusted in the Roster Settings, and persisted across power cycles.

== Consist, Roster, & Macro Database Backup ==
The Consists, Locomotive Roster entries, and Macros stored in your CS-105 can be backed up or loaded in from a previous backup using JMRI. For instructions, refer to the [[CS-105 Database Backup]] page

=Operating Trains=

==Speed and Function Operations==
When the command station is powered up, all locomotives will be set to speed zero, forward, with all functions off. To begin running a train, use the “select loco” function of your connected throttle and type in an address or select a locomotive from the active locomotives list.

The CS-105 supports F0 to F68 for DCC decoders, and F0 to F4 for Märklin-Motorola decoders.

The default selection is 128 speed steps for DCC decoders, and protocol version II for M/M decoders. To change the speed step mode, open the Roster Settings of the given locomotive, and modify the Speed Step Mode setting. This setting will be saved in persistent storage and the CS-105 will remember it after a power cycle.

The TCS Command System supports more than one throttle driving the same locomotive. When one throttle changes the locomotive speed or functions, other throttles will automatically update their screen.

==Consisting==
The TCS Command System uses the LCC protocol for consisting. Consists can be created by any LCC throttle (such as the UWT-100, UWT-50, [[LT-50]] or [[T-50]] throttles by TCS). Consists can be set up not only across DCC locomotives, but using an arbitrary mixture of DCC, M/M, or direct LCC (wireless) locomotives.

When selecting any of the consisted locomotives on a throttle, the entire consist will be operated: speed control and function control commands will automatically act on the consist, even if the given LCC throttle does not support the consisting protocol.

When operating functions such as horn (typically F2), the CS-105 will differentiate whether the throttle has selected the current locomotive (horn will sound) or a different locomotive of the consist (horn will not sound). This behavior can be selected or disabled for each DCC address and each function number specifically, see the Section Locomotive and Consist Roster. There is an additional headlights feature for prototypical diesel consists described in that section.

The Current Cab feature allows switching between different locomotives in a consist. This changes the relative display of forward/backward on the throttle display, and also changes which locomotive will sound the horn, if the given function’s consist behavior is configured to “Current Cab Only”. To change the Current Cab on a TCS throttle, press ENTER when a consist is selected.

The CS-105 stores consists in persistent storage. This means that your consists are saved between operating sessions and across power cycles. When a throttle selects a locomotive which is in a consist, all other consist members are automatically started and the consist is assembled on that throttle. This means that a consist can be handed over from one throttle to another; and a consist can be released on a throttle and picked up later on the same or different throttle by selecting any of the locomotives in the consist.

It is possible to have two different throttles select two different members of the same consist at the same time. When one throttle changes the consist speed or functions, other throttles will automatically update their screen.

==Technical information==
NOTE: The information in this section is subject to change in future software releases.

===Status screen===
Some technical information about the current operation of the CS-105 can be viewed in JMRI’s by opening the CS-105 configuration screen, then clicking the Status segment, or under Menu > Settings > DCC System Settings > Status on a TCS throttle.

===Start-up behavior===
When the Command Station powers up, it emits for approximately 1 second alternating DCC Broadcast Digital DecoderReset commands, and M/M Broadcast Speed Zero commands. This ensures that there are no runaway locomotives without the control of a throttle. Afterwards the regular (idle) packet sequence takes over.

In order for this start-up sequence to be effective, we recommend powering up the boosters of a layout no later than the command station. If the boosters and the command station are on the same switched power outlet, that's fine. If they are on separate switched outlets, we recommend flipping the switch of the boosters first, then the CS. This is just a recommendation though, and this recommendation also applies to non-TCS command stations -- if runaway trains are not a concern, then any sequence of power-up is just fine.

===Locomotive stack===
The CS-105 maintains an internal operative memory about the locomotives that it is controlling. This list in memory is sometimes referred to as the "stack." This memory allows the CS-105 to generate periodic messages to DCC and M/M decoders as required by the protocol standard, as well as provide information for a throttle or computer software about the current speed and functions for a given train upon request (typically when a train is acquired by a throttle).

Locomotives are automatically added to the operative memory when they are selected by a throttle. Each locomotive, including each consist member of a stored consist, occupies one entry in the “stack” of the CS-105. Upon powerup of the CS-105, this memory is empty, and the stored consists are loaded into it. The memory never gets full, because unused locomotives are automatically removed from the stack as needed.

The number of currently operating locomotives can be viewed in the Status screen. The CS-105 supports up to 260 locomotives in the operative memory, where these 260 locomotives are actively being addressed by a throttle and/or are being issued commands with somewhat regular frequency.

===Packet prioritization and repetition===
The CS-105 prioritizes packets to locomotives to achieve the best combination of fast response and reliability. Upon a change on a throttle (such as changing the speed or turning a function on and off), high-priority packets are going to be emitted to the track as soon as possible; then later low-priority packets are going to repeat this information; finally, refresh packets are going to keep repeating the locomotive state forever.

Refresh packets are emitted for DCC decoders for speed and functions F0-F12; for M/M decoders speed and F0-F4. The CS-105 will down-prioritize the sending of refresh packets to locomotives/addresses which have not been sent new commands for a long time. If the limit of the bandwidth is near to being reached, "un-used" locomotives will be removed from the packet generator/handler. This is referred to by some as the "stack." This methodology of handling packet generation and DCC bandwidth means that you will never have a "slot max" situation occur where you cannot effectively address a new locomotive and operate it; additionally, responsiveness from your throttle should always be immediate and lag-free.

The DCC bandwidth usage can be viewed in the Status screen, aggregated to a 10-second window and a 10-minute window.

====RailCom®-enabled DCC decoders====
RailCom-enabled locomotives do not need packets to be repeated, therefore saving a significant amount of DCC bandwidth. We recommend using RailCom-enabled locomotives, deploying RailCom-enabled Boosters such as the TCS [[B-106]], and enabling RailCom channel 2 transmissions in the decoders ([[CV 28|CV28]] bit 2 = 1). Check with your decoder’s instructions/literature or manufacturer to see if your decoder(s) support RailCom.

The number of currently operating RailCom-enabled locomotives can be viewed in the CS-105’s “Status”Status screen through a TCS UWT or connected JMRI configuration window.

===Heartbeat===
The CS-105 can continuously verify that a throttle controlling a moving train is operational, recognizing and stopping runaway trains that may be due to throttle malfunctions, dead batteries, wiring or wireless issues. This is accomplished by sending the throttle an LCC message, which it shall automatically or manually respond to, indicating that it is alive and intending to control that locomotive. A stopped train never generates heartbeat messages. When a throttle releases a train, the heartbeat checking also stops. For each train only the last assigned throttle will be checked.

A configuration option in DCC System Settings > Advanced Settings controls this feature. Setting the option to zero disables throttle heartbeats.

===Speed mapping===
The CS-105 translates the speed steps of the selected DCC or M/M protocol to the scale speed of 0 to 126 mph reported to the LCC throttles. This means that even if a decoder is driven with 14 or 28 speed steps, the throttles will always display a scale from 0 to 126.

The recommendation is that for speed matching purposes the locomotive decoders should be configured with a speed table that defines 1 (of 126) speed steps as 1 scale mph; for example, calibrate the locomotive to run with 32 scale mph at speed step 32, with 50 scale mph at speed step 50, etc. This makes the throttle display a speedometer, and any two locomotives can be consisted together.

===DCC Functions===
The CS-105 supports function packets of F0 to F68. The packets F0 to F12 are refreshed indefinitely; packets for F13 to F68 are sent out several times after the respective function command is received via LCC. Successful RailCom acknowledgement suppresses any repetitions of these packets.

=DCC Decoder Programming=

==Mainline Programming==
Mainline programming, also known as Operations mode or “OPS” programming is a method by which you can configure a DCC Decoder’s CVs (Configuration Variables) while “in operation” on the mainline track. All locomotives can continue operating while a locomotive is being programmed using Mainline Programming. For more information on mainline programming, please refer to our help article on the subject [[Support - DCC Programming Track|https://docs.tcsdcc.com/wiki/Support_-_DCC_Programming_Track]]

===OPS mode programming with RailCom®===
When programming a DCC decoder on the mainline, the CS-105 will attempt to use the NMRA standard for decoder feedback (also known as RailCom®). For this to succeed, the following requirements have to be met:

*The decoder must support RailCom®. (Check your decoder literature or ask your manufacturer.)
*RailCom- addressed feedback must be enabled in the decoder. CV28 bit 2 must be set. (Typical values are CV28=3 or CV28=131) If you’re unsure, you can place the locomotive on the Programming Track to read the value of CV28. A TCS UWT will show you which bits are set.
*RailCom Cutout must be enabled in the CS-105 settings (DCC System Settings > Advanced > Railcom Cutout > Enabled).
*The locomotive must be…
**on the track directly connected to the CS-105’s Mainline track output OR
**on track powered by a RailCom-aware booster connected to the LCC port (such as the TCS [[B-106]]), and DCC System Settings > Advanced > Drive LCC Boosters > Enabled must be set (as opposed to Enabled with no RailCom).

If you program a DCC decoder in OPS mode on the main which does support RailCom®, the decoder has the ability to provide feedback to the command station which acknowledges that a programming command has successfully completed. Similarly, the decoder can also send data to the command station, including CV values, meaning that you will be able to read the CV values.

===OPS mode programming without RailCom®===
When the above listed conditions are not met, you cannot read the value of a CV, nor does the command station have definitive certainty that a programming command was received and acted upon by the decoder. You will see a message when trying to read or program a CV indicating that there was no RailCom feedback. This is not an error message; when users without RailCom® feedback perform OPS mode programming, they just assume writes to have worked.

==Programming Track Programming==
Programming Track programming, also known as Service Mode programming is a method by which you can configure a DCC Decoder’s CVs while using a dedicated, isolated track. Connect your isolated programming track to the black 2-pin screw terminal block on your CS-105. To use the programming track, open the menu on your UWT and navigate to option "4 CV Programming" followed by "2 Programming Track". The programming track will not become active until you either READ or WRITE a CV; however, once the programming track turns on and while it is in use, the CS-105 will turn off the mainline output and the output to all auxiliary boosters over LCC. After the programming track comes online, it will remain online for 30 seconds. If you read or write another CV during this time, the 30 second timer will refresh. You can also cancel the timer early by exiting the Programming Track window.

Tip: To avoid unexpected shutdowns, we recommend disabling the Programming Track Access during operating sessions using ''DCC System Settings > Advanced > Program Track Access > Unavailable''

The use of a programming track is the only ''guaranteed'' way to be able to read back the values of CVs from a decoder. For more information on CV programming, please refer to our help article on the subject:

[[Support - DCC Programming Track]]

===How to Use The CS-105 Programming Track===
'''Follow the steps below to read a CV using the CS-105 and a UWT'''
{| class="wikitable"
!Step 1
!Step 2
!Step 3
!Step 4
|-
|[[File:Programming Track - Clean Slate.png|frameless]]
|[[File:Programming Track - CV 8 Press Enter to Read CV.png|frameless]]
|[[File:Programming Track - Reading CV 8.png|frameless]]
|[[File:Programming Track - CV 8 Read Successful.png|frameless]]
|-
|<nowiki>Enter Programming Track | MENU>4>2</nowiki>
|Use Keypad to enter a number in "CV:"
|Press "Enter" or "Read" button to read CV
|Wait for decoder to read. Value will display.
|}

'''Follow the steps below to write a CV using the CS-105 and a UWT'''
{| class="wikitable"
!Step 1
!Step 2(A)
!Step 2(B)
!Step 3
|-
|[[File:Programming Track - Clean Slate.png|frameless]]
|[[File:Programming Track - Write CV 29 Value 46 With Value.png|frameless]]
|[[File:Programming Track - Write CV 29 Value 46 With Bits.png|frameless]]
|[[File:Programming Track - CV 29 Value 46 Write Successful.png|frameless]]
|-
|<nowiki>Enter Programming Track | MENU>4>2</nowiki>
|(A) Use Keypad to enter number in "Value:"
|(B) Use Bit Disassembly to toggle bits
|Press "Enter" to write value to CV
|}

'''Possible Error Messages'''
{| class="wikitable"
!"No loco detected"
!"Write OK, verify failed"
!"Short on pgm track"
|-
|[[File:Programming Track - No Loco Detected.png|frameless]]
|[[File:Programming Track - CV 8 Write OK Verify Failed.png|frameless]]
|[[File:Programming Track - Short Circuit.png|frameless]]
|-
|This message will be displayed whenever there
is no "acknowledgement" sensed by the CS-105

after attempting to read or write a CV.

If you see this message, ensure your program

track is connected properly and that the loco

on the programming track is seated on the rails

properly and is wired correctly.
|This is not necessarily and error condition.
Certain CV's, particularly read-only CV's from

some manufacturers' decoders will not provide

an "acknowledgement" when writing to a

read-only CV. An example is CV 8 which can

be written to for a factory reset.

Annother possible reason to see this message

is if the value written to the CV (8) is not the

same as the value read back after the write.
|As the message implies, there is a short circuit
on the programming track. This short could be

caused by a wiring problem, screwdriver on the

rails, or an over-current situation caused by a

locomotive with bad wiring or a bad motor.

Seeing this message is a clear indication that

there is something wrong with your locomotive

wiring and/or motor.
|}

===Direct Mode Programming===
Direct mode programming, also known as “direct bit” or “bit manipulation” programming is a more time-efficient method of programming a DCC decoder, and is the default programming method used by the command station. When reading a CV, Direct mode programming works by querying a decoder for the state of each bit within a CV. The decoder will provide different acknowledgements for 1’s or 0’s within the CV. The command station can then convert the binary result into a decimal value and display it on the throttle in a readable way. Any Direct mode programming instruction always takes the same amount of time to complete, regardless of the CV number or CV value.

To access Direct Mode Programming, you do not need to specially select it. Simply use your TCS throttle menu and select “Program Track” from the CV Programming menu.

For more technical information on how Direct mode programming works, see NMRA standard S-9.2.3.

===Paged Mode Programming===
Paged mode programming is an older, slower method of programming a DCC decoder compared to Direct Mode Programming (described above). The CS-105 has partial support for Paged Mode programming; writing a CV is supported, but reading a CV is not. In order to access Paged Mode Programming, you need to specifically select it. To do this, enter the CV Programming menu on the TCS throttle, select “Advanced,” and then select “Paged Mode.”

To use Register Mode programming, select Paged Mode Programming, but write only CV's 1 through 5. Register Mode Programming in the CS-105 only supports a total of five CV's.

For more technical information on how Paged mode and Register mode programming works, see NMRA standard S-9.2.3.

==CS-105 DCC Address Programmer==
'''NOTE: The instructions outlined in this section assume the use of a TCS throttle. To use this feature, the locomotive/decoder must be placed on the Programming Track.'''

The process for programming a DCC decoder address using the CS-105 has been specifically crafted to make the user experience fluid and painless. The command station will perform some actions for you, unlike with many other systems where every action must be done manually. This feature can be used to conveniently check or set the DCC Address of a decoder.

To begin programming an address, enter the Menu on the TCS throttle, select “4 CV Programming” and then select “3 DCC Address” from the list of options as shown below.
[[File:CV Programming Menu - 3 DCC Address.png|center|frameless]]
The system will then ask you to place a locomotive on the programming track.
[[File:DCC Address - Place on programming track.png|center|frameless]]
If you do not place a locomotive on the programming track, or there is some issue in communicating with the decoder on the programming track, an error message will display stating that the loco/decoder was not detected.
[[File:DCC Address - No Loco.png|center|frameless]]
If there is a locomotive on the track and there is a good connection, the command station will perform a sequence of read operations in order to determine the current address(es) of the decoder. The information that will be displayed (as applicable) is:

*Current Address, including an indication for Short/Long format.
*Current Consist Address (Will not display if there is no consist address programmed)
*Consist Direction (If applicable)

Here are some examples:
[[File:DCC Address - Main Menu with Default Address.png|center|thumb|DCC Address - Main Menu with Default Address]][[File:DCC Address - Main Menu with Consist and Long Address.png|center|thumb|DCC Address - Main Menu with Consist and Long Address]]
 
[[File:DCC Address - Enter Short Address.png|thumb|DCC Address - Enter Short Address]]

===Short Address Programming===
The two-digit "Short" address is stored in CV 1 and has a valid range of values from 1 to 127. A value higher than 127 is invalid for short addressing. If you would like to program your locomotive with an address (such as a road number) which is greater than 127, you must use a 4-digit "Long" address as described in the section below. Per the NMRA spec, CV 1 cannot be modified on the main via operations (OPS) mode programming; therefore, you must use a dedicated DCC programming track to change a short address.

Note: By default, all DCC decoders ship in the two-digit "short" addressing format with a value of 3.

To program a short address, select option “1 Set Short Address” from the DCC Address menu, then enter an address between 1 and 127, followed by the “Save” button.

[[File:DCC Address - Enter Long Address.png|thumb|DCC Address - Enter Long Address]]

===Long Address Programming===
To program a long address, select option “2 Set Long Address” from the DCC Address menu.

Enter a long address using the keypad or encoder-based thumbwheel, then press “Save”. The command station will support DCC Long addresses from 0000 to 10239. Your decoder may or may not support addresses above 9999. Check with your manufacturer if you are unsure.

Note: It is possible to set a Long address which falls within the short address range (1-127). If you would like to select a long address within the short address range, you must add an extra “0” before the rest of the address when entering it into the throttle. For example, address 10L would be entered as “010” in the select loco screen. To select long address 0 (zero), type “00” into the select loco dialog.

After pressing “Save” the command station will change the address to the value you have entered, and will also change the address format from short to long if applicable.

[[File:DCC Address - Enter Consist Address.png|thumb|DCC Address - Enter Consist Address]][[File:DCC Address - Select Direction in Consist.png|thumb|DCC Address - Select Direction in Consist]][[File:DCC Address - Clear Consist Address.png|thumb|DCC Address - Clear Consist Address]]
===Consist Address (CV 19) Programming===

The steps in this section will demonstrate how to set up and/or clear CV 19 consists. Note that this method of consist programming is not in any way related to the TCS Command Station’s internal consisting method. CV 19 consists are typically a “portable” way to create consists, since the consisting information is stored within the decoders themselves, and not in the command station. Setting up a consist in this way, and also using CV 21 and CV 22 allows you to make and manage consists that can be used identically on any manufacturer’s command station.

Note: CV 19 consisting and Short addresses use the same 2-digit address space. For this reason, it is important to keep in mind that there could be potential conflicts with other decoders running on the same 2-digit address as your consist. It is also not possible to simultaneously use a short address and a consist address for the same decoder. Some decoder manufacturers allow for control of decoders on a long address and a consist address at the same time for different functions.

While a CV 19 consist is active, the motor control will always be ignored from the “base address.” The “base address” is the normal address the decoder would use when not in a consist.

To get started, select “4 Set Consist Address” from the DCC Address menu

Next, the system will ask you to enter a consist address. You may use the keypad or an encoder-based thumbwheel to change the value. Note that the maximum value is 127. CV 19 consists use Bit 7 of the CV to select the direction, meaning you have 127 forward and 127 reverse values.

After entering the address for your consist, the system will ask you to select the direction of this unit within the consist. This will set or clear bit 7 of CV19 as mentioned in the previous step.

After selecting the direction, the command station will program the decoder with the consist address you set.

If you would like to remove the CV 19 consist address from a decoder, select option “3 Clear Consist Address” from the DCC Address menu.

 

 

=Configuration=

===Push Button Track Power On/Off===
Pressing the push button on the CS-105 briefly will turn off (disable) track power. This acts on the entire layout, including auxiliary boosters. Press the button again to turn on (enable) track power. LED1 will be constant off when track power is disabled. When track power is enabled, LED1 will be on.

Changes to the track power status, be it from a throttle, button press, or short circuit, will be reported over LCC. See [[LCC Events Information]] for more details.

===Push Button Configuration Mode===
Push Button Configuration provides a basic means of configuring the CS-105 using only the push button and Status LEDs on the device. The options available in Push Button Configuration Mode are listed on the top side of the case of the CS-105.

At any time, '''Push Button Configuration Mode''' can be entered by pressing and holding down the push button for 10 seconds. Once all of the four Status LEDs appear solid on, the CS-105 is in Push Button Configuration Mode. In this mode you have '''30 seconds''' to select the configuration action you want by pressing the push button briefly one to four times. If the button is not pressed again for 30 seconds, the CS-105 will automatically exit Push Button Configuration Mode and return to normal operations without making any changes.

After you make a selection, all four LEDs will blink as many times as your selection, then after three such confirmations, the selected action will be performed and the CS will reboot.

====1 - Secure AP Configuration Mode Entry====
This action is selected by a '''long press, then 1x short press.'''

The CS-105 will reboot and start up in WiFi Access Point Mode using WPA2 security with the currently configured password (default is LAYOUTWIFI with password 123456789).

====2 - Open AP Configuration Mode Entry====
This action is selected by a '''long press, then 2x short presses.'''

The CS-105 will reboot and start up in WiFi Access Point Mode using no security.

'''Warning:''' In this mode, the CS-105 is not secure. In this mode, it is relatively easy for anyone to connect to the CS-105 with any WiFi device, intentionally or unintentionally. This mode is not recommended for prolonged use. This mode is primarily designed to allow you to recover the system and access the configurations for the WiFi in the event that you lose or forget your WiFi Password.

====3 - WiFi Client Mode====
This action is selected by a '''long press, then 3x short presses.'''

The CS-105 will reboot and start up in WiFi Client Mode. In this mode the CS-105 will automatically connect to a nearby WiFi network for which the network name (SSID) and password was stored in the settings. The WiFi LED will be blinking during the search and connection process.

If the WiFi LED keeps blinking, that means that the CS-105 is in WiFi Client mode, but can not find any of the configured WiFi networks nearby, or is unable to connect, for example because the password is incorrect.

The factory default settings have one WiFi network saved, named LAYOUTWIFI with password 123456789.

====4 - WPS Configuration Mode Entry====
This action is selected by a '''long press, then 4x short presses.'''

'''WPS''' is a method of easily connecting a WiFi device to a Wi-Fi Access Point or Router. Most modern WiFi routers have a '''WPS''' push button on them that, when pressed, can allow a device to automatically and securely connect to it. Sometimes this button is labeled with the icon .

Use the following process:

#Make sure that the CS-105 and the WiFi access point are not too far from each other.
#Long press the push button to enter Push Button Configuration Mode.
#Press the WPS button on the WiFi router.
#Press the CS-105 push button 4 times.
#Wait. The connection procedure can take up to two minutes.

===Factory Reset===
{|
!'''WARNING''': Factory Reset permanently erases data and can not be undone.
|}
The CS-105 can be returned to all factory settings by sending a special command through LCC. In JMRI, select menu > LCC > Send Frame. In the dialog, find the section with “Send OpenLCB addressed message to”, and select in the dropdown the CS-105 command station.

In the Contents field, type “20 AA 09 00 99 03 01 23”, which is “20 AA”, then the full S/N of your command station with spaces. Press the Send Datagram button. After a few seconds, the CS will reboot.

Factory Reset clears all consists, all Roster entries, removes the WiFi connections including password, sets all settings back to the factory default, and switches the CS-105 WiFi into AP mode. Performing a factory reset will also change certain "well-known Event ID's."

==CS-105 WiFi Configuration==
It may be desirable to change the WiFi Name (SSID), and/or password of the command station – for example, if your command station will be traveling with you to a train show. In this case, using the default WiFi name and Password may expose your layout to unwanted tampering or cross-talk with throttles and command stations using the same configuration. To address this, there are several methods you can use to modify the WiFi settings.

===WiFi Configuration Using Integrated Web Interface===
The CS-105 has a built-in web server that can serve up a graphical configuration interface to any connected device with a web browser such as a computer, smartphone, or tablet. In order to launch the configuration interface perform the following steps:

'''Accessing the Web Interface in Access Point Mode''':

In order to use the Web Interface configuration while the CS-105 is in Access Point mode, follow these steps:

#Switch the CS-105 into Access Point Mode (either open or secure) using the Push Button Configuration method described above.
#Connect your computer, smartphone, or tablet to the WiFi network provided by the CS-105. Make sure that your device does not have any other form of internet access (disable cellular service internet access for example).
#Open a web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer, Edge, Firefox, Google Chrome, or Safari).
#In the address bar, type 10.0.0.1 or my.tcsdcc.com and press Enter.

'''Accessing the Web Interface in Client Mode''':

In order to use the Web Interface configuration while the CS-105 is in WiFi Client mode, you must first determine the IP address that the CS-105 received from your WiFi network. There are multiple ways to do this:

'''Option 1:''' Connect JMRI through an LCC cable and USB Adapter (such as those available from [https://www.rr-cirkits.com/ RR CirKits]), open the configuration dialog of the CS-105, then look in the Status segment for “WiFi IP Address”.
{|
!'''WARNING''': DO NOT connect any cable between the LCC jacks on the CS-105 and your Ethernet.
|}
'''Option 2:''' Connect a TCS throttle, select Settings > DCC System Settings > Status > WiFi IP Address.

'''Option 3:''' Look up IP addresses in your WiFi router’s administrative interface.

Once you have determined the IP address, use the following procedure:

#Connect your computer, smartphone, or tablet to the same WiFi network as the CS-105 is connected to.
#Open a web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer, Edge, Firefox, Google Chrome, or Safari).
#In the address bar, type the IP address and press enter.

{|
!NOTE: This process can be simplified by assigning a "Static IP" to the CS-105 in your router's configuration settings.
|}
'''Web Interface Configuration Settings:'''

On the webpage that appears, you can modify the WiFi Name (SSID) and password of the Access Point configuration, or add another WiFi profile for connecting to, say, a router.

#Firstly, you may choose to change the “WiFi Mode” from ‘Access Point’ to ‘Client’ !!WARNING!! Do not set the system from Access Point mode to Client mode before configuring a new Client mode connection profile! Doing so will essentially disable WiFi connectivity to the system. If you find yourself locked out, use the push button configuration method to switch the CS-105 to Access Point mode.
#Under “Access Point Configuration” you can modify the WiFi name and password of the system when it is set to run in Access Point mode.
#Under the “Add WiFi” section, you can add WiFi names and passwords for connections you would like the command station to connect to in Client mode. Press the “Add” button after entering a new SSID and password to add it to the list of profiles. You can store up to 7 WiFi profiles total.
#At the bottom of the page is a list of profiles saved in the system. You can click the check box next to one or more profiles and then press the “Remove Selected Profiles” button to delete those profiles.
#After adding WiFi profile or changing the WiFi mode, you have to power cycle the CS-105 for the changes to take effect.

An example of the configuration window is shown below:

[[File:CS-105 Web Interface WiFi Configuration.png|frameless]]

===WiFi Configuration Using TCS Throttle===
You can reconfigure the onboard AP or add new WiFi profiles to the CS-105 through the menu interface of the TCS throttles. To do this, enter the Menu and navigate to 8 Settings > 2 DCC System Settings > 3 WiFi Settings. You will be presented with the following options:

#WiFi Mode[[File:WiFi Mode.png|none|thumb|WiFi Mode - Allows you to change the WiFi connection mode between Access Point mode and Client mode.]]'''!!WARNING!!''' DO NOT set the system from Access Point mode to Client mode before configuring a new Client mode connection profile via the Add Network menu! Doing so will essentially disable WiFi connectivity to the system. If you find yourself locked out, use the push button configuration method to switch the CS-105 to Access Point mode.
#Access Point Configuration You can modify the WiFi name and password of the system when it is set to run in Access Point mode.
#Add Network[[File:CS-105 Add Network.png|none|thumb|Add Network - Add WiFi names (SSID) and passwords for connections you would like the command station to connect to in Client mode.]]Use the “Save?” option when you have set both the name and the password.
#Saved Networks[[File:Saved Networks.png|none|thumb|Saved Networks - Shows a list of network profiles saved in the system. You can make modifications to these profiles if desired, or delete them when they are not needed anymore.]]
#Uplink[[File:CS-105 Uplink.png|none|thumb|Uplink - Allows you to connect the Command Station to a LCC-enabled router for the express purpose of expanding the number of possible wireless LCC throttle connections without the need for a PC and/or JMRI server connection.]]NOTE: Uplink is disabled by default.

It is important to note that no changes to the WiFi configuration will take place until the system is power cycled. If you are using a TCS throttle and exit the System Settings, a command will be sent to the system to reboot.

===JMRI-Based Configuration===
The same options as described above are available through the JMRI configuration menu. JMRI configuration works independently of the WiFi mode if JMRI is connected through the LCC cable. If you want to connect JMRI through the Web Interface, use the instructions above to determine the IP address of the CS-105. Use this IP address and port number 12021 for the JMRI Connection Profile.

===WPS-Based Configuration===
If supported by your router, you can press the “WPS” button to attempt an automatic pairing between the router and command station. See the instructions under “Push Button Configuration Mode” section “WPS” subsection.

===IP Address Changes===
When using the CS-105 in WiFi Client mode, the CS-105 uses an IP address assigned by your WiFi router. TCS throttles can typically detect the presence of the CS-105, but remember the last IP address for faster connection. JMRI profiles have to be set up explicitly with the IP address. When your network router changes the IP address of the CS-105, you might experience unexpected disruptions.

For this reason, it is recommended to set your WiFi router to always assign a fixed (static) IP address to the command station. Refer to the administrative interface of your WiFi router to do this.

==System Configuration==
It is possible to configure all of the settings of the device through a TCS throttle, either wired or wireless, or through JMRI, also either wired or wireless. The configuration process for the WiFi is described above. In addition to WiFi configuration, you can also change other settings which are detailed in the sub-sections below. To access the configuration options for the CS-105 through a TCS throttle, first enter the menu, then navigate to 8 Settings > 2 DCC System Settings.

You can find a complete flowchart of the menu structure on our website. You can also refer to the help text for any menu option through the built-in help function of the throttle available by using the [?] button. JMRI displays the help text for every setting.

===User Info Settings===
[[File:CS-105 User Info Settings.png|none|thumb|User Info Settings may be used to change the display name and description of the device as it appears on a network.]]
You can give your system a friendly name, such as “Joe” and a description, such as “My new favorite command station”.

===System Settings===
The System Settings Menu Tree allows you to configure the characteristics of the track output and DCC features. The short circuit protection can be modified from within the Track Output sub-menu, and you can enable or disable features via the Advanced Options menu.
[[File:CS-105 System Settings.png|frameless]][[File:CS-105 Track Output Settings.png|frameless]][[File:CS-105 Advanced Options.png|frameless]]

===WiFi Settings===
See the CS-105 WiFi Configuration section.

===Macros===
The CS-105 can be set up to use and control Macros. These macros could be a sequence of turnout throws on accessory decoders in order to set a route, or events that occur from a particular trigger. Macros and Macro Configuration are described in detail in supplementary documentation which can be found on the TCS website.

Also see our supplementary article for [[DCC Turnout Creation in JMRI With TCS Command Stations]].

===Status===
The Status Menu displays a variety of useful information about the system, such as the track voltage, track current, IP address and MAC address, DCC Bandwidth usage, and more! To check the individual values on the throttle, press the [?] button on a highlighted entry.

==Configuration Backup and Restore==
The JMRI Configuration window has a “Backup” and “Restore” button to save and restore the entire system configuration of the CS-105. This system can also be used to backup, restore, and copy locomotive roster entries.

Note: Passwords are not saved in the backup for security reasons.

Note: The locomotive Roster, Macros, and Consists are not saved to the backup. There will be a separate mechanism developed for backing up the CS-105’s internal database.

=Updating the CS-105 Software Version=
The CS-105 features a bootloader which can be used to perform software updates on the system in the field at any time, assuming you have access to a firmware file. You can check the software version of the system by using a TCS throttle and navigating to 8 Settings > 2 DCC System Settings > Status and then scrolling down until you see “SW Ver:”

There are multiple methods by which you can update the firmware on the CS-105. You may update the device over WiFi, or wired through the LCC bus (requires additional hardware, not included). Whichever method you choose to use, the first step is to enter the bootloader. In order to access the bootloader on the CS-105:

#Start with the device in an unpowered state. Unplug it if necessary.
#Press and hold the tactile button on the face of the CS-105 while plugging in the power.
#Continue to hold the button for approximately 3 to 5 seconds. Release the button once you see LED 1 and LED 4 on the LCC header begin to alternately blink back and forth like a grade crossing signal.

''Note: When updating the firmware '''via an LCC cable''' using JMRI, the CS-105 will be switched from operational state to bootloader automatically, thus you can skip these steps.''

You are now in bootloader mode, you are ready to begin the firmware update process! The switchover process disrupts WiFi connections, thus to update over WiFi, you must start from bootloader mode. Use one of the methods below to update the CS-105.

==Updating Through DEPOT==
Full Instructions with pictures on how to update your CS-105 through TCS DEPOT can be found on the [https://www.tcsdcc.com/update-with-depot TCS Website].

You must have the most recent version of TCS DEPOT installed on your computer to download and install this update into your device. If you do not have the program installed, you can download DEPOT from the TCS website. Even if you already have the program installed, it needs to be updated to the latest version in order for the firmware update process to work properly.

If TCS DEPOT is not supported on your PC, continue reading below or visit the TCS website for alternative instructions. TCS DEPOT is not supported on 32-bit operating systems.

==Updating Through Web Interface==
Full Instructions with pictures on how to update your CS-105 through the Integrated Web interface can be found on the [https://www.tcsdcc.com/update-with-web TCS Website].

The Web Interface updating process is significantly faster than other methods of updating firmware; however, it does have the downside of not being automatic in the same ways as TCS DEPOT, such as automatic firmware file downloads and auto detect/connect.

====Prerequisites====

*A PC, phone, or tablet.
*The firmware file for your device must be available on the computer you will be using to update. These files have the extension “.bin” Firmware files can be downloaded from the [https://tcsdcc.com/firmware Firmware Page] on the TCS Website. ''Note''':''' After downloading, it is recommended that you copy or move the firmware file into a safe place that is easy to find.''
*A WiFi access point connected and paired to the computer and the CS-105.

To reduce the possibility of mistakes and confusion, we ''recommend'' ensuring that you connect directly to the CS-105, and all other connections are closed or shut down. It is recommended, but not necessary, that you also shut down any active JMRI WiThrottle servers.

==Updating Through JMRI==
Like the Web Interface method described above, this method also required manual downloading of [https://tcsdcc.com/firmware Firmware Files] for your device. Additionally, you may require add-on hardware if your PC does not have a network connection/WiFi. Full Instructions with pictures on how to update your CS-105 through JMRI using WiFi can be found on the [https://www.tcsdcc.com/update-with-jmri TCS Website].

=WiFi Performance=
While WiFi as a wireless standard is fairly resilient, There are a number of steps that can be taken to maximize the overall performance. A general rule for the best performance is to mount the stationary equipment as high as reasonably possible with a clear line of sight between the base station (CS-105 or Router) and throttles, etc. Try to stay clear of metal objects such as ductwork.

===No External WiFi Router Used (Access Point Mode)===
The built-in WiFi antenna is optimized for its compactness within the CS-105 enclosure. The distance and placement between the CS-105 and other connected WiFi accessories (throttles) is more critical in this mode. Experimenting with the location and orientation of the CS-105 may be required to maximize performance. The expected range of the CS-105's Access Point is approximately 100ft (30.5 Meters) in ideal circumstances. The CS-105 and TCS Wireless throttles use 2.4GHz WiFi, which offers better range and penetration through obstacles such as walls or benchwork.

===External WiFi Router used (Client Mode)===
In this mode, the best performance can be achieved with WiFi routers that have two or more antennas. This is called antenna diversity, and it provides multiple redundant and diverse paths for the wireless signal. Experiment with the antenna orientation to achieve the best performance. Typically the best performance will be achieved by orienting each antenna differently (90o or 45o apart). Do not orient an antenna directly towards the CS-105 or yourself, because the WiFi signal is '''not''' emitted towards the direction where the antenna is pointing to, but rather perpendicular from the tip of the antenna. Vertical antenna orientation is usually a good starting point. The CS-105 MUST be connected to a router which offers 2.4G WiFi. Some modern routers do not have 2.4GHz enabled by default, so you may need to enable it in the router's settings.

===Mesh WiFi===
In recent years, WiFi mesh network solutions have become more prevalent. The CS-105 intentionally uses 2.4GHz WiFi to achieve maximum range. The vast majority of model railroad layouts do not require more than one WiFi Access Point. The best performance is typically achieved with a single WiFi Access Point centrally located.

The CS-105 and the UWT throttles provide fast and reliable train control with as little as one to two bars of WiFi signal strength. A switch to a different Access Point or Mesh Point is necessary only when the signal strength occasionally falls to zero bars. For this reason, UWT throttles very rarely jump between Mesh Points (roaming).

If you want to "force" roaming, and connect to a closer WiFi access point, you can select Menu > [6] Networks > [1] Current Network > [2] Reconnect to reconnect the throttle to the access point with the strongest signal.

=Troubleshooting Steps=
This section will help you diagnose some common issues using the Status LED's as described above. Listed here are the common problems and some steps to help you troubleshoot that problem.

'''Problem: There is no power on the track output (Mainline)'''

#Check the Power LED
##''The Track LED is off'' Check the Power Supply. If the power supply is unplugged, plug it in and check the Power LED. If the Power LED remains off, make sure that the power supply > wall cord is securely installed and is plugged into a live socket. If the socket is not live, check for tripped circuit breakers, etc. The power supply from TCS should include an on-board Blue LED which indicates that the power supply is operational. If this Blue LED on the power supply is not lit, the power supply is not receiving input power, or is otherwise not functioning.
##''The Track LED is on'' System is receiving incoming power; Continue to the next steps.
#Check the Track LED.
##''The Track LED is off.'' The track power has been turned off. You will also see a “POWER OFF” label on TCS throttles. To turn on track power again, briefly press the button on the CS. On a TCS throttle, press the red E-Stop button, then confirm that you want to turn on track power. Alternatively, select Menu > Settings > Track Power > Set Power On.
##''The Track LED is blinking rapidly (2 Hz).'' There is a short circuit on the track output of the CS-105. Remove the short-circuit. Check for derailed trains, incorrectly lined turnouts, reversing loop polarity, or wiring problems, such as a locomotive bridging to an incorrectly wired neighboring booster district. After the short circuit is removed, the track output will be switched on automatically in a few seconds. If this problem occurs frequently without an apparent short circuit, increase the current limits set under DCC System Settings > Track Output. If you’ve reached the maximum current limits, you may need one or more auxiliary Boosters such as the B-106 for your layout.
##''The Track LED is blinking slowly (once every 4 seconds).'' The CS-105 has overheated and disabled power output for safety. Once the device cools down to a moderate temperature, the power output will be enabled automatically. TCS has verified that under normal room temperature the CS-105 can operate at the maximum power output for an indefinite amount of time without overheating. If this problem occurs frequently, verify that there is sufficient air circulation around the CS-105. Do not mount the CS-105 in an enclosed space such as in a drawer. Do not cover the venting grills on the front or the back of the CS-105. If the device is operating in a hot climate, we recommend mounting the CS-105 vertically on a wall, with the Auxiliary Cab connector upwards, and at least two inches of space above and below the unit.
##''The Track LED is on.'' The CS-105 is providing power to the Mainline terminals. Verify your wiring. The track should be connected to the A and B terminals on the Mainline output (green plug).

'''Problem: the system has stopped responding and LED 4 is blinking in a pattern'''

In this condition, the system has encountered a software error.

Most crash conditions can be cleared by power cycling the system. Remove power, wait at least 5 seconds, and reapply power. If the issue continues, or is repeatable, record the blink pattern, and contact TCS Technical support for assistance.

'''Problem: there is no menu item called “DCC System Settings” in the Settings menu on the UWT throttle.'''

The throttle is set to operate in WiThrottle Protocol mode. In this mode the Throttle is not communicating directly with the TCS command station, and thus can not view or modify any settings.

Set the Connection Mode to LCC by Menu > [6] Networks > [1] Current Network > [3] Connect Mode > LCC.

'''Problem: there is no menu item called “Roster Settings” in the Settings menu on the UWT throttle.'''

No locomotive is selected.

Select a locomotive first to adjust its Roster Settings. In dual throttle mode on the UWT-100, it is always the left-hand throttle that is used for Roster Settings. When controlling a consist, the current cab is selected for Roster Settings.

'''Problem: the UWT throttle says “WiThr Server not found”'''

The throttle is set to operate in WiThrottle Protocol mode. To use a UWT with the CS-105, the LCC mode should be selected.

In the menu shown, scroll down to [5] Change LCC/WT Mode and select LCC.

'''Problem: the UWT throttle says “LCC Server not found”'''

#''Check the WiFi LED.''
##''The WiFi LED is off.'' The CS-105 is in Access Point Mode, and your throttle is connected to the wrong WiFi network (not the CS-105). Select [6] Open Network Menu > [2] Saved Networks. Pick the network name that the CS-105 broadcasts (default LAYOUTWIFI). Select [2] Connect Now. If you intend to use the CS-105 in WiFi Client mode with an external WiFi router, then you need to switch the CS-105 into WiFi Client mode. See the Push Button Configuration section on how to do that.
##''The WiFi LED is blinking.'' The CS-105 is in WiFi Client mode, but not connected to your WiFi network. Ensure that you correctly configured the WiFi network name and password for your desired WiFi. See the WiFi Configuration section. This error might also happen if the WiFi signal strength is too low at the location of the CS-105. Move your UWT to be near the CS-105, and read the signal strength on the display. If you can see at least two bars, this is certainly not an issue; with one bar the CS-105 would still likely work correctly.
##''The WiFi LED is on.'' The CS-105 is in WiFi Client mode, and correctly connected to your WiFi network. Verify that the UWT throttle is connected to the same WiFi network as the CS-105 is configured to connect to. It is possible that the auto-detection of the command station does not work on your WiFi network. Press Try Again a few times to re-try. If it does not work, then you may need to manually set the IP address of the CS-105 on the throttle. Refer to the Web Server Based Configuration > Client Mode section to determine the IP address of your CS-105. On the throttle, select [2] Set IP address. Enter the IP address (usually the first three numbers are pre-filled for you and you only need to enter the last number) and press Save. Before you go through this process, it is helpful to set the CS-105 to a fixed IP address in the administrative interface of your WiFi router.
##''The WiFi Full LED is on.'' There are too many WiFi throttles connected to the CS-105. You need an LCC hub / repeater to connect more than 10 WiFi throttles in WiFi Client mode. JMRI comes with such a software, and it can be activated via the LCC menu > Start Hub. You may need to use [2] Set IP Address on the throttle to fix it to your JMRI computer’s IP address.

'''Problem: cannot select any locomotive (error 1030).'''

This problem generally means that the throttle is connected to the LCC network, but the CS-105 command station is not.

Select Menu > [8] Settings > [2] DCC System Settings. If you get a message “No DCC System found”, then you can be certain that the throttle is unable to talk to the CS-105 via the LCC network. (If this menu is not there, see above for “there is no menu item called DCC System Settings”.) Continue troubleshooting using these steps:

#''Check the Status LED's.''
##''All LEDs are off.'' There is no power input on the CS-105. Verify that the power supply is correctly plugged in.
##''The Track LED and the WiFi Full/Error LED are rapidly blinking in an alternating fashion.'' The CS-105 is in bootloader mode. Make sure that there is no object accidentally pressing the pushbutton on the CS-105. Remove all objects from the front and back of the CS in 2” distance for safety reasons. To exit bootloader mode, remove the power from the CS-105, wait two seconds for all lights to go out, then plug in power again. If the alternate blinking resumes after power cycling the device, then the software upgrade of the CS-105 has failed and there is no operational software present. You need to download and apply a correct software update. See the Updating the Software Version section.
#''General LCC connectivity troubleshooting.''
##Go through the steps above for the Problem: the UWT throttle says “LCC Server not found”.
##If you are using JMRI, open the LCC menu > Configure Nodes. Press the Refresh button on the bottom of the screen. You should be seeing '''both''' the CS-105 and the UWT throttle in the list.
##If the UWT throttle is missing, then likely your throttle is connected to the wrong WiFi network.
##If the CS-105 is missing, then verify the connection between JMRI and the CS-105. Check the main PanelPro window for a red error message.
##If you’re using wired connection on the CS, check the LCC LED, it should be solid on. Check your USB-LCC adapter, verify that the LCC cables are all plugged in and the terminators are correctly connected at both ends of the LCC line. There has to be exactly two terminators at the two ends. If you are using wired Throttle Panels from TCS, check the TERM jumper: when this is on, that panel acts as a terminator itself.

'''Problem: cannot select a locomotive (error 80000).'''

This error happens on wired LCC throttles when the LCC cabling has a problem.

See the General LCC connectivity troubleshooting above for LCC cabling-related tips.

'''Problem: The LCC-USB adapter has its lights blinking rapidly, and in JMRI’s LCC Connection Monitor there are many short messages scrolling faster than I can read.'''

This happens when the CS-105 is connected to JMRI via both WiFi and the LCC CAN-bus cable, and a loop is created in the LCC network. The loop makes the network inoperational.

Remove either the WiFi or the wired connection between JMRI and the CS-105. You may need to temporarily unplug the USB-LCC adapter from your computer, quit JMRI, or switch the CS-105 into Access Point mode to let the LCC network recover.

If you are using an LCC-USB adapter for JMRI, the LCC cable is plugged into the CS-105, the CS-105 is in WiFi Client mode and you also use the LCC Menu > Start Hub in JMRI, then you need to disable the Uplink feature in the CS-105 WiFi Configuration. Select Settings > DCC System Settings > WiFi Settings > Uplink > Enable Uplink > disabled.

'''Problem: “No programming track found” message when selecting CV Programming > Program Track or DCC Address.'''

#''The programming track is disabled by configuration.'' Go to Settings > [2] DCC System Settings > [2] System Settings > [2] Advanced Options > [6] Program Track Access. Verify that it is set to “automatic switchover”.
#''Connectivity problem.'' Try to select and operate a locomotive. If you are getting an error, see above for “Problem: cannot select any locomotive (error 1030)”.

'''Problem: ALL auxiliary Boosters are nonoperational (no power output).'''

#''The LCC Booster output is disabled.'' Go to Settings > [2] DCC System Settings > [2] System Settings > [2] Advanced Options > [9] Drive LCC Boosters. Ensure that it is set to Enabled or Enabled with no RailCom.
#''The LCC Cable between the CS-105 and [booster adapter] is disconnected'' Inspect your LCC cables between the CS-105 and your booster network.
#''The LCC Network is missing terminator(s)'' To function properly, the wired LCC network requires at least one terminator. Ensure your network is properly terminated.

'''Problem: Can not turn on headlight for a [specific] locomotive.'''

Other functions work, and headlight on other locomotives also works. Sometimes the headlight comes on in only one direction but not in the other.

#''Check the MU switch setting and see if it is set for that locomotive.'' Review the Headlight MU Switch section of this manual to understand how to operate the MU Switch. Go to Menu > Settings > Roster Settings > F0 > MU Switch and set it to Solo Unit.
#''Directional headlight is set for that locomotive.'' Press F0 again after changing direction to turn on the headlight in the other direction. Review the Directional Control section of this manual to understand how to operate a directional headlight. Go to Menu > Settings > Roster Settings > F0 > Directional and set it to disabled.
#''Locomotive Roster Entry function control is setup incorrectly.''
##''F0 Set to Momentary'' If F0 is set to Momentary and not Latching, the function will only be on for as long as you hold the button down. Set F0 back to Latching.
##''Locomotive is in a CS-105 Consist'' If this locomotive is in a consist controlled by the CS-105, it is possible that the Consist Functions settings are not configured properly for this locomotive. With the locomotive selected, navigate to Menu > Settings > Roster Settings > F0 > Consist Behavior and select the correct option for your operations.
#''Locomotive/Decoder is in a CV 19 Consist'' Use the DCC Address feature to determine if the locomotive is in a CV 19 consist. If so, you may want to clear the Consist Address.
#''Wiring or decoder setup problem in that locomotive.'' Verify the wiring and the decoder setup in the locomotive. Try a factory reset on the decoder.

CS-105 Database Backup

2024-07-12T00:56:45Z

Dan Mycio: page creation with basic content

== Overview ==
The entire database, or memory, of the TCS command station can be backed up or restored using a computer. The database includes information such as the Roster Entries, Consists (members), and Macros.

This page will instruct you on how to create a database backup, as well as how to restore a saved backup. These instructions assume you have already created a JMRI profile for the device you want to backup/restore.

If you are looking for instructions on how to export and import roster entries between JMRI and a TCS Command Station, please refer to the [https://www.jmri.org/help/en/html/hardware/openlcb/TCS.shtml JMRI Help Article] on the subject.

== Creating a Database Backup ==
Follow these steps to create a backup of your command station's database.

# Power on the device you would like to backup and connect it to your computer. For a CS-105, you may use a wired LCC connection or a WiFi connection.
# Open JMRI Panel Pro and select the correct profile for this device and connection mode
# Select "Memory Tool" from the LCC menu
# In the Memory Tool window, use the drop-down box to select the correct device (CS-105 or LT-50)
# In the Memory Tool window, change the "Memory Space:" to 80
# Press the "Get.." button
# In the window that appears, set a file name and location to save the file to

After the database is done being read, the database will be saved to the location you selected as a ".bin" file.

== Restoring a Database Backup ==
Follow these steps to use an existing backup to overwrite your command station's database.

# Power on the device you would like to backup and connect it to your computer. For a CS-105, you may use a wired LCC connection or a WiFi connection.
# Open JMRI Panel Pro and select the correct profile for this device and connection mode
# Select "Memory Tool" from the LCC menu
# In the Memory Tool window, use the drop-down box to select the correct device (CS-105 or LT-50)
# In the Memory Tool window, change the "Memory Space:" to 80
# Press the "Put.." button
# In the window that appears, select the saved .bin file you would like to restore

After a few moments, the database file you selected will be completely restored.

LT-50 Database Backup

2024-07-12T00:25:18Z

Dan Mycio: created page redirect to CS-105

#REDIRECT [[CS-105 Database Backup]]

LT-50 Release Notes

2024-07-12T00:24:04Z

Dan Mycio:

==Release 2.2.1==

===<nowiki>======== Command Station Changes ========</nowiki>===

====New Feature Additions====

*Adds support for backup and restore of the entire internal database of the LT-50. Use the LCC Memory Tool in JMRI (Version 5.4 or newer required) to “get” and “put” memory space 80. Get will create a backup, Put will restore a backup onto the LT-50. '''Warning:''' performing a write to this memory space will overwrite all of the consists and roster entries in your CS-105 with the backup you are restoring!
*Adds support for controlling DCC extended accessories using the LCC Well-Known event identifiers 01.01.02.00.01.<addr>.<addr>.<aspect>, with the two address bytes being 0..2047 (MSB-first), and aspect being 0..255. Example: to set Signal address 1123 (binary address 0x460) to aspect 99 (binary 0x63), send Event 01.01.02.00.01.04.60.63.
*Adds Program On Main (POM) support for accessory decoders. To use this feature, currently you must perform an LCC memory config protocol write to memory space 0xf8. To compute the address, use formula 0x04C00000 + (turnout binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. This is addressed using output numbers. Example: to program CV 515 (binary representation 0x202) for turnout 650 (binary address 0x287), use address 0x04CA2A02 (which is 80357890 in decimal). For DCC Extended accessories, use 0x04A00000 + (accessory binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. The accessory binary address is denoted by A10A9…A1A0 in the DCC and RCN standards.
*Adds support for the draft LCC Stream protocol. '''This is considered experimental.'''
*Adds Macro editor into the Settings menu.

====Bug Fixes and Misc. Changes:====

*Fixes a bug in macro creation where the configuration display for “Normal” and “Reverse” on a DCC accessory turnout were mistakenly flipped. The bug fix aligns the displayed text for "Normal" and "Reverse" in the Command Station’s macro configuration with the UWT-100’s "Normal" and "Reverse" buttons, as well as the DCC & LCC standardized commands. This is a display-only change in the configuration window. '''Stored macros''' will continue to send the same DCC packets and LCC messages, and thus '''do not need to be updated'''.
*This release optimizes the roster storage in the LT-50, which fixes issues with locomotive selection after the LT-50 has been in use for an extended period of time. Existing locomotive roster entries will be optimized when the LT-50 is first turned on after updating the software.
*Adjustments have been made to the Program Track to improve the reliability when reading CVs, particularly with locomotives with large capacitance on board. These changes now better support the case when a (second) locomotive is placed on the program track when the programming track is already in operation.
*To improve safety and standards compliance, the “high current” mode of the Program Track will only be in effect only until the next power cycle, at which time the setting will automatically revert to the normal 250mA limit.
*Fixes an issue where the throttle display would not visually update the state of a function when running a macro which controlled said function.
*Changes the LCC “Custom Short Event” producer to simply indicate whether the track output is on or off. Now the LT-50 produces events that indicate the reason why the track was turned off (see [[LCC Events Information]]).
*Fixes issue where a momentary function on a roster entry does not operate as momentary when a function name is not configured.
*Fixes to the LCC initialization steps: removes spurious “Track voltage brownout” and “Track Fault” events at startup. Removes unneeded duplicate initialization messages at startup when the LCC cable is already plugged in. Adjusts incorrect Producer Range Identified message. Removes global AME message when starting up in throttle mode.
*Avoids crashes on non-compliant LCC messages that have a zero source alias.
*Minor fixes for LCC standards compliance in the CDI XML: added a trailing zero, removed non-compliant empty groups, and fixed a case where min/max was not matching the map values. Updated capitalization of menu items.
*Fixes issues when there is exactly one other CAN-bus device, which gets sometimes unplugged, sometimes plugged in again (e.g. a layout with just two LT-50’s). Displays “Throttle Mode: No Conn” when the LT-50 is in throttle mode (not plugged into the track socket), powered but there is no LCC network (e.g. not plugged into another LT-50 or a CS-105).
*Fixes ‘free storage’ information in the status window.
*Adds e-Label for current consumption in LCC Throttle mode.
*Updated DCC accessory addresses according to the newest standard RCN-213 and NMRA S-9.1.2 from 2023. This changes the behavior of turnout address 2045-2047, and extends the maximum to turnout address 2048. Turnouts 1-2044 did not change as part of this update.

===<nowiki>======== Throttle Changes ========</nowiki>===

*Fixes bug when the locomotive speed would jump to 126 unexpectedly after the throttle has been sitting idle for some time.
*Adds a configuration option for disabling or changing the sensitivity of the ballistic tracking (acceleration) for the encoder knob. ''Menu > 8 Settings > 1 Throttle Settings > 3 Drive Settings > Encoder Ballistics > Off/Low/Mid/High''. The default of this setting will be Mid, whereas software before 2.x had the same behavior as Low. Changing the setting to Off will disable all ballistics and the knob will control the speed at a constant rate with the rotation.
*Removed ballistic tracking when using the Encoder knob in the menus and text entry window.
*Improved behavior when the encoder knob is turned very fast. ''This is independent of the Ballistic setting'' and will have more consistent behavior even with Ballistics turned Off. Users who are accustomed to the behavior before this release may prefer to reduce the ballistics setting to Low or Off.

===Download Release 2.2.1===
[https://github.com/TCSDCC/Public-Software-Resources/raw/master/LCC%20Firmware%20Files/device/LT-50/LT-50%20R2.2.1%20(06-06-2024).bin Download LT-50 R2.2.1 (06-06-2024)]

==Note on Downgrading to R1.0 from R2.X==
TCS does not recommend downgrading the software from Version 2 to any earlier version. Such a downgrade, as well as any following upgrade will cause loss or inconsistency of Consist and Roster information. A computer backup of Roster information is strongly advised.

For Instructions on how to back up your CS-105 database and configurations/settings [[LT-50 Database Backup|CLICK HERE]].

==Release 1.0==
Release 1.0 is the first production release for the LT-50 which was shipped in the first production run.

LT-50 Release Notes

2024-07-12T00:22:07Z

Dan Mycio:

==Release 2.2.1==

===<nowiki>======== Command Station Changes ========</nowiki>===

====New Feature Additions====

*Adds support for backup and restore of the entire internal database of the LT-50. Use the LCC Memory Tool in JMRI (Version 5.4 or newer required) to “get” and “put” memory space 80. Get will create a backup, Put will restore a backup onto the LT-50. '''Warning:''' performing a write to this memory space will overwrite all of the consists and roster entries in your CS-105 with the backup you are restoring!
*Adds support for controlling DCC extended accessories using the LCC Well-Known event identifiers 01.01.02.00.01.<addr>.<addr>.<aspect>, with the two address bytes being 0..2047 (MSB-first), and aspect being 0..255. Example: to set Signal address 1123 (binary address 0x460) to aspect 99 (binary 0x63), send Event 01.01.02.00.01.04.60.63.
*Adds Program On Main (POM) support for accessory decoders. To use this feature, currently you must perform an LCC memory config protocol write to memory space 0xf8. To compute the address, use formula 0x04C00000 + (turnout binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. This is addressed using output numbers. Example: to program CV 515 (binary representation 0x202) for turnout 650 (binary address 0x287), use address 0x04CA2A02 (which is 80357890 in decimal). For DCC Extended accessories, use 0x04A00000 + (accessory binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. The accessory binary address is denoted by A10A9…A1A0 in the DCC and RCN standards.
*Adds support for the draft LCC Stream protocol. '''This is considered experimental.'''
*Adds Macro editor into the Settings menu.

====Bug Fixes and Misc. Changes:====

*Fixes a bug in macro creation where the configuration display for “Normal” and “Reverse” on a DCC accessory turnout were mistakenly flipped. The bug fix aligns the displayed text for "Normal" and "Reverse" in the Command Station’s macro configuration with the UWT-100’s "Normal" and "Reverse" buttons, as well as the DCC & LCC standardized commands. This is a display-only change in the configuration window. '''Stored macros''' will continue to send the same DCC packets and LCC messages, and thus '''do not need to be updated'''.
*This release optimizes the roster storage in the LT-50, which fixes issues with locomotive selection after the LT-50 has been in use for an extended period of time. Existing locomotive roster entries will be optimized when the LT-50 is first turned on after updating the software.
*Adjustments have been made to the Program Track to improve the reliability when reading CVs, particularly with locomotives with large capacitance on board. These changes now better support the case when a (second) locomotive is placed on the program track when the programming track is already in operation.
*To improve safety and standards compliance, the “high current” mode of the Program Track will only be in effect only until the next power cycle, at which time the setting will automatically revert to the normal 250mA limit.
*Fixes an issue where the throttle display would not visually update the state of a function when running a macro which controlled said function.
*Changes the LCC “Custom Short Event” producer to simply indicate whether the track output is on or off. Now the LT-50 produces events that indicate the reason why the track was turned off (see [[LCC Events Information]]).
*Fixes issue where a momentary function on a roster entry does not operate as momentary when a function name is not configured.
*Fixes to the LCC initialization steps: removes spurious “Track voltage brownout” and “Track Fault” events at startup. Removes unneeded duplicate initialization messages at startup when the LCC cable is already plugged in. Adjusts incorrect Producer Range Identified message. Removes global AME message when starting up in throttle mode.
*Avoids crashes on non-compliant LCC messages that have a zero source alias.
*Minor fixes for LCC standards compliance in the CDI XML: added a trailing zero, removed non-compliant empty groups, and fixed a case where min/max was not matching the map values. Updated capitalization of menu items.
*Fixes issues when there is exactly one other CAN-bus device, which gets sometimes unplugged, sometimes plugged in again (e.g. a layout with just two LT-50’s). Displays “Throttle Mode: No Conn” when the LT-50 is in throttle mode (not plugged into the track socket), powered but there is no LCC network (e.g. not plugged into another LT-50 or a CS-105).
*Fixes ‘free storage’ information in the status window.
*Adds e-Label for current consumption in LCC Throttle mode.
*Updated DCC accessory addresses according to the newest standard RCN-213 and NMRA S-9.1.2 from 2023. This changes the behavior of turnout address 2045-2047, and extends the maximum to turnout address 2048. Turnouts 1-2044 did not change as part of this update.

===<nowiki>======== Throttle Changes ========</nowiki>===

*Fixes bug when the locomotive speed would jump to 126 unexpectedly after the throttle has been sitting idle for some time.
*Adds a configuration option for disabling or changing the sensitivity of the ballistic tracking (acceleration) for the encoder knob. ''Menu > 8 Settings > 1 Throttle Settings > 3 Drive Settings > Encoder Ballistics > Off/Low/Mid/High''. The default of this setting will be Mid, whereas software before 2.x had the same behavior as Low. Changing the setting to Off will disable all ballistics and the knob will control the speed at a constant rate with the rotation.
*Removed ballistic tracking when using the Encoder knob in the menus and text entry window.
*Improved behavior when the encoder knob is turned very fast. ''This is independent of the Ballistic setting'' and will have more consistent behavior even with Ballistics turned Off. Users who are accustomed to the behavior before this release may prefer to reduce the ballistics setting to Low or Off.

===Download Release 2.2.1===
[https://github.com/TCSDCC/Public-Software-Resources/raw/master/LCC%20Firmware%20Files/device/LT-50/LT-50%20R2.2.1%20(06-06-2024).bin Download LT-50 R2.2.1 (06-06-2024)]

==Note on Downgrading to R1.0 from R2.X==
TCS does not recommend downgrading the software from Version 2 to any earlier version. Such a downgrade, as well as any following upgrade will cause loss or inconsistency of Consist and Roster information. A computer backup of Roster information is strongly advised.

== Release 1.0 ==
Release 1.0 is the first production release for the LT-50 which was shipped in the first production run.

LT-50 Release Notes

2024-07-12T00:09:11Z

Dan Mycio: page creation with 2.2.1 release content

== Release 2.2.1 ==

=== ======== Command Station Changes ======== ===

==== New Feature Additions ====

* Adds support for backup and restore of the entire internal database of the LT-50. Use the LCC Memory Tool in JMRI (Version 5.4 or newer required) to “get” and “put” memory space 80. Get will create a backup, Put will restore a backup onto the LT-50. '''Warning:''' performing a write to this memory space will overwrite all of the consists and roster entries in your CS-105 with the backup you are restoring!
* Adds support for controlling DCC extended accessories using the LCC Well-Known event identifiers 01.01.02.00.01.<addr>.<addr>.<aspect>, with the two address bytes being 0..2047 (MSB-first), and aspect being 0..255. Example: to set Signal address 1123 (binary address 0x460) to aspect 99 (binary 0x63), send Event 01.01.02.00.01.04.60.63.
* Adds Program On Main (POM) support for accessory decoders. To use this feature, currently you must perform an LCC memory config protocol write to memory space 0xf8. To compute the address, use formula 0x04C00000 + (turnout binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. This is addressed using output numbers. Example: to program CV 515 (binary representation 0x202) for turnout 650 (binary address 0x287), use address 0x04CA2A02 (which is 80357890 in decimal). For DCC Extended accessories, use 0x04A00000 + (accessory binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. The accessory binary address is denoted by A10A9…A1A0 in the DCC and RCN standards.
* Adds support for the draft LCC Stream protocol. '''This is considered experimental.'''
* Adds macro editor into the Settings menu.

==== Bug Fixes and Misc. Changes: ====

* Fixes a bug in macro creation where the configuration display for “Normal” and “Reverse” on a DCC accessory turnout were mistakenly flipped. The bug fix aligns the displayed text for "Normal" and "Reverse" in the Command Station’s macro configuration with the UWT-100’s "Normal" and "Reverse" buttons, as well as the DCC & LCC standardized commands. This is a display-only change in the configuration window. '''Stored macros''' will continue to send the same DCC packets and LCC messages, and thus '''do not need to be updated'''.
* This release optimizes the roster storage in the LT-50, which fixes issues with locomotive selection after the LT-50 has been in use for an extended period of time. Existing locomotive roster entries will be optimized when the LT-50 is first turned on after updating the software.
* Adjustments have been made to the Program Track to improve the reliability when reading CVs, particularly with locomotives with large capacitance on board. These changes now better support the case when a (second) locomotive is placed on the program track when the programming track is already in operation.
* To improve safety and standards compliance, the “high current” mode of the Program Track will only be in effect only until the next power cycle, at which time the setting will automatically revert to the normal 250mA limit.
* Fixes an issue where the throttle display would not visually update the state of a function when running a macro which controlled said function.
* Changes the LCC “Custom Short Event” producer to simply indicate whether the track output is on or off. Now the LT-50 produces events that indicate the reason why the track was turned off (see [[LCC Events Information]]).
* Fixes issue where a momentary function on a roster entry does not operate as momentary when a function name is not configured.
* Fixes to the LCC initialization steps: removes spurious “Track voltage brownout” and “Track Fault” events at startup. Removes unneeded duplicate initialization messages at startup when the LCC cable is already plugged in. Adjusts incorrect Producer Range Identified message. Removes global AME message when starting up in throttle mode.
* Avoids crashes on non-compliant LCC messages that have a zero source alias.
* Minor fixes for LCC standards compliance in the CDI XML: added a trailing zero, removed non-compliant empty groups, and fixed a case where min/max was not matching the map values. Updated capitalization of menu items.
* Fixes issues when there is exactly one other CAN-bus device, which gets sometimes unplugged, sometimes plugged in again (e.g. a layout with just two LT-50’s). Displays “Throttle Mode: No Conn” when the LT-50 is in throttle mode (not plugged into the track socket), powered but there is no LCC network (e.g. not plugged into another LT-50 or a CS-105).
* Fixes ‘free storage’ information in the status window.
* Adds e-Label for current consumption in LCC Throttle mode.

=== ======== Throttle Changes ======== ===

* Fixes bug when the locomotive speed would jump to 126 unexpectedly after the throttle has been sitting idle for some time.
* Adds a configuration option for disabling or changing the sensitivity of the ballistic tracking (acceleration) for the encoder knob. Menu > 8 Settings > 1 Throttle Settings > 3 Drive Settings > Encoder Ballistics > Off/Low/Mid/High. The default of this setting will be Mid, whereas software before 2.x had the same behavior as Low. Changing the setting to Off will disable all ballistics and the knob will control the speed at a constant rate with the rotation.
* Removed ballistic tracking when using the Encoder knob in the menus and text entry window.
* Improved behavior when the encoder knob is turned very fast. ''This is independent of the Ballistic setting'' and will have more consistent behavior even with Ballistics turned Off. Users who are accustomed to the behavior before this release may prefer to reduce the ballistics setting to Low or Off.

=== Download Release 2.2.1 ===
 

==== Misc changes: ====

* Updated DCC accessory addresses according to the newest standard RCN-213 and NMRA S-9.1.2 from 2023. This changes the behavior of turnout address 2045-2047, and extends the maximum to turnout address 2048. Turnouts 1-2044 did not change as part of this update.

== Note on Downgrading to R1.0 from R2.X ==
TCS does not recommend downgrading the software from Version 2 to any earlier version. Such a downgrade, as well as any following upgrade will cause loss or inconsistency of Consist and Roster information. A computer backup of Roster information is strongly advised.

LCC Events Information

2024-07-11T23:45:07Z

Dan Mycio: page creation with basic content and structure

This page details LCC event ID numbers created by the CS-105 or LT-50 or B-106.

These are "well-known events" which means that they don't change from one device to another. The transmission is sent as a byte sequence including "FE FF FF" as written below. 09 00 99 is a designation for the manufacturer ID - Train Control Systems.

== Product type identification: ==

* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.00.01 – TCS command station
* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.00.02 – DCC Programming Track
* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.00.03 – TCS Booster

== Broadcast commands: ==

* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.00.10 – Exit Programming Track Mode Immediately. Sending this event cancels the programming track timer (normally 30 seconds after a service mode operation) and returns the command station to regular operation mode. On the CS-105 this turns off the program track output and turns on the mainline and booster output.

== Track fault events: ==

* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.01.00 – Track Fault Detected. This device has detected a fault on the mainline output. ''All devices emit the same event. For per-device information use the configurable events in the per-device Configuration settings.''
* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.01.01 – Track Fault Cleared. The mainline output on this device does not have a fault anymore. Note that this does not necessarily mean that the track output is enabled.
* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.01.10 – Track Fault Due To Extreme Current. The measured current exceeded the second threshold level of short protection.
* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.01.11 – Track Fault Due To Overload. The measured current exceeded the first threshold level of short protection.
* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.01.12 – Track Fault Due To Short On Turn-On. The device attempted to turn on the track power, but there was a short circuit on the track, which does not look like a capacitor.
* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.01.13 – Track Fault on Programming Track. The current draw of the programming track exceeded the limits specified in the RCN-216 standard. These limits exist to protect the decoder, locomotive and program track in case of a wiring mistake during decoder installation.
* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.01.14 – Track Fault Due To Track-to-Common Short. The device detected that one of the tracks is shorted to the Booster Common line.

== Track off events: ==

* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.01.21 – Track Turned Off Due To District Off. An LCC Event configured for turning off the track power of this power district was received.
* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.01.22 – Track Turned Off Due To Global E-Off. The LCC Event for Global Emergency Off (de-energize) was received.
* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.01.25 – Track Turned Off Due To Program Track Operation. The mainline output is turned off, because a programming track operation was started.
* 09.00.99.FE.FF.FF.01.26 – Track Turned Off Due To No Signal. The Booster is not receiving the DCC track signal from the command station.

CS-105 Release Notes

2024-07-11T23:35:24Z

Dan Mycio: restructuring and rewording

==Release 2.2.1==

===New Feature Additions===

* Adds support for XpressNet throttles in the AUX Cabs port. Enable it via the DCC System Settings > AUX Cabs > Mode. Cab Bus and XpressNet ''cannot'' be used simultaneously. More details on the supported and unsupported features can be found here: [[XpressNet|https://docs.tcsdcc.com/wiki/XpressNet]]
* When two different throttles on the AUX Cab port in Cab Bus mode have the same locomotive selected, the screen will now update from each others’ changes. The screen will also update from macros executed.
* Adds support for backup and restore of the entire internal database of the CS-105. Use the LCC Memory Tool in JMRI (Version 5.4 or newer required) to “get” and “put” memory space 80. Get will create a backup, Put will restore a backup onto the CS-105. '''Warning:''' performing a write to this memory space will overwrite all of the consists and roster entries in your CS-105 with the backup you are restoring!
* Adds support for controlling DCC extended accessories using the LCC Well-Known event identifiers 01.01.02.00.01.<addr>.<addr>.<aspect>, with the two address bytes being 0..2047 (MSB-first), and aspect being 0..255. Example: to set Signal address 1123 (binary address 0x460) to aspect 99 (binary 0x63), send Event 01.01.02.00.01.04.60.63.
* Adds Program On Main (POM) support for accessory decoders. To use this feature, currently you must perform an LCC memory config protocol write to memory space 0xf8. To compute the address, use formula 0x04C00000 + (turnout binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. This is addressed using output numbers. Example: to program CV 515 (binary representation 0x202) for turnout 650 (binary address 0x287), use address 0x04CA2A02 (which is 80357890 in decimal). For DCC Extended accessories, use 0x04A00000 + (accessory binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. The accessory binary address is denoted by A10A9…A1A0 in the DCC and RCN standards.
* Adds support for the draft LCC Stream protocol. '''This is considered experimental.'''

===Bug Fixes and Misc. Changes===

* Fixes a bug in macro creation where the configuration display for “Normal” and “Reverse” on a DCC accessory turnout were mistakenly flipped. The bug fix aligns the displayed text for "Normal" and "Reverse" in the Command Station’s macro configuration with the UWT-100’s "Normal" and "Reverse" buttons, as well as the DCC & LCC standardized commands. This is a display-only change in the configuration window. '''Stored macros''' will continue to send the same DCC packets and LCC messages, and thus '''do not need to be updated'''.
* This release optimizes the roster storage in the CS-105, which fixes issues with locomotive selection after the CS-105 has been in use for an extended period of time. Existing locomotive roster entries will be optimized when the CS-105 is first turned on after updating the software.
* Adjustments have been made to the Program Track to improve the reliability when reading CVs, particularly with locomotives with large capacitance on board. These changes now better support the case when a (second) locomotive is placed on the program track when the programming track is already in operation.
* To improve safety and standards compliance, the “high current” mode of the Program Track will only be in effect only until the next power cycle of the command station, at which time the setting will automatically revert to the normal 250mA limit.
* Fixes issue with UWT throttles in LCC mode, where a function configured to be "Momentary" on a roster entry would not operate as momentary if the function's name was not also configured.
* Shows a "[[wikipedia:Splash_screen|splash screen]]" on AUX Cabs in Cab Bus Mode. This fixes the issue where a NCE PowerCab would sometimes start up in command station mode when connected to the CS-105.
* Improvements have been made to the response in Cab Bus mode when many AUX Cabs are in use.
* The CS-105 will now ensure that auxiliary boosters such as the B-106 are shut down if the CS-105 encounters a software failure.

==== LCC-Related Changes and Bug Fixes ====

* Changes the LCC “Custom Short Event” producer to simply indicate whether the track output is ON or OFF. Now the CS-105 produces events that indicate the reason why the track was turned off (see [[LCC Events Information]] for details).
* Minor fixes for LCC standards compliance in the CDI XML: added a trailing zero, removed non-compliant empty groups, and fixed a case where min/max was not matching the map values. Updated capitalization of menu items.
* Updates to the built-in LCC WiFi Hub: Adds newlines after the individual frames. Optimizes latency for memory configuration transfers.
* Avoids crashes on non-compliant LCC messages that have a zero source alias.
* Fixes crash when invalid Time values were entered in the fast clock configuration.
* Fixes to the LCC initialization steps: removes spurious “Track voltage brownout” and “Track Fault” events at startup. Removes unneeded duplicate initialization messages at startup when the LCC cable is already plugged in. Adjusts incorrect Producer Range Identified message.

=== Download Release 2.2.1 ===
[https://github.com/TCSDCC/Public-Software-Resources/raw/master/LCC%20Firmware%20Files/device/CS-105/CS-105%20R2.2.1%20(06-06-2024).bin Download CS-105 R2.2.1 (06-06-2024)]

==Note on Downgrading to R1.X from R2.X==
'''TCS does not recommend downgrading the software from Version 2+ to any earlier version. Such a downgrade, as well as any following upgrade, will cause loss or inconsistency of Consist and Roster information. A computer backup of Roster information is strongly advised.'''

For Instructions on how to back up your CS-105 database and configurations/settings [[CS-105 Database Backup|CLICK HERE]].

== Release 1.0.1 ==
Release 1.0.1 fixes an issue with compatibility and communication with a LCC Hub when run using JMRI.

Release 1.0 is the first production release for the CS-105, including pre-orders, and should be updated to 1.0.1 to fix this issue if you encounter it.

=== Download Release 1.0.1 ===
[https://github.com/TCSDCC/Public-Software-Resources/raw/master/LCC%20Firmware%20Files/device/CS-105/CS-105%20R1.0.1%20(12-29-2022).bin Download CS-105 R1.0.1 (12-29-2022)]

CS-105 Release Notes

2024-07-11T21:03:35Z

Dan Mycio: page creation with R2.2.1 release notes

== Release 2.2.1 ==

=== New Feature Additions ===
- Adds support for XpressNet throttles in the AUX Cabs port. Enable it via the DCC System Settings > AUX Cabs > Mode. Cab Bus and XpressNet ''cannot'' be used simultaneously. More details on the supported and unsupported features can be found here: [[XpressNet|https://docs.tcsdcc.com/wiki/XpressNet]]

- When two different throttles on the AUX Cab port in Cab Bus mode have the same locomotive selected, the screen will now update from each others’ changes. The screen will also update from macros executed.

- Adds support for backup and restore of the entire internal database of the CS-105. Use the LCC Memory Tool in JMRI (Version 5.4 or newer required) to “get” and “put” memory space 80. Get will create a backup, Put will restore a backup onto the CS-105. '''Warning:''' performing a write to this memory space will overwrite all of the consists and roster entries in your CS-105 with the backup you are restoring!

- Adds support for controlling DCC extended accessories using the LCC Well-Known event identifiers 01.01.02.00.01.<addr>.<addr>.<aspect>, with the two address bytes being 0..2047 (MSB-first), and aspect being 0..255. Example: to set Signal address 1123 (binary address 0x460) to aspect 99 (binary 0x63), send Event 01.01.02.00.01.04.60.63.

- Adds Program On Main (POM) support for accessory decoders. To use this feature, currently you must perform an LCC memory config protocol write to memory space 0xf8. To compute the address, use formula 0x04C00000 + (turnout binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. This is addressed using output numbers. Example: to program CV 515 (binary representation 0x202) for turnout 650 (binary address 0x287), use address 0x04CA2A02 (which is 80357890 in decimal). For DCC Extended accessories, use 0x04A00000 + (accessory binary address (0..2047) << 10) + cv_number. The accessory binary address is denoted by A10A9…A1A0 in the DCC and RCN standards.

- Adds support for the draft LCC Stream protocol. This is considered experimental.

=== Bug Fixes and Misc. Changes: ===
- Fixes a bug in macro creation where the configuration display for “Normal” and “Reverse” on a DCC accessory turnout were mistakenly flipped. The bug fix aligns the displayed text for Normal/Reverse in the Command Station’s macro configuration with the UWT-100’s Normal and Reverse buttons, as well as the DCC standardized commands respectively. This is a display-only change in the configuration window. '''Stored macros''' will continue to send the same DCC packets and LCC messages, and thus '''do not need to be updated'''.

- This release optimizes the roster storage in the CS-105, which fixes issues with locomotive selection after the CS-105 has been in use for an extended period of time. Existing locomotive roster entries will be optimized when the CS-105 is first turned on after updating the software.

- Adjustments to the Program Track to better support reading CVs of locomotives with large capacitance on board. Supports the case when a locomotive is placed on the program track when it is already in operation. To improve safety and standards compliance, the “high current” mode of the Program Track will be in effect only until the next power cycle of the command station.

- Changes the LCC “Custom Short Event” producer to simply indicate whether the track output is on or off. Now the CS-105 produces events that indicate the reason why the track was turned off (see list below).

- Fixes issue with UWT throttles in LCC mode, where a momentary function on a roster entry does not operate as momentary when a function name is not configured.

<s>- Fixes rare crash upon CS startup when an XpressNet throttle plugged into the AUX cabs port auxiliary throttle is connected which is recalling a stored locomotive.</s>

- Shows a splash screen on AUX Cabs in Cab Bus Mode. This fixes the issue when an NCE PowerCab starts up in command station mode on the CS-105.

- Response time improvements in Cab Bus mode when many Cabs are in use.

- Minor fixes for LCC standards compliance in the CDI XML: added a trailing zero, removed incompliant empty groups, and fixed a case where min/max was not matching the map values. Updated capitalization of menu items.

- Ensures that auxiliary boosters such as the B-106 are shut down when the CS-105 encounters a software failure.

- Updates to the built-in LCC WiFi Hub. Adds newlines after the individual frames. Optimizes latency for memory configuration transfers.

- Avoids crashes on noncompliant LCC messages that have a zero source alias.

- Fixes crash when invalid Time values were entered in the fast clock configuration.

- Fixes to the LCC initialization steps: removes spurious “Track voltage brownout” and “Track Fault” events at startup. Removes unneeded duplicate initialization messages at startup when the LCC cable is already plugged in. Adjusts incorrect Producer Range Identified message.

== Note on Downgrading to R1.X from R2.X ==
TCS does not recommend downgrading the software from Version 2+ to any earlier version. Such a downgrade, as well as any following upgrade will cause loss or inconsistency of Consist and Roster information. A computer backup of Roster information is strongly advised.

CV 248

2024-06-04T15:52:18Z

Dan Mycio:

{{Infobox CV
|cv name=Sound Set Version
|cv range=0-255
|cv accepted=NONE
|cv default=Varies
}}

==NMRA CV 248 - Sound Set Version==
This CV notates what Sound Set (aka "Version") is available in the decoder. For our flagship [[WOWSound]] product line, which includes our entire library of sounds at the time of release, please refer to the List of Sounds below for that version to determine what sounds are available.

For OEM decoders which have a specified sound set for the model (such as the [[Bachmann Spectrum SC-44 (Charger) - HO|Bachmann Charger]]), this CV will indicate which run the decoder is from if new sounds were added or changed between runs of the same model.

=== Version ID Numbers - CV 248 Value ===

==== WOWSteam (Flagship) ====

* WOWSteam Version 4.6 = 6
*WOWSteam Version 4.0 = 4
*WOWSteam Version 3 = 3
*WOWSteam Version 2 = 2
*WOWSteam Version 1 = 1

==== WOWDiesel (Flagship) ====

* WOWDiesel Version 4.5 = 5
*WOWDiesel Version 4 = 4
*WOWDiesel Version 3 = 3

{| class="wikitable"
|''NOTE: For OEM decoder Sound Set Version identification, please visit the respective OEM project page found [[Main Page#CV Lists and Other Resources:|elsewhere on this Wiki]].''
|}
 
===Flagship Decoder Sound Lists===

====WOWSteam====

*WOWSteam [[WOWSteam Version 4.6 Sound List|Version 4.6]]
*WOWSteam [https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/SV4 Version 4.0]
*WOWSteam [https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/SV3 Version 3]
*WOWSteam [https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/SV2 Version 2]
*WOWSteam [https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/SV1 Version 1]

====WOWDiesel====

*WOWDiesel [https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/DV4Prime Version 4.5]
*WOWDiesel [https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/DV4 Version 4.0]
*WOWDiesel [https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/DV3 Version 3]
*WOWDiesel [https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/DV2 Version 2]
*WOWDiesel [https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/DV1 Verison 1]

[[Category:Standard CV]]
[[Category:Read-Only CV]]

Support - RailCom®

2024-06-03T20:28:24Z

Dan Mycio:

==Overview==
RailCom is a bi-directional data communications technology found in The [https://www.nmra.org/index-nmra-standards-and-recommended-practices NMRA Standards & Recommended Practices] 9.3.1 and 9.3.2 (currently under revision). RailCom enables bi-directional communication between the command station and decoders, unlike in traditional DCC where the communication is done exclusively in one direction (from the Command Station to the Decoder). The inclusion of RailCom opens up significant opportunities for future features and expansion. For example, the use of RailCom allows for real-time read-back of CVs while programming on the mainline. In traditional DCC, you would only be able to write to a CV, whereas with RailCom, writing and reading on the mainline are both possible.

Some other possibilities such as live feedback on a throttle for fuel/water level, temperature, and many other statistics are also unlocked with RailCom technology. Block detection becomes more integrated with RailCom as well, including the possibility of knowing ''who'' is occupying a block, rather than just knowing a block is occupied. This data could be used further to aide in automation setups and macros. A fleet of rolling stock could also be equipped with basic RailCom decoders to keep track of cars in yards or trains. The potential applications for RailCom are still being explored, and is an untapped wealth of possibilities!

RailCom is a highly-responsive system as well, allowing up to ~126 individual operations per second (depending on the available DCC bandwidth) at a bit-rate of 250Kbps by introducing a very brief interruption to the DCC track power. During this interruption, the RailCom detector on the Command Station will send or receive information to and from the decoder.

!!! IMPORTANT !!! "RailCom®" and "RailCom+" are not the same thing! RailCom® is a registered trademark of [https://www.lenz-elektronik.de/index.php Lenz Elektronik GmbH] and is notated and standardized in NMRA RP 9.3.1 and 9.3.2. This specification has been updated and continues to be updated through [https://www.railcommunity.org/ RailCommunity] RCN-217. RailCom+ is an expanded version or RailCom which was modified and expanded upon by [https://www.esu.eu/en/ ESU (Electronic Solutions Ulm GmbH & Co.)]. The expanded featureset created by ESU is not available in any published documentation or standards. As such, TCS is not capable of developing our products to incorporate these unpublished features. Similarly, TCS cannot guarantee that all features of an ESU decoder featuring RailCom+ will operate correctly on a TCS command station with RailCom such as the CS-105.

==Requirements==
In order to make use of RailCom, the following requirements have to be met:

*The Command Station must provide a RailCom cutout and have a way to handle RailCom communication traffic.
*RailCom Cutout must be enabled. You can find this in the CS-105 settings - DCC System Settings > Advanced > RailCom Cutout > Enabled.
**If you are using a RailCom-enabled booster such the B-106, the RailCom data transmission over LCC must be enabled - DCC System Settings > Advanced > Drive LCC Boosters > Enabled must be set (as opposed to Enabled with no RailCom)
*The decoder must support RailCom.
**Supporting hardware is physically on the decoder (Check your decoder literature or refer to the chart below to see which TCS decoders support RailCom.)
**RailCom enabled in [[CV 29]] (see below)
*RailCom- addressed feedback must be enabled in the decoder. [[CV 28]] bit 2 must be set. (Typical values are CV 28=3 or CV 28=131) If you’re unsure, you can place the locomotive on the Programming Track to read the value of CV 28. A TCS UWT will show you which bits are set.
*The locomotive must be…
**on the track directly connected to the CS-105’s Mainline track output OR
**on track powered by a RailCom-enabled booster connected to the LCC port (such as the B-106).

===TCS Decoders with Supporting Hardware===
The list below shows all decoder hardware types and Versions which support RailCom in hardware. '''Not all of the decoder hardware types on this list are still in production'''. IF A DECODER IS NOT LISTED BELOW, IT DOES NOT AND HAS NEVER SUPPORTED RAILCOM. If a decoder has a specified version number specified (Min. SW Ver.), only decoders with that version and newer support RailCom. If no Version is specified, all decoders of that type have the capability of using RailCom, but the newer the version, the more likely they are to work. Non-sound decoder version 94 is the current production version (as of March 2023).

RailCom is a continuously-evolving technology, so in some cases even a decoder with supporting hardware may not operate on a command station using the latest RailCom spec due to incompatibility issues. If you believe you are experiencing this particular issue, please contact our technical support staff to see how we can help you get up and running with TCS decoders and RailCom.
{| class="wikitable"
|+TCS Decoders With RailCom®
!Decoder Name
!Scale
!ID (CV 249)
!Min. SW Ver.
|-
!DP2X
|HO
|1
|
|-
!DP2X-UK
|HO
|2
|
|-
!DP5
|HO
|3
|
|-
!A4X
|HO
|4
|
|-
!A6X
|HO
|5
|
|-
!T4
|HO
|16
|
|-
!T6
|HO
|17
|
|-
!G8
|HO
|18
|
|-
!ALD4
|N
|19
|
|-
!AMD4
|N
|20
|
|-
!ASD4
|N
|21
|
|-
!K0D8
|N
|(Varies)
|
|-
!K1D4
|N
|29
|
|-
!K1D4-NC
|N
|30
|
|-
!K2D4
|N
|31
|
|-
!MP-15N
|N
|38
|
|-
!LL8
|HO
|43
|
|-
!EU621
|HO
|44
|SW Ver. 91
|-
!L1D4
|N
|45
|
|-
!K4D6
|N
|46
|SW Ver. 92
|-
!AS6
|HO
|47
|
|-
!KAT22
|HO
|51
|
|-
!KAT24
|HO
|52
|
|-
!KAT26
|HO
|53
|
|-
!KAM4
|HO
|55
|SW Ver. 93
|-
!T4-LED
|HO
|54
|
|-
!KAM4
|HO
|55
|SW Ver. 93
|-
!KAM4-LED
|HO
|57
|SW Ver. 93
|-
!T1-LED
|HO
|58
|
|-
!K5D7
|HO
|59
|SW Ver. 91
|-
!LL8-LED
|HO
|60
|
|-
!AZL4
|Z
|61
|
|-
!EU821
|HO
|65
|SW Ver. 94
|-
!AZL1D4
|Z
|70
|
|-
!K8D6-A
|N
|72
|
|-
!K8D6-B
|N
|72
|
|-
!DSV-1
|OEM
|181
|
|-
!DSV-2
|OEM
|182
|
|-
!OEM-21
|OEM
|190
|
|}
 
==Configuration Options==
To enable RailCom on a TCS decoder, start by reading the value of CV 29. Compare the value to the chart shown below and reprogram as necessary. Once/If RailCom is enabled in CV 29, you may also need to set up CV 28 to allow for proper communications traffic flow. See the description and table below for more info and reprogram as necessary. 
{{:CV_29}}
{{:CV_28}}

==Related==
 
======RailCom® Trademark Note======
RailCom® is a registered trademark of Lenz Elektronik GmbH
[[Category:Technical Support]]

Cab Bus

2024-05-29T15:29:50Z

Dan Mycio:

Cab Bus is the name given to the throttle network that is used in the NCE, Ramtraxx, and SystemOne DCC systems. Electrically, Cab Bus is based around half duplex RS-485 and is a polled network running at 9600 baud. The CS-105 provides support for this bus protocol through the RJ12 port labeled "Auxiliary".

'''WARNING:''' Cab Bus Address 1 is reserved and should not be used.

==CS-105 Support==
While every effort has been made to provide a seamless user experience compared to Cab Bus throttles on their original system(s), a few features have been added in order to enhance the user experience further. Most of these added features are only available on NCE, Ramtraxx, and SystemOne Cabs with a 2x16 character LCD, often referred to as a ProCabTM.

==NCE Wireless System==
The NCE wireless system is fully supported. Because of some intrinsic properties of the NCE wireless system, the behavior of throttles operating while wireless will differ as follows:

#The '''EXPN''' button on a ProCabTM is reserved for wireless setup. The '''EXPN''' button will not work as described in the section(s) below. To use the '''EXPN''' button as described below, on a wireless cab, plug the cab in such that it is not using wireless.
#Normally, when the '''Horn/Whistle''' button is pressed, the appropriately assigned function status is changed to active on the LCD for the duration during which the '''Horn/Whistle''' button is held down. Because the NCE wireless system provides less communications bandwidth than when running wired, this feature is disabled in wireless mode. This helps to improve overall performance.
#Custom graphics, such as the bell, whistle, and superscript numbers are not displayed. The NCE wireless system does not support custom graphics when operating in wireless mode.

==Main LCD Screen==
The screen layout for ProCabTM support has been designed to closely match that of the original system(s). The general positioning of things such as the loco number, speed, direction, and active functions remain largely unchanged, while at the same time being enhanced to offer more information.

[[File:Cab Bus Enhanced Layout Comparison.jpg|frameless|500px]]

The user experience of the main LCD screen has been enhanced. With these enhancements, It is now possible to view the status of up to 28 functions and display locomotive names that are longer than four digits. To rotate between displaying functions 0 - 9, 10 - 19, and 20 - 28 respectively, one can use the "sticky shift" key. Sticky shift is accessed by pressing the '''Headlight''' key while holding down the '''Shift''' key.
The following example shows a traditional four digit locomotive address on the first row, as well as a system clock. The second row shows the current direction, with F for forward and R for reverse, the current speed, and functions 0(L), 9, 10, 15, 19, 20, and 28 turned on respectively. Note the '''<nowiki/>'.'<nowiki/>''' and '''<nowiki/>':'''' characters. When present, these denote which decade of functions is being shown.

'''<nowiki/><nowiki/><nowiki/>'''

[[File:Cab Bus Loco Speed, Direction, and Function Display.jpg|frameless|500px]]

The following example shows a greater than four digit locomotive name on the first row while the second row shows R for reverse, 035 for speed, and functions L, 9, 10, 15, 19, 20, and 28 turned on respectively. Note the superscript '''<nowiki/>'1'''<nowiki/>' and '''<nowiki/>'2'''' numbers. When present, these denote which decade of functions is being shown. Because custom superscript graphics are not supported in wireless mode, they are not used when operating in wireless mode.

'''<nowiki/>'''<nowiki/>'''<nowiki/>'''

[[File:Cab Bus Loco Speed, Direction, and Function Display Superscript.jpg|frameless|500px]]

When a greater than four digit locomotive address is active, up to 12 total digits can be shown. Up to the first six digits are always shown, however, the '''Enter''' key can be used to toggle between showing digits 7 through 14 or the clock.

==Select Loco==
The '''Select Loco''' button has been expanded to allow additional entry methods.
{| class="wikitable"
!Number of times the Select Loco Key is pressed
!Action
|-
|1
|Enter a two or for digit DCC address. To enter a four-digit address that is less than 128, add an extra leading zero. Example: to select long address 58, type in 058
|-
|2
|Enter Märklin-Motorola address
|-
|3
|Scrolling list of database search query results. Enter digits to filter the list. Use the INC/DEC buttons or thumbwheel encoder to scroll through the list.
|}
The scrolling list search entry can be particularly useful when trying to use locomotive protocols that are not DCC or Märklin-Motorola. A direct wireless equipped locomotive designed to natively use the LCC protocol is one such example. Up and down arrows indicate which direction(s) the list can be scrolled. Because custom graphics are not supported in wireless mode, a '.' is used in their place for the up and down arrows when operating in wireless mode.
The additional entry methods are only available on cabs that have LCD's. For cabs without LCD's (Cab-04, Cab-06, etc…), address entry is always DCC mode and search is not supported.<blockquote>Support is under development for assigning a non-DCC address to a cab without an LCD through the '''ASSIGN LOCO->CAB''' programming menu on an LCD cab. This will be available through a software update that can be applied by the user.</blockquote>[[File:Cab Bus Select Loco.jpg|frameless|500px]]

==Macro Button==
The '''Macro''' key allows for the execution of traditional macros managed by the command station. To run a macro, press the Macro button, then use the numerical keypad to enter the macro number you would like to run. To run the macro, press the ENTER key, or press the Macro button a second time.
{| class="wikitable"
|''NOTE: The CS-105 supports Macro numbers up to 300. Entering a number of 301 or greater is invalid and will not operate any macro. For more information on creating and managing macros, please see [[Command Station Macros]]''
|}
The macro control window also allows for sending 64-bit LCC events. If the number entered exceeds the maximum Macro number supported, the menu heading will switch from '''MACRO''' to '''EVENT'''. Press '''Enter''' after all 16 hexadecimal digits of the event have been entered in order to send the LCC event number onto the LCC bus. While cumbersome for normal operations, the ability to manually enter and send a 16-digit hexadecimal LCC event can be a useful troubleshooting tool. The '''EXPN''' key can be pressed to enter hexadecimal digits A through F. [[File:Cab Bus Macro.jpg|frameless|500px]]

==Select Accessory==
To enter the accessory control screen, press the "Select Accy" button on the handheld. To select an accessory to control, use the numerical keypad to enter an accessory number. Accessory addresses 1 to 2044 are supported. Once the accessory address has been entered, press the ENTER button to select that accessory for control. You will presented with options to set the accessory to N/ON or R/OFF. Use button 1 to set the accessory to N/ON, or use button 2 to set the accessory to R/OFF.

The last known state of the accessory (N/ON or R/OFF) will be indicated with an arrow (< or >) between the options. If the last state is unknown, a question mark (?) will be displayed. [[File:Cab Bus Select Accessory.jpg|frameless|500px]]

The accessory state is immediately updated across the network, so any other connected throttles (such as a UWT-100) would immediately show the change made using the cab bus throttle if the same accessory number is being displayed on the UWT's accessory window.

==Locomotive Functions==
Because the Command Station database supports associating locomotive specific functions types with a given function number (Bell, Horn, Whistle, etc…), the function number on the display can be substituted for an appropriate symbol or letter representing that function type.

When pressing the '''EXPN''' button, the user can view the status of all functions 0 through 28. Superscript characters are used in order to delimit functions 10 through 19 and 20 through 28. [[File:Cab Bus Locomotive Functions.jpg|frameless]]

==Emergency Stop==
When pressed, the red Emergency Stop button activates the global locomotive E-Stop. ProCabTM style throttles will blink the text "E-STOP" in the upper right hand corner of the display. Any throttle can resume normal operations by pressing the red Emergency Stop button again.

==AIU Support==
The NCE Auxiliary Input Unit (AIU01) is fully supported. This device provides 14 binary state inputs. Whenever an input changes state, the CS-105 will send a corresponding LCC Event ID. The Event IDs produced are fixed and use the following pattern:
{| class="wikitable"
!State
!LCC Event ID (Hexidecimal Format)
|-
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . < Cab Bus Address > . < (2 * (Input Index - 1)) + 0 >
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . < Cab Bus Address > . < (2 * (Input Index - 1)) + 1 >
|}

*'''Cab Bus Address''' is the address assigned to the AIU. Valid values are 2 through 63. The default factory programmed address is 4.
*'''Input Index''' is the input number as labeled on the AIU. Valid values are 1 through 14.

===Example for AIU Cab Bus Address 4===
{| class="wikitable"
!Input Index
!State
!LCC Event ID (Hexidecimal Format)
|-
| rowspan="2" |1
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 00
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 01
|-
| rowspan="2" |2
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 02
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 03
|-
| rowspan="2" |3
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 04
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 05
|-
| rowspan="2" |4
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 06
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 07
|-
| rowspan="2" |5
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 08
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 09
|-
|...
|...
|...
|-
| rowspan="2" |13
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 18
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 19
|-
| rowspan="2" |14
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 1A
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 1B
|}

==Configuration Options (AUX Cabs)==
Configuration options can be found under '''System Settings -> AUX Cabs'''.

===Mode===
{| class="wikitable"
!Option
!Comments
|-
|disabled
|Cab Bus is not enabled
|-
|Cab Bus
|Default setting, enables Cab Bus
|-
|Cab Bus Legacy Mode
|Enables Cab Bus but with limitations designed for expanded compatibility with some older Cab Bus devices. Disables some advanced features such as custom character graphics.
|}

===Cab Bus Clock Format===
{| class="wikitable"
!Option
!Comments
|-
|12 hour
|Clock format uses 12 hour AM/PM
|-
|24 hour
|Clock format uses 24 hour
|}

==Supported Hardware==
{| class="wikitable"
!Device
!Comments
|-
|ProCabTM, PowerCabTM
|All ProCab throttles are fully supported. The NCE PowerCabTM is fully supported. This includes ProCabs from NCE, Ramtraxx, and SystemOne. Some older ProCabs do not support custom characters. To use these older cabs choose the '''Cab Bus Legacy Mode''' configuration option.
|-
|Cab04TM, Cab05, Cab06TM
|All "engineering" cabs are fully supported.
|-
|NCE USB Adapter
|Limited functionality. Supports locomotive, accessory, and macro control.
|-
|WifiTrax WFD-30/WFD-31
|Fully supported. May be used in order to provide WiThrottle Protocol support.
|-
|ISE ProtoThrottleTM
|Fully supported. Requires the MRBW-CABBUS receiver.
|-
|NCE Auxiliary Input Unit (AIU01)
|Fully supported. AIU inputs trigger LCC Events. These can be linked to additional logic, including through the use of macros stored in the CS-105.
|-
|NCE Mini Panel
|Fully supported.
|}

==Unsupported Features==
{| class="wikitable"
! colspan="2" |Feature
!Comments
|-
| rowspan="4" |ProCabTM/PowerCabTM
|CONSIST Setup
|The Consist buttons (SETUP, CLEAR, ADD, DEL) are not supported. When pressed, a "NOT SUPPORTED" warning is displayed to the user for two seconds before returning to the main screen. To setup a consist, use a native LCC throttle such as the UWT-100 or UWT-50. Cab Bus throttles can still operate consisted locomotives from the address of any consisted member. It is not yet determined if support for consist setup will be added in the future.
|-
|PROG
|The PROG function of the PROG/ESC button is not supported. It does nothing when pressed. The ESC function of this button does operate where appropriate, for example to exit a "SELECT LOCO" window. This is sometimes labeled PROG MODE on some older throttles.
|-
|28/128
|The 28/128 button does nothing when pressed. This is sometimes labeled 14/28 on some older throttles.
|-
|MOMENTUM
|The MOMENTUM button does nothing when pressed.
|}

==Copyright & Trademarks==
Copyright © Train Control Systems, Inc 2022. ProCabTM, PowerCabTM, Cab04TM, and Cab06TM are trademarks of NCE Corporation. ProtoThrottleTM is a trademark of Iowa Scaled Engineering. Any unattributed copyrights and trademarks are unintentional and should be brought to the attention of Train Control Systems, Inc for correction.

Cab Bus

2024-05-29T15:04:06Z

Dan Mycio:

Cab Bus is the name given to the throttle network that is used in the NCE, Ramtraxx, and SystemOne DCC systems. Electrically, Cab Bus is based around half duplex RS-485 and is a polled network running at 9600 baud. The CS-105 provides support for this bus protocol through the RJ12 port labeled "Auxiliary".

'''WARNING:''' Cab Bus Address 1 is reserved and should not be used.

==CS-105 Support==
While every effort has been made to provide a seamless user experience compared to Cab Bus throttles on their original system(s), a few features have been added in order to enhance the user experience further. Most of these added features are only available on NCE, Ramtraxx, and SystemOne Cabs with a 2x16 character LCD, often referred to as a ProCabTM.

==NCE Wireless System==
The NCE wireless system is fully supported. Because of some intrinsic properties of the NCE wireless system, the behavior of throttles operating while wireless will differ as follows:

#The '''EXPN''' button on a ProCabTM is reserved for wireless setup. The '''EXPN''' button will not work as described in the section(s) below. To use the '''EXPN''' button as described below, on a wireless cab, plug the cab in such that it is not using wireless.
#Normally, when the '''Horn/Whistle''' button is pressed, the appropriately assigned function status is changed to active on the LCD for the duration during which the '''Horn/Whistle''' button is held down. Because the NCE wireless system provides less communications bandwidth than when running wired, this feature is disabled in wireless mode. This helps to improve overall performance.
#Custom graphics, such as the bell, whistle, and superscript numbers are not displayed. The NCE wireless system does not support custom graphics when operating in wireless mode.

==Main LCD Screen==
The screen layout for ProCabTM support has been designed to closely match that of the original system(s). The general positioning of things such as the loco number, speed, direction, and active functions remain largely unchanged, while at the same time being enhanced to offer more information.

[[File:Cab Bus Enhanced Layout Comparison.jpg|frameless|500px]]

The user experience of the main LCD screen has been enhanced. With these enhancements, It is now possible to view the status of up to 28 functions and display locomotive names that are longer than four digits. To rotate between displaying functions 0 - 9, 10 - 19, and 20 - 28 respectively, one can use the "sticky shift" key. Sticky shift is accessed by pressing the '''Headlight''' key while holding down the '''Shift''' key.
The following example shows a traditional four digit locomotive address on the first row, as well as a system clock. The second row shows the current direction, with F for forward and R for reverse, the current speed, and functions 0(L), 9, 10, 15, 19, 20, and 28 turned on respectively. Note the '''<nowiki/>'.'<nowiki/>''' and '''<nowiki/>':'''' characters. When present, these denote which decade of functions is being shown.

'''<nowiki/><nowiki/><nowiki/>'''

[[File:Cab Bus Loco Speed, Direction, and Function Display.jpg|frameless|500px]]

The following example shows a greater than four digit locomotive name on the first row while the second row shows R for reverse, 035 for speed, and functions L, 9, 10, 15, 19, 20, and 28 turned on respectively. Note the superscript '''<nowiki/>'1'''<nowiki/>' and '''<nowiki/>'2'''' numbers. When present, these denote which decade of functions is being shown. Because custom superscript graphics are not supported in wireless mode, they are not used when operating in wireless mode.

'''<nowiki/>'''<nowiki/>'''<nowiki/>'''

[[File:Cab Bus Loco Speed, Direction, and Function Display Superscript.jpg|frameless|500px]]

When a greater than four digit locomotive address is active, up to 12 total digits can be shown. Up to the first six digits are always shown, however, the '''Enter''' key can be used to toggle between showing digits 7 through 14 or the clock.

==Select Loco==
The '''Select Loco''' button has been expanded to allow additional entry methods.
{| class="wikitable"
!Number of times the Select Loco Key is pressed
!Action
|-
|1
|Enter a two or for digit DCC address. To enter a four-digit address that is less than 128, add an extra leading zero. Example: to select long address 58, type in 058
|-
|2
|Enter Märklin-Motorola address
|-
|3
|Scrolling list of database search query results. Enter digits to filter the list. Use the INC/DEC buttons or thumbwheel encoder to scroll through the list.
|}
The scrolling list search entry can be particularly useful when trying to use locomotive protocols that are not DCC or Märklin-Motorola. A direct wireless equipped locomotive designed to natively use the LCC protocol is one such example. Up and down arrows indicate which direction(s) the list can be scrolled. Because custom graphics are not supported in wireless mode, a '.' is used in their place for the up and down arrows when operating in wireless mode.
The additional entry methods are only available on cabs that have LCD's. For cabs without LCD's (Cab-04, Cab-06, etc…), address entry is always DCC mode and search is not supported.<blockquote>Support is under development for assigning a non-DCC address to a cab without an LCD through the '''ASSIGN LOCO->CAB''' programming menu on an LCD cab. This will be available through a software update that can be applied by the user.</blockquote>[[File:Cab Bus Select Loco.jpg|frameless|500px]]

==Macro Button==
The '''Macro''' key allows for the execution of traditional macros managed by the command station. To run a macro, press the Macro button, then use the numerical keypad to enter the macro number you would like to run. To run the macro, press the ENTER key, or press the Macro button a second time.

The macro control window also allows for sending 64-bit LCC events. If the number entered exceeds the maximum Macro number supported, the menu heading will switch from '''MACRO''' to '''EVENT'''. Press '''Enter''' after all 16 hexadecimal digits of the event have been entered in order to send the LCC event number onto the LCC bus. While cumbersome for normal operations, the ability to manually enter and send a 16-digit hexadecimal LCC event can be a useful troubleshooting tool. The '''EXPN''' key can be pressed to enter hexadecimal digits A through F. [[File:Cab Bus Macro.jpg|frameless|500px]]

==Select Accessory==
To enter the accessory control screen, press the "Select Accy" button on the handheld. To select an accessory to control, use the numerical keypad to enter an accessory number. Accessory addresses 1 to 2044 are supported. Once the accessory address has been entered, press the ENTER button to select that accessory for control. You will presented with options to set the accessory to N/ON or R/OFF. Use button 1 to set the accessory to N/ON, or use button 2 to set the accessory to R/OFF.

The last known state of the accessory (N/ON or R/OFF) will be indicated with an arrow (< or >) between the options. If the last state is unknown, a question mark (?) will be displayed. [[File:Cab Bus Select Accessory.jpg|frameless|500px]]

The accessory state is immediately updated across the network, so any other connected throttles (such as a UWT-100) would immediately show the change made using the cab bus throttle if the same accessory number is being displayed on the UWT's accessory window.

==Locomotive Functions==
Because the Command Station database supports associating locomotive specific functions types with a given function number (Bell, Horn, Whistle, etc…), the function number on the display can be substituted for an appropriate symbol or letter representing that function type.

When pressing the '''EXPN''' button, the user can view the status of all functions 0 through 28. Superscript characters are used in order to delimit functions 10 through 19 and 20 through 28. [[File:Cab Bus Locomotive Functions.jpg|frameless]]

==Emergency Stop==
When pressed, the red Emergency Stop button activates the global locomotive E-Stop. ProCabTM style throttles will blink the text "E-STOP" in the upper right hand corner of the display. Any throttle can resume normal operations by pressing the red Emergency Stop button again.

==AIU Support==
The NCE Auxiliary Input Unit (AIU01) is fully supported. This device provides 14 binary state inputs. Whenever an input changes state, the CS-105 will send a corresponding LCC Event ID. The Event IDs produced are fixed and use the following pattern:
{| class="wikitable"
!State
!LCC Event ID (Hexidecimal Format)
|-
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . < Cab Bus Address > . < (2 * (Input Index - 1)) + 0 >
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . < Cab Bus Address > . < (2 * (Input Index - 1)) + 1 >
|}

*'''Cab Bus Address''' is the address assigned to the AIU. Valid values are 2 through 63. The default factory programmed address is 4.
*'''Input Index''' is the input number as labeled on the AIU. Valid values are 1 through 14.

===Example for AIU Cab Bus Address 4===
{| class="wikitable"
!Input Index
!State
!LCC Event ID (Hexidecimal Format)
|-
| rowspan="2" |1
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 00
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 01
|-
| rowspan="2" |2
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 02
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 03
|-
| rowspan="2" |3
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 04
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 05
|-
| rowspan="2" |4
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 06
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 07
|-
| rowspan="2" |5
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 08
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 09
|-
|...
|...
|...
|-
| rowspan="2" |13
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 18
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 19
|-
| rowspan="2" |14
|Off
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 1A
|-
|On
|09 . 00 . 99 . FE . FF . FD . 04 . 1B
|}

==Configuration Options (AUX Cabs)==
Configuration options can be found under '''System Settings -> AUX Cabs'''.

===Mode===
{| class="wikitable"
!Option
!Comments
|-
|disabled
|Cab Bus is not enabled
|-
|Cab Bus
|Default setting, enables Cab Bus
|-
|Cab Bus Legacy Mode
|Enables Cab Bus but with limitations designed for expanded compatibility with some older Cab Bus devices. Disables some advanced features such as custom character graphics.
|}

===Cab Bus Clock Format===
{| class="wikitable"
!Option
!Comments
|-
|12 hour
|Clock format uses 12 hour AM/PM
|-
|24 hour
|Clock format uses 24 hour
|}

==Supported Hardware==
{| class="wikitable"
!Device
!Comments
|-
|ProCabTM, PowerCabTM
|All ProCab throttles are fully supported. The NCE PowerCabTM is fully supported. This includes ProCabs from NCE, Ramtraxx, and SystemOne. Some older ProCabs do not support custom characters. To use these older cabs choose the '''Cab Bus Legacy Mode''' configuration option.
|-
|Cab04TM, Cab05, Cab06TM
|All "engineering" cabs are fully supported.
|-
|NCE USB Adapter
|Limited functionality. Supports locomotive, accessory, and macro control.
|-
|WifiTrax WFD-30/WFD-31
|Fully supported. May be used in order to provide WiThrottle Protocol support.
|-
|ISE ProtoThrottleTM
|Fully supported. Requires the MRBW-CABBUS receiver.
|-
|NCE Auxiliary Input Unit (AIU01)
|Fully supported. AIU inputs trigger LCC Events. These can be linked to additional logic, including through the use of macros stored in the CS-105.
|-
|NCE Mini Panel
|Fully supported.
|}

==Unsupported Features==
{| class="wikitable"
! colspan="2" |Feature
!Comments
|-
| rowspan="4" |ProCabTM/PowerCabTM
|CONSIST Setup
|The Consist buttons (SETUP, CLEAR, ADD, DEL) are not supported. When pressed, a "NOT SUPPORTED" warning is displayed to the user for two seconds before returning to the main screen. To setup a consist, use a native LCC throttle such as the UWT-100 or UWT-50. Cab Bus throttles can still operate consisted locomotives from the address of any consisted member. It is not yet determined if support for consist setup will be added in the future.
|-
|PROG
|The PROG function of the PROG/ESC button is not supported. It does nothing when pressed. The ESC function of this button does operate where appropriate, for example to exit a "SELECT LOCO" window. This is sometimes labeled PROG MODE on some older throttles.
|-
|28/128
|The 28/128 button does nothing when pressed. This is sometimes labeled 14/28 on some older throttles.
|-
|MOMENTUM
|The MOMENTUM button does nothing when pressed.
|}

==Copyright & Trademarks==
Copyright © Train Control Systems, Inc 2022. ProCabTM, PowerCabTM, Cab04TM, and Cab06TM are trademarks of NCE Corporation. ProtoThrottleTM is a trademark of Iowa Scaled Engineering. Any unattributed copyrights and trademarks are unintentional and should be brought to the attention of Train Control Systems, Inc for correction.

Main Page

2024-05-18T00:01:46Z

Dan Mycio: added Diesel 4.5 sound list link

Welcome to the Train Control Systems documentation wiki! We are creating an online TCS knowledge base, hosted on a wiki (similar in format to an online encyclopedia, i.e. [https://en.wikipedia.org/ Wikipedia]).

We have been and will continuously be expanding on topics herein until we have complied a comprehensive knowledge base that is accessible to everyone and always up-to-date.

This wiki was first launched 3/4/2020. Documenting the TCS UWT-100 Universal WiFi Throttle as our first project of many. Please check back for more information, and send us suggestions for articles that you would find helpful.

Thanks! - The TCS Team

==TCS Flagship Products Information==

===[[WOWSound]]===

====WOWSound Information====

*[[Audio Assist®]]
*[[Light Mode and Sound Mode]]
*[[WOWSound Rotate Feature]]
*[[Momentum|WOWSound Momentum Feature]]
*[[Throttle Modes|WOWSound Throttle Modes]]

 
===WOWSteam===

====[https://www.tcsdcc.com/wowsteam WOWSteam V4.6 Products]====

====WOWSteam Version 4.X Resources:====

*[[WOWSteam Version 4.6 Changelog]]
*[[WOWSteam Version 4.6 Sound List]]
*[[WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's|WOWSteam V4.X Indexed CV's (Programming Guide)]]
*[https://09122110-fb14-4cd5-92e8-876baa0f5900.usrfiles.com/ugd/559cd7_945366308c1443bd84e7f4af0b34456b.pdf WOWSteam V4.0 Complete Programming Guide]
*[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/4CVSteamV4 WOWSteam V4.0 Guided Programmer]

 
===WOWDiesel===

====[https://www.tcsdcc.com/wowdiesel WOWDiesel V4.5 Products]====

====WOWDiesel Version 4.X Resources:====

*WOWDiesel Version 4.5 Changelog (Coming soon!)
*[[WOWDiesel Version 4.5 Sound List]]
*[[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's|WOWDiesel V4.X Indexed CV's]]
*[https://09122110-fb14-4cd5-92e8-876baa0f5900.usrfiles.com/ugd/559cd7_0f145c387a0345e0b548f2cd5757ca4a.pdf WOWDiesel V4.0 Complete Programming Guide]
*[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/4CVDieselV4 WOWDiesel V4.0 Guided Programmer]
*[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/4CVDieselV4Prime WOWDiesel V4.5 Guided Programmer]

 
===WOWElectric===
[https://www.tcsdcc.com/wowelectric WOWElectric Products]

[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/resources-bac-acs64 Bachmann HO-Scale ACS-64 Documentation Resources]

====WOWElectric Version 1 Resources:====

*[[WOWElectric Version 2 Indexed CV's|WOWElectric V2 Indexed CV's]]
*[https://09122110-fb14-4cd5-92e8-876baa0f5900.usrfiles.com/ugd/091221_4228265abdea4fba838577e3e7ee15a0.pdf WOWElectric V1 Programming Guide]
*(More Coming soon!)

 
===Non-Sound Decoders===

====Non-Sound Decoder Products====

*[https://www.tcsdcc.com/g-scale G/O/S Scale]
*[https://www.tcsdcc.com/ho-scale HO-Scale]
*[https://www.tcsdcc.com/n-scale N-Scale]
*[https://www.tcsdcc.com/z-scale Z-Scale]
*[https://www.tcsdcc.com/function-only Lighting-only]

====Non-Sound Decoder Resources:====

*[https://09122110-fb14-4cd5-92e8-876baa0f5900.usrfiles.com/ugd/559cd7_d3fbf8b528984a7a8c59874c9dcdd508.pdf Comprehensive Programming Guide]
*[[NMRA Standard CV's|List of TCS Standard CV's (1-255)]]
*[https://09122110-fb14-4cd5-92e8-876baa0f5900.usrfiles.com/ugd/559cd7_d423f23c2e674ceea87c8e462c52cc37.pdf CN & CN-GP installation Guide]

==Technical Support Resources==
We are currently in the process of migrating all of our help articles and documentation to the new Wiki format! Below you can find links to pages with information, support, and troubleshooting for our most-commonly-asked questions. To see all of our technical support resources and help articles, click on "Technical Support" just below:

===[[:Category:Technical Support|Technical Support]]===
(For a full list of technical support pages and resources, click on the link above)

====Common Questions/Issues:====

*[[Support - Lighting|Lighting Wiring and Programming]]
*[[Lighting Effects|Programming Lighting Effects]]
*[[Advanced Consisting|Consisting with CV19]]
*[[DCC Decoder Addressing|Decoder Address Programming and "Lost Address"]]
*[[Support - DCC Programming Track|Issues With DCC Programming Tracks and "No Ack"]]
*[[Support - Decoder Lock|What is Decoder Lock?]]
*[[Support - Resets|Decoder Reset Options]]
*[https://tcsdcc.com/faq Technical Support FAQ]

====CV Lists and Other Resources:====

*[https://tcsdcc.com/installations Decoder Installation Guides]
*[https://tcsdcc.com/documentation Legacy Documentation] << Click here to see all of our superannuated programming guides and other documents
*[https://tcsdcc.com/techsupport Legacy Support Articles] << Click here to see help articles not yet migrated here
*[[NMRA Standard CV's|List of TCS Standard CV's (1-255)]]
*[[WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's|List of TCS Indexed CV's (WOWSteam V4.X)]]
*[[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's|List of TCS Indexed CV's (WOWDiesel V4)]]

==[https://www.bachmanntrains.com/ Bachmann Trains] OEM Decoder Projects and Information==

===On30-Scale:===
{| class="wikitable"
|+On30-Scale Steam (Newest to Oldest - Descending)
!WOW® Sound
|-
|[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/media/30 Bachmann 2-6-2 Baldwin "Trench" - On30 Scale]
|}

===HO-Scale:===
{| class="wikitable"
|+HO-Scale Diesel (Newest to Oldest - Descending)
!WOW® Sound
!Sound Value®
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum SCV-42 (VIA Rail Charger) - HO|Bachmann Siemens SCV-42 (VIA Rail Charger) - HO Scale]]
|[[Bachmann Sound Value GE Dash 8-40CW - HO|Bachmann Sound Value GE Dash 8-40CW - HO Scale]]
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum ALC-42 (Charger) - HO|Bachmann Siemens ALC-42 (Charger) - HO Scale]]
|[[Bachmann Sound Value GP35 - HO|Bachmann Sound Value EMD GP35 - HO Scale]]
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum SC-44 (Charger) - HO|Bachmann Siemens SC-44 (Charger) - HO Scale]]
|[[Bachmann Sound Value RS-3 - HO|Bachmann Sound Value ALCo RS-3 - HO Scale]]
|-
|
|[[Bachmann Sound Value FT - HO|Bachmann Sound Value EMD FT - HO Scale]]
|}
{| class="wikitable"
|+HO-Scale Steam (Newest to Oldest - Descending)
!WOW® Sound
|-
|[[Bachmann 4-6-4 ALCo J3a Hudson - HO|Bachmann 4-6-4 ALCo J3a Hudson - HO Scale]]
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum 4-6-2 K4 - HO|Bachmann 4-6-2 K4 - HO Scale]]
|-
|[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/media/29 Bachmann 2-10-0 Russian "Decapod" - HO Scale]
|-
|[https://drupal.tcsdcc.com/resources-bac-k4 Bachmann Streamlined 4-6-2 K4 - HO Scale]
|}
{| class="wikitable"
|+HO-Scale Electric
!WOW® Sound
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum ACS-64 - HO|Bachmann ACS-64 - HO Scale]]
|}
===N-Scale:===
{| class="wikitable"
|+N-scale Diesel
!WOW® Sound
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum ALC-42 (Charger) - N|Bachmann Spectrum Siemens ALC-42 (Charger) - N Scale]]
|-
|[[Bachmann Spectrum SC-44 (Charger) - N|Bachmann Spectrum Siemens SC-44 (Charger) - N Scale]]
|}
 

==WiFi Command System==
===TCS LCC Command Station and Boosters===

====CS-105====
[[CS-105|CS-105 Overview]]

====LT-50====
[[LT-50|LT-50 Layout Throttle]]

====Boosters====
[[B-106|B-106 Auxiliary DCC Booster]]

====Panels and Accessories====
[[Booster Adapter]]

[[LT Panel]]

[[LCC Throttle Panel]]

LCC WiFi Panel - COMING SOON

 
===Universal WiFi Throttle===

====[[Universal WiFi Throttle - DCC System Compatibility|DCC System Compatibility]]====
[[UWT-100 compatibility with Digikeijs systems]]

[[UWT-100 compatibility with Digitrax systems]]

[[UWT-100 compatibility with ESU systems]]

[[UWT-100 compatibility with MRC systems]]

[[UWT-100 compatibility with NCE systems]]

====UWT-100====
[[UWT-100|UWT-100 Overview]]

[[UWT-100 Main Menu|UWT-100 Menu]]

====UWT-50====
[[UWT-50|UWT-50 Overview]]

[[UWT-50 Main Menu|UWT-50 Menu]]

====UWT Tips & Troubleshooting====
[[In-Throttle Consisting]]

[[Yard Mode]]

[[Universal WiFi Throttle - Connection Issues]]

[[UWT-100 Wrist Lanyard|Wrist Lanyard Installation Instructions]]

 
===Layout Command Control===
[[Layout Command Control (LCC)]]

==TCS Depot Software==
[https://tcsdcc.com/depot TCS Depot (Download and Instructions)]

WOWDiesel Version 4.5 Sound List

2024-05-17T23:58:26Z

Dan Mycio: reworked for proper diesel sounds. should be audited

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!

NOTE: This page can help you to manually program sounds to buttons. Please refer to the [[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's]] page for more information on the other programming options available in WOWDiesel Version 4 decoders.

The WOWDiesl Version 4.5 sound set includes:

* 19 Prime Movers - '''Including NEW Baldwin prime movers!'''
* 51 Bells
* 40 Horns

==WOWDiesel Version 4.5 Default Button Mappings==
{| class="wikitable"
! colspan="4" |WOWDiesel V4.5 Button Mappings
|-
|Function Button
|Sound Action
|Light Action
|Dual Enabled
|-
|0
|''None''
|Lamp 0F / 0R (Directional)
|True
|-
|1
|Bell
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 1
|False
|-
|2
|Playable Horn
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 2
|False
|-
|3
|Short Horn Blast
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 3
|False
|-
|4
|Grade Crossing Quill
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 4
|False
|-
|5
|Dynamic Brakes
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 5
|False
|-
|6
|[[Train Brake|Brake Release]]
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 6
|False
|-
|7
|[[Train Brake]] (apply)
|
|False
|-
|8
|1x Press Mute/Unmute
2x Press to rotate page

4x Press enter [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]]
|
|True
|-
|9
|[[WOWSound Rotate Feature|Rotate]]
|
|False
|-
|10
|Manual Notch Up
|
|False
|-
|11
|Manual Notch Down
|
|False
|-
|12
|Prime Mover Ignition
|
|False
|-
|13
|Coupling
|
|False
|-
|14
|Uncoupling
|
|False
|-
|15
|Momentum Mode Selection
|
|False
|-
|16
|[[Crew Alert]] On/Off
|
|False
|-
|17
|Windshield Wipers On/Off
|
|False
|-
|18
|Air Spit
|
|False
|-
|19-28
|''None''
|
|False
|}
{| class="wikitable"
! colspan="3" |Random Sound Mapping
|-
|Random Sound
Number
|Sound
Type
|Specific
Sound
|-
|1
|Air Compressor
|(Automatic With Prime Mover Selection)
|-
|2
|Air Spitter
|
|-
|3
|''Disabled''
|None
|-
|4
|''Disabled''
|None
|}

==WOWDiesel V4.5 Sound List==

===Complete List of Sounds===
''To change sound mappings, use indexed CV 1.X See [[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's]] for more information.''

Set CV 201 to 1. Set CV 202 to the button you want to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable"
!Sound Type
!Sound Number
!High Byte
(CV 203)
!Low Byte
(CV204)
!Sound Name
|-
|Air Compressor
|0
|0
|0
|ALCO Air Compressor 1
|-
|
|1
|0
|1
|EMD Air Compressor 1
|-
|
|2
|0
|2
|EMD Air Compressor 2
|-
|
|3
|0
|3
|GE "Whooping" Compressor
|-
|
|4
|0
|4
|EMD SD40-2 Air Compressor
|-
|
|5
|0
|5
|Baldwin VO-1000 Air Compressor
|-
|Air Spitter
|6
|0
|6
|GE U25B Air Spit
|-
|
|7
|0
|7
|EMD SD70MAC Air Spit
|-
|
|8
|0
|8
|EMD SD40-2 Air Spit 1
|-
|
|9
|0
|9
|EMD SD40-2 Air Spit 2
|-
|
|10
|0
|10
|EMD SD40-2 Air Spit 3
|-
|
|11
|0
|11
|Generic Air Spit 1
|-
|
|12
|0
|12
|LVC #126 Air Pump 2
|-
|Bell *
|13
|0
|13
|
|-
|Brake Release
|63
|0
|63
|Brake Release 1
|-
|
|64
|0
|64
|Brake Release 2
|-
|Brake Squeal
|65
|0
|65
|Brake Squeal *
|-
|Coupler Clank
|95
|0
|95
|Coupling 1
|-
|
|96
|0
|96
|Uncoupling 1
|-
|
|97
|0
|97
|Coupling 2
|-
|
|98
|0
|98
|Uncoupling 2
|-
|Crew Alert
|99
|0
|99
|[[Crew Alert|Crew Alert Feature]]
|-
|Dynamic Brakes *
|100
|0
|100
|Dynamic Brake Feature
|-
|Exhaust Fan
|103
|0
|103
|Generic Exhaust Fan
|-
|Forward Horn Quill *
|104
|0
|104
|
|-
|Playable Horn *
|144
|0
|144
|
|-
|Grade X Quill *
|184
|0
|184
|
|-
|Short Horn Blast *
|304
|1
|48
|
|-
|Manual Notch Down
|344
|1
|88
|
|-
|Manual Notch Up
|345
|1
|89
|
|-
|Momentum
|346
|1
|90
|[[WOWSound Momentum Function|Momentum Mode Feature]]
|-
|Mute
|348
|1
|92
|Mute All Sounds
|-
|Prime Mover Ignition *
|1755
|6
|219
|
|-
|Reverse Horn Quill *
|1793
|7
|1
|
|-
|Rotate Feature
|1834
|7
|42
|[[WOWSound Rotate Feature|Rotate Feature]]
|-
|Stop Quill *
|1873
|7
|81
|
|-
|Windshield Wipers
|1913
|7
|121
|
|}
'''* For sound types marked with this indicator, use this specific sound number to map the sound type to a button, then program the specific sound numbers in the corresponding indexed CV(s) using the tables below:'''

===Prime Mover Selection===
In WOWDiesel, the Prime Mover can be easily selected and set to use one or two prime movers by using [[Audio Assist®]]
{| class="wikitable"
!Indexed CV 4:11 Value
!Active Chuff Set
|-
|0
|ALCo 244 - Turbocharged (Type 1)
|-
|1
|ALCo 251 - Turbocharged (Type 1)
|-
|2
|ALCo 251 - Turbocharged (Type 2)
|-
|3
|ALCo 539T - Turbocharged
|-
|4
|Baldwin VO-1000
|-
|5
|Baldwin 606A
|-
|6
|Baldwin 606NA
|-
|7
|Baldwin 608A
|-
|8
|EMD 567 Non-Turbo
|-
|9
|EMD 567 - Turbocharged
|-
|10
|EMD 645 Non-Turbo (Type 1)
|-
|11
|EMD 645 Non-Turbo (Type 2)
|-
|12
|EMD 645 Non-Turbo (Type 3)
|-
|13
|EMD 645 - Turbochaged
|-
|14
|EMD 710 - Turbocharged
|-
|15
|GE FDL16
|-
|16
|GE 7FDL16 (Type 1)
|-
|17
|GE 7FDL16 (Type 2)
|-
|18
|GE "GEVo" ES44
|}

===Bell Type Selection Selection===
{| class="wikitable"
!Indexed CV 4:23 Value
!Active Bell
|-
|0
|E-Bell
|-
|1
|Fairbanks Morse Trainmaster Bell
|-
|2
|Galloping Goose #3 Bell
|-
|3
|GE 45 Tonner Bell
|-
|4
|Western Pacific #2100
|-
|5
|Conrail GP30 #2233
|-
|6
|Niles Canyon Mongo Speeder
|-
|7
|PRR GG1
|-
|8
|Quincy RR SW8 #1100
|-
|9
|Richmond Pacific SW900
|-
|10
|RSD1 #1956
|-
|11
|RSD12 #2958
|-
|12
|Santa Catalina JLA2 Critter
|-
|13
|Southern Pacific #1423
|-
|14
|Southern Pacific #3100
|-
|15
|Southern Pacific #5472
|-
|16
|Southern Pacific #5623
|-
|17
|VO-1000 Bell
|-
|18
|Western Pacific #713
|-
|19
|Western Pacific #918D
|-
|20
|C&O Bell (Type 1)
|-
|21
|CSRR Museum #491
|-
|22
|C&T #484 Bell
|-
|23
|Heisler-Class hand-powered Bell
|-
|24
|Replica John Bull hand-powered bell
|-
|25
|Leetonia RR Shay #1
|-
|26
|Lehigh Coal & Navigation #1
|-
|27
|Lehigh Valley Bell (Type 1)
|-
|28
|Lehigh Valley Bell (Type 2)
|-
|29
|Strasburg RR #89
|-
|30
|Philladelphia & Reading Camelback #592
|-
|31
|PRR H3 #1187 hand-powered bell
|-
|32
|PRR H3 #2846 hand-powered bell
|-
|33
|PRR #7002 hand-powered bell
|-
|34
|PRR Bell
|-
|35
|PRR American #1223 hand-powered bell
|-
|36
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 1)
|-
|37
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 2)
|-
|38
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 3)
|-
|39
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 4)
|-
|40
|Richland, Fredricksburg & Potomac Bell
|-
|41
|Richmond Pacific SW900 Bell
|-
|42
|Strausburg #475 air-powered Bell
|-
|43
|Strausburg #475 hand-powered Bell
|-
|44
|Strausburg #90 hand-powered Bell
|-
|45
|Strausburg #90 hand-powered bell (Alternate)
|-
|46
|Tweetsie RR Bell 1
|-
|47
|Unknown Bell 1
|-
|48
|Unknown Bell 2
|-
|49
|Virginia Truckee RR #260 hand-powered bell
|-
|50
|Williams Grove RR Bell
|}

===Horn Type Selection===
{| class="wikitable"
!Indexed CV 4:8 Value
!Active Horn
|-
|0
|SMS Lines AS616 #554
|-
|1
|SMS Lines DS44 750 #102
|-
|2
|SMS Lines S12 #303
|-
|3
|VO-1000 Horn
|-
|4
|Fairbanks Morse Trainmaster
|-
|5
|GE 45 Tonner
|-
|6
|GE 80 Tonner
|-
|7
|Southern Pacific #3100
|-
|8
|Hancock Air Whistle (Type 1)
|-
|9
|Leslie 125
|-
|10
|Leslie 200
|-
|11
|Leslie 3-Chime
|-
|12
|Leslie RS3
|-
|13
|Leslie RS3L
|-
|14
|Leslie RS5T
|-
|15
|Nathan K3
|-
|16
|Nathan K3H (Type 1)
|-
|17
|Nathan K3H (Type 2)
|-
|18
|Nathan K3LA
|-
|19
|Nathan K3LL
|-
|20
|Nathan K5H
|-
|21
|Nathan K5HL (Type 1)
|-
|22
|Nathan K5LA (ACS-64 High Horn - Type 1)
|-
|23
|Nathan K5LA (ACS-64 High Horn - Type 2)
|-
|24
|Nathan K5LA (ACS-64 Low Horn)
|-
|25
|Nathan K5LA (Type 1)
|-
|26
|Nathan K5LA (Strasburg RR #8618)
|-
|27
|Nathan K5LLA
|-
|28
|Nathan M3 (Type 1)
|-
|29
|Nathan M3 (Type 2)
|-
|30
|Nathan M3 (Type 3)
|-
|31
|Nathan M3 Tilt
|-
|32
|Nathan M5
|-
|33
|Nathan P3
|-
|34
|Nathan P5
|-
|35
|Nathan P5A
|-
|36
|Quincy RR SW8 #1100
|-
|37
|Southern Pacific RSD12 #2958
|-
|38
|Galloping Goose #3
|-
|39
|Wabco E2 - 3-Chime
|}

==CV Addendum (Standard CV's)==
WOWDiesel Version 4.5 follows the 256 NMRA Standard CV's as described in in TCS' [[NMRA Standard CV's|List of Standard CV's]]. Listed below are the CV's that have been modified for WOWDiesel Version 4.5.
{| class="wikitable"
!CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|#
|#
|...
|}

==CV Addendum (Indexed CV's)==
WOWDiesel Version 4.5 follows the motor and lighting CV's as described in TCS' [[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's|List of Indexed CV's for WOWDiesel Version 4]]. Listed below are the CV's that have been modified for WOWDiesel Version 4.5.
{| class="wikitable"
!CV 201
!CV 202
!CV 203
!CV 204
!Description
|-
|#
|#
|#
|#
|...
|}

WOWDiesel Version 4.5 Sound List

2024-05-17T23:00:48Z

Dan Mycio: page creation based on wowsteam v3.6 sound list

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!

NOTE: This page can help you to manually program sounds to buttons. Please refer to the [[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's]] page for more information on the other programming options available in WOWDiesel Version 4 decoders.

==WOWDiesel Version 4.5 Default Button Mappings==
{| class="wikitable"
! colspan="4" |WOWDiesel V4.5 Button Mappings
|-
|Function Button
|Sound Action
|Light Action
|Dual Enabled
|-
|0
|Generator
|Lamp 0F / 0R (Directional)
|True
|-
|1
|Bell
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 1
|False
|-
|2
|Whistle Long
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 2
|False
|-
|3
|Whistle Short
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 3
|False
|-
|4
|Grade Crossing Quill
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 4
|False
|-
|5
|Cylinder Cox on/off
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 5
|False
|-
|6
|Brake Release
|Constant Bright - Both Directions - Lamp 6
|False
|-
|7
|Train Brake (apply)
|
|False
|-
|8
|1x Press Mute/Unmute
2x Press to rotate page

4x Press enter Audio Assist
|
|True
|-
|9
|Rotate
|
|False
|-
|10
|Johnson Bar Up
|
|False
|-
|11
|Johnson Bar Down
|
|False
|-
|12
|Manual Injector
|
|False
|-
|13
|Manual Air Compressor
|
|False
|-
|14
|Blower
|
|False
|-
|15
|Momentum Mode Selection
|
|False
|-
|16
|Idling Sounds On/Off
|
|False
|-
|17
|Shoveling Sound
|
|False
|-
|18
|Blow Down
|
|False
|-
|19
|Ash Dump
|
|False
|-
|20
|Water Fill
|
|False
|-
|21-28
|None
|
|False
|}
{| class="wikitable"
! colspan="3" |Random Sound Mapping
|-
|Random Sound
Number
|Sound
Type
|Specific
Sound
|-
|1
|Air Pump
|N&W #611 Air Pump
|-
|2
|Injectors
|N&W #611 Injectors
|-
|3
|Shoveling
|Shoveling Sound 1
|-
|4
|Safeties
|Cass Shay #3 Safety
|}

==WOWSteam V4.5 Sound List==

===Complete List of Sounds===
''To change sound mappings, use indexed CV 1.X See [[WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's]] for more information.''

Set CV 201 to 1. Set CV 202 to the button you want to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable"
!Sound Type
!Sound Number
!High Byte
(CV 203)
!Low Byte
(CV204)
!Sound Name
|-
|Air Pump
|0
|0
|0
|Jeddo #85 Air Pump
|-
|
|1
|0
|1
|N&W #611 Air Pump
|-
|
|2
|0
|2
|Cass #6 Air Pump
|-
|
|3
|0
|3
|C&T #484 Air Pump 1
|-
|
|4
|0
|4
|C&T #484 Air Pump 2
|-
|
|5
|0
|5
|LC #126 Air Pump
|-
|
|6
|0
|6
|NPR #765 Air Pump
|-
|
|7
|0
|7
|N&W #475 Air Pump
|-
|
|8
|0
|8
|#89 Air Pump
|-
|
|9
|0
|9
|Cab-Fwd Air Pump
|-
|
|10
|0
|10
|Tweetsie #12 Air Pump
|-
|
|11
|0
|11
|LVC #126 Air Pump 1
|-
|
|12
|0
|12
|LVC #126 Air Pump 2
|-
|Ash Dump
|13
|0
|13
|Ash Dump
|-
|Bell*
|14
|0
|14
|
|-
|Blow Down
|65
|0
|65
|Blow Down 1
|-
|
|66
|0
|66
|Blow Down 2
|-
|Blower
|68
|0
|67
|Blower 1
|-
|
|69
|0
|69
|Blower 2
|-
|Brake Release
|70
|0
|70
|Brake Release 1
|-
|
|71
|0
|71
|Brake Release 2
|-
|Brake Squeal
|72
|0
|72
|Brake Squeal *
|-
|Coupler Clank
|9462
|36
|246
|Coupling
|-
|
|9463
|36
|247
|Uncoupling
|-
|Cylinder Cox
|9464
|36
|248
|Cylinder Cox Set 1
|-
|
|9465
|36
|249
|Cylinder Cox Set 2
|-
|Direction Change
|9466
|36
|250
|Power Reverse 1
|-
|Forward Sound *
|9495
|36
|251
|
|-
|
|9496
|36
|252
|
|-
|Generator
|9574
|37
|102
|
|-
|
|9575
|37
|103
|
|-
|
|9576
|37
|104
|
|-
|Idling Sounds
|9577
|37
|105
|Idle Sounds 1
|-
|
|9578
|37
|106
|Idle Sounds 2
|-
|
|9579
|37
|107
|Idle Sounds 3
|-
|
|9580
|37
|108
|Idle Sounds 4
|-
|Injector
|9581
|37
|109
|N&W #611 Injector
|-
|
|9582
|37
|110
|C&T #484 Injector
|-
|
|9583
|37
|111
|NPR #765 Injector
|-
|
|9584
|37
|112
|#89 Injector
|-
|
|9585
|37
|113
|Tweetsie #12 Injector
|-
|
|9586
|37
|114
|LVC #126 Injector
|-
|Johnson Bar
|9587
|37
|115
|Johnson Bar Down
|-
|
|9588
|37
|116
|Johnson Bar Up
|-
|Momentum
|9589
|37
|117
|Momentum Mode
|-
|Mute
|9591
|37
|119
|Mute All Sounds
|-
|Reverse Quill*
|9593
|37
|121
|
|-
|Rod Clank
|
|
|
|Rod Clank Set 1
|-
|
|
|
|
|Rod Clank Set 2
|-
|
|
|
|
|Rod Clank Set 3
|-
|
|
|
|
|Rod Clank Set 4
|-
|
|
|
|
|Rod Clank Set 5
|-
|Rotate Feature
|9787
|38
|59
|
|-
|Safeties
|9866
|38
|138
|Safety 1
|-
|
|9867
|38
|139
|Safety 2
|-
|
|9868
|38
|140
|Safety 3
|-
|
|9869
|38
|141
|Safety 4
|-
|Shoveling Sound
|9870
|38
|142
|Coal Shoveling
|-
|
|9871
|38
|143
|Air Powered Door
|-
|Snifter Valves
|9872
|38
|144
|
|-
|Station Announcements Arriving *
|9874
|38
|146
|
|-
|Station Announcements Departing *
|9880
|38
|152
|
|-
|Stop Quill *
|9886
|38
|158
|Stop Sound
|-
|Water Fill
|9965
|38
|237
|Water Fill Sound
|-
|Whistle Quill (Grade) *
|10045
|39
|61
|
|-
|Whistle Short Blast *
|10282
|40
|42
|
|}
'''* For sound types marked with this indicator, use this specific sound number to map the sound type to a button, then program the specific sound numbers in the corresponding indexed CV(s) using the tables below:'''

===Chuff Set Selection===
In WOWSteam V4.5, the chuff set can be easily selected on the fly by using the [[WOWSound Rotate Feature|Rotate Feature]].
{| class="wikitable"
!Indexed CV 4:11 Value
!Active Chuff Set
|-
|0
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 1 | Jeddo Coal Company #85</nowiki>
|-
|1
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 2 | Cumbrees & Toltec #484 - K-36</nowiki>
|-
|2
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 3 | Cumbrees & Toltec #488 - K-36</nowiki>
|-
|3
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 4 | Tweetsie Railroad #12 - 4-6-0 Baldwin "Ten-wheeler"</nowiki>
|-
|4
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 5 | Reading & Blue Mountain Northern #425 - 4-6-2 Baldwin "Pacific"</nowiki>
|-
|5
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 6 | Nickle Plate Road #765 - 2-8-4 "Berkshire"</nowiki>
|-
|6
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 7 | Tanfield Railway No.2 - Narrow-gauge 0-4-0 Saddle-tank</nowiki>
|-
|7
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 8 | Railtown 1987 RR #3 - Rogers 4-6-0</nowiki>
|-
|8
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 9 | New Hope #40 - 2-8-0 "Consolidation"</nowiki>
|-
|9
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 10 | Jeddo Coal Company #85 - Second Cut</nowiki>
|-
|10
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 11 | Cass Scenic RR #5 - 3-cyl Shay</nowiki>
|-
|11
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 12 | Black River & Western #60</nowiki>
|-
|12
|<nowiki>Chuffinity Chuffset 13 | Lehigh Valley Coal Company #126 - 0-6-0 Saddle-tank</nowiki>
|}

===Bell Type Selection Selection===
{| class="wikitable"
!Indexed CV 4:24 Value
!Active Bell
|-
|0
|Black River & Western #60
|-
|1
|Cass Shay #3
|-
|2
|C&O Bell (Type 1)
|-
|3
|CSRR Museum #491
|-
|4
|C&T #484 Bell
|-
|5
|Heisler-Class hand-powered Bell
|-
|6
|Replica John Bull hand-powered bell
|-
|7
|Leetonia RR Shay #1
|-
|8
|Lehigh Coal & Navigation #1
|-
|9
|Lehigh Valley Bell (Type 1)
|-
|10
|Lehigh Valley Bell (Type 2)
|-
|11
|N&W #611
|-
|12
|Strasburg RR #89
|-
|13
|Philladelphia & Reading Camelback #592
|-
|14
|PRR H3 #1187 hand-powered bell
|-
|15
|PRR H3 #2846 hand-powered bell
|-
|16
|PRR #7002 hand-powered bell
|-
|17
|PRR Bell
|-
|18
|PRR American #1223 hand-powered bell
|-
|19
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 1)
|-
|20
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 2)
|-
|21
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 3)
|-
|22
|Reading Railroad Bell (Type 4)
|-
|23
|Richland, Fredricksburg & Potomac Bell
|-
|24
|Richmond Pacific SW900 Bell
|-
|25
|Strausburg #475 air-powered Bell
|-
|26
|Strausburg #475 hand-powered Bell
|-
|27
|Strausburg #90 hand-powered Bell
|-
|28
|Strausburg #90 hand-powered bell (Alternate)
|-
|29
|Tweetsie RR Bell 1
|-
|30
|Unknown Bell 1
|-
|31
|Unknown Bell 2
|-
|32
|Virginia Truckee RR #260 hand-powered bell
|-
|33
|Williams Grove RR Bell
|-
|34
|Conrail #2233
|-
|35
|Fairbanks Morse Bell (Type 1)
|-
|36
|Galloping Goose #3 Bell
|-
|37
|GE 45 Tonner Bell
|-
|38
|Western Pacific #2100
|-
|39
|Niles Canyon Mongo Speeder
|-
|40
|PRR GG1
|-
|41
|Quincy RR SW8 #1100
|-
|42
|RSD1 #1956
|-
|43
|RSD12 #2958
|-
|44
|Santa Catalina JLA2 Critter
|-
|45
|Southern Pacific #1423
|-
|46
|Southern Pacific #3100
|-
|47
|Southern Pacific #5472
|-
|48
|Southern Pacific #5623
|-
|49
|Western Pacific #713
|-
|50
|Western Pacific #918D
|}

===Whistle Type Selection===
{| class="wikitable"
!Indexed CV 4:8 Value
!Active Whistle
|-
|0
|Air Chime Corporation #6
|-
|1
|Alamo Michigan Plant Whistle
|-
|2
|American Steam Gauge Single Note
|-
|3
|Santa Fe Original 6-Chime
|-
|4
|Santa Fe Reproduction 6-Chime
|-
|5
|Tweetsie RR Baldwin 3-Chime
|-
|6
|Baltimore & Ohio 3-Chime
|-
|7
|Boston & Maine 6-Chime
|-
|8
|Buffalo Creek & Gauley 3-Chime
|-
|9
|Canadian National 5-Chime
|-
|10
|Canadian Pacific 5-Chime
|-
|11
|Cass Scenic RR Shay #5
|-
|12
|Central NJ 3-Chime
|-
|13
|Chicago Burlington & Quincy RR 3-Chime
|-
|14
|Cleveland Cincinnati Chicago & St. Louis 5-Chime
|-
|15
|Crosby Steam Gauge 6-Chime
|-
|16
|Cumbrees & Toltec #488 K36 5-Chime
|-
|17
|Cumbrees & Toltec #484 K36 5-Chime
|-
|18
|Cumbrees & Toltec #484 K36 5-Chime (Alternate)
|-
|19
|Grand Trunk & Western 6-Chime
|-
|20
|Great Northern RR 5-Chime
|-
|21
|Great Northern RR 5-Chime (Alternate)
|-
|22
|Hancock Air Whistle
|-
|23
|Hancock Air Whistle (Alternate)
|-
|24
|Hancock 3-Chime Short-bell
|-
|25
|Illinois Central Nathan 3-Chime
|-
|26
|Kingsly RR 4-Chime
|-
|27
|Lehigh & New England 3-Chime
|-
|28
|Lehigh Valley RR Crosby 3-Chime
|-
|29
|Lehigh Valley RR Hancock 3-Chime
|-
|30
|Leslie 125 (Air Horn)
|-
|31
|Leslie 200 (Air Horn)
|-
|32
|Louisville & Nashville 3-Chime
|-
|33
|Lunkenheimer Single-note
|-
|34
|Lunkenheimer 3-Chime
|-
|35
|Nathan 5-Chime
|-
|36
|Lehigh Coal #126 Nathan 5-Chime
|-
|37
|Lehigh Coal #126 Nathan 5-Chime (Alternate)
|-
|38
|Nickel Plate Road #765
|-
|39
|Norfolk & Western "Hooter"
|-
|40
|Norfolk & Western Single-chime Long-bell
|-
|41
|Norfolk & Western Single-chime Short-bell
|-
|42
|Norfolk & Western Nathan 3-Chime
|-
|43
|PRR "Banshee"
|-
|44
|PRR 3-Chime
|-
|45
|PRR 3-Chime (Alternate)
|-
|46
|PRR K4 Whistle
|-
|47
|Reading RR "Hooter"
|-
|48
|Reading RR "Hooter" (Alternate)
|-
|49
|Reading RR G2 #179 6-Chime
|-
|50
|Reading Pacific G2 6-Chime
|-
|51
|Reading RR 6-Chime
|-
|52
|Reading RR 6-Chime (Alternate)
|-
|53
|Rio Grande Southern RR #41
|-
|54
|Southern Pacific 5-Chime
|-
|55
|Southern Pacific "Daylight" 6-Chime
|-
|56
|Southern RR Single-Chime
|-
|57
|Southern RR 3-Chime
|-
|58
|Southern RR 6-Chime
|-
|59
|London & North Eastern Crosby 3-Chime
|-
|60
|UK Whistle (Type 1)
|-
|61
|UK Whistle (Type 2)
|-
|62
|UK Whistle (Type 3)
|-
|63
|UK Whistle (Type 4)
|-
|64
|Consett Iron Co. Class A #5
|-
|65
|Consett Iron Co. Class A #5 (Alternate)
|-
|66
|British Single-Chime Whistle
|-
|67
|Unknown Whistle (Type 1)
|-
|68
|Unknown Whistle (Type 2)
|-
|69
|Unknown Whistle (Type 3)
|-
|70
|Unknown Whistle (Type 4)
|-
|71
|Unknown Whistle (Type 5)
|-
|72
|Hancock 3-Chime
|-
|73
|Union Pacific 3-Chime Long-bell
|-
|74
|Wabash 3-Chime
|-
|75
|Wabash 6-Chime
|-
|76
|Western Maryland Decapod #1114 Nathan 3-Chime
|-
|77
|Western Maryland K2 #204 3-Chime
|-
|78
|WW2-Era 3-Chime
|}

==CV Addendum (Standard CV's)==
WOWSteam Version 4.5 follows the 256 NMRA Standard CV's as described in in TCS' [[NMRA Standard CV's|List of Standard CV's]]. Listed below are the CV's that have been modified for WOWSteam Version 4.5.
{| class="wikitable"
!CV
!Value
!Description
|-
|#
|#
|...
|}

==CV Addendum (Indexed CV's)==
WOWDiesel Version 4.5 follows the motor and lighting CV's as described in TCS' [[WOWDiesel Version 4 Indexed CV's|List of Indexed CV's for WOWDiesel Version 4]]. Listed below are the CV's that have been modified for WOWDiesel Version 4.5.
{| class="wikitable"
!CV 201
!CV 202
!CV 203
!CV 204
!Description
|-
|#
|#
|#
|#
|...
|}

CV 8 Macros

2024-05-08T20:08:58Z

Dan Mycio: Updated WOWSound V4 macros to include options 13 and 14

==CV 8 "Macros"==
CV 8 offers multiple "[https://www.oxfordlearnersdictionaries.com/us/definition/english/macro_1 macro]" options which allow you to quickly configure certain aspects of the decoder on the fly. Most macros will perform a sequence of operations internally within the decoder, meaning you would not need to perform each of those operations individually, and can instead use one single command. CV 8 can also be used to save and load User Presets, perform a factory reset, and more!

CV 8 Macros may be programmed on the mainline or a programming track; however, it is strongly recommended that you use a dedicated programming track when performing a factory reset so as to avoid any addressing conflicts.

===Available Macros===
{| class="wikitable"
|+TCS Non-Sound Version 88-91
!Value
!Macro/Operation
|-
|2
|Factory Reset (Excluding ULST)
|-
|3-9
|''Not Used''
|-
|10
|Configure F1 and F2 Ditch Lights
|-
|11
|Configure Trolley Preset
|-
|12
|Configure "Deluxe" Trolley Preset
|}

{| class="wikitable"
|+TCS Non-Sound Version 92
!Value
!Macro/Operation
|-
|2
|Factory Reset (Excluding ULST)
|-
|3-7
|''Not Used''
|-
|8
|Factory Reset (Excluding ULST)
|-
|10
|Configure F1 and F2 Ditch Lights
|-
|11
|Configure Trolley Preset
|-
|12
|Configure "Deluxe" Trolley Preset
|}

{| class="wikitable"
|+WOWSound Version 4
!Value
!Macro/Operation
|-
|2
|Factory Reset (Excluding ULST)
|-
|3-9
|''Not Used''
|-
|10
|Configure F1 and F2 Ditch Lights
|-
|11
|Configure Trolley Preset
|-
|12
|Configure "Deluxe" Trolley Preset
|-
|13
|Set [[Throttle Modes|Throttle Mode]] to "Traditional"
|-
|14
|Set [[Throttle Modes|Throttle Mode]] to "Prototype"
|}
<noinclude>
</noinclude>

WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's

2024-05-07T15:36:43Z

Dan Mycio: Added description fro index 4:32

==WARNING - THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION -==
Some information on this page has yet to be entered, and is missing! We are working to fill out the rest of this page as quickly as possible. Please pardon the mess, and watch your step!
{{:WOWSound Version 4 Indexed CV's}}

==List of WOWSteam Version 4 Indexed CV's==

===Index 1:X - Sound Button Remapping===
Set CV 201 and CV 202 to a value shown in the table below to select a button to map a sound to. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to select the sound you would like to map to the button.

'''Note: it is highly recommended that you use [[Audio Assist®|Audio Assist]] to remap sound functions, as it requires much less effort and no lookup tables!'''
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 1.X "Sound Button Remapping"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|1:1
|Function Button 1 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:2
|Function Button 2 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:3
|Function Button 3 Sound Mapping
|-
|1:4
|Function Button 4 Sound Mapping
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|1:28
|Function Button 28 Sound Mapping
|}

===Index 3:X - Individual Chuff Timings===
Set CV 201 to 3, and CV 202 to a value between 1 and 126 to select a speed step. Then, use CV 203 and CV 204 to set the chuff timing. The higher the value, the more quickly you will hear a chuff during the rotation of the motor.

'''Note: This is an advanced feature which is made easier with a graphical user interface such as JMRI.''' These settings can be done in real-time using mainline programming, and often require a lot of trial-and-error to get right. You may consider the use of a CAM to trigger your chuffs for prefectly-timed chuff sounds.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 3.X "Individual Chuff Timing"
!Indexed CV
!Description
|-
|3:1
|Speed Step 1 Chuff Timing
|-
|3:2
|Speed Step 2 Chuff Timing
|-
|(...)
|
|-
|3:126
|Speed Step 126 Chuff Timing
|}

===Index 4:X - Sound Options===
This is the primary index which holds most of the configuration options for the WOWSound decoder, especially those pertaining to how the decoder operates.
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.x "Sound Options"
!Indexed CV
!Name/Feature
!Description
|-
|4:1
|Cylinder Cox Shut-off Speed Step
|Above this speed step (of 128), the Cylinder Cocks sound will stop playing, either when turned on automatically or manually. Range of values is 0-126. A value of 0 will never allow the cylinder cocks to play; a value of 126 will never cut out the cylinder cocks automatically (must be turned off with button).

'''Default = 16'''
|-
|4:2
|Random Sound Channel #1 Frequency
|Random Sound Channel 1 is reserved for the Air Pump/Air Compressor. Higher values = higher frequency of playing.
'''Default = 215'''
|-
|4:3
|Random Sound Channel #2 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 96'''
|-
|4:4
|Random Sound Channel #3 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 64'''
|-
|4:5
|Random Sound Channel #4 Frequency
|Higher values = higher frequency of playing.

'''Default = 1'''
|-
|4:6
|Random Sounds Overall Frequency
|Higher values = lower frequency of playing.

'''Default = 768 (3:0)'''
|-
|4:7
|Random Sounds Cut-out Speed Step
|When the locomotive is moving above this speed step (of 128), the Random Sounds will not play.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:8
|Rotate Whistle Pointer / Whistle Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Whistle Type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:9
|(Not Used)
|
|-
|4:10
|Master Volume
|
|-
|4:11
|Chuff Set Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Chuff Set number from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:12
|Automatic Sounds Selection
|(0)* Snifter Valves
(1)* Rod Clank

(2)* Idling Sound

(3) Enable Automatic Bell '''| VERSION 4.6 ONLY not used in V4.0 and older'''

(4) Enable Automatic Forward Whistle Quill

(5) Enable Automatic Reverse Whistle Quill

(6) Enable Automatic Stop Whistle Quill

(7)* Enable Direction Change Sound (power reverser)

(8)* Enable Random Sound 1

(9)* Enable Random Sound 2

(10)* Enable Random Sound 3

(11)* Enable Random Sound 4

(12-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on except Automatic Whistles and Bell

'''Default (XXXX1111 10000111) = 3975 (15:135)'''
|-
|4:13
|Brake Grinding Noise Start Speed
|Speed step at which "squeals" stop and "grinding" starts while braking. Brake grinding noises are sounds more accurate to low speeds and heavy brake application.
Range of Values is 0-126. A Value of 0 disables brake grinding and only uses brake squeal.

'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:14
|Dual-Enabled Functions
|For functions F0F-F12, set bit to have a function button available in both Light Mode and Sound Mode.
<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is F0F, F0R, and F8 (mute) dual-enabled.

'''Default (XXX00010 00000011) = 515 (2:3)'''
|-
|4:15
|''WOWSteam V4.6 ONLY''
|''See Below''
|-
|4:16
|Chuff Rate Overall Adjustment
|Percentage of adjustment to increase or decrease the chuff rate at all speed steps. Valid range of values is 1-200
'''Default = 100 (X:100)'''
|-
|4:17
|Rod Clank Set Selection
|Determines which set of Rod clank sounds are played. The number of Rod Clank sound sets is determined by the Sound List.
|-
|4:18
|Cylinder Cox Auto Turn-on Time
|Sets how long the locomotive must be stationary before the cylinder cox will come on automatically the next time the locomotive starts moving.
Valid Range of values 1 - 65535

'''Default = 256 (1:0)'''
|-
|4:19
|User Options
|(0) Enable CAM
(1) (Not Used)

(2) Enable Mute on startup

(3)* Allow Articulated Chuff to Slip

(4)* Enable Rotate whistle/bell Audio feedback

(5)* Enable Light Mode/Sound Mode Audio feedback

(6)* Enable Audio auto shutoff timer

(7)* "Momentary F2" - Improves performance while in Audio Assist with some throttles.

(8) Enable Articulated Chuff

(9) (Not Used)

(10) Reverse Directional Whistles

(11)* Enable Power Braking

(12)* Enable Momentum Mode Audio Feedback

(13)* Enable Johnson Bar Audio Feedback

(14) ''Enable "Function Pagination" |'' WOWSteam Version 4.6 ONLY

(15) [reserved]

'''*Default (X0111000 11111000) = 14584 (56:248)'''
|-
|4:20
|Articulated Chuff Slip Rate
|Determines how frequently articulated chuffs slip in and out of sync. The higher the number the more frequently it happens.
Valid values are 0-255

'''Default = 240 (X:240)'''
|-
|4:21
|Automatic Audio Shut-off Timer
|This feature will automatically mute the decoder after the set period of time. To completely disable this feature, see Index 4:19 "User Options." This feature will extend the life of your decoder by muting the sound when stationary without any user input received. A value of 256 equals approximately three minutes.
Valid range of values is 1-65535

'''Default = 1200 (4:176) - Approximately 15 Minutes'''
|-
|4:22
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:23
|Minimum Chuff Volume
|This setting will set the minimum volume the chuff volume can fall to, regardless of the BEMF/load. Changing this setting will prevent the sound from behaving prototypical, but can force the decoder to always "chuff chuff chuff" as long as it is moving.
Valid range of values is 0 - 32767

'''Default = 0 (chuff/throttle can shut off completely)'''
|-
|4:24
|Rotate Bell / Bell Selection
|Uses CV 204 to select the Bell type from the List of Sounds.
|-
|4:25
|Grade Crossing Quill Options
|TCS records multiple grade crossing quills, and puts up to three of them in the decoder. This CV's selection controls which quills will play when the Grade X Quill Button is pressed.
(0)* Short Quill,

(1)* Medium Quill

(2)* Long Quill

(3 - 6) Not used

(7) Randomize Quill Play Order

If a value of zero is entered, the short quill is defaulted to. In order to disable the whistle quill function, the button mapping for Grade X Quill must be overwritten or disabled.

'''Default = 7 (X:7)'''
|-
|4:26
|Cylinder Cox Set
|Determines which set of cox sounds are active
''NOTE: Using CV programming to assign a cylinder cox sound to a button will put the cylinder cocks sound type on that button, but might not set up the correct set. I.E. if you remap the "cylinder cox set 2" sound onto a button, but don't change this CV, that button will play a "cylinder cox set 1" instead. Changing this CV will affect any button or buttons already mapped with the Cylinder Cox sound type.''

Valid values are 1-2

'''Default = 1 (X:1)'''
|-
|4:27
|Idling Sounds Selection
|Determines which "Idling Sounds" sound plays while the locomotive is idle.
Valid values are determined by the Sound List.
|-
|4:28
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:29
|Chuff Volume Change Time
|Controls how fast the chuff volume can change from one level to another in response to a change in the load. This setting effectively adds "hysteresis" to the chuff volume if you feel the locomotive's chuff sound response is too sensitive and changes too quickly. A change of "1" adds or subtracts approximately 0.5 milliseconds to the responsiveness. This setting only affects the responsiveness when coasting at a set speed, and does not affect the performance and responsiveness when changing speed. See 4:32 "Chuff Volume Velocity Factor" for more info.
'''Default = 4500 (17:148) | (Approximately 2.25 seconds transition time from min to max)'''
|-
|4:30
|BEMF Low Calibration (Forward)
|
|-
|4:31
|BEMF High Calibration (Forward)
|
|-
|4:32
|Chuff Volume Velocity Factor
|This CV controls the effects accelerating and decelerating have upon the chuff volume. The higher the value the more drastic the change in volume from accelerating and decelerating.

'''Default = 612 (2:100) | (Approximately 0.3 seconds to transition from min to max)'''
|-
|4:33
|BEMF Low Calibration (Reverse)
|
|-
|4:34
|BEMF High Calibration (Reverse)
|
|-
|4:35
|Rod Clank Volume from BEMF
|At the calculated minimum BEMF volume (BEMF Low Calibration) rod clank will be at full volume (rod clank type volume) and will fade away as the load increases. This CV is a percentage above the BEMF Low Calibration value that the rod clank will cut out.
Valid values are 0-100

'''Default = 30 (X:30)'''
|-
|
|
|
|-
|4:42
|Throttle Mode Selection
|0 = Traditional Throttle Mode
1 = Prototype Throttle Mode
This setting controls how the chuff sound behaves:
In "traditional" mode, the chuff volume is constant and determined by the "Chuff" Sound Type Volume. Snifters will play at their maximum programmable volume when the throttle is shut off, rod clank will not play at all.

In "Prototype" throttle mode, the chuff volume is determined by the velocity, speed, BEMF/load, and calibration settings. The snifter valve and rod clank volume are also controlled dynamically by prototype throttle mode. Snifters will play when the throttle is deemed to be "off" and rod clank will start playing when the throttle is deemed to be appropriate (See Index 4:35)

'''Default = 1 (Prototype Throttle Mode)'''
|-
|4:43-4:46
|''Not Used''
|
|-
|4:47
|Thermal Overload Limit
|'''***WOW501 ONLY***'''
This CV sets the temperature at which the decoder will trip the thermal overload. It is not recommended to adjust this CV unless otherwise guided to do so by TCS technical support. If the thermal overload is tripping, your decoder is overheating!
|-
|4:48
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Regulated Supply Mode
|Default = 431
|-
|4:49
|''WOWSteam V4.6 ONLY''
|''See Below''
|-
|4:50
|Switching Mode Acceleration
|Default = 5
|-
|4:51
|Switching Mode Deceleration
|Default = 5
|-
|4:52
|Mainline Mode Acceleration
|Default = 20
|-
|4:53
|Mainline Mode Deceleration
|Default = 60
|}

==New Indexed CV's Unique to WOWSteam Version 4.6==
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible"
|+TCS Index 4.X "Sound Options" (NEW!)
!Indexed CV
!Description
!
|-
| colspan="3" |NOTE: ALL OF THE INDEXED CV NUMBERS LISTED ABOVE IN THE SAME PRIMARY INDEX (4:X) STILL APPLY. THE CV'S LISTED IN THIS TABLE ARE ADDITIONS OR REVISIONS TO THE PREVIOUS TABLE
|-
|4:15
|DC Mode Sounds Selection
|(0)* DC mode automatic bell enabled
(1)* DC mode Forward Sound

(2)* DC mode Reverse Sound

(3)* DC mode stop sound

(4)* DC mode quill enabled

(5-15) NU

<nowiki>*</nowiki>Default is all on.

'''Default (XXXXXXXX XXX11111) = 31 (X:31)'''
|-
|4:41
|DC Mode Chuff Volume
|Sets the chuff volume level while in DC mode. If you are using a high power speaker and an power pack with poor regulation, loud chuffs can cause a significant drop in voltage. Lowering the maximum chuff volume can alleviate this issue.
'''Default = 5888'''
|-
|4:43
|DC Mode Start Voltage - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2400'''
|-
|4:44
|DC Mode Bell Cutout Voltage - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2525'''
|-
|4:45
|Automatic Bell Cutout Speed
|DCC speed step above which the bell will stop playing (when enabled to play automatically).
'''Default = 15'''
|-
|4:46
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 600'''
|-
|4:48
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 431'''
|-
|4:49
|Track Voltage BEMF Offset Factor
|'''Default = 0'''
|-
|4:54
|DC Mode Max ADC Value - Regulated Supply Mode
|Sets the expected maximum ADC value the decoder can expect to see when running in Analog mode. This gives the decoder a range that can be used to determine which speed to go depending on the track voltage. By default=, this CV is set to the maximum resolution size, which means the decoder will max out at about 14.5V on the rails. This CV will not help for DC power packs with higher max outputs than 15V, but for max outputs below 15V, the speed step range can be tuned; additionally, going above the ADC range, or increasing this CV, can limit the speed step at full throttle. This often does sound nicer, and gives more of a range in the "nice chuff rate zone" where speed is limited but enjoy-ability is increased.
Range of values is 0-4250. Recommended absolute minimum value is 2800.

''This CV MUST NOT be less than or equal to the Motor Start Voltage''

'''Default = 4250 (16:154)'''
|-
|4:66
|DC Mode Start Voltage - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2816'''
|-
|4:67
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 1250'''
|-
|4:68
|DC Mode Motor Hysteresis - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 12'''
|-
|4:69
|DC Mode Bell Cutout Voltage - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 2500'''
|-
|4:70
|DC Mode Quill Delta - Unregulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 1000'''
|-
|4:72
|DC Mode Speed Step Hysteresis - Regulated Supply Mode
|'''Default = 8'''
|}

[[Category:Indexed CV]]
[[Category:Technical Support]]

Keep Alive® Wiring Diagrams

2024-03-26T20:09:55Z

Dan Mycio:

==THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION==
Some content on this page is missing or unavailable at this time. We appreciate your patience while we work to fill in any missing content. In the mean time, please watch your step!

==Keep Alive® Compatibility==
'''This article only lists decoders manufactured by TCS.'''

This article only lists decoders which do not include Keep Alive on-board, such as the "KAM" and "KAT" series decoders.

For information on general decoder compatibility with Keep Alive, please see our main [[Support - Keep Alive®|Support Article]].

==Keep Alive® Wiring Diagrams for Non-Sound Decoders==

===HO-Scale Non-Sound Decoders===
{| class="wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"A" Series
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|A1
|''DISCONTINUED''
|'''Not Compatible'''
|-
|A4X
|2013-Present
|[[File:A4X KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=A4X KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|400x400px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|A6X
|2013-Present
|[[File:A4X KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=A4X KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|400x400px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|AS6
|(All)
|[[File:AS6 KA Wiring Diagram.png|alt=AS6 KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|333x333px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"DP" Series
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|DP2X
|2013-Present
|[[File:DP2X KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=DP2X KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|DP2X-UK
|2013-Present
|[[File:DP2X-UK KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=DP2X-UK KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|DP2-LL
|2013-Present
|[[File:DP2X KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=DP2X KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|DP5
|2013-Present
|[[File:DP5 KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=DP5 KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"FL" Fleet Lighter Series
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|FL2
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|FL4
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"LL" Life-Like Series
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|LL8
|2013-2022 (Rev1)
|[[File:LL8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.png|alt=LL8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|LL8-LED
|2013-2022 (Rev1)
|[[File:LL8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.png|alt=LL8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|LL8
|2023-Present (Rev2)
|''On-board "KA-P" connector''[[File:KA-P Wiring Diagram.png|alt=KA-P Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|182x182px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|LL8-LED
|2023-Present (Rev2)
|''On-board "KA-P" connector''[[File:KA-P Wiring Diagram.png|alt=KA-P Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|182x182px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"M" Series
! colspan="3" |Note: Decoder Name includes all variants such as "P-1"
|-
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|M1
|2012-2022
|[[File:M1 Keep Alive wiring diagram.jpg|alt=M1 Keep Alive wiring diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|M1-T
|(All)
|'''Not Compatible'''
|-
|M4
|2012-2022
|[[File:M4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=M4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|M1
|2022-Present
|Keep Alive wires factory-installed
|-
|M4
|2022-Present
|Keep Alive wires factory-installed
|-
|MC2
MC4

MC6
|2013-Present
|[[File:MC2-MC4-MC6 Keep Alive wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=MC2-MC4-MC6 Keep Alive wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"T" Series
! colspan="3" |Note: Decoder Name includes all variants such as "P-1"
|-
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|T1
|2012-2023
|[[File:2012-2023 T-series KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=T-series KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|204x204px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|T1-LED
|2012-2023
|[[File:2012-2023 T-series KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=T-series KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|204x204px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|T4
|2012-2023 (Rev2-3)
|[[File:2012-2023 T-series KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=T-series KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|204x204px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|T4-LED
|2012-2023 (Rev2-3)
|[[File:2012-2023 T-series KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=T-series KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|204x204px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|T4
|2023-Present (Rev4)
|[[File:KA-P Wiring Diagram.png|alt=KA-P Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|182x182px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|T4-LED
|2023-Present (Rev4)
|[[File:KA-P Wiring Diagram.png|alt=KA-P Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|182x182px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Miscellaneous Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|EU821
|2012-Present
|''Provided through Motherboard''[[File:NEM660 - eight function non-sound Keep Alive.png|alt=NEM660 - eight function non-sound Keep Alive|none|thumb|323x323px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|G8
|2012-Present
|Coming Soon!
|} 
===Z-Scale Non-Sound Decoders===
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Z-Scale Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|AZL4
|All
|[[File:AZL4 Keep Alive® Wiring Diagram.png|alt=AZL4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|400x400px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|AZL1D4
|2022-Present
|[[File:AZL1D4 Keep Alive® Wiring Diagram.png|alt=AZL1D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|400x400px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|AZL2D5
|2024-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|Z2
|2012-2023
|[[File:Z2-KA.png|alt=Z2 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|Z2
|2023-Present
|[[File:Z2-KA - Factory Installed.jpg|alt=Z2 with Keep Alive wires|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
==Keep Alive® Wiring Diagrams for N-Scale Drop-in Decoders==

===Atlas N-scale Drop-in Decoders===
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Atlas Drop-In Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|ALD4
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|AMD4
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|ASD4
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|MP15-N
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|VO-1000
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|}

===Classic N (CN) Decoders===
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Classic N (CN) Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|CN
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|CN-GP
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|}

===KATO N-scale Drop-in Decoders===
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+KATO Drop-in Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|K0D8
|2013-Present (All Variants)
|[[File:K0D8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.png|alt=K0D8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|K1D4 / K1D4-NC
|2013-Present
|[[File:K1D4 & K1D4-NC KeepAlive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=K1D4 & K1D4-NC KeepAlive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|K2D4
|2013-Present
|[[File:L1D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=L1D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|K3D3
|2013-Present
|[[File:K3D3 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=K3D3 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|K4D6
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|K5D7
|(All)
|Coming Soon!
|-
|K6D4
|(All)
|[[File:K6D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=K6D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|K7D4
|(All)
|[[File:K6D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=K6D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}

===Miscellaneous N-Scale Decoders===
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Misc. N-Scale Drop-in Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|EUN651
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|IMD4
IMD4-W
|
|Coming Soon!
|-
|IMF4
IMF4-NF

IMFTA4

IMFTB4
|
|Coming Soon!
|-
|IMFP4
IMFP4-NF
|
|Coming Soon!
|-
|L1D4
|2013-Present
|[[File:L1D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=L1D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|MT1500
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|}
==Keep Alive® Wiring Diagrams for WOWSound Decoders==
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+WOWSound Version 4
!Decoder Name
!Diagram
|-
|WOW101
|''Provided through WOW-AUX Plug Connector''[[File:WOW101 Decoder Wiring Diagram (2023).png|alt=WOW101 Decoder Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|456x456px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|WOW121
|''Provided through Motherboard''[[File:NEM660 - eight function non-sound Keep Alive.png|alt=NEM660 - eight function non-sound Keep Alive|none|thumb|323x323px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|WOW501
|''Keep Alive® On-board''
|}

Keep Alive® Wiring Diagrams

2024-03-26T20:09:03Z

Dan Mycio:

==THIS PAGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION==
Some content on this page is missing or unavailable at this time. We appreciate your patience while we work to fill in any missing content. In the mean time, please watch your step!

==Keep Alive® Compatibility==
'''This article only lists decoders manufactured by TCS.'''

This article only lists decoders which do not include Keep Alive on-board, such as the "KAM" and "KAT" series decoders.

For information on general decoder compatibility with Keep Alive, please see our main [[Support - Keep Alive®|Support Article]].

==Keep Alive® Wiring Diagrams for Non-Sound Decoders==

===HO-Scale Non-Sound Decoders===
{| class="wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"A" Series
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|A1
|''DISCONTINUED''
|'''Not Compatible'''
|-
|A4X
|2013-Present
|[[File:A4X KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=A4X KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|400x400px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|A6X
|2013-Present
|[[File:A4X KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=A4X KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|400x400px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|AS6
|(All)
|[[File:AS6 KA Wiring Diagram.png|alt=AS6 KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|333x333px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"DP" Series
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|DP2X
|2013-Present
|[[File:DP2X KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=DP2X KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|DP2X-UK
|2013-Present
|[[File:DP2X-UK KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=DP2X-UK KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|DP2-LL
|2013-Present
|[[File:DP2X KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=DP2X KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|DP5
|2013-Present
|[[File:DP5 KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=DP5 KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"FL" Fleet Lighter Series
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|FL2
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|FL4
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"LL" Life-Like Series
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|LL8
|2013-2022 (Rev1)
|[[File:LL8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.png|alt=LL8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|LL8-LED
|2013-2022 (Rev1)
|[[File:LL8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.png|alt=LL8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|LL8
|2023-Present (Rev2)
|''On-board "KA-P" connector''[[File:KA-P Wiring Diagram.png|alt=KA-P Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|182x182px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|LL8-LED
|2023-Present (Rev2)
|''On-board "KA-P" connector''[[File:KA-P Wiring Diagram.png|alt=KA-P Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|182x182px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"M" Series
! colspan="3" |Note: Decoder Name includes all variants such as "P-1"
|-
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|M1
|2012-2022
|[[File:M1 Keep Alive wiring diagram.jpg|alt=M1 Keep Alive wiring diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|M1-T
|(All)
|'''Not Compatible'''
|-
|M4
|2012-2022
|[[File:M4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=M4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|M1
|2022-Present
|Keep Alive wires factory-installed
|-
|M4
|2022-Present
|Keep Alive wires factory-installed
|-
|MC2
MC4

MC6
|2013-Present
|[[File:MC2-MC4-MC6 Keep Alive wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=MC2-MC4-MC6 Keep Alive wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+"T" Series
! colspan="3" |Note: Decoder Name includes all variants such as "P-1"
|-
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|T1
|2012-2023
|[[File:2012-2023 T-series KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=T-series KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|204x204px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|T1-LED
|2012-2023
|[[File:2012-2023 T-series KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=T-series KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|204x204px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|T4
|2012-2023 (Rev2-3)
|[[File:2012-2023 T-series KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=T-series KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|204x204px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|T4-LED
|2012-2023 (Rev2-3)
|[[File:2012-2023 T-series KA Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=T-series KA Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|204x204px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|T4
|2023-Present (Rev4)
|[[File:KA-P Wiring Diagram.png|alt=KA-P Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|182x182px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|T4-LED
|2023-Present (Rev4)
|[[File:KA-P Wiring Diagram.png|alt=KA-P Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|182x182px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
 
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Miscellaneous Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|EU821
|2012-Present
|''Provided through Motherboard''[[File:NEM660 - eight function non-sound Keep Alive.png|alt=NEM660 - eight function non-sound Keep Alive|none|thumb|323x323px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|G8
|2012-Present
|Coming Soon!
|}

==Keep Alive® Wiring Diagrams for Z-Scale Decoders==
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Z-Scale Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|AZL4
|All
|[[File:AZL4 Keep Alive® Wiring Diagram.png|alt=AZL4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|400x400px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|AZL1D4
|2022-Present
|[[File:AZL1D4 Keep Alive® Wiring Diagram.png|alt=AZL1D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|400x400px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|AZL2D5
|2024-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|Z2
|2012-2023
|[[File:Z2-KA.png|alt=Z2 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|Z2
|2023-Present
|[[File:Z2-KA - Factory Installed.jpg|alt=Z2 with Keep Alive wires|none|thumb|250x250px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}
==Keep Alive® Wiring Diagrams for N-Scale Drop-in Decoders==

===Atlas N-scale Drop-in Decoders===
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Atlas Drop-In Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|ALD4
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|AMD4
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|ASD4
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|MP15-N
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|VO-1000
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|}

===Classic N (CN) Decoders===
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Classic N (CN) Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|CN
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|CN-GP
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|}

===KATO N-scale Drop-in Decoders===
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+KATO Drop-in Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|K0D8
|2013-Present (All Variants)
|[[File:K0D8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.png|alt=K0D8 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|K1D4 / K1D4-NC
|2013-Present
|[[File:K1D4 & K1D4-NC KeepAlive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=K1D4 & K1D4-NC KeepAlive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|K2D4
|2013-Present
|[[File:L1D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=L1D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|K3D3
|2013-Present
|[[File:K3D3 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=K3D3 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|K4D6
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|K5D7
|(All)
|Coming Soon!
|-
|K6D4
|(All)
|[[File:K6D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=K6D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|K7D4
|(All)
|[[File:K6D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=K6D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|}

===Miscellaneous N-Scale Decoders===
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+Misc. N-Scale Drop-in Decoders
!Decoder Name
!Hardware Revision
!Diagram
|-
|EUN651
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|-
|IMD4
IMD4-W
|
|Coming Soon!
|-
|IMF4
IMF4-NF

IMFTA4

IMFTB4
|
|Coming Soon!
|-
|IMFP4
IMFP4-NF
|
|Coming Soon!
|-
|L1D4
|2013-Present
|[[File:L1D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram.jpg|alt=L1D4 Keep Alive Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|300x300px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|MT1500
|2013-Present
|Coming Soon!
|}
==Keep Alive® Wiring Diagrams for WOWSound Decoders==
{| class="wikitable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed"
|+WOWSound Version 4
!Decoder Name
!Diagram
|-
|WOW101
|''Provided through WOW-AUX Plug Connector''[[File:WOW101 Decoder Wiring Diagram (2023).png|alt=WOW101 Decoder Wiring Diagram|none|thumb|456x456px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|WOW121
|''Provided through Motherboard''[[File:NEM660 - eight function non-sound Keep Alive.png|alt=NEM660 - eight function non-sound Keep Alive|none|thumb|323x323px|Click to Enlarge]]
|-
|WOW501
|''Keep Alive® On-board''
|}